UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 


GIFT  OF 

Larry  Lsughlin 


WILLIAM  T. 
SHERMAN 
ATLANTA 


ULYSSES   3. 

GRANT 
VICKSBURG 


WILLIAM    R. 
SHAFTER 
SANTIAGO 


LEONARD 
WOOD 

SAN    JUAN 


4RY 
OR 


3RBY         CHANCELLORSVILLE   FREDE  RICKS  BU  RG 


NELSON  A. 

MILES 
PORTO    RICO 


JOSEPH 
WHEELER 

EL    CANEY 


INSTRUCTION    AROUND     CAMP    FIRE 


N  AT  I  ON  A  L 
SERVICE 


MAJOR  CHARLES  E.  KILBOURNE 

Qtneral  Staff  C^  United  Sta'" 
EDITOR-IN-CHIEF 

Volume  Three 

PRINCIPLES  OF  MILITARY 
TRAINING 

MAJOR   FRANK   R.^McCOY 

CAVALRY,  UNITED    STATES    ARMY 


_________ . 

qT>e  (oilier  (lassies 


Copyright  1917 
BY  P.  F.  COLLIB*  &  SON 


wno 
M  /s 


r 


Tie  (oilier  (lassies 

LITERATURE  *"   SCIENCE  *  HISTORY 
CONTEMPORARY  BELLES-LETTRES 

edited  by 
WILLIAM  ALLAN  NEILSON,  PH.D. 

Prtfttttr  of  English,  Harvard  University 


CJ3 

3 


346647 


Contents 

PAGE 

INTRODUCTION — TREND   OF   MILITARY   TRAINING   IN 

AMERICA n 

Early  Colonists ;  Military  Adventurers ; 
How  One  War  Trained  the  Leaders  of  the 
Next;  Lethargy  after  the  Civil  War;  The 
Renaissance  of  Military  Training. 

PART   I— THE   ENLISTED    MAN 

CHAPTER 

I.    RULES  GOVERNING  DISCIPLINE 17 

Kitchener's  Mob;  Rookies;  Effect  of  the 
Training;  Application  to  Our  Situation; 
The  Oath  of  Enlistment  and  What  It 
Means ;  Military  Authority ;  Honors  and 
Courtesies ;  Orderlies ;  Insignia  of  Rank ; 
The  True  meaning  of  Military  Courtesies ; 
"Militarism." 

II.  CARE  OF  HEALTH  IN  GARRISON  AND  FIELD  .  .  38 
General  Principles ;  Exercises ;  Regular 
Habits ;  Preventives  of  Disease ;  Contagious 
Diseases ;  Sanitation  and  Personal  Hygiene  ; 
Care  of  the  Feet ;  Intoxicating  Beverages ; 
First- Aid  Rules ;  Resuscitation  of  the 
Apparently  Drowned. 

III.    THE  RIFLE 65 

Importance  of  Markmanship ;  Description 
of  the  Service  Rifle  and  Its  Development; 
Rules  for  Safety ;  Care  of  the  Rifle ;  Shoot- 
ing Straight;  The  Use  of  the  Bayonet. 

5 


Contents 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

IV.    MARCH  DISCIPLINE 79 

Principles ;  Straggling ;  Leaving  Ranks ; 
Water;  Rests;  Obstacles. 

V.    CLOTHING 93 

Clothing  Allowance;  Importance  of 
Good  Footgear. 

VI.    GUARD  DUTY 99 

The  Sentinel ;  General  Orders ;  The  Out- 
post ;  Scouting  and  Patrolling ;  What  a 
Soldier  on  Outpost  Duty  Must  Know. 

VII.    PATROLLING 108 

Handy  Information  for  Patrol  Leaders ; 
Combat  Patrol  Leaders;  The  Border 
Patrols;  Night  Patrolling;  Messages 
from  Patrols ;  Cavalry  Patrols ;  Bivouacs ; 
Map  Reading;  Individual  Instruction  for 
Patrol  Duties. 

VIII.    CAMP  EXPEDIENTS 134 

Making  Yourself  Comfortable;  Camp 
Fires ;  If  Lost  from  Camp  or  Comrades ; 
Cooking. 

PART  II— THE  COMMISSIONED 
OFFICER 

I.    THE   NEWLY   COMMISSIONED   OFFICER   .     .     139 
The    Oath    of    Service;    Uniform    and 
Equipment;  Reporting  for  Duty;  Cour- 
tesies Between  Officers;   Relations  with 
Enlisted  Men. 

6 


Contents 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

II.    ROUTINE  DUTIES  OF  OFFICERS 163 

Administration  (Maintenance  and  Gov- 
ernment) ;  The  So-Called  "Red  Tape"; 
Company  Administration ;  Selection  and 
Appointment  of  Noncommissioned  Officers 
and  Special  Grades ;  Company  Records ; 
Company  Property;  Growth  of  the  System 
of  Accounting ;  Carelessness ;  Councils ; 
Interior  Economy  of  Companies ;  Messing 
and  Cooking. 

III.  THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  A  MILITARY  POLICY  .     177 

Lack  of  Policy  in  the  Past;  The  Awaken- 
ing Under  Secretary  Root;  The  Problem 
of  Training;  Solution  by  the  General 
Staff.. 

IV.  SUGGESTIONS  FOR  TACTICAL  TRAINING  .     .     .     192 

The  Old  Method  of  Instruction ;  New  De- 
velopments ;  Map  and  Terrain  Problems ; 
Extracts  from  Notes  by  Major  H.  B. 
Fisher,  U.  S.  Army. 

V.    SPECIAL  TRAINING 203 

The  Firing  Regulations ;  Machine  Guns ; 
Bombs  and  Hand  Grenades ;  An  English- 
man's Views  of  Modern  Implements ; 
Training  in  the  Trenches ;  Application  to 
the  American  Soldier ;  Marches  and  Troop 
Movements. 

VI.    A  SYSTEM  OF  INTENSIVE  TRAINING     .     .     .     227 
The   Problem  on   the   Border;   Organiza- 
tion   for    Training   the    National    Guard ; 
Camp  Location  and  Discipline ;  References 
to  Appendixes  as  Guides  to  the  System. 

7 


APP1HDIX 


Contents 

APPENDIXES  PAGE 

I.    INDIVIDUAL   FIELD   EQUIPMENT   FOR   DIS- 
MOUNTED  COMPANY  OFFICERS    .     .     .     240 
II.    UNIFORM   AND   EQUIPMENT  OF   OFFICERS' 

RESERVE  CORPS 242 

III.  CORRESPONDENCE  MODEL  SHOWING  LETTER 

MARKS 249 

IV.  INDIVIDUAL     EQUIPMENT     FOR     ENLISTED 

MEN  OF  A  COMPANY 255 

V.    CONTENTS  OF  THE  COMPANY  FIELD  DESK 

FOR  A  PERIOD  OF  THREE  MONTHS  .     .     259 
VI.    A  FORM  FOR  INSURING  A  COMPLETE  IN- 
SPECTION OF  AN  ORGANIZATION  .     .     .     261 
VII.    FORM  OF  AN  ORDER  GOVERNING  DETAILS 

OF  INSTRUCTION 263 

VIII.    SUGGESTIONS     FOR     AN     INSPECTION     OF 
EQUIPMENT   "A"   AND   SURPLXJS   KITS 
PRESCRIBED  IN  EQUIPMENT  "B"     .     .     276 
IX.     FORM  OF  AN  ORDER  FOR  ATHLETIC  COM- 
PETITION AND  OTHER  AMUSEMENTS    .     284 
X.    INSTRUCTIONS  ON   THE  SUBJECT  OF  FIRE 

CONTROL 286 

XI.  PRACTICAL  AND  THEORETICAL  INSTRUCTION 
IN  MACHINE-GUN  COMPANIES  AND 
TROOPS  AND  TESTS  FOR  THE  EFFICIENCY 

OF  THE  ORGANIZATION 312 

XII.    PRACTICE  WITH  DUMMY  HAND  GRENADES    319 

XIII.  TRENCH   DIGGING 321 

XIV.  MARCH   OF   INFANTRY 324 

XV.    RULES  FOR  CONDUCT  OF  TROOPS  TRAVEL- 
ING BY  RAILWAY 327 

XVI.    SUGGESTIONS   FOR   TRAINING  IN   EQUITA- 
TION      338 

XVII.  NOTES  ON  THE  TRAINING  OF  TROOPS  IN 
THE  GREAT  EUROPEAN  WAR  WITH  DE- 
DUCTIONS DRAWN  THEREFROM  .  .  .  352 

(From  War  Department  Documents. ) 

XVIII.    TRAINING  FOR  TRENCH  WARFARE  .     .     .     363 
8 


Introduction 
TREND  OF  MILITARY  TRAINING  IN  AMERICA 

THE  fight  between  Cain  and  Abel  was  the 
broth  of  war,  the  control  of  land  whether  by  the 
practical  agriculturist  or  the  peripatetic  sheep- 
man, the  first  and  a  continuing  cause  of  war, 
while  the  chronicles  of  the  Old  Testament  make 
the  Bible  the  first  of  military  works  and  the  only 
one  known  to  most  of  the  early  colonists  and 
conquerors  of  America.  There  was  the  comfort- 
ing and  convenient  authority  for  possessing  the 
land  and  smiting  their  enemies  hip  and  thigh. 

It  must  be  of  interest  to  follow  military  habits 
from  the  early  days  of  our  country,  when  self- 
defense  was  that  of  the  individual  and  his  nearest 
neighbors,  to  these  days  of  the  Great  War,  and 
the  training  of  whole  nations  on  the  right  lines 
of  progressive  systems,  in  vivid  contrast  to  the 
old  routine  circle  of  the  professional  soldier  in 
the  barrack  yard. 

The  early  colonists  had  few  professional  sol- 
diers among  them,  and  amid  the  adventures  of 
conquering  new  homes  the  few,  such  as  Miles 
Standish,  Captain  John  Smith,  and  Sir  Henry 
Vane,  were  welcomed  and  made  much  of,  and 
9 


Introduction 

with  a  soldier's  instinct  each  one  tried  to  or- 
ganize and  train  the  young  Colonials,  who,  how- 
ever, soon  learned  more  from  their  Indian  ene- 
mies than  from  the  cut-and-dried  methods  of 
the  Old  World.  The  frequent  minor  wars  with 
the  Indians  and  along  the  French  and  Spanish 
frontiers  kept  alive  a  certain  amount  of  military 
knowledge  and  training,  without,  however,  any 
adequate  preparation  for  even  the  affairs  imme- 
diately ahead.  The  more  extensive  campaigns 
of  the  French  and  Indian  War,  in  the  West,  in 
Cuba  and  Canada,  trained  most  of  our  leaders 
for  the  fight  for  freedom ;  and  as  the  Revolu- 
tionary War  dragged  on  its  leaders  practically  all 
recognized  the  vital  necessity  of  organization 
and  training. 

The  military  adventurers  from  Europe  were 
welcomed  with  open  arms  and  their  experience 
made  the  most  of.  Even  then  the  Prussian  thor- 
oughness was  appreciated,  and  Von  Steuben, 
De  Kalb,  and  a  number  of  other  professional 
soldiers,  evolved  the  first  system  of  drill  and 
training  for  the  American  army. 

The  Germans  not  only  gave,  but  they  took 
away,  and  one  of  them,  Gneisenau  (afterward 
Bliicher's  great  chief  of  staff),  one  of  the 
founders  of  the  modern  German  army,  served 
under  Washington,  and  was  so  impressed  by  the 
open-order  fighting  of  the  Americans — taken  in 
turn  by  them  from  the  Indians — that  he  evolved 
10 


Introduction 

much  more  elastic  handling  of  the  German  sol- 
diers in  the  field.  The  marked  individuality  of 
American  soldiers  has  been  both  their  strength 
and  weakness.  Not  even  Von  Steuben's  de- 
termined efforts  resulted  in  any  mechanical  body, 
but  they  did  infuse  a  certain  amount  of  training, 
and  the  habits  of  discipline  which  have  since 
persisted  in  the  regular  army. 

His  influence  and  that  of  his  drillmasters  was 
dominant  until  Napoleonic  times,  when  the  in- 
fluence of  the  French  engineers  and  other  offi- 
cers who  were  received  into  our  army  began  to 
have  a  marked  effect,  principally  through  West 
Point,  where  many  became  instructors  and  pro- 
fessors. For  many  years,  too,  the  honor  men  at 
West  Point  were  sent  to  the  French  technical 
and  professional  schools,  and  the  highly  trained 
body  of  officers,  notably,  Grant,  Lee,  Sherman, 
Longstreet,  Jackson,  McClellan,  Meade,  Davis, 
Bragg,  and  others — who  made  the  Mexican  War 
our  most  successful  one  from  the  military  and 
professional  standpoint,  received  their  inspira- 
tion and  training  from  them.  Scott  and  Taylor 
and  a  few  of  the  old-timers  had  been  in  the  War 
of  1812. 

And  so,  as  each  minor  campaign  trained  sol- 
diers for  the  succeeding  one,  the  Mexican  War 
developed  most  of  the  great  leaders  in  the  Civil 
War.  The  Civil  War,  although  it  trained  mil- 
lions of  men,  and  nearly  all  young  ones,  actually 
II 


Introduction 

prepared  them  for  an  abler  return  to  civil  life 
and  for  the  continued  opening  up  of  our  country 
• — the  building  of  the  transcontinental  railways 
and  its  great  industrial  development.  The  sad 
lessons  of  unpreparedness  were  forgotten  and 
the  vital  value  of  training  and  teamwork  on  a 
grand  scale  ceased  to  be  available  at  a  stroke  for 
military  purposes,  for  what  was  left  of  an  army 
was  scattered  all  over  the  Western  frontier  for 
minor  operations  to  protect  the  pioneers  and 
operate  against  the  Indians. 

The  failures  and  successes  of  the  war,  though 
made  available  as  after  all  our  wars  by  congres- 
sional investigations,  were  neither  digested  nor 
interpreted.  The  country  has  been  full  of  books 
about  the  Civil  War,  telling  about  what  happened 
from  the  writer's  point  of  view.  Moot  points 
were  fought  over;  strategy  was  discussed  in 
Jomini-like  formula;  but  just  how  the  armies 
were  organized,  how  they  were  trained,  and  the 
wonderfully  successful  problems  of  supply  that 
had  been  solved,  were  neglected  and  forgotten. 
Military  history  was  studied  like  the  dead  lan- 
guages. After  the  terrible  years  of  strain  many 
soldiers  lived  on  their  laurels,  and  the  chief  con- 
cern of  the  nation  was  how  to  reward  its  heroes. 
The  country  was  tired  of  war.  The  vital  ques- 
tion which  had  caused  it  seemed  to  be  settled 
and  no  thought  of  future  wars  was  allowed  to 
disturb. 

12 


Introduction 

The  rennaissance  of  intelligent  professional 
study  and  training  in  America  came  when  a 
certain  coterie  of  live  officers  organized  and  de- 
veloped the  Leavenworth  Schools.  West  Point 
still  held  to  its  standards  of  honor  and  duty  and 
training  of  mind  and  character,  and  has  fur- 
nished most  of  the  officers,  who  in  the  Service 
Schools  at  Leavenworth,  free  from  traditions 
and  prejudices,  have  sought  for  the  best  wher- 
ever to  be  found,  whether  in  Germany  or  France, 
to  interpret  our  own  military  history  and  to 
make  practical  use  of  it. 

The  development  in  England  has  been  almost 
parallel,  up  to  the  beginning  of  the  Great  War. 
For  more  than  two  years  she  has  been  in  the 
fire,  and  it  behooves  us  to  take  advantage  of  her 
experience.  She  has  trained  great  armies,  as 
we  would  have  to  do,  developing  suddenly  and 
intensely  great  volunteer  forces,  with  com- 
paratively few  trained  officers  and  noncommis- 
sioned officers.  This  book  gives  our  own  train- 
ing methods,  with  an  attempt  to  take  advantage 
of  everything  known  of  the  European  and  Eng- 
lish experiences.  The  danger  in  accepting  any 
radical  changes  resulting  from  the  present  war 
is  from  the  hasty  generalizations  of  attaches,  ob- 
servers, and  correspondents.  The  scale  of  this 
war  is  so  great  that  every  kind  of  warfare  since 
the  world  began  is  in  progress.  Every  weapon, 
from  those  of  the  men  of  the  old  Stone  Age  to 
13 


Introduction 

the  modern  machine  gun,  is  in  use.  Classical  and 
historical  projectiles  and  machines  are  in  the 
war  pictures.  Everything  is  made  use  of.  Mu- 
seums have  been  emptied  of  their  so-called  ob- 
solete weapons.  The  picturesque  near-armored 
knight  is  seen  in  the  newspaper  supplements 
beside  the  flying  man  in  his  gear.  Every  cam- 
paign of  classic  and  historic  times  is  being  par- 
alleled on  the  same  ground ;  but  the  fundamental 
training  of  the  soldiers  is  the  same.  To  become 
disciplined,  to  keep  himself  fit,  to  march,  and  to 
shoot,  are  what  we  first  train  for. 


Part  I— The  Enlisted  Man 


Rules  Governing  Discipline 

"KITCHENER'S  MOB/'  they  were  called  in  the 
early  days  of  August,  1914,  and  it  was  thor- 
oughly descriptive  of  the  array  of  would-be  sol- 
diers which  volunteered  to  save  England.  One 
of  them  says : 

We  herded  together  like  so  many  sheep.  We  had 
lost  our  individuality,  and  it  was  to  be  months  before 
we  regained  it  in  a  new  aspect,  a  collective  individuality 
of  which  we  became  increasingly  proud.  My  own 
battalion  sergeant,  in  his  address  of  welcome,  sized 
us  up  accurately :  "  'Lissen  'ere,  you  men.  I've  never 
saw  such  a  raw,  round-shouldered  batch  o'  rookies  in 
fifteen  years'  service.  Yer  pasty-faced  and  yer  thin- 
chested.  Gawd  'elp  'is  Majesty  if  it  ever  lays  with  you 
to  save  'im.  'Owever,  we're  'ere  to  do  wot  we  can  with 
wot  we  got !" 

Indeed,  the  same  could  be  said  of  any  bunch 
of  rookies,  and  also  what  the  same  American 
soldier  in  Kitchener's  first  100,000  feelingly 
states  after  he  was  a  veteran  of  Flanders : 

It  was  interesting  to  note  the  physical  improvement  in 
the  men  wrought  by  a  life  of  healthy,  well-ordered 

15 


National  Service  Library 

routine.  My  battalion  was  recruited  largely  from  what 
is  known  in  England  as  the  lower  middle  classes ;  there 
were  shop  assistants,  clerks,  railway  and  city  employees, 
tradesmen,  and  a  general  sprinkling  of  common  la- 
borers. Many  of  them  had  been  used  to  an  indoor  life, 
practically  all  of  them  to  city  life,  and  needed  months 
of  the  hardest  kind  of  training  before  they  could  be 
made  physically  fit,  before  they  could  be  seasoned  and 
toughened  to  withstand  the  hardships  of  active  service. 
Plenty  of  hard  work  in  the  open  air  wrought  great  and 
welcome  changes.  The  men  talked  of  their  food, 
anticipated  it  with  a  zest  which  came  from  realizing 
for  the  first  time  the  joy  of  being  genuinely  hungry. 
They  watched  their  muscles  harden  with  the  satis- 
faction known  to  every  normal  man  when  he  is  becom- 
ing physically  efficient.  Food,  exercise,  and  rest,  taken 
in  wholesome  quantities  and  at  regular  intervals,  were 
having  the  usual  excellent  results. 

For  my  own  part,  I  had  never  before  been  in  such 
splendid  health.  I  wish  that  it  might  at  all  times  be 
possible  for  democracies  to  exercise  a  beneficent 
paternalism  over  the  lives  of  their  citizenry,  at  least  in 
matters  of  health.  It  seems  a  great  pity  that  the 
principle  of  personal  freedom  should  be  responsible  for 
so  many  ill-shaped  and  ill-assorted  incompetents.  My 
fellow  Tommies  were  living,  really  living,  for  the  first 
time ;  they  had  never  before  known  what  it  was  to  be 
radiantly,  buoyantly  healthy.  The  restraints  of  disci- 
pline and  the  very  exacting  character  of  military  life  and 
training  gave  them  self-control  and  mental  alertness. 

At  the  beginning  they  were  individuals,  no  more 
cohesive  than  so  many  grains  of  wet  sand.  After  nine 
months  of  training  they  acted  as  a  unit,  obeying  orders 
with  that  distinctive  promptness  of  action  that  is  so 
essential  on  the  field  of  battle,  when  men  think  scarcely 
at  all.  Discipline  was  an  all-important  factor  in  the 
daily  grind.  At  the  beginning  of  their  training  the  men 
of  the  new  armies  were  gently  dealt  with.  Allowances 
were  made  for  civilian  frailties  and  shortcomings,  but 
as  they  adapted  themselves  to  changed  conditions,  re- 
16 


Rules  Governing  Discipline 

strictions  became  increasingly  severe.  Once  Tommy 
understood  the  reasonableness  of  severe  discipline,  he 
took  his  punishment  for  his  offenses  without  complaint. 
He  realized,  too,  the  futility  of  kicking  against  the 
pricks.  In  the  army  he  belonged  to  the  government 
body  and  soul. 

With  the  disappearance  of  the  malcontents  and  in- 
corrigibles  the  battalion  soon  reached  a  high  grade  of 
efficiency.  Physical  incompetents  were  likewise  ruth- 
lessly weeded  out.  If  the  standard  of  conduct  of  my 
battalion  is  any  criterion,  then  I  can  say  truthfully  that 
there  is  very  little  crime  in  Lord  Kitchener's  armies, 
either  in  England  or  abroad.  There  were  many  of- 
fenders against  minor  points  of  discipline,  such  as 
untidy  appearance  on  parade,  inattention  in  ranks,  tardi- 
ness at  roll  call,  etc.  The  punishment  meted  out  varied 
according  to  the  seriousness  of  the  offense  and  the 
past-conduct  roll  of  the  offender.  It  usually  consisted 
of  from  one  to  ten  days'  confinement  to  barracks.  Only 
twice  did  we  have  a  general  court-martial,  the  offense 
in  each  case  being  assault  by  a  private  upon  a  non- 
commissioned officer,  and  the  penalty  awarded  was 
three  months  in  a  military  prison.  Tommy  was  quiet 
and  law-abiding  in  England,  his  chief  lapses  being  due 
to  an  exaggerated  estimate  of  his  capacity  for  beer. 

In  France  his  conduct  has  been,  as  far  as  my  ob- 
servation goes,  splendid  throughout.  During  six  months 
in  the  trenches  I  saw  but  two  instances  of  drunken- 
ness. Never  did  I  see  or  hear  of  a  woman  treated 
otherwise  than  courteously.  Neither  did  I  see  or  hear 
of  any  instances  of  looting  or  petty  pilfering  from  the 
civilian  inhabitants.  It  is  true  that  the  men  had  fewer 
opportunities  for  misconduct  and  they  were  fighting  in 
a  friendly  country.  Even  so,  active  service  as  we 
found  it  was  by  no  means  free  from  temptations,  and 
the  admirable  restraint  of  most  of  the  men  in  face  of 
them  was  a  fine  thing  to  see. 

"Blood  is  thicker  than  water,"  and  a  common 
tongue  is  a  heart- warmer ;  hence  the  foregoing 

17 


National  Service  Library 

picture  by  an  American  of  the  discipline  and 
rules  of  conduct  in  the  British  army  applies  ab- 
solutely to  our  own.  The  Articles  of  War,  which 
is  the  statutory  military  code  of  the  American 
army,  was  taken  almost  bodily  from  the  British 
articles  of  war,  and  the  armies  have  developed 
on  parallel  lines. 

The  standard  of  conduct  which  England  ex- 
pected of  her  righting  men  was  well  set  forth  in 
Lord  Kitchener's  letter  to  the  troops  ordered 
abroad : 

You  are  ordered  abroad  as  a  soldier  of  the  King, 
to  help  our  French  comrades  against  the  invasion  of  a 
common  enemy.  You  have  to  perform  a  task  which 
will  need  your  courage,  your  energy,  your  patience. 
Remember  that  the  honor  of  the  British  army  depends 
upon  your  individual  conduct.  It  will  be  your  duty 
not  only  to  set  an  example  of  discipline  and  perfect 
steadiness  under  fire,  but  also  to  maintain  the  most 
friendly  relations  with  those  whom  you  are  helping  in 
this  struggle.  The  operations  in  which  you  are  en- 
gaged will  for  the  most  part  take  place  in  a  friendly 
country,  and  you  can  do  your  own  country  no  better 
service  than  in  showing  yourself  in  France  and  Bel- 
gium in  the  true  character  of  a  British  soldier.  Be  in- 
variably courteous,  considerate,  and  kind.  Never  do 
anything  likely  to  injure  or  destroy  property,  and  al- 
ways look  upon  looting  as  a  disgraceful  act.  You  are 
sure  to  meet  with  a  welcome  and  to  be  trusted,  and 
your  conduct  must  justify  that  welcome  and  that  trust. 
Your  duty  cannot  be  done  unless  your  health  is  sound, 
so  keep  constantly  on  your  guard  against  any  excesses. 
In  this  new  experience  you  may  find  temptations  both 
in  wine  and  women.  You  must  resist  both  temptations ; 
and  while  treating  all  women  with  perfect  courtesy, 

18 


Rules  Governing  Discipline 

you  should  avoid  any  intimacy.  Do  your  duty  bravely. 
Fear  God.  Honor  the  King. 

KITCHENER,  Field  Marshal. 

The  American  soldier  on  enlistment  takes  this 
oath: 

I,  ,  do  hereby  acknowledge  to  have  voluntarily 

enlisted  this  day  of  ,  19 — ,  as  a  soldier  in  the 

army  of  the  United  States  of  America,  for  the  period 
of  seven  years  in  active  service  and  in  the  Army  Re- 
serves for  the  periods  and  under  the  conditions  pre- 
scribed by  law,  unless  sooner  discharged  by  proper 
authority ;  and  do  also  agree  to  accept  from  the  United 
States  such  bounty,  pay,  rations,  and  clothing  as  are  or 
may  be  established  by  law.  And  I  do  solemnly  swear 
(or  affirm)  that  I  will  bear  true  faith  and  allegiance  to 
the  United  States  of  America ;  that  I  will  serve  them 
honestly  and  faithfully  against  all  their  enemies  whom- 
soever ;  and  that  I  will  obey  the  orders  of  the  President 
of  the  United  States,  and  the  orders  of  the  officers 
appointed  over  me,  according  to  the  Rules  and  Articles 
of  War. 

By  so  doing  he  surrenders  a  certain  amount  of 
freedom  and  gives  himself  to  his  country  for 
weal  or  woe,  but  by  the  same  token  he  is  en- 
dowed with  a  dignity  and  honorable  self-respect, 
and  his  personal  rights  and  privileges  are  ac- 
curately defined  and  strictly  safeguarded.  All 
persons  in  the  military  service  are  required  to 
obey  strictly  and  to  execute  promptly  all  lawful 
orders  of  their  superiors.  There  is  no  official 
equality  in  any  army;  everyone  is  responsible  to 
a  superior  in  the  military  hierarchy,  but  there 
is  a  fine  spirit  of  comradeship  and  personal 
19 


National  Service  Library 

equality  among  the  officers  and  men  of  the  serv- 
ice, and  under  our  laws  and  customs  there  is  the 
truly  American  chance  and  hope  of  rising  to  the 
top.  As  every  American  boy  may  aspire  to  be 
president,  so  every  private  soldier  in  the  ranks 
may  rise  by  his  own  efforts  to  the  highest  rank 
in  the  army.  In  recent  years  two  chiefs  of  staff 
of  the  army,  Generals  Chaffee  and  Young,  have 
risen  from  the  ranks.  Ambitious  and  apt  young- 
sters may  obtain  commissions  by  appointment  to 
West  Point,  or,  after  a  year's  service,  by  passing 
an  examination,  or  may  obtain  a  commission 
directly,  or  become  an  officer  of  the  Reserve 
Corps  from  civil  life.  Many  of  our  ablest  officers 
to-day  have  come  from  the  ranks.  Soldiers  lack- 
ing in  advanced  education  still  have  the  chance 
for  noncommissioned  officers,  and  many  oppor- 
tunities at  the  various  service  schools  for  ad- 
vancing their  education. 

Military  authority  is  exercised  with  firmness, 
kindness  and  justice.  Punishment  must  conform 
to  law  and  follow  offenses  as  promptly  as  cir- 
cumstances will  permit.  Soldiers  have  absolute 
right  of  appeal,  and  the  measures  for  their  pro- 
tection are  carefully  set  forth.  Superiors  are 
forbidden  to  injure  those  under  their  authority 
by  tyrannical  or  capricious  conduct  or  by  abusive 
language. 

Courtesy  among  military  men  is  indispensable 
to  discipline.  Observance  of  the  forms  of  mili- 
20 


Rules  Governing  Discipline 

tary  courtesy  is  a  measure  of  discipline  and  sol- 
dierliness.  All  the  armies  of  the  civilized  world 
from  time  immemorial  have  found  it  advan- 
tageous and  fitting  to  observe  strict  military 
etiquette  and  ceremonial ;  and  these  forms  are 
much  the  same  in  all  services. 

The  military  salute  is  universal.  It  is  at  foun- 
dation but  a  courteous  recognition  between  two 
individuals  of  their  common  fellowship  in  the 
same  honorable  profession,  the  profession  of 
arms.  Regulations  require  that  it  be  rendered 
by  both  the  senior  and  the  junior,  as  bare  cour- 
tesy requires  between  gentlemen  in  civil  life.  It 
is  in  reality  rather  a  privilege  than  an  obligation, 
it  betokens  good  standing  in  a  common  cause;  a 
prisoner,  not  being  in  good  standing,  is  forbidden 
by  regulations  to  render  the  salute.  This  is  the 
right  conception  of  saluting ;  and  in  this  light  you 
will  see  that  the  question  should  not  be  "Shall 
I  salute?"  but  rather  "May  I  salute?"  And  if 
you  are  an  individual  out  of  ranks  you  can  rarely 
go  wrong  by  saluting.  The  salute  is  rendered  to 
all  officers,  active  or  retired,  of  the  army,  navy, 
Marine  Corps,  and  organized  militia.  Officers  of 
foreign  military  and  naval  services  should  be 
saluted  as  those  of  our  own. 

Whenever  the  national  anthem  is  played  at 
any  place  when  persons  belonging  to  the  military 
service  are  present,  all  officers  and  enlisted  men 
not  in  formation  shall  stand  at  attention  facing 

21 


National  Service  Library 

toward  the  music  (except  at  retreat  when  they 
shall  face  toward  the  flag).  If  in  uniform,  cov- 
ered or  uncovered,  or  in  civilian  clothes,  un- 
covered, they  shall  salute  at  the  first  note  of  the 
anthem,  retaining  the  position  of  salute  until  the 
last  note  of  the  anthem.  If  not  in  uniform 
and  covered,  they  shall  uncover  at  the  first  note 
of  the  anthem,  holding  the  headdress  opposite 
the  left  shoulder  and  so  remain  until  its  close, 
except  that  in  inclement  weather  the  headdress 
may  be  held  slightly  raised. 

The  same  rules  apply  when  "To  the  Color"  or 
"To  the  Standard"  is  sounded  as  when  the  na- 
tional anthem  is  played. 

When  played  by  an  army  band,  the  national 
anthem  shall  be  played  through  without  repeti- 
tion of  any  part  not  required  to  be  repeated  to 
make  it  complete. 

The  same  marks  of  respect  prescribed  for  ob- 
servance during  the  playing  of  the  national 
anthem  of  the  United  States  shall  be  shown 
toward  the  national  anthem  of  any  other  coun- 
try when  played  upon  official  occasions. 

Officers  and  enlisted  men  passing  the  uncased 
color  will  render  honors  as  follows:  If  in  uni- 
form they  will  salute  as  they  would  a  senior 
officer;  if  in  civilian  dress  and  covered  they  will 
uncover,  holding  the  headdress  opposite  the  left 
shoulder  with  the  right  hand;  if  uncovered  they 
will  salute  with  th£  right-hand  salute. 

22 


Rules  Governing  Discipline 

By  uncased  colors  is  meant  those  that  are  not 
in  their  waterproof  cases.  By  "colors"  is  meant 
the  national  and  regimental  flags  that  are  carried 
by  troops. 

In  Army  Regulations  the  word  "colors" 
is  used  in  referring  to  regiments  of  infantry, 
battalions  of  engineers,  and  coast  artillery, 
while  "standard"  refers  to  cavalry  and  field 
artillery.  By  "flag"  is  meant  the  national  em- 
blem that  waves  from  flagpoles  and  other  sta- 
tionary poles.  They  are  not  saluted,  except  at 
the  ceremony  of  raising  or  lowering  when  the 
"Star-Spangled  Banner"  or  "To  the  Color"  is 
being  played. 

In  uniform,  covered  or  uncovered,  but  not  in 
formation,  officers  and  enlisted  men  salute  mili- 
tary persons  as  follows:  With  arms  in  hand, 
the  salute  prescribed  for  that  arm  (sentinels  on 
interior  guard  duty  excepted)  ;  without  arms,  the 
right-hand  salute. 

In  civilian  dress,  covered  or  uncovered,  officers 
and  enlisted  men  salute  military  persons  with  the 
right-hand  salute. 

Officers  and  enlisted  men  will  render  the  pre- 
scribed salutes  in  a  military  manner,  the  officer 
junior  in  rank  or  the  enlisted  man  saluting  first. 
.When  several  officers  in  company  are  saluted  all 
entitled  to  the  salute  shall  return  it. 

Except  in  the  field  under  campaign  or  simu- 
lated campaign  conditions,  a  mounted  officer  (or 
23 


National  Service  Library 

soldier)  dismounts  before  addressing  a  superior 
officer  not  mounted. 

A  man  in  formation  shall  not  salute  when  di- 
rectly addressed,  but  shall  come  to  attention  if 
at  rest  or  at  ease. 

When  an  officer  entitled  to  the  salute  passes  in 
rear  of  a  body  of  troops  it  is  brought  to  atten- 
tion while  he  is  opposite  the  post  of  the  com- 
mander. 

In  public  conveyances,  such  as  railway  trains 
and  street  cars,  and  in  public  places,  such  as 
theaters,  honors  and  personal  salutes  may  be 
omitted  when  palpably  inappropriate  or  apt  to 
disturb  or  annoy  civilians  present. 

Salutes  are  rendered  within  such  distances  as 
allow  individuals  and  insignia  of  rank  to  be 
readily  recognized  at  about  thirty  paces.  You 
would  salute  an  officer  where  you  would  ex- 
change greetings  with  a  casual  acquaintance.  The 
soldier  is  "at  attention"  when  he  salutes;  either 
at  a  halt  standing  at  attention,  or  if  walking, 
marching  at  attention.  This  requires  military 
bearing,  clothing  properly  adjusted,  and  forbids 
smoking  while  saluting.  If  moving  at  a  trot  or 
double  time,  he  must  first  come  to  the  walk  or 
quick  time.  An  officer  would  continue  at  double 
time  or  the  trot,  but  ^hould  be  saluted  just  the 
same. 

An  enlisted  man  without  arms,  mounted  or  dis- 
mounted, salutes  with  the  right  hand.  If  officer 
24 


Rules  Governing  Discipline 

and  soldier  are  approaching  each  other,  the 
salute  is  commenced  when  six  paces  from  the 
officer.  If  the  approach  does  not  continue  to 
within  six  paces  the  salute  is  rendered  at  the 
nearest  point.  In  passing  each  other  in  the  same 
direction,  the  salute  is  rendered  just  as  they  pass. 
It  is  a  common  fault  to  begin  the  salute  six  feet 
rather  than  six  paces  away.  Count  your  steps 
some  time  and  see  that  you  are  prompt  enough, 
otherwise  the  officer  may  not  have  opportunity 
to  return  it  other  than  in  a  perfunctory  manner. 

In  saluting  look  at  the  person  saluted  ancj 
maintain  the  salute  until  it  has  been  acknowl- 
edged or  the  officer  has  passed.  The  precision 
and  snap  with  which  you  salute  marks  the  type 
of  soldier  you  are  and  the  pride  you  take  in  your 
profession.  It  is  a  pleasure  to  return  a  snappy 
salute,  and  a  strange  officer  is  apt  to  inquire  to 
what  organization  you  belong.  There  are  so- 
called  salutes  so  indifferently  made  that  an  officer 
would  be  ashamed  to  acknowledge  them.  He 
could  feel  no  brotherhood  with  such  a  soldier. 

Where  an  officer  is  recognized,  he  is  saluted 
the  same  whether  in  civilian  clothes  or  uniform. 
The  enlisted  man  may  be  in  uniform  or  in  civilian 
clothes.  The  presence  of  ladies  with  either  party 
makes  no  difference. 

An  enlisted  man  out  of  ranks  armed  with  a 
saber  salutes  with  the  saber  if  drawn,  otherwise 
with  the  hand;  armed  with  the  rifle,  he  makes 
25 


National  Service  Library 

the  prescribed  rifle  salute,  the  rifle  on  either 
shoulder.  If  indoors  he  salutes  at  the  "order," 
or  if  moving,  at  the  "trail."  The  same  regulation 
obtains  as  to  distances,  and  looking  at  the  person 
to  be  saluted. 

The  soldier  salutes  with  the  "present  arms" 
only  when  posted  as  a  sentinel,  except  on  field 
service,  when  a  mounted  man,  officer  or  soldier, 
wishes  to  address  or  is  addressed  by  his  military 
superior,  he  first  dismounts. 

An  enlisted  man  accompanying  an  officer, 
should  walk  about  two  paces  to  the  officer's  left 
and  rear;  if  riding,  this  distance  is  doubled. 

A  noncommissioned  officer  in  command  of  a 
detachment  should  call  them  to  attention  and 
himself  render  the  salute  to  an  officer  as  above 
explained  for  a  single  individual.  If  the  officer 
passed  in  rear  the  detachment  would  be  brought 
to  attention  and  so  held  until  he  has  passed,  but 
no  salute  would  be  rendered. 

When  an  officer  approaches  a  group  of  enlisted 
men  not  in  ranks,  the  first  one  to  perceive  him 
should  call  "attention"  so  that  all  will  hear,  when 
all  stand  at  attention,  and,  at  the  proper  point, 
all  salute.  If  walking  together  the  same  rules 
obtain,  except  that  the  salutes  would  be  rendered 
without  halting.  If  indoors  the  same  rules  ob- 
tain except  that  if  unarmed  they  uncover  and 
that  no  one  salutes  unless  spoken  to ;  if  armed  all 
would  salute.  One  exception  to  this  rule — if 
26 


Rules  Governing  Discipline 

seated  at  meals  the  soldiers  do  not  rise  at  the 
call  "attention"  but  cease  eating  and  remain  sit- 
ting at  attention.  Of  course,  any  individual  ad- 
dressed by  the  officer  would  rise.  By  "indoors" 
is  meant  military  offices,  barracks,  quarters,  and 
similar  places — it  does  not  refer  to  storehouses, 
riding  halls,  stables,  post-exchange  buildings, 
hotels,  etc. 

Upon  the  approach  of  an  officer  indoors,  the 
enlisted  man,  if  unarmed,  uncovers  and  stands 
at  attention,  and  does  not  salute.  If  armed  with 
a  rifle  he  salutes  from  the  position  of  the  order 
or  the  trail ;  if  armed  and  uncovered,  he  should 
cover  before  saluting  if  practicable.  A  soldier 
with  belt,  side  arms,  pistol,  saber,  or  bayonet,  is 
considered  armed. 

Whenever  holding  conversation  with  a  supe- 
rior, a  soldier  should  stand  strictly  at  attention, 
the  conversation  being  preceded  by  the  military 
salute;  and  it  is  only  by  strictly  observing  the 
position  of  attention  that  you  may  be  really  at 
ease,  any  halfway  measures  will  tend  to  make 
you  self-conscious  and  ill  at  ease.  And  do  not 
keep  assuming  that  the  officer  has  finished  his 
remarks  and  thus  have  to  repeat  your  salute  at 
leaving.  It  is  much  more  military  to  stand  pat 
until  he  has  dismissed  you  with  such  words  as 
"that  will  do,"  then  you  make  a  dignified  salute 
on  departure. 

The  soldier  actually  at  work  does  not  stop  his 
27 


National  Service  Library 

work  to  render  a  salute,  unless  addressed  by  the 
officer.  Driving  or  riding  in  a  carriage  or  other 
vehicle,  the  soldier  would  salute  an  officer  as 
though  walking,  but  without  rising,  unless  a 
senior  be  present  in  the  vehicle.  Circumstances 
which  would  render  the  salute  unnecessary,  such 
as  endangering  passengers  or  pedestrians  if  at- 
tention be  relaxed  may  arise.  Such  cases  must 
be  met  with  good  judgment;  there  is  no  breach 
of  discipline  when  intentional  discourtesy  is  not 
present. 

In  camp  a  mounted  man  should  not  take  his 
horse  up  in  front  of  an  officer's  tent  where  he 
may  soil  the  ground.  Leave  him  tied  or  held  at 
a  little  distance.  Even  when  he  brings  up  the 
officer's  horse,  he  may  hold  him  a  little  way  off, 
until  the  officer  directs  him  to  come  closer. 

In  holding  the  horse  for  an  officer  to  mount, 
the  orderly  should  invariably  stand  on  the  off  side 
facing  the  horse's  shoulder,  both  reins  held  firmly 
in  the  right  hand  just  behind  the  bit,  the  left 
hand  holding  the  right  stirrup  and  bearing  down 
to  keep  the  saddle  from  being  displaced  as  the 
officer  mounts.  He  then  adjusts  the  stirrup 
neatly  to  the  officer's  foot  as  his  leg  comes  down 
in  the  mount.  If  the  orderly  has  his  own  horse 
with  him,  he  must  hold  that  horse  out  of  the 
way  on  the  off  side  of  the  officer's  horse. 

An  enlisted  man  in  conversation  with  a  military 
superior  will  properly  use  the  third  person,  i.  e., 
28 


Rules  Governing  Discipline 

he  will  ask,  "Does  the  sergeant  intend  so  and  so  ?" 
Or,  "Does  the  lieutenant  want  his  horse?"  Not 
"Do  you  intend  so  and  so,"  etc. 

Where  a  verbal  message  is  carried  between 
officers  the  messenger  prefaces  his  message  with 
"The  adjutant  presents  his  compliments"  (the 
commanding  officer,  Captain  so  and  so,  whoever 
sends  it)  "and  directs,  asks,  says,  requests,  etc.," 
followed  by  the  message. 

To  report  for  duty  as  orderly,  the  man  pro- 
ceeds to  the  officer  to  whom  detailed,  stands  at 
attention  before  him  and,  when  the  officer  gives 
him  opportunity,  salutes  and  reports  in  these 

words :  "Sir,  Private ,  Company  I,  Tenth 

Infantry,  reports  as  orderly." 

At  all  times  and  places  outside  his  quarters  an 
enlisted  man  should  be  neat  and  orderly  in  his 
appearance.  His  hat  and  clothing  should  be 
properly  adjusted  and  buttoned  up.  Even  fatigue 
uniform  should  be  properly  worn.  In  the  field 
in  hot  weather  it  is  allowable  in  ordinary  circum- 
stances to  have  the  top  button  of  the  shirt  un- 
buttoned— but  never  the  shirt  sleeves  rolled  up. 
At  formations,  such  as  retreat,  everything  should 
be  the  neatest  possible.  There  is  something 
wrong  with  tHe  organization  whose  members 
are  habitually  indifferent  to  their  soldierly  ap- 
pearance. 

Every  soldier  should  know  the  various  insignia 
worn  by  officers  to  indicate  their  grade. 
29 


National  Service  Library 

They  are  found  on  the  collar  of  the  O.  D.  shirt, 
on  the  shoulder  straps  and  loops  of  coats,  and  on 
sleeves  of  overcoat,  and  are  as  follows  on  the  col- 
lars and  shoulders: 

Major  general — two  stars. 

Brigadier  general — one  star. 

Colonel — eagle. 

Lieutenant  colonel — oak  leaf,  silver. 

Major — oak  leaf,  gold. 

Captain — two  silver  bars. 

First  lieutenant — one  silver  bar. 

Second  lieutenant — has  no  insignia  of  rank, 
but  may  be  recognized  as  an  officer  by  the  other 
insignia. 

On  overcoat  and  full-dress  coat  sleeves  a  knot 
of  three  loops  of  braid  for  officers  below  the 
grade  of  general. 

Colonel — the  knot  contains  five  rows  of  braid. 

Lieutenant  colonel — four  rows. 

Major — three  rows. 

Captain — two  rows. 

First  lieutenant — one  row. 

In  addition  to  the  insignia  of  rank  all  com- 
missioned officers  may  be  distinguished  by  special 
ornaments,  for  example — with  the  olive-drab 
blouse  the  commissioned  officers  have  a  band  of 
braid  around  the  cuff;  with  the  dress  uniform 
and  full-dress  uniform  respectively  shoulder 
straps  and  shoulder  knots  are  worn;  with  the 
olive-drab  shirt  a  commissioned  officer  has  the 

30 


Rules  Governing  Discipline 

letters  "U.  S.,"  "U.  S.  V.,"  or  "U.  S.  R.,"  on  the 
right  side  in  the  middle  of  the  collar  one  inch 
from  the  end,  and  on  the  left  side  similarly 
placed  the  insignia  of  the  corps,  department,  or 
arm  of  the  service  to  which  he  belongs. 

No  honors  are  paid  by  troops  when  on  the 
march,  in  trenches  or  on  outpost,  unless  a  special 
individual  be  addressed  or  the  command  be 
called  to  attention. 

No  salute  is  rendered  when  marching  in  double 
time. 

Arms  are  not  presented  by  troops,  except  in 
the  ceremonies. 

The  commander  of  a  body  of  troops  salutes  all 
general  officers  and  the  commander  of  his  post, 
regiment,  squadron,  or  immediate  organization, 
by  bringing  his  command  to  attention  and  salut- 
ing in  person.  He  salutes  all  others  without 
bringing  it  to  attention. 

When  two  officers  exchange  salutes,  each  com- 
manding a  body  of  troops,  the  troops  are  brought 
to  attention  during  the  exchange. 

An  officer  in  command  of  troops  is  saluted  by 
all  junior  officers  and  by  men  out  of  ranks.  Ex- 
cept during  ceremonies,  when  especially  pre- 
scribed to  the  contrary,  an  officer  will  at  all  times 
acknowledge  the  courtesies  of  his  juniors  by 
returning  the  salute. 

Respect  to  superiors  will  not  be  confined  to 
acts  on  duty,  but  will  be  extended  on  all  oc- 


National  Service  Library 

casions.  The  conventional  courtesies  common 
among  soldiers  of  all  nations  have  descended 
from  the  days  of  chivalry.  Saluting,  standing  at 
attention,  rising  in  the  presence  of  superiors,  and 
other  marks  of  respect  are  necessary  to  the  effi- 
ciency of  soldiers,  as  well  as  marks  of  mutual 
respect.  Manly  deference  to  superiors,  which  in 
military  life  is  merely  recognition  of  constituted 
authority,  does  not  imply  inferiority  any  more 
than  respect  for  law  implies  cowardice.  These 
habits  and  courtesies  are  just  as  obligatory  for 
officers  as  for  soldiers.  The  highest  ranking  gen- 
eral in  the  army  returns  the  salute  of  the  green- 
est recruit.  All  officers  and  soldiers  salute,  ex- 
cepting the  soldier  not  in  good  standing,  who  is 
not  allowed  to  salute. 

From  a  recent  letter  of  a  former  German  sol- 
dier, published  in  a  daily  paper,  I  take  his  very 
descriptive  account  of  the  daily  routine  of  a 
German  soldier.  Of  course,  it  is  that  of  almost 
every  other  soldier,  but  the  average  American  so 
seldom  sees  the  American  soldier  in  arms,  and 
when  he  does  see  him  it  is  usually  on  pass  or 
otherwise  off  duty,  or  if  on  duty,  at  some  parade 
or  ceremony,  that  in  many  mild  American  minds 
the  life  of  the  soldier  is  a  lazy,  and  apparently 
useless,  one.  I  remember  last  summer,  during 
the  raiding  on  the  border,  when  every  trooper 
was  riding  on  night  patrols  protecting  the  scat- 
tered farms  and  ranches  near  the  Rio  Grande, 

32 

Vol.  3— N.S.L.  i 


Rules  Governing  Discipline 

that  one  big  ranchman  came  into  my  camp  and 
demanded  that  a  detachment  be  stationed  at  his 
ranch  house.  I  tried  to  explain  to  him  that  my 
command  was  so  small  that  I  could  not  furnish 
such  a  detachment  but  would  give  him  protection 
in  my  own  way  by  patrolling  and  keeping  in 
touch  over  the  telephone.  In  disdain  he  turned 
toward  the  tents  of  the  troopers  and  called  atten- 
tion to  the  large  number  lying  asleep  on  their 
bunks,  not  realizing  that  every  one  of  the  troop- 
ers had  spent  all  the  night  before  patrolling  and 
protecting  in  the  best  possible  way.  Much  of  the 
work  of  the  soldier  is  done  at  night  or  so  early 
in  the  morning  that  the  visiting  civilian  at  an 
army  post  may  not  see  much  sign  of  activity. 
But  the  men  who  have  attended  training  camps 
or  been  with  the  National  Guard  on  the  border 
know  that  the  soldier's  life  is  a  hard  and  active 
one,  and  they  have  a  respect  born  of  experience 
and  feeling  of  comradeship  that  the  regular  sol- 
dier is  glad  to  welcome.  The  very  enthusiasm  of 
the  civilian  soldier  who  has  had  association  with 
the  regular  soldiers  is  partly  due  to  the  surprised 
interest  in  that  fine  body  of  men  who  have  done 
him  many  a  good  turn  in  the  field  and  shown 
him  the  little  wrinkles  of  the  old  soldier. 

"German  militarism"  as  I  know  it — having  seen  years 
of  service  in  the  German  army — is,  in  my  opinion,  the 
foundation  of  Germany's  success  in  all  other  fields, 
such  as  manufacture,  commerce,  education,  and  the 

33 

Vol.  3— N.S.L.  2 


National  Service  Library 

solving  of  economical  and  social  questions  in  general. 
"German  militarism"  is,  in  my  opinion,  the  greatest 
university  in  the  world,  the  university  of  the  masses, 
where  the  healthy  body  of  the  young  man  is  made  per- 
fect, where  discipline  teaches  him  that  he  is  not  the 
"only  pebble  on  the  beach,"  but  that  strict  obedience  to 
orders  issued  by  superiors  is  an  absolute  necessity  to 
accomplish  in  union  what  cannot  be  accomplished 
singly. 

Military  laws  and  orders  governing  the  German  army 
are  of  the  highest  moral  order.  All  that  is  bad  is 
eliminated ;  all  that  is  good  adopted.  The  life  of  the 
German  soldier  is  almost  ideal.  Between  five  and  six 
in  the  morning  he  rises;  he  makes  his  bed,  washes, 
dresses,  cleans  once  more  the  things  needed  for  the 
day's  service,  then  gets  his  coffee.  Generally  at  eight 
the  three-hours'  service,  whatever  it  consists  of,  begins ; 
shortly  after  eleven  he  is  back  in  his  room.  Around 
twelve  o'clock  the  only  hot  meal  given  in  the  army,  and 
consisting  of  meat,  potatoes,  and  vegetables,  mostly 
cooked  in  a  stew,  is  eaten.  About  two  o'clock  the  after- 
noon service  begins,  and  ends  at  four ;  from  five  to  six 
an  hour's  instruction  generally  ends  the  day's  work, 
unless  it  be  that  the  soldier  is  ambitious  and  avails 
himself  of  the  many  places  of  learning  either  provided 
directly  by  the  regiment  or  else  provided  through  the 
regiment  by  private  teachers. 

In  my  regiment  there  were  chances  to  learn  penman- 
ship, stenography,  bookkeeping,  telegraphy,  surveying, 
and  many  other  things  which  the  average  common  sol- 
dier never  would  have  a  chance  to  get  acquainted  with 
in  his  civilian  life.  Of  course,  to  gain  this  kind  of 
knowledge  he  uses  his  own  free  time,  as  the  hours  are 
generally  set  so  that  he  can  be  back  in  his  quarters  at 
nine  in  winter  and  ten  in  summer.  Supper  the  soldier 
provides  himself,  and  if  he  is  very  poor  and  has  no 
relatives  his  black  bread  is  the  menu,  but,  as  a  rule,  all 
soldiers  get  enough  eatables  or  money  from  home  to  be 
able  to  provide  plenty  of  good  things  to  go  with  the 
wholesome  bread,  and,  as  the  ties  of  comradeship  are 

34 


Rules  Governing  Discipline 

very  close  among  the  boys,  those  that  have  no  relatives 
very  seldom  need  eat  their  bread  dry,  because  when 
packages  arrive  from  home  there  is  generally  a  division 
and  every  one  gets  his  portion  even  though  some  of 
them  cannot  reciprocate. 


35 


II 

Care  of  Health  in  Garrison 
and  Field 

"WAR  is  hell-th"  is  the  play  on  Sherman's  oft- 
quoted  words  of  a  happily  thoughtful  Platts- 
burg  man  and  which  should  be  still  more  often 
quoted. 

It  is  not  enough  for  a  soldier  to  be  healthy. 
His  life  and  work  demand  that  he  should  have 
more  than  the  average  amount  of  muscular 
strength  and  endurance  in  addition  to  good 
health. 

His  enlistment  practically  insures  good  health 
to  start.  He  must  not  only  keep  that  good 
health  by  intelligent  care  and  pride,  but  he  must 
learn  how  to  increase  his  general  health  and 
bodily  vigor,  his  muscular  strength  and  endur- 
ance, self-reliance,  smartness,  activity  and  pre- 
cision. All  are  essential  soldierly  qualities.  The 
Greeks  considered  them  all  as  physical  qual- 
ities, but  most  of  them  are  directly  dependent 
on  the  inner  virtues,  and  together  make  a 
man  bold  and  ready  for  the  utmost,  so  that  he 
may  know  how  both  to  live  and  to  die  like  a 
soldier. 

36 


Health  in  Garrison  and  Field 

IN  GARRISON 

On  enlistment,  and  afterward  at  frequent  in- 
tervals, soldiers  are  carefully  examined  by  sur- 
geons. At  these  times  surgeons  should  be  asked 
to  indicate  the  weak  points  in  one's  physique  and 
how  harmonious  strength  can  best  be  developed. 
Exercises  which  require  activity  and  agility 
rather  than  those  demanding  strength  only  should 
be  used  daily.  As  far  as  possible,  select  the  par- 
ticular exercise  which  seems  most  attractive. 
Short  and  frequent  exercises  should  be  preferred, 
beginning  with  the  least  violent  ones  and  gradu- 
ally working  up  to  those  that  are  more  so,  then 
carefully  working  back  to  the  simpler  ones,  so 
that  on  finishing  the  condition  will  be  as  nearly 
normal  as  possible.  All  exercises  should  be  car- 
ried on  as  far  as  possible  in  the  open  air.  By 
constant  practice  learn  to  breathe  slowly  through 
the  nostrils  during  all  work,  especially  while  run- 
ning. Never  exercise  immediately  after  a  meal, 
nor  eat  or  drink  immediately  after  exercise.  Do 
not  hesitate  to  drink  good  cool  water  in  small 
quantities,  but  the  exercise  should  be  continued, 
particularly  if  perspiring  freely.  Cool  off  gradu- 
ally and  wear  some  sweater  or  extra  clothing 
while  overheated.  Follow  the  exercise  whenever 
practicable  by  bathing.  After  very  violent  exer- 
cise try  to  get  a  hot  bath,  and  if  there  is  time  fol- 
low with  a  cold  or  a  cool  one.  Light  flannel  is 
37 


National  Service  Library 

best  to  wear  next  the  body  during  violent  work 
and  play. 

SCOPE 

Setting-up  exercises  are  the  foundation  upon 
which  the  entire  course  of  training  in  the  service 
is  based.  Their  importance  cannot  be  overesti- 
mated, as  by  means  of  them  alone  it  is  possible 
to  effect  an  all-round  development  impossible  of 
attainment  by  any  other  method.  They  should 
therefore  form  a  very  important  part  of  every 
drill. 

Marching  in  quick  time  and  exercises  calling 
into  action  the  various  parts  of  the  body  while 
marching  tend  to  develop  coordination,  upon 
which  to  a  great  extent  poise,  posture,  carriage 
and  rhythm  are  dependent.  Marching  in  double 
time  is  a  heart  and  lung  developing  exercise  of 
moderate  severity.  Running,  on  the  other  hand, 
especially  when  continued  for  long  periods,  or  at 
a  high  rate  of  speed,  or  when  taken  in  conjunc- 
tion with  leg  exercises,  affects  those  organs  in  a 
very  marked  degree.  Both  double  timing  and 
running  are  invaluable  in  the  development  of  en- 
durance and  organic  vigor. 

Dumb-bell  exercises  are  closely  allied  to  the 
setting-up  exercises  and  differ  from  these  only 
by  the  extra  weight  that  is  imposed  by  the 
bells,  which  should,  however,  never  exceed  two 
pounds. 

38 


Health  in  Garrison  and  Field 

Club  exercises  are  of  use  principally  as  a 
means  for  the  development  of  coordination  and 
grace  in  the  upper  extremities ;  their  weight,  since 
muscular  development  is  not  aimed  at,  should  not 
exceed  two  pounds. 

Rifle  exercises  have  for  their  object  the  de- 
velopment of  "handiness"  with  the  piece.  Owing 
to  the  weight  of  the  rifle  they  are  powerful  fac- 
tors in  the  development  of  the  muscles  of  the 
arms,  upper  back,  shoulders,  and  chest,  and  when 
taken  in  conjunction  with  trunk  and  leg  exercises 
they  are  excellent  agents  for  the  all-round  de- 
velopment of  those  who  possess  the  strength  to 
wield  the  piece  to  advantage. 

Climbing,  on  poles  or  ropes,  when  both  arms 
and  legs  are  used,  brings  into  action  nearly  every 
muscle  of  the  body  and  exerts  considerable  in- 
fluence upon  the  heart.  Where  poles  or  ropes  of 
sufficient  length  are  used  this  exercise  will  de- 
velop self-reliance  also. 

Jumping,  when  indulged  in  as  a  gymnastic  ex- 
ercise, where  a  series  of  from  eight  to  ten  jumps 
of  moderate  length  are  executed  successively,  is 
essentially  a  leg  and  heart  developing  exercise. 
When  form  is  insisted  upon  and  the  nature  of 
the  jump  is  varied  by  introducing  various  leg, 
arm,  and  trunk  movements,  it  becomes  a  strong 
factor  in  the  development  of  coordination. 

Apparatus  work  should  be  supplementary  to 
all  other  forms  of  training.  The  chief  object  of 
39 


National  Service  Library 

this  work  in  the  service  should  be  to  use  it  as  a 
means  for  the  development  of  the  ability  of  the 
soldier  to  control  his  body  while  its  weight  is  sup- 
ported by  or  suspended  from  the  arms  and  hands, 
in  order  to  enable  him  successfully  to  overcome 
and  surmount  such  obstacles  as  may  present 
themselves  during  field  service.  The  exercises 
composing  this  part  of  the  training  should,  there- 
fore, be  confined  to  those  that  will  develop  the 
muscular  strength  of  the  entire  body  in  general 
and  that  of  the  arms  and  legs  in  particular,  and 
at  the  same  time  make  the  soldier  agile  and  active 
and  teach  him  decision  and  self-reliance. 

Gymnastic  contests  are  the  simpler  forms  of 
antagonistic  gymnastics  in  which  the  participants 
are  pitted  against  each  other,  and  which  never 
fail  to  induce  the  usual  rivalry  for  superiority 
attending  personal  contests.  Their  chief  value 
lies  in  the  development  of  agility  and  quickness 
of  thought  and  action.  They  are  quite  the  most 
interesting  of  those  exercises  in  which  the  effort 
is  lost  sight  of  in  the  desire  to  win. 

Athletics,  when  employed  for  the  sake  of  their 
value  as  a  means  for  the  development  of  large 
numbers,  which  should  be  the  case  in  the  service, 
have  nothing  in  common  with  competitive  ath- 
letics. In  other  words,  their  value  lies  entirely 
in  their  usefulness  in  the  development  of  physical 
strength,  endurance,  and  skill,  and  not  in  the 
making  or  breaking  of  records. 
40 


Health  in  Garrison  and  Field 

Swimming  is  of  vital  importance  to  everyone 
connected  with  the  service,  and  it  should  be  made 
obligatory  upon  all  officers  and  enlisted  men  to 
make  themselves  proficient  in  it.  Aside  from  its 
usefulness  it  is  without  doubt  the  best  single 
means  to  all-round  physical  development. 

Boxing  and  wrestling  should  be  encouraged  at 
all  times,  not  only  on  account  of  their  value  as  a 
means  to  bodily  development,  but  on  account  of 
the  self-reliance  and  confidence  they  give  to  those 
who  are  proficient  in  them. 

Not  much  needs  to  be  said  as  to  competitive 
athletics  in  garrison,  for  all  soldiers  take  part  in 
football  or  baseball  and  track  athletics,  en- 
couraged by  their  officers. 

Every  opportunity  should  be  taken  to  ride,  for 
sooner  or  later  most  soldiers,  whether  of  the 
mounted  branch  or  of  the  infantry,  have  the 
chance  and  should  make  the  most  of  it.  If  serv- 
ing with  mounted  commands,  the  troopers  take 
pride  in  suggestions  and  passing  the  results  of 
their  own  experience  as  horsemen.  Infantrymen 
who  like  horses  always  have  the  chance,  too,  for 
detail  to  the  mounted  orderly  detachment  at 
headquarters. 

In  garrison  the  life  of  the  soldier  is  one  of 
regular  habits  and  the  finest  of  opportunities  for 
healthful  and  enjoyable  physical  development. 
For  a  young  man  of  vim  and  vigor  it  is  the 
finest  life  on  earth  if  he  will  only  make  it  so.  He 


National  Service  Library 

has  for  regular  daily  diet  what  his  brother  in 
civil  life  gets  only  on  holidays.  As  a  rule  the 
exercises  which  the  civilian  has  little  time  for 
are  part  of  the  regular  work  of  the  soldier.  Much 
of  his  exercise  is  chosen  for  him,  and  the  close 
association  with  his  comrades  keeps  him  up  to 
the  mark.  To  play  the  game  and  be  part  of  the 
great  team  is  more  or  less  forced  upon  him.  He 
must  be  fit,  and  he  must  be  clean,  and  he  must 
be  decent,  and  the  more  of  it  the  better.  Many 
soldiers  suffer  from  one  irregular  habit  which, 
causes  constipation,  discomfort  and  disease,  ow- 
ing to  the  fact  that  so  often  they  are  called  for 
duty  immediately  after  breakfast.  This  is  espe- 
cially so  in  the  cavalry  and  in  the  field.  Many 
experienced  soldiers  have  overcome  this  by 
adopting  the  Indian  habit  of  going  to  the  rear 
immediately  after  reveille,  or  in  some  cases  before 
reveille.  This  habit  can  always  be  acquired;  it 
can  then  always  be  regular,  and  if  a  bath  or  par- 
tial bath  can  be  had  then,  there  is  complete  clean- 
liness and  comfort  and  prevention  from  many 
attendant  troubles. 

Being  young  and  healthy,  and  so  often  care- 
less, it  is  well  for  the  soldier  to  know  and  mark 
these  plain,  flat  rules,  the  observance  of  which 
have  made  the  modern  soldier  a  model  man, 
ready  for  anything  and  everything.  The  garri- 
son life  is  the  training  for  the  field,  and  those 
who  have  not  experienced  the  life  and  dangers 

42 


Health  in  Garrison  and  Field 

of  serving  with  thousands  of  others  in  the  field 
should  take  to  heart  the  results  of  the  experience 
which  have  changed  armies  from  hotbeds  of  dis- 
ease to  the  fit,  free  men  of  to-day.  In  all  the 
wars  of  ancient  times,  many  more  soldiers  were 
put  out  by  disease  than  by  battle ;  this  is  true  as 
recently  as  the  Spanish  War.  The  American 
army  learned  its  lesson  then.  The  American  sol- 
dier can  now  campaign  in  any  part  of  the  world 
— in  Alaska,  in  the  Philippines,  in  Cuba,  or  on 
the  Mexican  border  —  and  remain  active  and 
healthy.  The  game  of  the  soldier  is  to  do  his 
part  in  preventing  disease  by  following  the  rules 
of  sanitation  laid  down.  He  doesn't  need  to 
bother  about  what  will  happen  to  him  should  he 
be  unlucky  or  suffer  from  his  own  carelessness. 
The  army  is  well  supplied  with  excellent  surgeons 
always  at  hand  to  give  the  best  of  treatment  to 
the  sick  or  injured.  Vaccination  and  innocula- 
tion  for  typhoid  have  done  away  with  the  old- 
time  dread  diseases  of  smallpox  and  enteric 
fevers.  The  red-flag  dangers  to-day  are  flies  and 
vermin,  mosquitoes  and  venereal  diseases.  For- 
tunately most  of  the  dangerous  mosquitoes  are 
night  birds,  so  that  by  the  use  of  mosquito  nets 
when  sleeping  and  head  nets  when  on  guard  and, 
when  practicable,  on  other  night  duty,  the  danger 
from  the  mosquito  is  reduced  to  the  minimum. 
Flies  have  an  apt  alliteration  with  filth. 

The  dangers  and  results  of  venereal  disease 
43 


National  Service  Library 

have  been  impressed  on  all  of  us,  but  some  sol- 
diers are  careless  and  many  recruits  ignorant. 
The  War  Department  has  recognized  this,  and  all 
soldiers  are  carefully  instructed  on  the  prophy- 
lactic treatment,  to  save  them  from  the  terrible 
diseases  that  may  follow  their  misconduct.  At 
all  army  stations  prompt  treatment  is  available, 
and  even  the  most  reckless  soldiers  now  know 
that  they  can  keep  themselves  clean  and  free 
from  all  venereal  diseases.  Should  any,  however, 
become  evident,  or  the  slightest  suspicion  be  felt, 
consult  the  surgeon  at  once.  Young  soldiers 
often  from  a  sense  of  shame  hide  their  troubles 
or  consult  quacks,  thereby  suffering  the  dread 
results,  whereas  by  quick  action  at  the  hospital 
and  consulting  the  surgeon  the  next  morning,  the 
soldier  can  keep  clean  and  well.  Instructions  are 
fully  set  forth  in  War  Department  General 
Orders  No.  17  of  1912  and  No.  71  of  1913,  and 
the  carrying  out  of  these  measures  has  largely 
wiped  away  the  shameful  record  of  the  old  awny. 


LEALTH 


f  CARE  OF 

/  History  shows  that  in  most  past  wars  rhanj 

more  men  have  died   from  disease  than   from 
wounds  received  in  battle,  and  that  many  a  cam 
\        paign  has  been  brought  to  naught  because  sick 
\       ness  had  incapacitated  the  men  to  complete  it 
V      Much  of  this  disease  is  preventable,  and  is  du 
\  44 

V 


Health  in  Garrison  and  Field 

either  to  the  ignorance  or  to  the  carelessness  of 
the  person  who  has  the  disease,  or  of  other  per- 
sons about  him.  It  is  a  terrible  truth  that  one 
man  who  violates  any  of  the  great  rules  of  health 
may  be  the  means  of  killing  many  more  of  his 
comrades  than  are  killed  by  the  bullets  of  the 
enemy. 

Here  is  a  subject  for  the  direct  personal  atten- 
tion of  every  man  in  the  service.  It  is  as  much 
your  military  duty  to  be  well  and  strong  as  to  be 
skilled  in  use  of  your  arms.  A  sick  man  is  of  no 
more  value  in  campaign  and  battle  than  a 
wounded  man,  or  a  prisoner,  and  he  is  much 
more  of  a  nuisance.  Negligently  or  ignorantly  to 
allow  yourself  or  your  men  to  become  sick  is  as 
disastrous  to  battle  efficiency  as  to  allow  them 
needlessly  to  be  killed  and  wounded  or  taken 
prisoner.  When  men  and  leaders  realize  this, 
they  will  more  cheerfully  and  conscientiously 
give  heed  to  the  rules  of  health. 

It  is  therefore  important  that  every  soldier  be 
impressed  with  the  necessity  of  keeping  healthy, 
and  not  only  that  leaders  be  trained  to  guard  the 
health  of  their  men,  but  that  every  man  be  taught 
how  to  care  for  his  own  health,  which  will  include 
seeing  to  it  that  his  comrades  also  observe  the 
prescribed  rules  for  this  purpose. 

Catching  or  contagious  diseases  are  the  ones 
mostly  to  be  feared  among  troops.    All  of  them 
due  to  germs,  which  are  either  little  animal, 
45 


National  Service  Library 

or  little  plants  so  very  small  that  they  can  only 
be  seen  by  the  aid  of  the  microscope.  One  billion 
dead  typhoid  germs  are  given  in  the  fifteen  drops 
of  the  second  and  third  doses  of  typhoid  vaccine. 
All  diseases  caused  by  germs  are  "catching."  All 
other  diseases  are  "not  catching." 

icre  are  only  five  ways  of  catching^  disease : 

(o\  Getting  certain  germs  on  the  body,  or 
touching  some  one  or  something  which  has  them 
on  it.  Vhus,  one  may  catch  venereal  diseases, 
smallpoxXmeasles,  scarlet  feve/,  chicken  pox, 
mumps,  bods,  lice  (body),  rmgworm,  barbers' 
itch,  dhobie\  itch,  and  sonrfe  other  diseases. 
Wounds  are  infected  in  this/manner. 

(fc)  Breathing  in  certain  germs  which  float  in 
the  air.  In  this  Vay  on/ may  catch  pneumonia, 
consumption,  infmenz/  diphtheria,  whooping 
cough,  tonsilitis,  spinal  meningitis,  measles,  and 
certain  other  disease 

(c)  Taking  certain,  germs  in  through  the 
mouth  in  eating  o/  drinfting.  Dysentery,  cholera, 
typhoid  fever,  caiarrhea,  ynd  intestinal  worms 
may  be  caught  An  this  mamaer. 

(rf)  Having  certain  germs  injected  into  the 
body  by  bitesy&f  insects  or  by  otposit  on  the  body 
of  their  exdreta,  such  as  mosq\itoes,  fleas,  lice 
and  bedbugs.  Malaria,  yellow \fever,  dengue 
fever,  typhus,  and  bubonic  plague  may  be  caught 
in  this  way. 

(e)     Inheriting  the  germ  from  one's  parents. 
46 


Health  in  Garrison  and  Field 

Persons  may  have  these  germs  sometimes 
out  apparently  being  sick  with  any  disease.  Sucl 
persons  and  those  who  are  sick  with  the  diseases 
are  a  great  source  of  danger  to  others  about  them. 
Germs  which  multiply  in  such  persons  are  found 
in  their  urine  and  excretions  from  the  bowels ; 
in  discharges  from  ulcers  and  abscesses ;  in  the 
spit  or  particles  coughed  or  sneezed  into  the  air ; 
in  the  perspiration  or  scales  from  the  skin;  and 
in  the  blood  sucked  up  by  biting  insects. 

Those  who  have  taken  care  of  their  health,  and 
who  have  not  become  weakened  l?y  bad  habits, 
exposure,  and  fatigue,  are  not  oniy  less  liable  to 
catch  disease,  but  are  more  apt.  to  recover  whet 
taken  sick. 

Knowing    all    these    things, 
understand  djjie^2a|ons  for  th 
ano^nowimportant  it  is^that  they  be  carried  out1 
by  each  person : 

Stay  away  from  persons  having  "catching^ 
diseases. 

If  you  have  any  disease,  do  not  try  to  cure  it 
yourself,  but  go  to  the  surgeon.  Insist  that  your 
comrades  do  likewise. 

Cooked  germs  are  dead  and  therefore  harmless, 
Water,  even  when  clear,  may  be  alive  with  deadly 
germs.  Therefore,  when  the  conditions  are  such 
that  the  commanding  officer  orders  all  drinking 
water  to  be  boiled,  be  careful  to  live  up  to  this 
order. 

47 


National  Service  Library 

Use  the  latrines  and  do  not  go  elsewhere  to 
relieve  yourself.  In  open  latrines  cover  your 
deposit  with  dirt,  as  it  breeds  flies,  and  may  also 
be  full  of  germs. 

Flies  carry  germs  from  one  place  to  another. 
Therefore,  see  that  your  food  and  mess  kit  are 
protected  from  them. 

All  slops  and  scraps  of  food  scattered  about 
camp  soon  produce  bad  odors  and  draw  flies. 
Therefore,  do  your  part  toward  keeping  the  camp 
free  from  disease  by  carefully  depositing  such 
refuse  in  the  pits  or  cans  used  for  this  purpose. 

Urinate  only  in  the  latrines,  or  in  arrange- 
ments provided  for  this  purpose,  never  on  the 
ground  around  camp,  because  it  not  only  causes 
unpleasant  odors,  but  urine  sometimes  contains 
germs  of  "catching"  diseases. 

Soapy  water  thrown  on  the  ground  soon  pro- 
duces bad  odors.  Therefore,  in  camps  of  several 
days'  duration,  this  water  should  be  thrown  in 
covered  pits  or  in  cans  used  for  this  purpose. 

As  certain  mosquitoes  can  transmit  malaria 
and  yellow  fever,  use  your  mosquito  bar  for  this 
reason  as  well  as  for  personal  comfort. 

Keep  your  mouth  clean  by  brushing  your  teeth 
once  or  twice  a  day.  It  helps  to  prevent  the  teeth 
from  decaying.  Decayed  teeth  cause  toothache. 
They  also  lead  to  swallowing  food  without  prop- 
erly chewing  it,  and  this  leads  to  stomach  trouble 
of  various  kinds.  Food  left  around  and  between 
48 


Health  in  Garrison  and  Field 

the  teeth  is  bad  for  the  teeth  and  forms  good 
breeding  places  for  germs. 

Keep  the  skin  clean.  Through  the  pores  of 
the  skin  the  body  gets  rid  of  much  waste  and 
poisonous  matter.  Therefore  remove  this,  and 
keep  the  pores  open  by  bathing  once  every  day, 
if  possible.  If  water  is  scarce,  rub  the  body  over 
with  a  wet  towel.  If  no  water  is  at  hand,  take  a 
dry  rub.  Wash  carefully  the  armpits,  between 
the  legs,  and  under  the  foreskin,  as  this  will  pre- 
vent chafing. 

The  skin  prevents  the  sensitive  parts  under- 
neath from  injury  and  helps  to  keep  out  germs. 
Therefore,  when  blisters  are  formed  do  not  tear 
off  the  skin.  Insert  a  needle  under  the  skin  a 
little  distance  back  from  the  blister  and  push  it 
through  to  the  opposite  side.  Press  out  the  liquid 
through  the  holes  thus  formed.  Heat  the  needle 
red  hot  first  with  a  match  or  candle  to  kill  the 
germs. 

When  the  skin  is  broken  (in  cuts  or  wounds), 
keep  the  opening  covered  with  a  bandage  to  keep 
out  germs  and  dirt ;  otherwise  the  sore  may 
fester.  Pus  is  always  caused  by  germs. 

Take  care  of  your  feet.  A  soldier  cannot 
march  with  sore  feet,  and  marching  is  the  main 
part  of  a  soldier's  duty.  Even  the  cavalrymen 
must  be  able  to  work  on  foot.  The  exigencies  of 
service  may  require  it  at  any  time.  The  Germans 
treat  sore  feet  as  a  military  offense,  as  it  is  gen- 
49 


National  Service  Library 

erally  due  to  carelessness  or  neglect  on  the  part 
of  the  soldier.  Wash  and  dry  the  feet  carefully 
at  the  end  of  every  day's  march.  This  removes 
the  dirt  and  perspiration  and  makes  the  skin 
healthy.  It  soothes  tired  feet  and  greatly  lessens 
the  chances  of  sores  and  chafing.  Do  not  wander 
about  camp  through  the  grass  barefooted,  as  the 
skin  may  be  scratched  or  the  feet  bruised,  or 
poisonous  weeds  may  be  encountered.  If  the 
skin  is  tender  or  the  feet  perspire  freely,  wash 
with  warm  salt  water  or  alum  water.  For  raw 
or  chafed  spots  use  foot  powder,  which  can  be 
obtained  at  the  hospital.  Grease  or  soap  or  foot 
powder  applied  to  the  foot  or  stocking  before 
starting  on  the  march  prevents  rubbing.  Cut  the 
toenails  square  (fairly  close  in  the  middle,  but 
leaving  the  sides  somewhat  longer),  as  this  pre- 
vents ingrowing  nails.  If  corns  or  bunions  or 
ingrowing  nails  give  trouble,  or  any  rawness  or 
rubbing  causes  pain,  go  to  the  surgeon  promptly 
for  advice.  Do  not  wait  several  days  till  you  can 
no  longer  march.  Do  not  wear  stockings  full  of 
holes  if  you  can  possibly  get  others.  Wear  a  clean 
pair  every  day,  washing  them  at  night  if  neces- 
sary. The  light  woolen  stockings  issued  by  the 
government  are  probably  the  best  to  use  even  in 
the  summer.  Should  a  hole  or  seam  in  the  stock- 
ing begin  to  cause  rubbing,  turn  it  inside  out  or 
change  it  to  the  other  foot.  Be  careful  in  draw- 
ing shoes  to  get  a  good  fit.  Remember  that  the 
50 


Health  in  Garrison  and  Field 

feet  lengthen  in  a  hard  march  and  that  the  shoes 
should  allow  for  this.  Get  them  two-thirds  of  an 
inch  longer  than  the  foot.  Do  not  be  so  foolish 
or  green  as  to  start  out  to  march  wearing  new 
shoes  or  the  light  shoes  ordinarily  used  by  civil- 
ians, or  low  shoes,  or  patent  leather  shoes.  Keep 
the  marching  shoes  well  oiled  to  keep  them  soft 
and  pliable.  If  they  get  full  of  sand  on  the  march 
wash  out  the  inside  on  reaching  camp  and  then 
hang  on  a  couple  of  pegs  overnight  to  drain. 
They  may  feel  cool  and  clammy  in  the  morning, 
but  they  will  be  clean  and  soft.  Never  place  the 
shoes  near  a  fire,  or  in  the  sun,  to  dry  as  it  makes 
them  hard  and  stiff. 

Keep  your  hair  short.  Long  hair  and  a  long 
beard  in  the  field  usually  means  a  dirty  head  and 
a  dirty  face,  and  favors  skin  diseases,  lice  and 
dandruff. 

Do  not  let  others  spit  on  the  floor  of  your  tent 
or  quarters. 

Be  careful  of  any  discharges  from  the  horses' 
nostrils,  eyes,  etc.  Always  wash  your  hands 
carefully  after  grooming  and  before  eating. 

Do  not  let  any  part  of  the  body  become  chilled, 
as  this  very  often  is  the  direct  cause  of  diarrhea, 
dysentery,  pneumonia,  rheumatism,  and  other 
diseases. 

If  unavoidably  chilled,  take  deep  breathing  ex- 
ercises at  once ;  it  will  prevent  taking  cold. 

Wet  clothes  may  be  worn  while  marching  or 


National  Service  Library 

exercising  without  bad  results,  but  there  is  great 
danger  if  one  rests  in  wet  clothing,  as  the  body 
may  become  chilled. 

Do  not  sit  or  lie  or  sleep  directly  on  damp 
ground,  as  this  is  sure  to  chill  the  body. 

When  hot  or  perspiring  or  when  wearing  damp 
clothes,  do  not  remain  where  a  breeze  can  strike 
you.  You  are  sure  to  become  chilled. 

Every  day,  if  possible,  hang  your  blanket  and 
clothing  out  to  air  in  the  sun ;  shake  or  beat  them 
with  a  small  stick.  Germs  and  vermin  do  not  like 
this  treatment,  but  damp,  musty  clothing  suits 
them  very  well.  Wash  your  shirts,  underwear 
and  socks  frequently.  The  danger  of  blood  poi- 
soning from  a  wound  is  greatly  increased  if  the 
bullet  first  passes  through  dirty  clothes. 

Always  prepare  your  bed  before  dark.  Level 
off  the  ground  and  scrape  out  a  little  hollow  for 
your  hips.  Get  some  straw  or  dry  grass,  if  pos- 
sible. Green  grass  or  branches  from  trees  are 
better  than  nothing.  Sleep  on  your  poncho.  This 
keeps  the  dampness  from  coming  up  from  the 
ground  and  chilling  the  body.  Every  minute 
spent  in  making  a  good  bed  means  about  an 
hour's  good  rest  later  on. 

Avoid  the  food  and  drink  found  for  sale  in  the 
cheap  stands  about  camp.  The  quality  is  gen- 
erally bad,  and  it  is  often  prepared  in  filthy 
places  by  very  dirty  persons. 

Do  not  drink  water  from  any  source  until  it 
52 


Health  in  Garrison  and  Field 

has  been  declared  safe  by  the  company  com- 
mander. If  there  is  any  doubt,  boil  it  twenty 
minutes  first.  Keep  everything  out  of  your  mouth 
that  may  be  unclean,  straws,  toothpicks,  etc. 

The  use  of  intoxicating  liquor  is  particularly 
dangerous  in  the  field.  Its  excessive  use,  even  at 
long  intervals,  break  down  one's  system.  Drink- 
ing men  are  more  apt  to  get  sick,  and  less  liable 
to  get  well,  than  are  their  more  abstemious  com- 
rades. If  alcohol  is  taken  at  all,  it  is  best  after 
the  work  of  the  day  is  over.  It  should  never  be 
taken  when  the  body  is  exposed  to  severe  cold, 
as  it  diminishes  the  resistance  of  the  body.  Hot 
tea  or  coffee  is  much  preferable  under  these 
circumstances. 

A  FEW  FIRST-AID  RULES 

The  bandages  and  dressings  contained  in  the 
first-aid  packet  have  been  so  treated  as  to  destroy 
any  germs  thereon.  Therefore  when  dressing  a 
wound  be  careful  not  to  touch  or  handle  or  ex- 
pose unnecessarily  that  part  of  the  dressing  which 
is  to  be  applied  to  the  wound. 

A  sick  or  injured  person  should  always  be 
made  to  lie  down  on  his  back,  if  practicable,  as 
this  is  the  most  comfortable  position,  and  all 
muscles  may  be  relaxed. 

All  tight  articles  of  clothing  and  equipment 
should  be  loosened  so  as  not  to  interfere  with 
breathing  or  the  circulation  of  the  blood.  Belts, 
53 


National  Service  Library 

collars,  and  the  trousers  at  the  waist  should  be 
opened. 

Do  not  let  mere  onlookers  crowd  about  the 
patient.  They  prevent  him  from  getting  fresh 
air,  and  also  make  him  nervous  and  excited. 

In  case  of  injury  the  heart  action  is  gen- 
erally weak  from  shock,  and  the  body  therefore 
grows  somewhat  cold.  So  do  not  remove 
any  more  clothing  than  is  necessary  to  expose 
the  injury. 

Cut  or  rip  the  clothing,  but  do  not  pull  it.  Try 
to  disturb  the  patient  as  little  as  possible. 

Do  not  touch  a  wound  with  your  fingers,  or  a 
handkerchief,  or  with  anything  else  but  the  first- 
aid  dressing.  Do  not  wash  the  wound  with  water. 
Otherwise  you  may  infect  the  wound. 

Do  not  administer  stimulants  (whisky,  brandy, 
wine,  etc.)  unless  ordered  to  do  so  by  a  doctor. 
While  in  a  few  cases  stimulants  are  of  benefit,  in 
a  great  many  cases  they  do  positive  harm,  espe- 
cially where  there  has  been  any  bleeding. 

The  heart  may  be  considered  as  a  pump  and  the 
arteries  as  a  rubber  hose  which  carry  the  blood 
from  the  heart  to  every  part  of  the  body.  The 
veins  are  the  hose  which  carry  the  blood  back  to 
the  heart.  Every  wound  bleeds  some,  but  unless 
a  large  artery  or  a  large  vein  is  cut,  the  bleeding 
will  stop  after  a  short  while  if  the  patient  is  kept 
quiet  and  the  first-aid  dressing  is  bound  over  the 
wound  so  as  to  make  pressure  on  it. 
54 


Health  in  Garrison  and  Field 

When  a  large  artery  is  cut  the  blood  gushes  out 
in  spurts  every  time  the  heart  beats.  In  this  case 
it  is  necessary  to  stop  the  flow  of  blood  by  press- 
ing upon  the  hose  somewhere  between  the  heart 
and  the  leak. 

If  a  vein  be  cut  the  blood  is  darker  colored  and 
flozvs  steadily,  and  the  flow  will  be  stopped  by 
pressing  between  the  cut  and  the  extremity,  that 
is  somewhere  beyond  the  leak  away  from  the 
heart. 

This  pressure  may  be  applied  temporarily  by 
the  thumbs  pressing  through  the  flesh  down 
against  the  bone,  and  thus  closing  the  artery  or 
vein. 

Another  way,  and  more  permanent,  is  to  apply 
pressure  by  means  of  a  tourniquet.  Place  a  pad 
of  tightly  rolled  cloth  or  paper,  or  any  suitable 
object,  over  the  artery  between  the  heart  and  the 
wound.  Tie  a  bandage  loosely  about  the  limb 
over  this  pad,  and  then  insert  your  bayonet  or  a 
stick,  and  twist  up  the  bandage  until  the  pressure 
of  the  pad  on  the  artery  stops  the  leak.  Twist 
the  bandage  slowly  and  stop  as  soon  as  the  blood 
ceases  to  flow  in  order  not  to  bruise  the  flesh  or 
muscles  unnecessarily. 

A  tourniquet  may  cause  pain  and  swelling  of 
the  limb,  and  if  left  on  too  long  may  cause  the 
limb  to  die.  Therefore,  about  every  half  hour  or 
so  loosen  the  bandage  very  carefully,  but  if  the 
bleeding  continues,  pressure  must  be  applied 
55 


National  Service  Library 

again.  In  this  case  apply  the  pressure  with  the 
thumb  for  five  or  ten  minutes,  as  this  cuts  off 
only  the  main  artery  and  leaves  some  of  the 
smaller  arteries  and  the  veins  free  to  restore 
part  of  the  circulation.  When  a  tourniquet  is 
painful,  it  is  too  tight,  and  should  be  carefully 
loosened  a  little. 

A  broken  bone  is  called  a  fracture.  The  great 
danger  in  the  case  of  a  fracture  is  that  the  sharp, 
jagged  edges  of  the  bones  may  stick  through  the 
flesh  and  skin,  or  tear  and  bruise  the  arteries, 
veins,  and  muscles.  If  the  skin  is  not  broken,  a 
fracture  is  not  serious,  as  no  germs  can  get  in. 
Therefore,  never  move  a  person  with  a  broken 
bone  until  the  fracture  has  been  so  fixed  that  the 
broken  ends  of  the  bone  cannot  move. 

If  the  leg  or  arm  is  broken,  straighten  the 
limb  gently,  and  if  necessary,  pull  upon  the  end 
firmly  to  get  the  bones  in  place.  Then  bind  the 
limb  firmly  to  a  splint  to  hold  it  in  place.  A 
splint  may  be  made  of  any  straight,  stiff  material 
— a  shingle  or  piece  of  board,  a  bayonet,  a  rifle. 
a  straight  branch  of  a  tree,  etc.  Whatever  ma- 
terial you  use  must  be  well  padded  on  the  side 
next  to  the  limb.  Be  careful  never  to  place  the 
bandages  over  the  fracture,  but  always  above  and 
below. 

Many  surgeons  think  that  the  method  of  bind- 
ing a  broken  leg  to  the  well  one,  and  of  binding 
the  arm  to  the  body  is  the  best  plan  in  the  field, 
56 


Health  in  Garrison  and  Field 

as  being  the  quickest,  and  one  that  serves  the 
immediate  purpose. 

When  a  fracture  is  accompanied  by  an  arterial 
wound  do  not  attempt  to  reduce  the  fracture. 
Stop  the  bleeding  which  will  result  in  death  other- 
wise, and  leave  the  fracture  for  later  treatment. 

With  wounds  about  body,  chest  and  abdomen, 
you  must  not  meddle,  except  to  protect  them 
when  possible  without  much  handling  with  ma- 
terials of  the  packet. 

The  symptoms  of  fainting,  shock,  and  heat  ex- 
haustion are  very  similar.  The  face  is  pale,  the 
skin  cool  and  moist,  the  pulse  is  weak,  and  gen- 
erally the  patient  is  unconscious.  Keep  the  pa- 
tient quiet,  resting  on  his  back,  with  his  head  low. 
This  last  is  especially  important.  Loosen  the 
clothing,  but  keep  the  patient  warm,  and  give 
stimulants  (whisky,  hot  coffee,  tea,  etc.) 

In  case  of  sunstroke  the  face  is  flushed,  the 
skin  is  dry  and  very  hot,  and  the  pulse  is  full  and 
strong.  In  this  case  place  the  patient  in  a  cool 
spot,  remove  the  clothing,  and  make  every  effort 
to  lessen  the  heat  in  the  body  by  cold  applica- 
tions to  the  head  and  surface  generally.  The 
head  should  be  comfortably  raised.  Do  not,  under 
any  circumstances,  give  any  stimulants  or  hot 
drinks. 

In  case  of  freezing  and  frostbite  the  part 
frozen,  which  looks  white  or  bluish  white  and  is 
cold,  should  be  very  slowly  raised  in  temperature 
57 


National  Service  Library 

by  brisk  but  careful  rubbing  in  a  cool  place  and 
never  near  a  fire.  Stimulants  are  to  be  given 
cautiously  when  the  patient  can  swallow,  and  fol- 
lowed by  small  amounts  of  warm  liquid  nourish- 
ment. The  object  is  to  restore  the  circulation  of 
the  blood  and  the  natural  warmth  gradually  and 
not  violently.  Care  and  patience  are  necessary 
to  do  this. 

Being  under  water  for  four  or  five  minutes  is 
generally  fatal,  but  an  effort  to  revive  the  ap- 
parently drowned  should  always  be  made,  unless 
it  is  known  that  the  body  has  been  under  water 
for  a  very  long  time.  The  attempt  to  revive  the 
patient  should  not  be  delayed  for  the  purpose  of 
removing  his  clothes  or  placing  him  in  the  am- 
bulance. Begin  the  procedure  as  soon  as  he  is 
out  of  the  water,  on  the  shore,  or  in  the  boat.  The 
first  and  most  important  thing  is  to  start  artificial 
respiration  without  delay. 

The  Schaefer  method  is  preferred  because  it 
can  be  carried  out  by  one  person  without  assist- 
ance, and  because  its  procedure  is  not  exhausting 
to  the  operator,  thus  permitting  him,  if  required, 
to  continue  it  for  one  or  two  hours.  Where  it  is 
known  that  a  person  has  been  under  water  for 
but  a  few  minutes,  continue  the  artificial  respira- 
tion for  at  least  one  and  a  half  to  two  hours 
before  considering  the  case  hopeless.  Once  the 
patient  has  begun  to  breathe,  watch  carefully  to 
see  that  he  does  not  stop  again.  Should  the 
58 


Health  in  Garrison  and  Field 

breathing  be  very  faint,  or  should  he  stop  breath- 
ing, assist  him  again  with  artificial  respiration. 
After  he  starts  breathing,  do  not  lift  him,  nor  per- 
mit him  to  stand,  until  the  breathing  has  become 
full  and  regular. 

As  soon  as  the  patient  is  removed  from  the 
water,  turn  him  face  to  the  ground,  clasp  your 
hands  under  his  waist,  and  raise  the  body  so  that 
any  water  may  drain  out  of  the  air  passages  while 
the  head  remains  low. 

Schaefer  Method. — The  patient  is  laid  on  his 
stomach,  arms  extended  from  his  body  beyond  his 
head,  face  turned  to  one  side  so  that  the  mouth 
and  nose  do  not  touch  the  ground.  This  position 
causes  the  tongue  to  fall  forward  of  its  own 
weight  and  so  prevents  its  falling  back  into  the 
air  passages.  Turning  the  head  to  one  side  pre- 
vents the  face  coming  into  contact  with  mud  or 
water  during  the  operation.  This  position  also 
facilitates  the  removal  from  the  mouth  of  foreign 
bodies  such  as  tobacco,  chewing  gum,  false  teeth, 
etc.,  and  favors  the  expulsion  of  mucus,  blood, 
vomitus,  serum,  or  any  liquid  that  may  be  in  the 
air  passages. 

The  operator  kneels,  straddling  one  or  both  of 
the  patient's  thighs,  and  faces  his  head.  Locating 
the  lowest  rib,  the  operator,  with  his  thumbs 
nearly  parallel  to  his  fingers  places  his  hands  so 
that  the  little  finger  curls  over  the  twelfth  rib. 
If  the  hands  are  on  the  pelvic  bones,  the  object 
59 


National  Service  Library 

of  the  work  is  defeated ;  hence  the  bones  of  the 
pelvis  are  first  located  in  order  to  avoid  them. 
The  hands  must  be  free  from  the  pelvis  and  rest- 
ing on  the  lowest  rib.  By  operating  on  the  bare 
back  it  is  easier  to  locate  the  lower  ribs  and 
avoid  the  pelvis.  The  nearer  the  ends  of  the  ribs 
the  hands  are  placed  without  sliding  off  the  bet- 
ter. The  hands  are  thus  removed  from  the  spine, 
the  fingers  being  nearly  out  of  sight. 

The  fingers  help  some,  but  the  chief  pressure  is 
exerted  by  the  heels  (thenar  and  hypothenar 
eminences)  of  the  hands,  with  the  weight  coming 
straight  from  the  shoulders.  It  is  a  waste  of 
energy  to  bend  the  arms  at  the  elbows  and  shove 
in  from  the  sides,  because  the  muscles  of  the 
back  are  stronger  than  the  muscles  of  the  arms 

The  operator's  arms  are  held  straight,  and  his 
weight  is  brought  from  his  shoulders  by  bringing 
his  body  and  shoulders  forward.  This  weight 
is  gradually  increased  until  at  the  end  of  the 
three  seconds  of  vertical  pressure  upon  the  lower 
ribs  of  the  patient  the  force  is  felt  to  be  heavy 
enough  to  compress  the  parts ;  then  the  weight  is 
suddenly  removed ;  if  there  is  danger  of  not 
returning  the  hands  to  the  right  position  again 
they  can  remain  lightly  in  place,  but  it  is 
usually  better  to  remove  the  hands  entirely.  If 
the  operator  is  light,  and  the  patient  is  heavy, 
the  operator  can  utilize  over  80  per  cent  of  his 
weight  by  raising  his  knees  from  the  ground,  and 
60 


Health  in  Garrison  and  Field 

supporting  himself  entirely  on  his  toes  and  the 
heels  of  his  hands — the  latter  properly  placed  on 
the  ends  of  the  floating  ribs  of  the  patient.  In 
this  manner  he  can  work  as  effectively  as  a  heavy 
man. 

A  light  feather  or  a  piece  of  absorbent  cotton 
drawn  out  thin  and  held  near  the  nose  by  some 
one  will  indicate  by  its  movements  whether  or 
not  there  is  a  current  of  air  going  and  coming 
with  each  forced  expiration  and  spontaneous 
inspiration. 

The  rate  of  operation  is  12  to  15  times  per 
minute,  and  should  not  exceed  this ;  the  lungs 
must  be  thoroughly  emptied  by  three  seconds  of 
pressure,  then  refilling  takes  care  of  itself.  Pres- 
sure and  release  of  pressure — one  complete  res- 
piration- — occupies  about  five  seconds.  If  the 
operator  is  alone  he  can  be  guided  in  each  act  by 
his  own  deep,  regular  respiration,  or  by  counting, 
or  by  his  watch  lying  by  his  side;  if  comrades 
are  present,  he  can  be  advised  by  them. 

The  duration  of  the  efforts  at  artificial  respira- 
tion should  ordinarily  exceed  an  hour ;  indefi- 
nitely longer  if  there  are  any  evidences  of  return- 
ing animation,  by  way  of  breathing,  speaking,  or 
movements.  There  are  liable  to  be  evidences  of 
life  within  25  minutes  in  patients  who  will 
recover  from  electric  shock,  but  where  there  is 
doubt  the  patient  should  have  the  benefit  of  the 
doubt.  In  drowning,  especially,  recoveries  are 
61 


National  Service  Library 

on  record  after  two  hours  or  more  of  uncon- 
sciousness; hence,  the  Schaefer  method,  being 
easy  of  operation,  is  more  likely  to  be  persisted 
in. 

Aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia  may  be  poured  on 
a  handkerchief  and  held  continuously  within  3 
inches  of  the  face  and  nose;  if  other  ammonia 
preparations  are  used,  they  should  be  diluted  or 
held  farther  away.  Try  it  on  your  own  nose 
first. 

When  the  operator  is  a  heavy  man,  it  is  nec- 
essary to  caution  him  not  to  bring  force  too 
violently  upon  the  ribs,  as  one  of  them  might  be 
broken. 

Do  not  attempt  to  give  liquids  of  any  kind  to 
the  patient  while  unconscious.  Apply  warm 
blankets  and  hot-water  bottles  as  soon  as  they 
can  be  obtained. 

As  a  rule,  soldiers  do  not  need  much  encour- 
agement to  learn  to  swim.  It  is  great  sport  for 
them  and  in  the  field,  after  long  and  hot  marches, 
practically  all  of  them  want  to  get  into  the  water. 
Being  mostly  young  and  venturesome,  they  are 
always  taking  chances — diving  into  streams  with- 
out first  having  determined  the  depth  or  whether 
there  are  any  rocks  or  logs  close  to  the  surface. 
In  my  own  regiment  there  have  been  a  number 
of  valuable  officers  and  men  who  have  been 
drowned  or  broken  their  necks  by  diving  into 
shallow  water.  Many  soldiers  venture  into  strong 
62 


Health  in  Garrison  and  Field 

currents  without  being  strong  swimmers,  so  that 
a  proper  precaution  always  to  be  taken  by  sol- 
diers, whether  swimming  together  or  as  individ- 
uals, is  to  look  around  and  see  how  they  would 
help  each  other  or  themselves  in  difficulty.  As 
they  usually  swim  near  camps,  it  is  well  to  take 
a  lariat  or  rope  with  them  to  use  in  case  of  emer- 
gency. In  crossing  streams  in  boats  soldiers 
should  take  off  their  ammunition  and  equipment. 
In  wading  or  fording  streams  the  same  should 
apply. 


Ill 

The  Rifle 

WHEN  joining  his  organization,  the  soldier  is 
issued  at  once  his  uniform,  arms  and  equipment, 
and  from  that  moment  he  becomes  responsible 
for  their  safe  keeping,  their  care,  and  so  hand- 
ling them  as  to  feel  like  a  new  man  and  soldier. 
Their  appearance  and  use — with  them  his  life  is 
bound  up.  He  should  have  a  feeling  regard  for 
his  best  friend,  the  rifle,  and  should  see  that  it 
receives  his  constant  care  and  gain  the  confi- 
dence that  comes  from  handling  it  like  an  old 
soldier.  Even  to  one  accustomed  to  the  use  of 
arms  in  civil  life,  excepting  in  rare  cases,  the 
handling  and  use  of  the  army  rifle  is  a  new  game, 
unless  he  has  been  a  member  of  the  National  Rifle 
Association  or  served  in  the  National  Guard. 
Every  soldier  should  know  all  about  his  weapon 
— the  nomenclature,  safe  handling,  and  accu- 
rate and  rapid  use,  not  only  as  a  lone  rifle- 
man, but  as  one  controlled,  directed  and  dis- 
ciplined with  his  comrades.  One  of  his  first 
duties  is  to  learn  to  shoot  straight  as  an  individ- 
ual, and  to  protect  himself  in  the  charge  and  in 
hand-to-hand  fighting  with  the  bayonet.  Later 
64 


The  Rifle 

on  he  may  have  the  opportunity  of  serving  in 
the  machine-gun  company  and  handling  and 
throwing  bombs  and  grenades  without  being  more 
dangerous  to  himself  and  his  friends  than  to  the 
enemy. 

NOMENCLATURE 

The  rifle  used  throughout  the  United  States 
service  is  officially  known  as  the  United  States 
rifle,  caliber  .30,  model  of  1903,  commonly  spoken 
of  as  the  "Army  Springfield"  because  it  was  first 
manufactured  at  the  Arsenal,  Springfield,  Mass. 
It  is  the  lineal  descendant  of  the  long  old  squir- 
rel rifle  of  our  forefathers,  famous  as  the  weapon 
of  Morgan's  riflemen  and  their  Southern  com- 
rades at  King's  Mountain;  the  best  friend  of 
Daniel  Boone,  Davy  Crockett,  Kit  Carson,  and  a 
long  line  of  our  pioneers,  scouts  and  trappers. 
Flintlock  at  first,  succeeded  by  the  percussion  cap, 
until  the  radical  change  in  the  latter  years  of  the 
Civil  War  when  the  Berdan  rifle  and  the  Spencer 
carbine  surprised  the  Confederates  and  made  the 
select  troops  in  the  Union  forces  so  efficient  in 
the  last  years  of  the  war.  It  was  rapidly  followed 
by  the  Sharpe,  and  the  first  Springfield  model 
which  persisted  through  the  Indian  wars  until  '92, 
when  the  first  magazine  rifle,  the  Krag-Jorgensen, 
was  imported  and  gave  us  our  first  experience 
with  smokeless  powder  and  really  rapid  fire.  The 
Spanish  Mauser  plainly  showed  its  superiority 

65 

Vol.  3— N.S.L.  3 


National  Service  Library 

during  the  campaign  in  Cuba,  so  that,  with  it 
as  a  model,  our  Ordnance  Department  developed 
the  present  most  effective  weapon  which  has  been 
used  since  1903.  For  hand-to-hand  fighting  and 
to  give  confidence  in  the  charge  there  is  the 
long,  sharp  bayonet,  which  is  always  loaded  and 
with  which  the  soldier  goes  at  his  enemy  with 
blood  in  his  eye. 

Complete  without  the  bayonet  the  rifle  weighs 
about  Sy2  pounds,  and  the  bayonet  about  i 
pound.  The  four  grooves  cut  in  the  bore  spirally 
like  a  corkscrew  grip  the  bullet  as  it  passes 
through,  making  it  spin  on  its  axis,  increasing 
the  range  and  accuracy  by  making  it  keep  point 
foremost  in  flight.  This  is  called  "rifling,"  and 
the  gun  is  so  called  because  of  these  grooves.  The 
raised  portions  between  grooves  are  "lands." 
Caliber  means  the  diameter  of  the  barrel  meas- 
ured from  land  to  land.  The  caliber  of  the  rifle 
is  .30  (30-100  of  an  inch).  The  bullet  of  the 
ball  cartridge  has  a  muzzle  or  initial  velocity  of 
about  2,700  feet  per  second.  This  means  that 
when  the  bullet  leaves  the  muzzle  it  is  going  at 
that  rate  of  speed.  The  bullet  will  go  farthest 
when  the  barrel  is  pointed  upwards  at  an  angle  of 
nearly  45  degrees  above  the  horizontal.  It  will 
then  strike  level  ground  4,982  yards  (about  2^4 
miles)  away.  This  is  called  the  maximum  range 
of  the  rifle,  but  the  greatest  range  for  which  the 
sight  is  marked  is  2,850  yards. 
66 


The  Rifle 

Every  soldier  should  know  the  names  and  uses 
of  the  parts  of  his  rifle.  Memorize  at  once  the 
number  of  your  rifle.  The  Ordnance  Department 
publishes  a  pamphlet,  "Description  and  Rules  for 
the  Management  of  the  United  States  Rifle," 
copies  of  which  are  in  every  organization.  Every- 
thing is  there  explained  in  detail.  The  enlisted 
man  is  not  allowed  to  take  his  rifle  apart,  except 
the  bolt  and  magazine  mechanisms,  without 
first  getting  permission  from  a  commissioned 
officer. 

The  rifle  must  be  used  just  as  it  is  issued  by 
the  Ordnance  Department,  without  any  change 
except  that  the  wood  of  the  upper  band  may  be 
worked  down  under  the  supervision  of  a  com- 
missioned officer.  Don't  try  to  polish  any  part  of 
the  rifle  that  is  blued.  Don't  put  any  part  of  a 
rifle  in  a  fire,  or  file  any  part,  or  use  sandpaper, 
emery  paper,  or  powder,  or  anything  else  that 
cuts  or  scratches.  If  the  trigger  pull  doesn't  suit 
you,  consult  your  company  commander.  Never 
use  abrasives  to  clean  the  bore,  nor  clean  with  a 
rod  from  the  muzzle  end.  This  last  wears  down 
the  lands  at  the  muzzle  and  is  a  cause  of  inac- 
curacy. Many  rifles  have  been  ruined  by  this 
practice. 

HANDLING  THE  RIFLE 

The  following  rules  from  paragraph  75,  In- 
fantry Drill  Regulations,  are  important: 
6? 


National  Service  Library 

The  piece  is  not  carried  with  cartridges  in  either  the 
chamber  or  the  magazine  except  when  specifically 
ordered.  When  so  loaded,  or  supposed  to  be  loaded,  it 
is  habitually  carried  locked ;  that  is,  with  the  safety 
lock  turned  to  the  "safe."  At  all  other  times  it  is  car- 
ried unlocked  with  the  trigger  pulled. 

Whenever  troops  are  formed  under  arms  pieces  are 
immediately  inspected.  A  similar  inspection  is  made 
immediately  before  dismissal.  If  cartridges  are  found 
in  the  chamber  or  magazine  they  are  removed  and 
placed  in  the  belt. 

The  cut-off  is  kept  turned  "off"  except  when  car- 
tridges are  actually  used. 

The  bayonet  is  not  fixed  except  in  bayonet  exercises, 
on  guard  or  for  combat. 

Be  sure  that  when  the  piece  is  locked  the  safety 
lock  is  turned  fully  to  the  right.  If  it  is  turned 
not  quite  far  enough  and  the  trigger  is  pulled,  the 
piece  may  be  discharged  when  the  safety  lock  is 
next  turned  to  the  "ready"  position. 

After  any  duty  out  of  ranks  draw  back  the  bolt, 
look  at  the  chamber  and  magazine,  and  see  that 
your  rifle  is  empty.  Never  put  your  rifle  away 
loaded  except  when  ordered  to  do  so. 

Always  guard  your  rifle  carefully  against 
injury.  If  it  is  in  good  order  and  shoots  accu- 
rately, it  may  some  day  save  your  life.  Do  not 
drop  it  or  place  it  so  that  it  is  apt  to  fall.  Spe- 
cial care  must  be  taken  not  to  strike  or  bend  the 
sights. 

It  is  best  to  keep  the  cover  on  to  protect 
the  front  sight.  Be  sure  to  lay  down  the  rear 
sight  after  finishing  firing.  In  coming  to  "order 
68 


The  Rifle 

arms"   at   drill   lower   the   piece   gently   to   the 
ground. 

Do  not  lay  the  rifle  on  the  ground  unless  you 
have  to.  Dampness  will  warp  the  stock  and  spoil 
the  accuracy. 

Be  especially  careful  to  keep  the  muzzle  off 
of  the  ground.  Dirt  inside  the  barrel  is  liable  to 
make  it  burst  when  fired. 

You  cannot  eject  the  empty  shell  or  loaded 
cartridges  from  the  magazine  unless  you  draw 
the  bolt  fully  to  the  rear;  you  should  be  careful 
about  this,  especially  in  rapid  fire.  Draw  the 
bolt  back  quick  and  hard. 

If  there  is  a  misfire  it  is  not  safe  to  draw  back 
the  bolt  at  once,  as  it  may  be  a  hang-fire.  Instead 
of  drawing  back  the  bolt,  cock  the  piece  by  draw- 
ing back  the  cocking  piece  and  try  again.  A 
misfire  is  often  caused  by  not  pressing  the  bolt 
handle  fully  down  or  by  raising  it  with  the  hand 
when  aiming.  Be  sure  the  handle  is  pressed  fully 
down  before  firing. 

Keep  the  receiver  free  from  unburned  grains 
of  powder  which,  when  many  rounds  are  fired, 
sometimes  interfere  with  closing  the  bolt. 

Do  not  get  in  the  habit  of  leaning  on  the  muzzle 
of  your  rifle  with  elbow  or  hands.  It  is  a  rookie 
trick.  Of  course  there  is  no  danger  of  an 
unloaded  rifle  going  off,  but  many  accidents 
have  been  the  result  of  "not  knowing  it  was 
loaded.''' 

69 


National  Service  Library 

CLEANING  THE  RIFLE 

The  bore  of  the  rifle  must  be  kept  clean  and 
free  from  rust.  Clean  it  as  soon  as  the  firing  is 
over.  Never  postpone  this. 

How  to  Clean.  Take  out  the  bolt.  Swab  out 
thoroughly  from  the  breech  end  with  the  clean- 
ing rod  and  a  patch  of  canton  flannel  about  i& 
inches  square,  wet  with  Hoppe's  Powder  Solvent 
No.  9.  After  it  is  thoroughly  clean,  dry  it  out 
by  running  through  with  clean  dry  rags.  Then 
grease  thoroughly  with  a  clean  rag  soaked  in 
"Three-in-One"  oil  to  prevent  rust.  If  no  clean- 
ing rod  is  at  hand,  use  the  pull-through  in  the 
butt  of  the  rifle,  drawing  the  brush  and  rag  from 
the  muzzle  toward  the  breech.  Clean  and  lightly 
oil  the  bolt  and  all  cams  and  bearing  surfaces, 
preferably  with  "Three-in-One"  oil,  or  the  sperm 
oil  in  the  small  arms  oiler  in  the  butt  of  the 
piece.  If  the  rifle  is  not  to  be  used,  repeat  this 
operation  after  twenty-four  hours. 

SHOOTING  STRAIGHT 

Every  soldier  is  keen  about  shooting,  and  his 
interest  lasts  through  any  amount  of  work  and 
training  as  long  as  he  can  see  the  results  of  his 
work ;  but  he  must  know  that  to  be  a  good,  con- 
sistent, steady  shot,  both  on  the  range  and  in 
battle,  every  one  of  the  wrinkles  of  the  expert 
must  come  involuntarily,  as  the  result  of  long 
70 


The  Rifle 

practice  and  following  the  progressive  course  of 
instruction  laid  down  in  the  Small  Arms  Firing 
Regulations.  After  learning  the  habits  of  his 
rifle,  he  must  cultivate  instinctive  habits  of  hand- 
ling it  and  using  it,  like  a  third  arm,  first  by 
position  and  aiming  drills. 

Thus,  when  a  novice  on  a  battle  field  is  shoot- 
ing at  a  target,  this  target  being  a  man,  he  has 
to  think  as  to  whether  he  is  paying  proper  atten- 
tion to  the  following  things :  the  position  of  the 
feet  if  standing,  of  the  body  if  lying  down ;  of  the 
butt  of  the  gun  against  the  shoulder  or  arm ; 
whether  or  not  the  gun  is  canted ;  the  position  of 
the  left  arm  for  the  body  rest;  the  position  of 
the  right  arm  to  get  the  greatest  degree  of  steadi- 
ness ;  holding  the  head  to  keep  the  nose  out  of 
reach  of  the  recoil;  whether  the  eye  is  shut  or 
not;  the  taking  of  a  long  breath;  holding  the 
breath  while  pulling  the  trigger;  whether  a  full 
or  only  a  half  sight  be  taken ;  bringing  the  front 
sight  tangent  to  a  certain  portion  of  the  target; 
selection  of  the  point  of  aim;  proper  use  of  the 
notch  of  the  rear  sight;  squeeze  of  the  trigger, 
and  observation  of  the  strike  of  the  bullet  after 
firing.  All  these  are  habits  of  the  expert  shot, 
without  his  thinking  about  them.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  novice,  in  the  midst  of  excitement,  is 
trying  to  think  of  all  these  things,  and  so  fails  to 
function  properly — gets  rattled,  jerks  the  trigger, 
or  otherwise  fires  wildly.  A  thorough  course  in 
71 


National  Service  Library 

the  position  and  aiming  drills  is  absolutely  nec- 
essary, and  by  their  means  a  man  may  be  made  a 
good  shot  before  he  has  ever  fired  at  a  target. 
Throughout  the  target  season  soldiers  should 
practice  these  drills  constantly.  The  most  impor- 
tant of  the  position  and  aiming  drills  are  the  lying 
down  and  kneeling  positions,  as  they  are  almost 
always  used  on  the  field  of  battle.  They  are  also 
more  difficult,  and  they  should  be  practiced  the 
more.  These  drills  should  be  followed  by  gal- 
lery practice  and  then  the  course  on  the  target 
range  as  laid  down  in  the  Firing  Regulations, 
followed  by  firing  problems  and  combat  exercises 
for  the  teamwork. 

The  apparent  dimensions  of  a  visible  target 
vary  inversely  as  the  distance ;  that  is,  the  appar- 
ent dimensions  of  a  target  at  a  distance  of  1,000 
yards  are  one-tenth  the  apparent  dimensions  of 
the  same  target  at  100  yards.  The  visual  area, 
therefore,  of  a  target  at  1,000  yards  is  one  one- 
hundredth  of  the  visual  area  of  the  same  target 
at  loo  yards;  that  is,  a  man  at  1,000  yards'  dis- 
tance is  loo  times  as  hard  to  hit  as  a  man  at  100 
yards.  This  explains  why,  in  certain  battles,  a 
hit  is  made  for  every  100  rounds  of  ammunition 
fired,  while  in  others  it  seems  to  require  1,000 
rounds  of  ammunition  to  hit  a  man. 

In  the  close  range  fighting  on  the  western  front 
in  France,  where  there  is  little  time  or  chance 
for  long-range  firing,  the  great  importance  of 
72 


The  Rifle 

rapid  fire  at  short  ranges  has  been  impressed  on 
everybody,  and  quick  and  sure  handling  of  the 
piece,  whether  standing,  kneeling,  lying  down, 
running  or  crawling. 

Every  soldier  should  learn  to  fire  with  some 
degree  of  accuracy  at  least  20  shots  per  minute, 
and  aspire  to  getting  off  25. 

To  shoot  well  a  man  must  be  in  good  physical 
condition.  The  eye,  the  muscles  of  the  body,  and 
the  nervous  system  must  work  in  unison  with 
one  another  and  with  the  mind.  The  best  expert 
shots  keep  so  by  constant  practice.  Take  advan- 
tage of  every  opportunity  to  practice  aiming  and 
squeezing  the  trigger,  and  always  aim  at  some 
particular  object.  Put  a  black  paster  on  the  wall 
of  your  quarters,  or  on  a  stake  near  your  tent 
and  frequently  aim  at  it  and  squeeze  the  trigger. 
When  in  the  field  or  on  the  range,  pick  out  small, 
clear-cut  targets  in  every  direction,  estimating 
the  distances  and  setting  your  sights  to  them,  and 
squeeze  your  trigger  again,  holding  on  the  tar- 
get, Every  man  who  is  not  badly  defective  in 
vision  can  become  a  good  shot  if  he  puts  his  mind 
to  it  and  keeps  practicing  on  the  lines  of  exper- 
ience as  laid  down  by  the  Small  Arms  Firing 
Regulations. 

The  soldier  who  is  keen  about  shooting  and 

becomes  an  expert,  not  only  enjoys  it  as  a  game, 

but  is  privileged  to  go  to  the  National  and  Army 

shoots  and  compete  with  the  best  shots  of  this 

73 


National  Service  Library 

and  other  countries.  Sooner  or  later  he  is  also 
picked  out  as  a  noncom.,  for  most  good  shots 
are  good  all-round  soldiers.  Details  as  sergeant- 
instructor  are  open  to  him  with  the  National 
Guard,  and  he  has  the  opportunity  of  attending 
the  Army  School  of  Musketry  where  the  experts 
are  trained  as  instructors  and  learn  the  final 
finesse  of  the  game.  Every  soldier  too  should 
keep  his  record  throughout  his  service.  The  best 
of  the  score  books  furnished  soldiers  is  the 
"Bull's-eye"  score  book,  published  by  "Arms  and 
the  Man,"  Washington,  D.  C,  from  which  much 
of  the  foregoing  advice  has  been  taken  or  been 
suggested. 

BAYONET  TRAINING  AND  COMBAT 

A  bayonet  fixed  on  the  Springfield  rifle  makes 
the  infantryman  a  descendant  of  the  ancient 
spearman  and  pikeman  and  gives  him  a  murder- 
ous^reach  of  about  five  feet.  It  has  played  an 
important  part  in  the  Great  War,  especially  in 
the  hands  of  the  French  and  Russians.  Like  the 
saber  in  the  hands  of  the  cavalryman,  it  may  not 
result  in  causing  many  deaths  or  wounds,  but  it 
has  a  moral  effect  for  the  man  who  handles  it 
of  making  him  ready  and  eager  to  reach  his 
enemy  in  a  charge,  and  a  very  demoralizing  effect 
on  the  enemy.  With  the  bayonet  fixed  a  gun  is 
always  loaded.  The  infantry  soldier  should  be 
taught  bayonet  fencing  to  make  him  active  and 
74 


The  Rifle 

quick  in  hand-to-hand  combat,  train  his  eye  and 
steady  his  hand,  and  to  give  him  absolute  con- 
fidence in  himself.  The  movements  in  training 
for  bayonet  exercises  are  given  in  Infantry  Drill 
Regulations  (fourth  volume). 

In  training  for  the  assault,  soldiers  should  be 
made  to  run,  jump  and  rush  in  open  spaces,  carry- 
ing the  bayonet  at  the  charge.  Bayonet  fencing 
alone  is  in  itself  not  an  aggressive  training. 
The  hesitation  that  arises  in  hand-to-hand  fight- 
ing from  fencing  alone  is  somewhat  demoraliz- 
ing; it  tends  to  caution  which  should  be  over- 
come by  charging  over  distances  at  an  assumed 
enemy.  The  Frenchmen  find  that  a  charging  line 
by  lowering  the  bayonets  to  the  height  of  the 
waist  and  determined  advance  together  is  most 
demoralizing  to  the  enemy  and  almost  invariably 
causes  him  to  run. 

The  training  exercises  carried  out  by  one  com- 
pany of  Frenchmen  to  prepare  for  the  attack 
first  were : 

First :  a  brief  review  of  the  movements,  then  fencing 
on  the  run.  Then  running,  shout  "Halt !  Thrust ! 
Thrust  again !"  They  started  again,  climbed  the  slopes, 
lunged  and  relunged  furiously.  They  got  winded,  so 
much  the  worse — but  everyone  ran,  descended  the 
slope  stabbing  and  stabbing  again,  getting  excited  and 
feverish,  the  officers  and  noncoms.  galloping  more  furi- 
ously than  the  rest.  Afterward  there  was  fencing  with 
the  dummy.  Stuffed  sacks  full  of  straw,  made  smaller 
each  day  to  provide  smaller  target  and  oblige  the  men 
to  be  more  accurate  in  their  blows.  A  course  was  laid 

75 


National  Service  Library 

out  of  about  seventy-five  yards  in  quite  a  tangled  wood. 
Obstacles  were  placed  in  the  course  by  cutting  down 
bushes.  Here  and  there  were  placed  dummies.  Thus 
on  a  fairly  short  course  the  men  were  obliged  to  run, 
jump,  bend  down,  attack,  and  this  in  every  manner, 
because  the  dummies  were  placed  in  such  a  way  that 
the  men  had  to  combine  his  attack  with  right  face,  left 
face,  face  to  the  rear,  or  crossing  an  obstacle.  This 
exercise  particularly  interested  the  men,  and  as  we 
measured  the  time  taken  by  each  one  to  run  the  course, 
in  a  few  days  it  had  developed  in  an  astonishing  man- 
ner their  agility  and  suppleness  and  gave  nerve  to 
those  who  lacked  it. 

Afterward  there  were  attacks  in  groups  and  then 
charges  by  platoon.  Here  we  sought,  while  giving  the 
greatest  impulsion  and  fury  possible,  to  keep  cohesion 
and  give  to  each  one  the  confidence  of  being  elbow  to 
elbow,  and  to  the  enemy  the  terrifying  impression  of 
a  wave  that  nothing  could  stop.  We  marched  at  charg- 
ing pace,  and  as  we  charged,  lowered  the  bayonets  in 
a  single  movement  to  the  height  of  the  waist. 


76 


IV 

March  Discipline 

A  HORSE,  no  matter  what  his  quality  and  con- 
formation, is  only  as  good  as  his  four  legs.  So 
an  infantryman,  no  matter  how  strong  and  well 
set-up  he  may  be  in  appearance,  will  last  just  as 
long  as  his  feet.  The  best  marching  soldiers 
probably  in  the  world  as  a  nation  are  the  French. 
The  French  poilu  is  not  anything  like  as  smart- 
looking  a  soldier  as  his  comrade  of  the  British 
army.  He  looks  decidedly  sloppy  on  the  march. 
But  in  large  bodies  they  stump  off  twenty-five 
miles  a  day  without  any  apparent  effort  and  carry 
most  of  fifty  pounds  to  boot.  There  is  no  stiff- 
ness nor  jolt  to  a  Frenchman  on  the  march;  he 
seems  entirely  relaxed,  and  his  cheery  spirit  and 
soldierly  pride  are  just  as  much  in  evidence  at  the 
end  of  a  long  day's  hike  as  at  the  beginning. 
The  American  soldier  is  well  equipped  in  every 
way,  and  he  can  learn  and  train  himself  to  march 
just  as  well  as  the  Frenchman,  but  he  must  know 
that  the  habit  and  wrinkles  of  marching  like  the 
Frenchman — like  the  best  of  his  own  regulars — 
come  from  hitting  the  trail  properly  shod  and 
properly  packed.  The  wrinkles  known  to  the 
77 


National  Service  Library 

tried  and  trained  soldier  he  must  pick  up  from 
the  regulars  with  whom  he  associates,  especially 
the  noncoms.  He  must  not  straggle  and  he 
must  play  the  game  as  a  member  of  the  great 
team. 

There  is  a  reason  for  every  bit  of  march  dis- 
cipline and  every  habit  insisted  upon  by  his  com- 
manding officer.  The  best  marching  soldiers  in 
our  annals  were  those  of  Stonewall  Jackson's 
famous  Stonewall  Brigade.  It  was  a  flying  col- 
umn and  marched  all  around  its  opponents.  "His 
victories  were  won  rather  by  sweat  than  by  blood, 
by  skillful  marching  than  by  sheer  hard  fighting. 
The  enemy,  surprised  and  outnumbered,  was 
practically  beaten  before  a  shot  was  fired  and 
success  was  obtained  at  a  trifling  cost."  (Hen- 
derson.) 

Mr.  Thomas  Nelson  Page  told  me  of  sit- 
ting on  the  fence  of  his  father's  plantation 
when  the  Stonewall  Brigade  marched  down  the 
Niggerfoot  Road  .  .  .  and  struck  the  Union  right 
at  Mechanicsville.  He  remembers  particularly 
when  the  halt  was  sounded  that  every  soldier 
promptly  flopped  down  in  the  road,  like  a  tired 
dog,  and  relaxed  into  complete  rest  until  the 
onward  march.  On  that  very  march  Stonewall 
Jackson  threatened  to  shoot  every  straggler. 
There  was  no  straggling.  Our  cavalry  in  the 
Indian  wars  never  had  any  stragglers,  for  every 
pony  soldier  knew  if  he  were  left  behind  the 
78 


March  Discipline 

Indians  would  scalp  him.  So  that  the  spirit  and 
march  discipline  has  everything  to  do  with  getting 
there  all  together. 

No  soldier  should  leave  ranks  at  any  time  on 
the  march  without  permission.  An  army  on  the 
march  must  swarm  along  like  a  column  of  insects. 
Any  straggling  or  undisciplined  marching  affects 
the  whole  column.  The  careless  habits  of  the 
individual  or  the  small  party  operating  has  no 
place  in  the  march  of  large  bodies. 

Private  property  must  be  absolutely  respected. 
Soldiers  leaving  ranks  to  loot,  or  to  drop  into 
orchards  or  country  stores,  is  disorganizing.  Sev- 
eral National  Guard  regiments  on  the  border 
recently  became  absolutely  disorganized  by  a 
severe  storm.  If  the  officers  of  a  command 
allowed  their  men  to  get  out  of  hand  when  pelted 
by  rain,  what  a  mess  there  would  be  under  a 
rain  of  bullets ! 

A  column  on  the  march  keeps  to  the  right  side 
of  the  road,  so  that  the  left  may  be  available  for 
mounted  men,  messengers  and  staff  officers.  At 
rest,  soldiers  sit  or  lie  on  right  hand  side,  officers 
opposite  their  companies  on  the  left  side. 

Treasure  your  canteen  of  water.  Train  your- 
self not  to  drink  on  the  march.  If  absolutely 
necessary,  simply  rinse  your  mouth,  or  drink  a 
very  little  at  a  time.  Remember  what  you  would 
do  under  exhausting  circumstances  in  baseball 
or  football. 

79 


National  Service  Library 

The  Twelfth  New  York,  during  the  summer  of 
1916  in  Texas  was  so  trained  that  the  regiment 
could  knock  off  twenty-five  miles  at  a  stretch 
without  stragglers,  and  learned  to  take  great 
pride  in  carrying  their  packs  like  old  soldiers  ;  and 
on  Thanksgiving  Day,  in  a  point  to  point  race  of 
three  miles  there  were  104  entries,  every  soldier 
fully  packed  and  equipped  for  the  march,  with 
loo  rounds  of  ammunition,  and  nearly  all  fin- 
ished, the  winner  doing  the  three  miles  in  twenty- 
one  minutes  plus,  across  a  rough  country,  over 
drainage  ditches  and  through  chaparral.  Not  a 
man  was  hurt  by  the  test.  After  four  months 
of  such  training  two  divisions  under  General 
Parker  operated  against  one  another  with  long 
marches  and  frequent  deployments  without  any 
distress  or  straggling,  and  enjoyed  the  game  so 
much  that  most  of  the  soldiers  were  sorry  when 
the  maneuvers  were  over. 

The  mob  spirit  is  very  close  under  the  skins 
of  all  but  very  seasoned  troops.  Every  little 
relaxation  of  road  or  camp  discipline  is  a  con- 
cession to  this  spirit,  lends  encouragement  to 
it,  and  physical  weariness,  lack  of  sleep,  excite- 
ment, hunger,  cold,  or  extreme  heat  drive  men 
rapidly  in  this  dangerous  direction.  Absolute  dis- 
regard for  the  individual,  even  to  rough  meas- 
ures, and  the  sternest  discipline  for  stragglers  on 
the  march,  men  who  leave  the  ranks  at  rests  or 
their  company  streets  in  camp,  will  eventually 
80 


March  Discipline 

crush  the  mob  spirit  and  will  eventually  result 
in  a  pride  of  discipline. 

It  is  as  easy  to  train  troops  to  march  fast  as 
slowly.  The  Twelfth  Infantry  averaged  three 
miles  per  hour  including  halts ;  perhaps  a  little 
less  on  exceptionally  hot  days,  in  a  march  of 
nearly  one  hundred  miles.  Their  pace  was  uni- 
formly one  hundred  and  twenty  steps  to  the 
minute  in  route  march.  They  made  camp  in  time 
to  settle  themselves  comfortably,  wash  and  clean 
their  clothes,  get  a  good  meal  before  dark,  gather 
wood  for  big  bonfires  around  which  they  gathered 
to  sing  and  swap  yarns. 

Rests  should  be  frequent  and  short.  The 
Twelfth  marched  twenty-five  minutes  and  rested 
five  in  every  half  hour  and  on  the  hour  and  half 
hour.  All  watches  set  together  and  every  ele- 
ment of  the  column  halted  and  rested  on  the 
hour  and  the  half — five  minutes  about  the  length 
of  time  that  men  absolutely  rest.  They  become 
restless  after  this  or  stiffen.  In  resting,  they 
should  lean  back  on  the  packs,  drop  the  arms  by 
the  side,  chest  up  and  unrestricted  with  a  few 
deep  breaths,  hat  brim  over  the  eyes,  cartridge 
belt  thrown  open,  etc.  On  the  whistle,  there 
should  be  a  prompt  getaway,  no  fiddling  around. 
When  very  hot,  files  may  be  opened  to  greater 
intervals.  Each  soldier  should  see  the  road  in 
front  of  him  and  not  be  annoyed  by  muzzle  of 
rifle  of  man  in  front.  Singing  should  be  encour- 
81 


National  Service  Library 

aged — mouth  organs  great  help — and  ridicule  in- 
spired for  men  who  are  taken  in  ambulance  or 
attempt  to  shirk  the  full  pack. 

The  business  of  every  man  is  to  get  over  the 
road — "kill  it,"  as  the  soldier  says. 

Obstacles  or  bad  places  in  the  road  must  be 
handled  so  as  not  to  check  the  rate  of  march. 
Instead  of  the  head  of  the  column  slacking  up 
after  passing  an  obstacle  for  the  rear  to  close 
up,  the  reverse  should  be  practiced.  Each  head 
of  column  and  each  element  in  the  column  down 
to  each  set  of  fours  fight  their  way  across  at 
increased  pace  so  that  the  element  or  man  in  the 
rear  never  checks  his  pace.  I  have  seen  an 
entire  regiment  meet  a  serious  obstacle  and  the 
last  man  in  the  column  never  check  his  stride 
for  a  moment.  The  men  soon  learn  to  love  it 
and  you  can  hear  cheers  and  shouts  as  each  part 
of  the  line  bucks  the  obstacle.  Men  hate  checks 
and  delays,  it  puts  them  in  bad  humor,  while  the 
foregoing  method  really  enlivens  the  march  and 
adds  incredibly  to  the  pace.  Streams,  mudholes, 
deep  ditches  or  steep  banks  become  hazards  met 
cheerfully  instead  of  with  growl. 

Never  lengthen  the  column  by  marching  in 
twos  or  files,  except  in  extreme  necessity.  Such 
formations  result  in  immediate  slackness. 

March  the  little  men  in  front  most  of  the  time, 
but  change  units,  battalions  and  companies  in 
column  daily. 

82 


March  Discipline 

The  "getaway"  from  camp  has  a  most  impor- 
tant bearing  on  the  march.  An  orderly,  well- 
planned,  and  therefore  cheerful  breaking  and 
cleaning  of  camp  puts  the  best  foot  of  a  com- 
mand foremost  and  will  keep  them  up  to  best 
form  all  day.  Likewise  making  camp  is  equally 
important.  The  site  should  be  selected  in  ample 
time  and  the  company  flags  collected  in  time  to  be 
set  long  before  troops  arrive,  so  that  lines  are 
formed  immediately  on  arrival  and  packs  unslung. 
Their  mood  is  very  different  when  they  must 
stand  around  or  are  changed  several  times. 

At  night  "taps"  should  be  sounded  early,  de- 
pending on  hour  of  start  the  next  morning.  It 
is  urgently  important  that  all  commanders  see 
that  men  pitch  their  tents,  make  proper  beds  and 
that  all  noise  and  talking  cease  at  taps.  There 
are  always  a  few  men  in  every  company  who  will 
continue  to  laugh  and  talk  for  hours,  thus  dis- 
turbing their  comrades  who  seek  and  need  rest. 

A  cheerful",  even  noisy  reveille,  sounds  fine  to 
a  commanding  officer,  with  his  ear  tuned  to  camp 
sounds  which  convey  so  much  to  him.  Then  a 
good  breakfast,  time  for  the  men  to  relieve  them- 
selves, a  tense  moment  as  every  man  stands  to 
his  post  at  the  "general"  with  a  great  shout  at 
the  last  note  and  keen  rivalry  in  the  race  to  be 
ready  first,  with  friendly  chaffing  of  the  slow 
men  or  units — all  mean  that  a  good  day's  work 
will  be  done. 

83 


National  Service  Library 

In  case  of  storm  in  camp,  make  men  work.  Do 
not  let  them  stop  to  think  of  their  misery.  Get 
wood,  build  big  bonfires,  make  hot  coffee,  dig 
ditches — and  every  officer  in  the  middle  of  his 
men,  without  a  particle  more  clothing  or  protec- 
tion than  they  have. 

I  have  many  times  watched  a  column  at  rest 
with  watch  in  hand.  Relaxation  is  complete  for 
about  four  and  one-half  minutes.  Then  a 
restlessness  becomes  evident  which  steadily  in- 
creases until  in  about  six  minutes  relaxation 
has  apparently  ceased  for  a  majority  of  the 
column. 

I  have  carefully  watched  from  the  rear  flanks  a 
column  regiment  on  the  march.  There  was 
always  an  officer  whose  sole  duty  was  to  set  the 
pace  with  watch  in  hand.  I  have  started  the 
pace  at  114  per  minute;  noted  the  grumble  and 
checking  in  the  column,  the  sound  of  the  column 
was  not  satisfactory.  Increased  to  116  and  118 
there  was  noted  considerable  improvement.  At 
1 20  the  "rate"  of  the  column  settled  to  the  steady 
hum  as  you  might  say  of  a  motor,  which  has 
struck  its  most  efficient  rate  of  revolution,  The 
swing  carries  through  the  whip  at  the  tail  and 
the  check  at  the  heads  of  units  practically  dis- 
appeared and  evidently  all  felt  the  machine  was 
working  smoothly  and  efficiently. 

The  following  notes  are  taken  from  Mercur's 
"Art  of  War,"  one  of  the  most  interesting  and 
84 


March  Discipline 

well-thought-out  volumes  ever  published  on  the 
subject : 

For  large  bodies  of  men  marching  continuously  day 
after  day,  the  daily  distances  covered  are  at  first  sight 
surprisingly  small.  Twelve  miles  a  day  is  fair  going, 
fifteen  miles  is  good  and  twenty  miles  a  day  continu- 
ously is  regarded  as  forced  marching. 

Roberts's  march  of  318  miles  from  Kabul  to  Kan- 
dahar took  twenty-three  days,  and  Huidekoper  tells  in 
his  paper  on  the  Great  War  that  Friant's  division  cov- 
ered seventy-eight  miles  in  forty-six  hours,  in  time  to 
arrive  at  Austerlitz,  where  on  the  following  day  he 
fought  so  hard  that  he  lost  40  per  cent  of  the  surviving 
strength.  The  most  interesting  chapter  in  Napier's 
"Peninsular  Wars"  tells  of  how  the  Light  Division 
forced  itself  to  Talavera,  making  sixty-two  miles  in 
twenty-six  hours.  Such  marching  can  be  achieved  only 
by  trained  soldiers  and  experienced  officers,  taking  in- 
finite pains  and  paying  attention  to  a  host  of  details, 
each  trivial  in  itself. 

SPEED 

The  ordinary  quick  time  is  that  of  120  thirty-inch 
steps  a  minute.  This  gives  us  the  round  figure  of  100 
yards  a  minute,  which  is  so  important  a  datum  in  the 
calculation  of  distances  when  the  commander  of  a  unit 
has  to  get  his  force  at  a  given  point  at  a  given  time  to 
take  its  allotted  place  in  a  column  of  march.  Allowing 
for  halts,  this  works  out  at  about  three  miles  an  hour, 
but  the  larger  the  force  the  more  slowly  it  marches  and 
two  and  a  half  miles  an  hour  for  a  brigade  or  two  for 
a  division  is  a  good  average. 

DURATION 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  average  fifteen-mile  march 
will  take  a  brigade  six  hours  and  a  division  eight  hours. 
When  you  realize  that  a  division,  with  all  its  impedi- 
ments in  column  of  march,  covers  a  length  of  fifteen 

85 


National  Service  Library 

miles  of  road,  it  is  much  easier  to  appreciate  the  dif- 
ficulties which  occur  when  a  wagon  breaks  down  and 
blocks  a  narrow  way  near  the  head  of  the  column.  At 
the  best,  the  rear  guard,  at  the  end  of  the  fifteen-mile 
march,  can  only  reach  the  point  from  which  the  advance 
column  moved  off  in  the  morning  and  the  normal  eight 
hours  which  the  rear  guard  should  occupy  on  its  day's 
march  will  be  increased  by  every  delay  which  checks 
the  weary  column  ahead  as  it  gradually  breaks  down  the 
road  along  which  it  slowly  labors  on  its  way. 

RHYTHM 

Rhythm  of  marching  will  place  the  tall  and  short 
men  at  a  mechanical  disadvantage.  On  the  other  hand, 
walking  is  so  automatic  an  action  that  it  is  said  to  be 
the  only  exercise  which  can  be  continued  during  sleep. 
It  must  therefore  be  largely  under  subconscious  con- 
trol. Any  factor  which  increases  this  subconscious  con- 
trol diminishes  purposeful  mental  effort  and  thus 
economizes  mental  strain.  Marching  in  rhythm,  and 
especially  to  music  or  singing,  is  a  valuable  aid  to  sub- 
conscious control  in  marching  and  probably  more  than 
neutralizes  the  loss  by  mechanical  disadvantage  which 
results  from  maintaining  an  uniform  length  stride  for 
men  of  different  heights.  Men  should  alternate  between 
marching  in  step,  marching  at  ease,  and  marching  to 
song.  In  hot  weather  the  chest  should  be  bared  and 
sleeves  rolled  up. 

EFFECTS  OF  WATER  Loss 

Water  forms  66  per  cent  of  the  total  body  weight. 
The  loss  of  one  gallon  involves  danger,  the  loss  of  one 
and  a  half  gallons  causes  death.  One  quart  can  be  lost 
without  inefficiency  resulting,  so  that  at  the  end  of  seven 
and  a  half  miles  marched  without  water  the  men  should 
be  quite  fit.  During  the  loss  of  the  next  quart  slight 
inefficiency  gradually  appears,  and  at  the  end  of  fifteen 
miles  there  is  a  genuine  "necessity  thirst,"  but  still  there 
is  but  slight  inefficiency.  During  the  loss  of  the  third 

86 


March  Discipline 

quart  inefficiency  becomes  marked,  if  no  water  has  been 
drunk,  and  after  the  loss  of  four  quarts  during  a 
thirty-mile  waterless  march  the  man's  condition  is  be- 
coming dangerous. 

On  a  fifteen-mile  march  the  contents  of  the  water 
bottle  should  not  be  touched  until  the  halfway  point  is 
reached.  The  contents  of  the  canteen  should  then 
suffice  to  take  the  men  into  camp  without  the  bottle 
being  refilled,  or  inefficiency  being  experienced. 

The  precise  data  thus  obtained  afford  invaluable  aid 
in  the  maintenance  of  water  discipline,  the  enforcement 
of  which  has  been  made  less  firm  by  the  fear  of  the 
combatant  officer  that  strict  discipline  in  this  matter 
might  inflict  genuine  distress  on  the  men.  Owing  to 
uncertainty  as  to  the  precise  point  at  which  habit  thirst 
becomes  necessity  thirst,  no  definite  orders  have  been 
laid  down.  Allowance  must  be  made  for  the  increased 
sweat  occurring  on  hot  days,  but  even  so,  there  is  a 
margin  of  a  quart  of  water  always  between  the  man's 
needs  and  the  onset  of  even  slight  inefficiency  due  to 
loss  of  fluid. 

The  normal  average  requirements  are  that  the  men 
should  get  one  quart  of  water  at  the  end  of  every  seven 
and  a  half  miles  marched,  making  allowance  for  high 
speed,  increased  weight  carried,  and  high  atmospheric 
temperature  or  humidity. 

One  of  the  most  noticeable  habits  of  the  Ameri- 
can soldier  is.  guzzling  water  on  the  march.  It  is 
a  habit  which  can  easily  be  changed  into  one  of 
saving  your  canteen  of  water  until  after  the 
march,  for  the  rest  time,  when  it  will  do  the  most 
good,  and  when  you  will  often  most  need  it  in 
a  dry  country.  Under  the  hot  sun,  on  the  march, 
if  thirst  overcomes  the  will,  drink  as  little  as  pos- 
sible, rinse  out  the  mouth,  or  if  necessary,  take 
small  drinks  frequently;  but  most  old  soldiers 
87 


National  Service  Library 

discover  that  they  can  go  without  water  until  in 
camp  or  at  rest.  The  sensation  of  thirst  is  due 
to  a  loss  of  water  from  the  blood.  It  can  be 
overcome  only  by  restoring  the  proper  amount 
of  fluid  to  the  veins.  When  overheated,  or 
exhausted,  or  excited,  the  stomach's  action  is 
checked  and  no  amount  of  water  poured  in  will 
relieve  the  sensation,  for  the  water  remains  in 
the  stomach.  This  condition  is  exaggerated  if 
the  water  be  cold  and  the  stomach  be  overloaded. 
A  temporary  cooling  of  the  throat  is  the  only 
result  and  one  swig  at  the  canteen  tempts  to 
another.  Pain  and  distress  follow.  A  small 
amount  of  warm  water  will  relieve  real  thirst 
more  readily  than  a  large  amount  of  cold  water. 
A  little  sugar  from  the  haversack  taken  with  the 
water  aids  the  stomach  to  absorb  and  pass  the 
water  into  the  blood. 

Before  starting  on  the  march  men  should  have 
a  large  amount  of  hot  tea  or  weak  coffee.  In 
view  of  the  great  value  of  sugar,  this  should  be 
freely  sweetened.  Men  should  be  advised  to 
suck  a  bullet  or  pebble  on  the  march.  The  value 
of  this  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  keeps  the  mouth 
shut  and  therefore  moist.  The  old  campaigner 
will  march  all  day  without  having  recourse  to 
his  canteen.  The  difficulty  is  with  the  young 
recruit,  who  starts  pulling  at  his  canteen  before 
he  has  marched  two  or  three  miles,  thus  promot- 
ing habit  thirst  and  the  necessity  of  refilling  his 
88 


March  Discipline 

canteen  from  the  first  contaminated  wayside 
source.  The  canteen  should  be  refilled  at  the 
end  of  the  first  fifteen  miles  and  at  the  end  of 
every  seven  miles  subsequently,  thus  preventing 
men  from  suffering  from  "necessity  thirst,"  and 
there  will  always  be  a  quart  of  water  between 
them  and  any  inefficiency  from  loss  of  fluid.  The 
canteens  should  always  be  filled  at  night,  either 
with  sterilized  water  or  with  weak  sweet  tea  or 
coffee.  The  canteens  are  thus  sterilized  and  in 
the  morning  they  are  full  of  cold  safe  liquid.  Tea 
is  a  better  thirst  quencher  than  water. 

The  features  of  good  marching  boots  have 
been  mentioned  and  the  methods  of  preparing 
boots  for  the  march  have  been  described.  It  is 
probable  that,  contrary  to  general  belief,  the 
majority  of  cases  of  disability  from  sore  feet  are 
due  to  defects  in  the  socks  rather  than  in  the 
boots ;  such  as,  undarned  holes  of  which  the 
edges  ruck  up  into  ridges,  and  bad  darning.  If, 
when  wearing  light  woolen  socks,  there  is  still 
friction  or  blisters,  it  is  advisable  to  wear  two 
pairs  of  socks,  the  outer  pair  to  be  of  cotton,  thus 
taking  the  friction  of  the  boot  off  the  woolen  pair 
worn  next  the  feet. 

When  the  socks  are  worn  into  holes  and  cannot 
be  replaced,  they  may  be  substituted  by  a  trian- 
gular piece  of  thin  soft  textile,  preferably  linen. 
The  soldier  places  his  foot  on  it  with  the  toe 
toward  the  apex  so  that  the  material  can  be 
89 


National  Service  Library 

brought  up  around  and  wrapped  over  the  foot. 
In  the  absence  of  suitable  textile  material,  thin 
greased  paper  may  be  substituted.  Men  should 
wash  their  feet  in  cold  water,  rubbing  them  with 
alum  or  spirit  lotion  to  harden  the  skin  if  there 
be  any  tenderness.  Clean  socks  and  camp  shoes 
should  be  put  on  when  practicable.  The  socks 
worn  on  the  march  should  be  washed  and  kneaded 
until  perfectly  soft  and  then  dried  ready  for  the 
morning,  when  socks  and  boots  will  be  clean,  soft 
and  comfortable.  Of  course,  while  it  will  often 
happen  that  this  routine  cannot  be  carried  out 
daily,  it  should  be  adhered  to  as  far  as  possible, 
and  the  consequent  reduction  in  disability  from 
sore  feet  will  be  surprising. 


90 


V 

Clothing 

THE  soldier  is  given  a  liberal  clothing  allow- 
ance, and  every  bit  of  it  supplied  by  the  govern- 
ment is  of  good  cut  and  quality.  Properly  cared 
for,  it  is  smart  and  appropriate,  and  every  sol- 
dier should  take  pride  in  it  and  remember  that 
one  of  his  most  important  duties  is  to  look  his 
part.  Every  American  has  a  weakness  for  a 
soldier,  and  he  expects  him  to  look  soldierly 
and  show  at  a  glance  his  superior  feeling  and 
training. 

Every  enlisted  man  has  a  clothing  allowance 
of  $48  for  the  first  year  of  his  term,  with  a  sub- 
sequent allowance  of  $24  for  each  succeeding 
year.  Out  of  this  allowance  he  can  easily,  and 
must,  clothe  himself.  The  careful  soldier  can 
save  money  out  of  this  sum,  which  is  paid  to  him 
on  his  discharge.  Some  of  the  more  expensive 
items  formerly  charged  against  the  soldier's 
account  are  now  issued  free  of  charge  by  the 
government,  and  the  soldier  is  responsible  merely 
for  their  safe  keeping  and  reasonable  care.  In 
this  list  are  included  the  poncho,  the  overcoat  and 
the  blankets. 

91 


National  Service  Library 

The  old  saw  about  an  army  moving  on  its  belly  is  all 
wrong.  An  army — horse,  foot,  and  guns — moves  on  its 
feet.  It  is  a  matter  of  tires  and  iron-shod  hoofs  and 
socks  and  shoes.  But  we  will  narrow  the  discussion 
here  to  the  feet  of  the  fighting  men,  the  infantry,  which 
forms  the  bulk  of  all  armies. 

If  the  army's  feet  are  not  sound  it  doesn't  move  far, 
and  it  can't  move  fast.  And  that  is  why,  in  the 
Medical  Corps  and  in  the  quartermaster's  division,  you 
will  find  a  disproportionate  amount  of  official  so- 
licitude about  feet  as  compared  to  legs  or  hands,  or 
even  heads.  This  concern  is  the  same  in  all  armies ; 
and  we  are  profiting  by  the  trials  and  the  mistakes 
taught  us  by  the  millions  of  weary  feet  which  have 
followed  the  roads  of  Europe  into  battle.  An  infantry- 
man will  advance  a  day  or  retreat  two  days  without 
food  sometimes,  but  he  won't  advance  on  sore  feet. 
Motor  lorries  will  be  loaded  up  with  him  going  to  the 
front,  and  ambulances  lugging  him  away  to  the  rear. 

In  the  early  weeks  of  the  militia  concentration  on  the 
Texan  border  practice  marches  developed  physical  un- 
fitness  in  nearly  every  command.  On  short  hikes  of 
no  more  than  six  or  ten"  miles  a  very  large  percentage 
of  men  fell  out,  to  be  gathered  up  by  motor  trucks  and 
brought  into  camp  or  harvested  by  ambulances  back  to 
hospitals.  These  men  fell  out  for  a  variety  of  reasons, 
but  a  great  many  of  them  refused  to  march  any  farther 
on  account  of  sore  feet.  To  begin  with,  marching  and 
walking — as  the  average  civilian,  not  a  policeman  or  a 
postman,  understands  walking  about  his  daily  vocation 
— are  two  very  different  things.  An  infantryman  on 
his  feet  carries  about  sixty  pounds  of  dead  weight: 
forty-five  pounds  or  so  of  pack,  eight  pounds  or  so  of 
rifle,  and  the  rest  in  ammunition  or  separate  equip- 
ment. He  cannot  choose  his  own  gait,  and  he  has  to 
negotiate  all  kinds  of  ground,  winter  roads  corrugated 
with  frozen  ruts,  slippery  trails  of  mud  and  water, 
rocks,  hot  sand.  And  more  than  half  the  time  a  change 
of  shoes  is  for  him  a  luxury;  he  is  very  apt  to  keep  the 
same  pair  on  night  and  day,  wet  or  dry.  If  his  shoes 

92 


Clothing 

are  not  right,  or  if  his  feet  are  not  sound,  he  cannot 
last  a  week  with  a  moving  command ;  and  it  is  entirely 
possible  that  he  will  even  have  trouble  in  a  trench. 

It  was  easy  to  account  for  a  great  many  militia  sore 
feet  early  in  the  summer.  The  machinery  of  the  War 
Department  ground  slowly,  and  many  regiments  turned 
up  in  all  kinds  of  quaint  footwear  made  to  be  sat  in  or 
briefly  stood  in,  but  never  to  be  hiked  in  over  the  rough 
gumbo  of  Texas.  There  were  patent  leathers,  boots 
button,  kid-top  boots,  low  shoes  with  pointed  toes  and 
wide  verandas  running  round  them,  sneakers,  Congress 
gaiters,  and  "college  shoes  for  college  men,"  all  bravely 
kicking  up  the  dust  or  squeegeeing  through  the  mud, 
hay-foot-straw-foot,  along  the  border.  No  wonder 
Illinois  fell  out  by  their  20  per  cent,  or  Virginia  lay 
down  in  companies.  No  wonder  New  York  lost  ninety 
men  by  the  roadside  in  six  miles.  Some  of  it  was  sun, 
some  of  it  was  faint  heart;  most  of  it  was  feet. 

In  those  early  weeks  the  trouble  was  due  to  no 
serious  attempt  at  scientific  shoeing  ar  all.  But  as  late 
as  November  a  brigade  formed  of  regiments  from  the 
District  of  Columbia,  Mississippi,  and  West  Virginia, 
after  nearly  five  months  spenj:  in  active  duty  at  their 
State  and  border  camps,  made  a  three  days'  hike  of 
only  thirty-six  miles  from  Fort  Houston  to  Landa 
Park,  Tex.  "Scores  of  the  militiamen,"  the  report 
goes,  "reached  here  in  ambulances  as  a  result  of  foot 
trouble."  Every  one  of  these  militiamen  in  the  ambu- 
lances was  wearing  a  pair  of  regulation  shoes  issued 
according  to  the  old  mechanical  requisition  on  the 
quartermaster's  stores.  The  difficulty  in  this  case  was 
due  to  imperfect  inspection  and  inaccurate  requisition,  a 
combination  of  bad  system  and  misuse  of  good  material. 

In  those  days  arose  upon  the  border  a  prophet,  an 
apostle  to  the  weary  and  heavy  laden.  His  name  was 
Major  William  W.  Reno,  Medical  Corps,  U.  S.  A.,  and 
he  was  a  voice  crying  in  the  Texan  wilderness,  saying: 
"They  shall  run  and  not  be  weary ;  they  shall  walk  and 
not  faint."  Major  Reno  makes  a  profession  of  keeping 
the  United  States  army  on  its  feet.  With  him  it  is 

93 


National  Service  Library 

more  than  a  profession ;  it  is  almost  a  religion.  Out  of 
the  experience  of  many  years  devoted  to  the  study  of 
pedal  extremities  he  devised  a  system  of  inspection 
with  a  consequent  form  of  requisition  on  the  quarter- 
master's supply  of  shoes  and  socks.  Army  orders  were 
issued  which  established  that  system  for  the  regulars 
and  for  the  organized  militia  in  service.  Under  this 
established  system,  during  the  last  six  months,  Major 
Reno  has  inspected  250,000  feet — not  pairs  of  feet — 
and  prescribed  for  them  with  a  refinement  which  goes 
to  the  sixteenth  of  an  inch. 

Most  men  enter  the  service  with  some  deform- 
ity or  weakness  in  the  feet.  It  is  up  to  the  soldier 
to  find  out  from  the  surgeon  what  the  weakness 
is  and  to  set  to  work  at  once  to  cure  his  feet  and 
make  them  sound  by  regularly  established  feet 
exercises,  and  above  all,  by  having  his  feet  prop- 
erly shod.  There  are  certain  feet  exercises  in  the 
Setting-up  Manual,  and  they  have  proved  of  great 
help  in  the  service.  They  are  given  here  in  the 
words  of  George  Marvin,  who  wrote  the  above 
interesting  article  on  "The  Feet  of  the  Fighting 
Men  on  the  Border"  for  the  "World's  Work" : 

In  Exercise  I  every  man  stands  erect,  with  only  his 
toes  projecting  beyond  the  edge  of  the  board  or  the 
little  depression  he  has  dug  in  the  ground.  In  this 
position  he  repeatedly — thirty  times,  generally — bends  or 
attempts  to  bend  his  toes  downward  in  a  gripping 
movement  reminiscent  of  his  prehistoric  ancestors.  For 
Exercise  II  he  moves  forward  a  little  until  half  his  foot 
projects  over  the  edge  of  plank  or  depression  and  goes 
through  the  same  movement  an  equal  number  of  times. 

When  it  comes  to  Exercise  III  each  man  moves  back 
until  his  entire  foot  rests  on  a  flat  surface,  when,  with- 

94 


Clothing 

out  raising  the  body  of  the  foot,  the  toes  are  curled 
back  thirty  times.  In  Exercise  IV,  in  this  same  posi- 
tion, the  direction  is  to  separate  all  the  toes  thirty  times> 
the  way  babies  do  and  the  way  very  few  of  the  rest  of 
us  can  do.  In  fact,  the  average  facial  expression  of  the 
enlisted  man  when  Exercise  IV  is  announced  says 
eloquently :  "It  can't  be  done."  Exercises  V  and  VI  are 
nearly  the  same.  The  toes  are  turned  slightly  in  and 
the  heels  out,  the  weight  of  the  body  thrown  on  the 
outer  edge  of  the  foot,  while  the  toes  are  bent  down- 
ward and  curled  under  the  foot,  or  with  the  weight 
of  the  body  on  the  heels  the  anterior  portion  of  the 
entire  foot  is  lifted  as  high  as  possible  from  the 
ground. 

An  infantryman  is  only  as  good  as  his  feet, 
and  sound  feet  are  directly  dependent  upon  the 
soldier's  shoes.  In  garrison  the  regular  soldier 
has  his  feet  most  carefully  measured  and  his  shoes 
most  carefully  tested,  under  the  provisions  of 
General  Orders  No.  26  of  1912;  but  in  the  camp 
and  in  the  field  the  soldier  himself,  as  well  as  his 
officers,  must  exercise  the  greatest  care.  Meas- 
urement for  shoes  should  be  taken  over  the  socks, 
standing  on  one  foot  with  weight  on  ball,  with  at 
least  forty  pounds  weight  on  the  back,  to  provide 
for  the  added  expansion  and  swelling  due  to  the 
pack  on  the  back  of  the  infantryman.  The 
marching  shoes  supplied  by  the  government  are 
of  excellent  last  and  usually  provide  the  width 
automatically.  With  the  pack  on  the  back,  under 
no  circumstances  should  the  vacant  space  in  front 
of  the  great  toe  be  less  than  two-thirds  of  an 
inch,  nor  should  there  be  pressure  on  the  top  of 
95 


National  Service  Library 

the  toes.  Try  on  several  pairs  of  shoes  before 
deciding.  Keep  a  careful  record  after  experience 
of  the  proper  size  and  width  of  your  shoes.  Be- 
fore going  into  the  field,  be  sure  your  shoes  are 
absolutely  serviceable,  but  never  go  into  the  field 
without  having  your  shoes  properly  broken  in. 
If  this  is  impracticable  by  a  certain  amount  of 
wear,  stand  in  your  new  shoes  in  about  two  and 
one-half  inches  of  water  for  five  minutes,  until 
the  leather  is  thoroughly  pliable  and  moist ;  then 
walk  for  about  an  hour  on  a  level  surface,  letting 
the  shoes  dry  on  your  feet.  On  removing  the 
shoes  a  very  little  neat's-foot  oil  should  be  rubbed 
into  the  leather  to  prevent  its  hardening  and 
cracking. 

Light  woolen  or  heavy  woolen  socks  will  be 
worn  for  marching.  They  will  be  large  enough 
to  permit  free  movement  of  the  toes,  but  not  so 
loose  as  to  cause  wrinkles.  Darned  socks  or 
socks  with  holes  must  not  be  worn  for  march- 
ing. Start  every  march  with  clean  feet  and 
clean  socks. 


96 


VI 
Guard  Duty 

To  walk  guard  is  one  of  the  soldier's  most 
important  duties.  It  is  hedged  around  with  many 
ancient  rules  and  customs,  and  both  in  peace  and 
war  is  a  sacred  trust.  The  soldier  on  guard  duty 
is  entrusted  with  the  safety  and  security  of  the 
lives  and  property  of  the  command.  While  the 
sentinel  is  on  duty  he  is  dignified  by  his  respon- 
sibilities, and  is  treated  with  the  greatest  respect 
and  formality  by  all  officers  and  men.  It  is 
always  a  trying  duty,  and  in  war  times,  especially 
among  savage  tribes,  often  soul-trying.  I  have 
never  felt  so  proud  of  the  American  soldier  as 
when  on  guard  among  the  Moros  of  the  Lake 
Lanao  region  and  Sulu,  where  in  the  darkness 
he  was  under  constant  danger  of  being  jumped 
by  murderous  Moros  determined  to  hack  him  up 
in  fanatical  rage,  and  where  the  sentries  nearly 
always  showed  the  sterling  stuff  of  the  American 
soldier  at  his  best,  often  putting  up  splendid  hand- 
to-hand  fights  and  seldom  showing  the  nervous- 
ness which  must  have  been  present  throughout 
their  night  tours.  The  army  station  on  Lake  La- 
nao, in  Mindanao,  is  named  in  honor  and  memory 

97 

Vol.  3— N.S.L.4 


National  Service  Library 

of  a  private  soldier,  who,  on  sentry  duty,  killed 
five  Moros  and  gave  the  alarm  to  the  sleeping 
camp,  saving  many  lives  from  the  fierce  attack  of 
the  fanatical  Moros.  Kiethley  himself  was  mor- 
tally wounded  in  his  hand-to-hand  fighting  with 
the  Moros,  and  died  after  making  his  way  over  a 
mile  from  his  outpost  station  to  the  main  guard 
and  giving  the  alarm,  his  outpost  comrades  all 
having  been  killed. 

Whether  in  the  nipping,  eager  air  of  a  tour  in 
the  north,  or  fighting  mosquitoes  in  the  tropics, 
guard  duty  is  of  the  most  trying  character,  and 
the  constant  enemy  to  be  fought  on  the  part  of 
the  sentry  is  sleep.  For  that  reason  a  sentry  is 
usually  obliged  to  walk  his  post,  so  that  he  may 
keep  awake  and  alert.  The  temptation  to  sit 
down  for  a  moment  has  been  the  ruin  of  many  a 
sleepy  soldier. 

Sentinels  are  obliged  to  know  their  general  and 
special  orders;  general  orders  being  those  that 
apply  to  all  sentinels  in  the  army ;  they  should  be 
memorized  at  once  by  all  soldiers.  Special  orders 
are  those  that  apply  to  the  particular  post  and 
duties  of  the  particular  command.  The  general 
orders  for  sentinels  in  the  army  are: 

1.  To  take  charge  of  this  post  and  all  government 
property  in  view. 

2.  To  walk  my  post  in  a  military  manner,  keeping 
always  on  the  alert  and  observing  everything  that  takes 
place  within  sight  or  hearing. 

98 


Guard  Duty 

3.  To  report  all  violations  of  orders  I  am  instructed 
to  enforce. 

4.  To  repeat  all  calls  from  posts  more  distant  from 
the  guardhouse  than  my  own. 

5.  To  quit  my  post  only  when  properly  relieved. 

6.  To  receive,  obey,  and  pass  on  to  the  sentinel  who 
relieves   me  all  orders   from  the  commanding  officer, 
officer  of   the  day,  and  officers  and  noncommissioned 
officers  of  the  guard  only. 

7.  To  talk  to  no  one  except  in  line  of  duty. 

8.  In  case  of  fire  or  disorder  to  give  the  alarm. 

9.  To  allow  no  one  to  commit  a  nuisance  on  or  near 
my  post. 

10.  In  any  case  not  covered  by  instructions  to  call 
the  corporal  of  the  guard. 

11.  To  salute  all  officers,  and  all  colors  and  standards 
not  cased. 

12.  To  be  especially  watchful  at  night,  and,  during 
the  time  for  challenging,  to  challenge  all  persons  on  or 
near  my  post,  and  to  allow  no  one  to  pass   without 
proper  authority. 

In  the  field  and  on  outpost  sentries'  actions 
and  duties  are  often  modified  from  the  strict 
conventions  of  the  Guard  Manual,  and  he  must 
become  the  alert  lookout  for  trouble  of  all  kinds. 
The  tendency  in  the  service  now  is  to  post  double 
sentries  when  practicable.  They  assist  each  other, 
keep  each  other  awake,  and  can  observe  in  all 
directions  against  surprise.  Here  the  habits  of 
the  Indian  and  frontiersman  are  needed — acute 
hearing  and  sharp  sight.  At  night  the  sentries 
should  be  below  the  sky  line,  often  under  cover 
themselves  with  an  open  range  of  vision,  lurking 
or  lying  in  concealment  and  letting  the  enemy 
walk  and  move.  This  kind  of  duty  depends  much 
99 


National  Service  Library 

upon  the  enemy,  and  is  covered  more  fully  in 
Patrol  and  Outpost  Duties. 

It  is  the  custom  of  the  service  for  interior 
guards  to  be  on  duty  for  twenty-four  hours,  dur- 
ing which  time  members  of  the  guard  remain  at 
the  guardhouse  or  guard  tent,  subject  to  con- 
stant call.  The  guard  is  divided  into  three  reliefs, 
with  tours  of  duty  of  two  hours  on  and  four 
hours  off.  In  the  field  small  commands  often 
post  running  guards  at  night,  when  the  night  tour 
is  divided  up  among  practically  the  whole  com- 
mand, so  that  each  soldier  has  his  tour  of  duty 
and  can  then  sleep  the  remainder  of  the  night ; 
it  is  a  frequent  custom  of  the  cavalry  in  the  field 
for  the  picket-line  guard. 

The  guard  duty  heretofore  described,  whose 
duties  are  laid  down  in  the  Guard  Manual  (much 
of  which  must  be  memorized  by  the  soldier),  has 
descended  from  the  old-time  routine  guard  of 
castles  and  walled  towns  and  the  protection  of 
camps  and  government  property.  It  is  routine  to 
a  degree  and,  like  many  other  apparently  foolish 
performances,  has  been  considered  of  value  in 
the  training  and  discipline  of  soldiers.  Its  cere- 
monies and  conventions  are  in  evidence  and  are 
part  of  the  spectacular  formations  of  the  soldier 
familiar  to  the  public.  The  citizen  sees  the  sen- 
tinel pacing  back  and  forth ;  he  is  interested  and 
amused  when  visiting  camps.  But  he  is  quite 
ignorant  of  the  more  important  duties  of  the 

100 


Guard  Duty 

sentry — the  scouting  and  the  patrols  in  the  field 
for  which  the  routine  duty  is  in  part  a  prepara- 
tion— certainly  as  to  the  sacred  duty  of  the  sen- 
tinel on  post  and  the  habits  of  observation  and 
staying  awake  and  alert.  Soldiers  of  the  old 
time  had  a  limited  field  of  action,  at  least  in  litera- 
ture. The  sentry  with  his  routine  round  fre- 
quently appears  in  Shakespeare.  He  appears  in 
classical  writings  of  Greece  and  Rome,  and  in  the 
grand  opera  and  light  opera  of  all  countries. 
Plutarch  tells  of  his  faithful  companion  the  dog, 
and  how  the  sleeping  sentry  was  aroused  from 
slumber  by  the  geese  of  Rome.  Gustavus,  Tu- 
renne,  and  Napoleon  all  appear  in  sentry  stories, 
inspecting  and  rewarding  for  vigilance,  but 
neither  Xenophon  nor  Caesar  nor  other  military 
narratives  go  into  the  functions  of  security  and 
information  on  the  march.  The  extensive  mili- 
tary literature,  manuals,  text  and  reference  books 
on  the  duties  and  experiences  of  outposts,  scouts 
and  patrols,  is  of  recent  origin.  There  is  no 
duty  of  the  soldier,  after  fighting,  more  important 
and  at  the  same  time  so  interesting  to  him  than 
this.  Every  American  boy  has  played  Indian  and 
is  familiar  with  his  wily  ways.  He  has  heard  and 
read  stories  of  spies,  and  fur  traders  and  trappers, 
Mayne  Reid  and  Cooper  have  given  him  many  a 
hero,  and  Washington  himself,  in  his  early  adven- 
tures on  the  frontier  and  his  historic  suggestions 
to  Braddock,  was  part  of  the  boyhood  of  every 
101 


National  Service  Library 

one  of  us.  In  recent  years  such  experiences  have 
been  studied  and  are  available  to  Boy  Scouts,  and 
the  young  soldier  takes  most  kindly  to  this  part  of 
his  work.  It  is  no  trouble  to  have  him  read  up 
the  government  publications  and  manuals,  and 
train  and  work  on  Sherlock  Holmes  and  Baden- 
Powell  lines. 

Troops  on  the  march,  whether  in  large  bodies 
or  small,  when  at  a  halt  establish  guards,  no  mat- 
ter for  how  short  a  time,  sending  men  out  to 
cover  every  possible  line  of  approach  of  an 
enemy.  When  in  camp  the  larger  and  more 
important  outposts,  with  a  system  of  reserve  sup- 
ports, outguards  and  patrols,  are  always  estab- 
lished. The  soldier  here  finds  himself  on  his  own 
responsibility,  and  often  under  terrible  strain  at 
night  in  a  hostile  country.  The  routine  of  the 
interior  guard  is  changed  and  the  training  and 
skill  and  intelligence  of  the  individual  is  tested. 
Every  surprise  and  ambush,  and  most  military 
failures,  can  be  traced  directly  to  a  failure  on 
the  part  of  the  individual  soldier  or  his  careless 
commanders.  Outposts  in  order  from  the  main 
body  are  the  reserve,  the  line  of  supports,  the 
line  of  outguards,  and  the  advance  cavalry.  In 
the  daytime  a  single  sentry  at  the  outguard  is 
usually  provided  by  a  Cossack  post  consisting  of 
a  noncom.  and  a  relief  of  three  men.  The  sen- 
tinel should  be  concealed  where  he  may  have  the 
best  field  of  view,  and  his  comrades,  also  in  com- 
102 


Guard  Duty 

fortable  concealment,  should  be  where  he  can  be 
seen  and  signal  to  them,  not  more  than  twenty  or 
twenty-five  yards  away.  At  nighttime  and  in 
dangerous  country  two  sentinels  are  posted 
together  on  a  post  that  is  known  as  a  double-sen- 
tinel post.  Here  they  support  each  other,  watch 
in  every  direction,  give  each  other  security  and 
keep  each  other  awake.  These  posts  were  always 
used  in  the  Moro  country  and  they  came  to  our 
common  use  throughout  the  service.  The  out- 
guards  whatever  their  form,  should  see  and  not 
be  seen.  They  should  know  where  their  noncom. 
is  and  report  to  him  every  suspicious  sight  or 
sound  and  keep  anybody,  hostile  or  otherwise, 
from  passing. 

The  following  extracts  from  Andrew's  "Fun- 
damentals of  Military  Service"  should  be  mem- 
orized by  every  soldier  as  a  guide  to  outpost  duty : 

First:  About  myself  and  friendly  neighbors. 

My  post  is  number ,  outguard  number .  The 

outguard  is  there.  The  post  on  my  right  is  number , 

outguard  number and  is  there.  The  post  on  my  left 

is  number ,  outguard  number and  is  there.  The 

support  is  there.  Other  detachments  are  there  and 
there.  Such  and  such  patrols  are  operating  in  my 
front.  This  roads  leads  to .  , 

Second:  About  the  enemy. 

The  enemy  is  reported  to  be  there.  I  have  seen  him 
(describing  exactly  what  hostile  bodies  I  have  seen) 
there;  or,  I  have  not  seen  him.  I  am  to  watch  for  him 
between  there  and  there.  If  I  see  any  unusual  move- 
ment I  am  to  report  it  at  once  to  my  outguard  com- 
mander who  is  there.  If  suddenly  attacked  and  forced 

103 


National  Service  Library 

to  retire  or  threatened  with  capture,  I  shall  rejoin  my 
outguard  by  going  around  that  way  so  as  not  to  disclose 
the  position  of  my  outguard  to  the  enemy  or  to  mask 
its  fire. 

Third:  How  to  conduct  myself  on  my  post. 

By  day  I  shall  make  the  best  possible  use  of  such 
natural  or  artificial  cover  as  is  available,  standing, 
crouching,  or  lying  down,  and  remaining  stationary  or 
moving  about  as  will  enable  me  to  observe  the  sector 
assigned  me  to  watch  in  the  most  efficient  manner.  I 
shall  carry  my  piece  at  will,  loaded  and  locked.  I  shall 
inform  passing  friendly  patrols  of  what  I  have  seen. 

At  night  I  shall  remain  standing,  habitually  station- 
ary, moving  about  only  for  the  purposes  of  observa- 
tion. I  shall  not  sit  or  lie  down  unless  authorized  to 
do  so. 

Fourth:  When  to  fire  on  the  enemy. 

Unless  specially  ordered  to  fire  on  the  enemy  when- 
ever seen  I  shall  fire  only  under  the  following  circum- 
stances:  (a)  When  suddenly  attacked  and  there  is  no 
time  to  call  the  outguard  commander,  I  shall  fire  rapidly, 
but  with  careful  aim.  (&)  When  a  person  approaching 
my  post  is  ordered  to  halt  and  fails  to  do  so,  or  other- 
wise disobeys  me,  I  shall  fire  deliberately,  taking  care- 
ful aim,  so  as  to  be  sure  to  stop  him.  , 

Fifth:  Treatment  of  individuals  approaching  my 
post. 

By  day  I  shall  allow  only  officers,  noncommissioned 
officers,  and  detachments  recognized  as  part  of  the  out- 
post, and  officers  known  to  have  authority  to  do  so,  to 
pass  my  post  either  in  or  out.  I  shall  detain  all  others 
and  notify  my  outguard  commander. 

At  night  when  any  persons  approach  my  post,  I  shall 
come  to  a  ready,  halt  them,  and  notify  the  outguard 
commander.  Persons  claiming  to  be  deserters  from  the 
enemy  are  required  to  lay  down  their  arms.  If  they 
are  pursued  by  the  enemy,  I  shall  order  them  to  drop 
their  arms  and  I  shall  give  the  alarm.  If  they  fail  to 
obey  me  at  once  I  shall  fire  on  them.  I  shall  halt 
bearers  of  flags  of  truce  and  their  escorts,  require 

104 


Guard  Duty 

them   to   face   outward,   and  at  once  notify   the  com- 
mander of  the  outguard. 

Detached  Posts. — These  are  practically  the  same  as 
supports,  but  are  sent  to  distant  points  outside  of  the 
line  of  supports  and  outpost  proper,  which  the  superior 
commander  has  deemed  it  necessary  to  cover.  Their 
location  is  made  known  to  all  members  of  the  outpost. 
If  detailed  to  this  duty  you  would  proceed  much  as  the 
support  commander,  and  arriving  at  your  destination 
would  use  your  best  judgment  in  disposing  your 
strength  to  best  cover  the  ground  assigned  you. 

These  general  rules  have  interesting  modifica- 
tions for  the  soldier  in  minor  campaigns,  whether 
in  the  Philippines  or  on  the  border,  as  determined 
by  the  possible  enemy.  Our  experiences  in  the 
Philippines  and  on  the  frontier  in  the  days  of 
Indian  warfare  have  given  our  present  noncoms. 
thorough  practice,  and  many  soldiers  now  on  the 
border  are  so  trained  as  to  give  confidence  for 
the  near  future.  Both  the  regular  troops  and  the 
National  Guard  have  outposted  and  patrolled  the 
border  from  the  Gulf  to  the  Pacific,  giving  effec- 
tive protection  to  their  countrymen  in  persons  and 
property. 

Outposts  in  themselves  can  be  of  value  only 
as  points  of  support  for  vigorous  and  extensive 
patrolling  and  scouting. 


105 


VII 

Patrolling 

THE  following  notes  and  special  instructions 
issued  to  the  troops  as  a  result  of  experience  on 
the  border  are  exceedingly  valuable  both  in  im- 
pressing upon  the  civilian  the  great  amount  of 
training  and  detail  necessary  not  only  for  efficient 
work  by  junior  officers  and  noncommissioned  offi- 
cers, but  actually  for  their  safety  and  the  safety 
of  those  whom  they  command.  It  will  be  use- 
less for  the  patriotic  citizen  struggling  for  pre- 
paredness to  endeavor  to  learn  these  by  heart. 
They  must  be  impressed  upon  him  by  experience. 
This  may  be  simulated  by  a  study  of  tactical  prob- 
lems and  by  taking  tactical  walks.  By  going  out 
into  the  country  on  an  imagined  mission  and 
asking  oneself  from  time  to  time  just  what  should 
be  done  it  is  remarkable  how  soon  one  can  have 
all  the  points  indicated  so  impressed  that  there 
will  be  no  danger  of  forgetting  anything  of 
importance. 

HANDY  INFORMATION  FOR  PATROL  LEADERS 

Kinds  of  Patrol:  Visiting,  Combat,  Exploring, 
Reconnoitering,  Flanking,  Harassing,  Pursuing, 
etc.    F.  S.  R.    Note  i,  par.  23. 
106 


Patrolling 

Number:  Enough  to  insure  effective  recon- 
naissance. No  more. 

Strength:  Two  or  three  men  up  to  as  large  as 
a  company,  depending  on  purpose  and  conditions. 
Never  less  than  two  men  even  after  sending  mes- 
sengers or  dividing. 

Formation:  Below  is  an  example  of  a  patrol 
formation : 

Eight  men  on  street  or  road : 


Point :  similar 
to  advance  guard 


+     Sergt. 

(20  yards) 

-f-     Private 

(60  yjards) 

+     Lieut. 

(5  yards) 

-f-     Private 
(5  yards) 
-j-     Private 

(S  yards) 

-f-     Private 
(5  yards) 
-j-     Private 

(60  yards) 


-f    Private"!  Rear  Partv :  s*m~ 
(15  yards)  I  ilar  to  rear  guard 

+     Private  J   of  large  command 

107 


Support:  similar  to 
main  body  of 
larger  commands 


National  Service  Library 

Don't  forget  flank  guard  of  at  least  one  man 
when  necessary. 

1.  Remember  the  foregoing  is  only  a  guide. 

2.  It  is  one  of  many  possible  patrol   forma- 
tions. 

3.  Change  your  formation  to  suit  conditions. 

4.  Think,  always  think,  and  don't  blindly  fol- 
low fixed  rules. 

Formation  will  vary  according  to  conditions. 
Think.  Use  your  judgment.  Formation  should 
always  be  such  as  to  insure  the  escape  of  at  least 
one  man  in  case  of  attack. 

Composition:  For  any  important  independent 
mission:  Patrol  leader  should  be  an 
officer. 

To  gain  information :  Patrol  leader  spe- 
cially selected.  Noncommissioned  officer 
or  officer. 

Sent  out  from  covering  detachment: 
Ordinary  patrols  be-' 

tween  groups  .... 

~    ..  at-  Patrol  leader 

Ordinary      flanking 

\.     may  be  any 

patrols f     .  .  ...  ... 

.-    ,.  intelligent  soldier. 

Ordinary  outpost 

patrols 

No  member  of  patrol  should  have  cold  that 
would  cause  him  to  cough  or  sneeze.  Do 
not  select  a  "boozer"  for  important  distant 
patrolling. 

108 


Patrolling 

PATROL  LEADER 

The  patrol  leader  receives  the  following  instruc- 
tions and  information  before  starting-: 

1.  Information  of  the  enemy. 

2.  Information  of  our  own  supporting  troops. 

3.  Plan  of  our  own  commander. 

4.  The  mission  of  his  patrol. 

5.  The  size  of  his  patrol. 

6.  Where  patrol  is  obtained. 

7.  A  map  is  furnished. 

8.  General  route  of  patrol. 

9.  Hour  of  departure. 

10.  Limits  of  country  to  be  observed, 
n.  Location  of  other  friendly  patrols. 

12.  Time  patrol  is  to  return. 

13.  Latest  hour  first  message  should  be  sent  back. 

14.  Where  messages  should  be  sent. 

15.  Time    at    which    information    must    reach 

designated  point. 

16.  Location  of  our  own  outposts. 

17.  Expected  movements  of  our  own  command 
during  absence  of  patrol. 

When,    as    patrol    leader,    you    receive    your 
orders,  think  as  follows: 

1.  What  is  my  mission?     Do  I  understand  it 

clearly  ? 

2.  What  is  the  location  of  the  enemy? 

109 


National  Service  Library 

3.  Am  I  apt  to  meet  the  enemy's  patrols,  cavalry 

or  infantry? 

4.  What  am   I   to   do  if   I   meet   the  enemy's 
patrols?     Form  your  plans  ahead  of  time 
and  then,  if  necessary,  change  the  plans  you 
have  formed  according  to  the  accidents  of 
the  ground  and  other  circumstances. 

5.  I  must  slip  rapidly  and  unobserved  through 
flat  and  open  country. 

6.  I  must  stop  and  watch  from  high  places  using 
field  glasses. 

7.  I  must  reconnoiter  cross  roads. 

8.  I  must  see  that  my  retreat  is  not  cut  off. 

9.  I  must  advance  boldly  but  cautiously. 

10.  I  must  not  become  careless  nor  for  a  single 
minute   neglect   a   proper  patrol    formation 
and  military  precautions. 

11.  I  must  get  my  information  back  in  time  to 

be  of  use. 

12.  /  must  accomplish  my  mission. 

The  patrol  leader  does  the  following  before 
starting: 

1.  Sets  his  watch  with  that  of  officer  sending  him. 

2.  Selects  men  specially  qualified  unless  other- 
wise detailed. 

3.  Makes  arrangements  for  start.     Hour  men 
are  to  be  called.     Breakfast  or  other  meal 
before  starting.     Cook  meal  to  be  carried  if 
patrol  is  to  be  gone  more  than  six  hours. 

no 


Patrolling 

4.  His  equipment :  Arms  and  ammunition,  field 
glasses,  pencils,  maps,  whistle,  watch,  mes- 
sage pad,  notebook,  compass. 

5.  Studies  map. 

6.  Notes  prominent  landmarks. 

7.  Decides  on  plan. 

8.  Assembles   and   inspects    detail   and   equip- 
ment. 

9.  Sees  that  men  are  physically  fit. 

10.  Sees  that  canteens  are  filled  with  water  or 
coffee. 

11.  Sees   that   men  have  the   necessary  cooked 
lunch  in  haversack. 

12.  Sees  that  accouterments  do  not  glisten  or 
rattle. 

13.  Sees  that  no  man  has  any  maps,  letters  or 

newspapers  that  might  be  of  value  to  enemy 
in  case  of  capture. 

14.  Assures  himself  men  have  had  meal  before 

starting. 

15.  Carefully  explains  mission  to  patrol. 

1 6.  Shows    map,    explaining    to    men    principal 

roads  and  important  features. 

17.  Tells   men   where  messages   are  to  be  de- 

livered. 

1 8.  Instructs  men  as  to  conduct,  especially  to 

keep  concealed  and  avoid  a  fight. 

19.  Rehearses    with   men    some    simple    set   of 

signals. 

20.  Designates  a  second  in  command. 

in 


National  Service  Library 

21.  If  mounted,  sees  that  horses  are  not  of  con- 

spicuous color. 

22.  If    mounted,    do    not    select    horses    that 
neigh. 

The   patrol   leader   does   the    following   after 
starting: 

1.  Halts  at  the  outpost  and  calls  attention  of 
men  to  position  of  outpost. 

2.  Points  out  the  route  and  such  landmarks  as 
are  of  importance. 

3.  Questions  the  outpost  sentry  or  noncommis- 
sioned officer  as  to  any  information  of  the 
enemy  and  our  patrols. 

4.  Informs  the  noncommissioned  officer  and  the 

sentry  of  the  outpost  by  what  route  he 
is  going,  by  what  route  he  will  probably 
return,  and  what  time  he  will  probably 
return. 

5.  On  clearing  outpost  the  patrol  takes  up  a 
proper  extended   formation,   distance   from 
head    to    rear    varying    from    100    to    200 
yards. 

6.  Flank  reconnaissance  is  done  by  main  body 
of  patrol. 

7.  Keep  to  roads. 

8.  Proceed   as    rapidly   as   possible,    consistent 

with  safety  and  accomplishment  of  your 
mission. 

112 


Patrolling 

9.  Select  high  points  for  reconnoitering.    Reach 
them  rapidly  and  unseen. 

10.  Reconnoiter  important  crossroads  as  far  as 
nearest  crest  or  turn. 

11.  Be  careful  in  passing  through  denies  not  to 
be  trapped.     Reconnoiter  first. 

12.  If  you  send  a  man  out  from  patrol  tell  him 

where  to  go  and  where  to  rejoin. 

13.  Don't    split    your    patrol    unless    absolutely 
necessary. 

14.  Approach  houses  and  villages  with  caution. 

15.  Better  to  reconnoiter  village  from  distance 
unless  necessary  to  enter  it. 

16.  Ordinarily  keep  out  of  inclosures. 

17.  Point  out  important  landmarks  to  men  as 
you  go  along. 

1 8.  Make  necessary  corrections  on  map. 

19.  Halt  only  in  concealed  places. 

20.  Put  out  march  outpost  when  you  halt. 

21.  If  hostile  patrol  passes  you,  take  his  back 
trail.     You  are  less  liable  to  meet  others 
than  on  new  road. 

22.  Designate  a  place  of  assembly  in  case  patrol 

is  compelled  to  scatter  to  avoid  capture. 

23.  Send  written  messages  by  two  men  if  you 
can  spare  them.     Give  copy  to  each.     Have 
them     repeat     message    to    you.       Inform 
commander   what   your  next   position    will 
be. 

24.  Don't  let  strangers  get  ahead  of  you. 

"3 


National  Service  Library 

NOTES  ON  PATROLLING 

Reconnoitering  Patrol:  Your  commander  will 
want  to  know  the  enemy's  location,  strength,  and 
composition,  movements,  probable  intentions. 

Any  Patrol:  You  can  come  in  contact  with  the 
enemy  in  two  ways:  I.  By  your  own  efforts. 
2.  The  enemy  may  come  on  you  unexpectedly. 
In  either  case  be  prepared.  Decide  quickly  what 
it  is  you  have  encountered:  (a)  Is  it  a  fixed  out- 
post? (b)  Is  it  a  moving  patrol?  (c)  Is  it  a 
moving  covering  detachment?  Then,  when  you 
have  decided,  act  promptly  according  to  the 
requirements  of  your  mission ;  remember,  chang- 
ing conditions  may  make  it  impossible  for  you  to 
carry  out  your  mission.  But  do  not  let  mere  phy- 
sical difficulties,  danger  or  hardship  cause  you  to 
give  up  or  half-heartedly  attempt  your  mission. 

COMBAT  PATROL  LEADER 

Any  position  or  formation  of  your  patrol  that 
allows  firing  line  to  be  attacked  without  warning 
is  absolutely  wrong. 

You  must  place  your  combat  patrol  so  that  it 
can  see  more  than  the  men  in  the  flank  of  the 
firing  line  can  see.  Otherwise  it  is  useless. 

In  practically  all  cases  your  combat  patrol 
must  be  in  advance  of  the  firing  line  in  order 
to  gain  necessary  information  in  time  to  be  of 
any  use. 

114 


Patrolling 

Your  combat  patrol  must  see  that  the  enemy 
does  not  get  within  effective  rifle  range  on  the 
flank  of  the  firing  line. 

After  the  action  begins  and  during  the  entire 
fight,  your  combat  patrol  must  maintain  contact 
with  the  enemy  on  the  exposed  flanks. 

GENERAL  NOTES 

Infantry  patrols  are  generally  used  for  work 
within  two  miles  of  supporting  troops,  but  cases 
arise  where  they  must  go  to  greater  distances. 

A  patrol's  mission  is  usually  to  locate  the 
enemy's  main  body,  or  other  important  hostile 
body.  When  you  gain  contact,  hang  on  until  you 
have  valuable  information. 

Information  or  reconnoitering  patrols  should  as 
a  rule  endeavor  to  avoid  fighting  and  keep 
themselves  concealed  as  far  as  practicable  from 
observation. 

Security  or  covering  patrols  will  fight  whenever 
necessary  to  their  mission  of  guarding  the  main 
body  from  observation. 

Information  and  reconnoitering  patrols  may 
fight  under  the  following  conditions :  (a)  To 
gain  important  information,  (b)  To  escape  with 
important  information,  (c)  To  avoid  capture, 
(d)  In  exceptional  cases  to  prevent  the  enemy 
gaining  important  information,  (e)  In  excep- 
tional cases  to  prevent  the  enemy  from  escaping 
with  important  information,  (f)  To  prevent  hos- 
"5 


National  Service  Library 

tile  patrols  from  getting  in  rear  and  thus  endan- 
gering the  transmission  of  important  messages, 
(g)  In  exceptional  cases  to  capture  prisoners  if 
this  can  be  done  without  great  danger  and  there 
is  a  probability  that  important  information  may 
be  gained  from  them,  (h)  But  finally  remember, 
it  is  the  business  of  a  reconnoitering  patrol  to 
gain  information  and  not  to  fight. 

Travel  by  main  roads  or  side  roads  -where  you 
can  observe  main  roads. 

Keep  your  eyes  open  and  see  that  your  retreat 
is  not  cut  off. 

Don't  forget  to  use  flank  guards  where  neces- 
sary, even  if  each  flank  guard  consists  of  only 
one  man. 

Be  careful  about  interviewing  inhabitants  of 
hostile  country.  It  will  often  be  necessary,  but 
they  will  probably  inform  the  enemy  of  your 
movements. 

Smoking  and  fires  may  betray  your  location  to 
hostile  patrols. 

The  following  notes  on  the  establishment  of 
outposts  and  performance  of  patrolling  duty 
along  the  Rio  Grande,  prepared  by  an  officer,  as 
the  result  of  his  experience,  will  be  of  interest  to 
all  those  who  may  be  engaged  on  this  duty  : 

I.  Posts  established  along  the  Rio  Grande  have  a 
double  mission ;  one  is  to  protect  the  various  pumping 
plants  on  which  depend  the  water  supply  for  the  towns 
and  camps  in  the  interior,  and  to  hold  other  important 


Patrolling 


points ;  the  other  is,  to  protect  the  country  against  raids, 
by  making  it  impossible  for  bandits  to  wander  about 
either  by  day  or  by  night,  north  of  the  Rio  Grande. 

2.  The  first  object  is  accomplished  by  constructing 
suitable  defensive  works,  to  enable  a  small  force  to 
hold  the  pumping  plants  against  any  attack  with  cer- 
tainty and  without  undue  risk  to  the  officers  or  men, 
and  by  perfecting  plans  for  conducting  a  defense  with- 
out confusion  or  loss  of  control. 

3.  The    second    object    is    accomplished    by    active 
patrolling  both  by  day  and  by  night.    The  day  patrolling 
is    best    performed    by    the    cavalry,    and    experienced 
cavalry  patrols  are  located  at  Donna  Pump,  Progreso 
and  Rabb's  Ranch  for  this  work. 

THE  BANDIT  SITUATION 

4.  While  the  bandits  have  their  main  haunts  south  of 
the  Rio  Grande,  there  is  a  large  Mexican  population 
north  of  the  river.   Many  of  these  act  as  spies  for,  or  are 
actively  in  league  with,  the  bandits  south  of  the  river, 
so  that  it  may  be  considered  that  they  are  bandit  gangs 
on  both  sides  of  the  river.    These  gangs  are  not  mili- 
tary bands,  as   a  rule,  but  individuals  who   come  to- 
gether for  a  set  purpose  and  afterward   disband  and 
scatter,  leaving  no  trace.     The  river,  at  low  water,  is 
easily  fordable  in  many  places,  and  at  high  water  there 
are    numerous    boats    available   on    the    Mexican    side. 
These  bandits  are  not  bold,  but  very  cautious ;  if  the 
United  States  troops  are  alert,  and  conduct  active  and 
systematic  patrolling,  they  lie  low  and  do  not  venture 
out ;  on  the  contrary,  if  posts  are  inactive  and  stick 
close  to  their  camps,  the  bandits  are  quick  to  find  it  out, 
and  they  then  wander  forth,  steal  cattle  and  terrorize 
and  rob  the  people.    It  is  also  possible,  of  course,  that 
larger   organized   gangs,   reported    from   time   to   time 
farther  south  of  the  Rio  Grande,  might  venture  north 
and  attempt  to  cross  the  river,  but  this  is  unlikely,  and 
in  any  case,  the  best  protection  against  the  local  bandits, 
viz.,  active  patrolling,  is  the  best  protection  against  any 

117 


National  Service  Library 

others,  since  once  their  presence  was  discovered,  how- 
ever large  a  band  they  might  have,  they  would  beat  a 
hasty  retreat  knowing  full  well  the  large  numbers  of 
troops  in  the  vicinity  and  the  ease  with  which  the 
cavalry  and  infantry  in  motor  trucks  could  move  to 
surround  them. 

THE  CARRANZISTA  SOLDIERY 

5.  The  Mexican  bank  of  the  river  is  occupied  by 
detachments  of  cavalry,  stationed  at  various  points, 
their  headquarters  being  at  Matamoros,  Rio  Bravo, 
Reynosa,  Camargo,  and  Mier.  These  detachments 
patrol  the  Mexican  bank  with  varying  frequency  and 
are  on  excellent  terms  with  our  men,  with  whom  they 
usually  exchange  salutes  by  waving  their  hats  in  pass- 
ing on  the  opposite  banks.  No  hostile  shot  has  been 
fired  across  the  river  in  this  sector  for  nearly  a  year. 
It  is  highly  desirable  to  preserve  this  entente  cordiale 
with  the  Carranzistas  and  equally  desirable  not  to  in- 
vite or  permit  them  to  cross.  Positive  instructions  exist 
that  no  United  States  officer  or  soldier  shall  cross  the 
river  to  the  Mexican  side  except  under  orders  or  on  a 
hot  trail  in  pursuit  of  bandits.  .  .  . 

PATROLLING 

7.  Since  much  of  the  patrolling  is  done  at  night, 
special  consideration  should  be  given  to  the  training 
for  this  work.  Patrols  consist  of  two  or  more  men  and 
may  be  conveniently  classified  as  regular  and  special 
patrols.  The  regular  patrols  (of  two  men)  being  used 
for  local  reconnaissance,  within  a  few  hundred  yards 
of  the  camp,  and  special  patrols,  usually  consisting  of 
not  less  than  five  men,  and  always  under  an  officer  or 
N.  C.  O.,  being  sent  on  some  special  mission.  At  night 
the  members  of  the  regular  patrol  (of  two  men)  should 
walk  ten  to  twenty  yards  apart — as  far  as  they  can  con- 
veniently see  one  another ;  they  should  not  stay  out 
longer  than  ten  or  fifteen  minutes  without  reporting 

118 


Patrolling 

back  to  a  sentinel  or  to  the  corporal  of  the  guard,  who 
should  always  keep  himself  informed  in  what  direction 
they  have  gone  and  from  what  direction  they  will  re- 
turn. In  this  way  a  single  active  patrol  will  make  it 
impossible  for  an  enemy  to  approach  within  night  firing 
range  without  being  discovered.  Should  the  regular 
patrol  hear  or  see  anything  unusual  beyond  its  ordinary 
patrolling  distance  from  the  camp,  a  stronger  special 
patrol  should  at  once  be  sent  out  to  investigate  it.  The 
regular  patrol  should  not  follow  a  "set"  beat  or  path. 

Patrols  should  seldom  return  by  the  same  route. 
The  routes,  distances,  and  time  of  sending,  and  the 
number  of  patrols  sent  out  should  be  varied  from  night 
to  night,  taking  into  consideration  the  information  re- 
ceived, phase  of  the  moon  and  other  circumstances. 
The  patrols  at  first  should  be  sent  out  by  day  that  the 
men  may  become  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  country 
and  trails.  The  size  of  the  patrol  should  be  increased 
(or  else  two  or  more  patrols  sent  to  act  in  concert)  if 
it  is  to  go  beyond  two  miles. 

It  is  advisable  to  have  designated  each  night  one  or 
two  reserve  patrols,  to  be  sent  out  in  case  some  need 
should  arise  while  the  special  patrols  are  out,  either  to 
go  to  the  support  of  a  special  patrol,  if  firing  is  heard, 
or  to  investigate  some  suspicious  circumstance  beyond 
the  patrolling  scope  of  the  regular  patrol. 

The  special  patrols  should  not  be  kept  out  usually 
more  than  two  and  a  half  hours  (unless  they  are  to  lie 
in  wait  somewhere),  nor  the  same  patrol  be  sent  out 
more  than  twice  the  same  night.  Nor  should  patrols 
ordinarily  be  sent  in  more  than  two  directions  at  one 
time,  i.  e.,  if  three  are  sent,  two  at  least  should  be  sent 
by  the  same  or  adjacent  trails.  All  patrols  should  be 
informed  in  advance  of  all  other  patrols  out  or  to  be 
sent  out. 

The  men  need  to  be  taught  great  caution  in  firing. 
While  pieces  should  be  carried  loaded  at  night,  the 
leader  should  see  that  they  are  kept  locked,  and  that 
no  shot  is  fired  unless  it  is  absolutely  certain  that  a 
legitimate  target  is  offered  or  that  a  positive  danger 

119 


National  Service  Library 

exists,  making  it  necessary  to  give  the  alarm.  Random 
firing  alarms  the  command  and  makes  for  carelessness. 
If  men  are  seen  at  night  it  should  be  determined  with 
absolute  certainty  that  they  are  not  our  men  before 
resorting  to  firing.  If  an  infantry  patrol  meets  a 
cavalry  patrol  at  night  it  should  never  run  or  hide  from 
it,  but  halt  and  challenge. 

INSTRUCTION  IN  PATROLLING 

8.  For  successful  night  patrolling  men  need  to  be 
taught  to  move  silently,  to  listen  frequently  and  at- 
tentively, and  to  be  practiced  in  interpreting  night 
sounds  and  sights.  Silence  demands  first  of  all  lifting 
up  and  quietly  planting  the  feet  in  walking  to  avoid 
stumbling  over  stones  and  rough  ground ;  second, 
absence  of  any  noise  or  rattling  of  equipment  such  as  a 
loose  canteen  chain  or  the  rasping  of  bayonet  scabbard 
against  breeches ;  third,  absence  of  talking,  coughing, 
whistling,  etc.  Tapping  on  the  stock  of  the  rifle  will  be 
found  a  satisfactory  means  of  communication  between 
members  of  a  patrol. 

Sounds  travel  far  at  night.  An  inexperienced  man 
will  often  think  a  shot  fired  a  mile  or  so  away  is  fired 
within  a  hundred  yards.  It  is  difficult  to  judge  of  the 
distance  of  sounds,  and  also  of  the  direction.  The  men 
should  study  the  interpretation  of  night  sounds.  The 
normal  night  sounds  vary  with  the  character  of  the 
country  and  with  density  of  the  population.  One 
familiar  with  these  can  always  tell  whether  anyone  is 
approaching.  An  ordinary  baseball  megaphone  is  useful 
to  listen  through  on  night  outpost  as  it  intensifies  sounds 
to  the  ear  about  100  per  cent. 

Night  sight  is  most  important  and  must  be  cultivated. 
To  begin  with,  no  man  should  read,  play  cards  or  sit 
by  a  lamp  or  lantern  in  the  evening  before  going  out  on 
a  night  patrol,  since  to  do  so  blinds  him  from  seeing  out 
of  doors  at  night.  Use  of  electric  candles  (while  per- 
missible on  the  return  trip  of  a  patrol)  should  in  gen- 
eral be  avoided.  Practice  in  picking  up  distant  objects 

120 


Patrolling 

at  night  and  then  testing  the  accuracy  of  sight  by  going 
up  to  examine  the  objects  will  soon  develop  good  night 
eyesight.  The  men  should  all  learn  to  orient  themselves 
at  night  by  the  stars,  not  only  by  the  Dipper  and 
North  Star,  but  by  other  stars  and  constellations,  the 
position  of  the  moon,  and  of  the  planets.  They  should 
also  learn  to  avoid,  when  possible,  marching  toward  the 
moon  in  open  moonlight  in  night  patrolling,  and  to 
avoid  halting  on  the  sky  line  or  against  a  light  back- 
ground. Men  sometimes  seek  cover  under  a  tree  at 
night ;  the  background  against  which  they  may  show  up 
is  usually  more  important  than  the  overhead  shadow. 
In  moonlight  all  men  should  be  inspected  to  see  that  no 
part  of  the  equipment  or  dress  is  shiny  or  shows  white ; 
pieces  should  be  carried  low  and  without  bayonets.  On 
dark,  cloudy  nights  the  men  should  be  practiced  in 
orientation  by  the  recognition  of  fences,  trails  and  ob- 
jects which  they  may  have  been  able  to  observe  by  day, 
and  by  the  direction  of  the  prevailing  winds. 

Night  morale  is  important.  Men  unaccustomed  to 
moving  in  the  dark  at  first  are  fearful  at  every  unusual 
sound ;  as  they  get  used  to  it  they  learn  that  night  is  the 
safest  and  most  favorable  time  for  patrolling,  and  that 
the  best  man  by  day  is  twice  the  best  man  at  night.  In 
case  a  patrol  meets  anyone  it  should  almost  never  re- 
sort to  firing.  Most  men  want  to  fire  at  night  to  keep 
their  courage  up,  because  they  are  frightened.  If  un- 
discovered the  patrol  should  generally  halt,  wait  and 
listen,  until  it  can  act  with  as  full  knowledge  of  the 
case  as  possible.  Its  action  should  consist  of  either  a 
charge  or  a  silent  get-away;  against  an  inferior  enemy 
in  any  numbers  a  charge  will  generally  win,  against  a 
greatly  superior  force  rapid  fire  of  a  single  clip  may 
precede  the  charge.  In  a  reconnoiter  the  surprise  favors 
the  side  of  the  aggressor.  To  insure  cohesion  and 
united  action,  the  patrol  should  march  as  closed  up  as 
practicable  at  night ;  the  exception  is  crossing  an  open 
space  in  the  moonlight  which  should  be  done  by  twos. 

Training:  Patrolling  is  not  to  be  taught  the  men 
from  books,  but  by  practice  combined  with  friendly  and 

121 


National  Service  Library 

intelligent  criticism.  The  officers  should  frequently  lead 
many  patrols,  especially  at  first,  and  the  next  day  or 
before  the  next  patrol  point  out  the  errors  and  suggest 
how  the  work  can  be  better  done  and  how  the  men  can 
fit  themselves  for  the  better  doing  of  it.  ... 

DRILLS  WHILE  ON  OUTPOST 

10.  As  the  night  duty  imposed  on  the  men  on  this 
service  is  arduous,  day  instruction  and  duty  should  be 
reduced  accordingly.  A  short,  snappy  drill  might  be 
held  occasionally  after  retreat,  but  once  or  twice  a 
week  drills  should  be  held  after  dark  to  accustom  the 
men  to  move  by  command  and  to  deploy  at  night.  Night 
deployment  should  always  be  with  normal  intervals 
(one  man  per  yard)  and  with  fixed  bayonets,  and  the 
men  taught  to  charge  or  rapid  fire  and  charge,  for 
offensive  action.  .  .  . 

GUARD  AND  PATROL  DETAILS 

12.  The  men  should  preferably  not  be  put  on  guard 
or  patrol  duty  oftener  than  every  other  night.     In  no 
case  should  they  be  put  on  oftener  than  three  nights  out 
of  four  and,  if  that  be  found  necessary,  the   regular 
guard  and  patrol  duty  should  be  alternated  with  special 
patrol   work  and   all   day  duty  suspended   that   is  not 
absolutely  necessary. 

13.  War  diaries  will  be  kept  by  each  post  and  sub- 
mitted to  the  division  or  separate  brigade  headquarters 
which   established   the   post   every   ten   days,   giving   a 
record  of  all  patrols  (with  the  leader,  route,  strength, 
time  of  starting  and  return  and  information  gained  by 
each)    of   the  guard,   drills,  alarms  and  any  unusual 
military  event.  .  .  . 

You  can  estimate  the  strength  of  a  column 
from  the  following: 

Troops  passing  a  point  in  one  minute:  Infantry  in 
4's,  175;  infantry  in  2fs,  88.  Cavalry  in  4*3,  no  (walk), 

122 


Patrolling 


200  (trot)  ;  cavalry  in  2's,  55  (walk),  100  (trot).    Guns 
or  caissons,  5. 

MESSAGES 

You  should  have  a  field-message  book.  Write 
your  messages  in  the  following  form : 

No.  I.  U.  S.  Army  Field  Message, 

From  Patrol  No.  i,  Co.  "L,"  23d  Inf. 
At  LAMARQUE,  23  Nov.  14,  8:15  a.  m. 

To  C.  O.  Co.  "L,"  23d  Inf., 

NADEAU. 

Have  observed  LAMARQUE — GALVESTON  road  from  top 
of  water  tower.  A  hostile  patrol  of  about  eight  mounted 
men  is  now  at  north  end  of  CAUSEWAY.  They  are  mov- 
ing in  this  direction  on  the  GALVESTON — LAMARQUE  shell 
road.  Will  remain  in  observation. 

PETRUS,  Sgt. 

Note  about  above  form  of  message.1 — When  there  is 
considerable  chance  that  messengers  may  be  intercepted 
by  the  enemy,  it  will  be  safer  to  omit  not  only  your  own 
location  but  also  the  location  of  the  commander  to 
whom  the  message  is  addressed.  In  this  case  before 
allowing  the  messengers  to  depart,  make  them  repeat 
aloud:  (i)  The  location  of  the  commander  for  whom 
the  message  is  intended;  (2)  the  location  of  your  patrol. 

General  notes.  —  When  messages  are  sent  back 
through  hostile  territory,  send  two  men  with  written 
messages,  either  together  or  by  separate  routes.  You 
must  be  the  judge  of  this.  Make  them  repeat  the  mes- 
sage before  departing.  Tell  each  messenger  the  route 
he  is  to  take  and  the  rate  of  speed  at  which  he  is  to 
travel.  Caution  the  messenger  to  destroy  the  message 

1  It  is  an  excellent  plan  to  enter  numbers  i,  2,  3,  etc.,  on  the  maps  of 
the  commander  of  the  patrol  and  of  the  officer  directing  the  recon- 
naissance. These  may  be  used  instead  of  names,  and  may  be  changed 
from  time  to  time. 

123 


National  Service  Library 

rather  than  allow  it  to  fall  into  the  hands  of  the  enemy. 
Messengers  who  have  been  sent  back  from  a  patrol  do 
not  as  a  rule  rejoin  in  the  patrol;  consequently,  you 
have  no  means  of  knowing  whether  your  message  has 
been  delivered;  therefore  (i)  number  your  messages 
No.  I,  No.  2,  etc..  in  order  that  your  commander  may 
know  whether  a  message  has  failed  to  reach  him ;  (2) 
if  you  send  more  than  one  message,  repeat  in  message 
No.  2,  etc.,  any  very  important  information  that  you 
gave  in  message  No.  I,  thereby  making  it  doubly  sure 
that  your  commander  will  not  miss  any  important  in- 
formation in  case  previous  messengers  were  captured. 

ADDITIONAL  NOTES  ON  OBSERVATION 

A  thick  cloud  of  dust  indicates  infantry.  A  high 
thin  cloud  indicates  cavalry.  A  broken  cloud  indicates 
artillery  or  trains. 

Note:  Be  careful  about  estimating  by  dust  clouds, 
because:  (i)  The  wind  may  cause  dust  clouds  to  act 
deceptively;  (2)  these  deceptive  dust  clouds  may  not  be 
caused  by  troops  at  all,  but  civilians,  vehicles,  etc. 
Therefore  it  is  better  to  get  close  enough  to  be  abso- 
lutely certain  of  what  you  see. 

PRELIMINARY  INSTRUCTIONS — CAVALRY  PATROLS 

Assuming  considerable  instruction  in  the  abstract  has 
been  imparted  to  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers, 
the  country  surrounding  the  camp  should  be  thoroughly 
covered  by  reconnoitering  patrols  and  sent  out  with 
definite  instructions  to  go  by  certain  routes,  to  return 
by  others,  to  be  at  certain  places  at  set  times,  to  observe 
all  local  features,  ranches  and  their  names,  the  habits 
and  customs  of  the  people  and  their  communities, 
names,  how  spelled  and  how  pronounced,  watering 
places,  kinds  of  forage  and  where  to  be  obtained.  En- 
courage the  cultivation  of  friendly  relations  with  in- 
habitants of  all  classes. 

After  several  weeks'  training  by  day,  repeat  the 
patrolling  at  night  over  the  same  country,  cultivate  the 

124 


Patrolling 

sense  of  direction  and  of  traveling  by  night  signs  and 
sounds,  testing  for  quick  and  quiet  marching.  When- 
ever possible,  obtain  the  company  of  experienced 
natives  with  an  intimate  knowledge  of  signs  and  trail- 
ing. Test  the  officers  and  the  noncommissioned  officers 
on  how  to  travel  by  the  map.  See  that  all  patrols  re- 
port departure  and  return  and  that  officers  always  in- 
spect patrols  at  these  times. 

RECONNOITERING  PATROLS 

At  the  preliminary  inspection  see  that  your  patrol 
commander  sets  his  watch  with  your  own,  and  that  he 
is  provided  with  a  map,  compass,  notebook,  and  pencil ; 
and  that  each  trooper  has  his  rations,  canteen  filled  and 
grain  for  his  mount.  See  that  the  horses  have  been 
watered;  that  the  men  are  fit  for  the  field;  and  the*, 
they  are  properly  clothed,  armed  and  equipped.  See 
that  the  rifles  and  pistols  are  loaded  and  locked ;  that 
the  bridles  and  bits  are  properly  adjusted;  and  that  the 
horses  are  shod  and  equipped  with  halters  and  halter 
shanks,  and  the  saddle  properly  packed  for  quiet  and 
quick  movement.  Troop  commanders  should  always 
make  sure  that  no  detachment  leaves  without  its  com- 
mander reporting  its  departure  to  the  organization 
commander  or  to  one  of  the  lieutenants.  Upon  return 
of  the  patrol  similar  report  to  be  made,  whereupon 
either  he  or  one  of  the  lieutenants  should  make  an 
inspection  of  the  detachment  and  of  its  mounts.  The 
instructions  for  the  patrol  should  be  simple  and  definite, 
where  to  go  and  how,  gait  and  time  of  return.  Have 
them  repeated  by  the  detachment  commander  and  make 
sure  that  he  thoroughly  understands  them.  Tell  him 
where  other  detachments  and  patrols  are  or  may  be 
expected.  Keep  other  detachments  and  patrols  informed 
of  the  movements  of  your  patrols.  Inform  your  patrol 
commander  of  how  and  where  he  may  reach  you  in  an 
emergency,  of  places  en  route  where  there  are  tele- 
phones. Direct  him  to  notice  telephone  and  telegraph 
lines  and  to  report  as  quickly  as  possible  if  any  are  cut, 

125 


National  Service  Library 

to  observe  and  report  any  wire  fence  which  has  been 
cut.  This  is,  in  itself,  in  bandit  times,  an  evidence  of 
illegal  crossing  and  of  probable  bandit  trails. 

When  practicable  and  consistent  with  instructions 
from  higher  authority  direct  the  patrol  commander  to 
return  by  a  different  route  from  that  which  he  followed 
going  out.  Impress  upon  him  the  value  of  aggressive 
action  in  his  mounted  mobility,  and  that  this  must  not 
be  sacrificed,  except  under  most  exceptional  circum- 
stances. Impress  upon  him  his  mission.  Show  your 
interest  in  his  mission  and  in  the  conduct  of  his  patrol, 
and  do  not  give  the  impression  that  it  is  a  routine 
performance. 

Conduct  and  marching  of  a  reconnoitering  patrol:  A 
reconnoitering  patrol  should  not  be  less  than  a  squad 
consisting  of  a  noncommissioned  officer  and  seven 
troopers,  and  the  general  principles  of  advance  and 
rear  guard  shall  apply.  Two  troopers  should  be  out  as  a 
point,  at  varied  distances,  extended  or  close,  according 
to  circumstances.  Where  possible,  however,  in  all  move- 
ments in  a  close  country,  keep  at  least  two  troopers 
together.  When  marching  in  column  of  half  squads  01 
twos,  the  troopers  march  on  either  side  of  the  road 
close  to  the  brush  or  fence.  Arrange  for  simple  signal- 
ing when  they  separate.  On  the  march,  water  your 
horses  at  every  opportunity. 

BIVOUAC 

Avoid  any  routine  bivouac.  If  there  is  any  danger 
in  the  vicinity,  change  the  bivouac  to  a  new  place  after 
nightfall.  Sleep  in  uniform ;  avoid  sleeping  in  wooden 
houses  or  other  buildings,  making  good  night  targets 
and  offering  no  compensating  advantage  of  protection 
from  fire.  Post  double  sentinels  in  hiding  or  in  shadow, 
with  open  or  moonlit  spaces  around  them,  watching 
roads  and  possible  approaches. 

Routine  sentry  duty  is  particularly  dangerous. 

Before  turning  in,  the  detachment  commander  should 
decide  in  his  own  mind  what  he  would  do  in  a  case 

126 


Patrolling 

of  sudden  attack,  and  give  his  detachment  instructions 
accordingly. 

Cover  for  the  horses  should  be  considered  and  provi- 
sion made  for  their  security  both  against  thieves  and 
stampede.  Consider  quickest  use  of  telephone  or  other 
communication  with  commander. 

Nothing  is  more  interesting  to  the  soldier  than 
patrol  duty  and  nothing  develops  more  rapidly 
his  initiative  and  confidence.  The  selection  for 
this  duty  may  be  made  a  means  of  arousing  com- 
petition among  the  men  in  the  matter  of  keeping 
their  equipment  and  clothing  in  perfect  condition. 
An  officer  in  the  Philippines  used  to  select  his 
patrols  by  inspection  of  'the  footgear.  As 
soon  as  this  became  known,  practically  every 
man  secured  a  pair  of  strong,  perfectly  fitting 
shoes. 

MAP  READING  AND  SKETCHING 

Every  intelligent  soldier  must  learn  to  read  a 
map,  and  if  he  aspires  to  be  a  noncom.  and 
eventually  an  officer  he  must  become  absolutely 
at  home  on  the  map,  be  able  to  travel  on  it  and 
find  himself,  and  later  on  to  make  simple  road 
sketches  and  position  sketches,  whether  he  has 
a  natural  talent  for  drawing  or  not.  So  much 
the  better  if  he  can  make  a  pleasing  picture,  but 
every  man  of  intelligence  can  draw  some  lines 
and  learn  the  conventional  signs,  so  that  he  can 
make  plain  to  his  comrades  or  to  his  officers 
what  he  has  seen  by  accurate  observation. 
127 


National  Service  Library 

In  patrolling  and  scouting,  noncoms.  and 
picked  soldiers  are  sent  out  to  gather  informa- 
tion. No  matter  how  keen  the  powers  of  ob- 
servation, the  soldier  must  learn  to  make  some 
conventional  picture  of  it  to  show  to  his  com- 
mander or  his  patrol  leader.  Power  of  language 
is  not  enough.  With  the  most  accurate  use  of 
English  it  would  take  a  steady  flow  of  words  to 
describe  what  a  patrol  leader  or  scout  has  seen; 
whereas  with  a  few  lines  in  the  sand  or  on  a 
sheet  of  paper,  properly  oriented,  he  can  convey 
his  information  and  impressions.  By  constant 
practice  on  the  map  every  soldier  can  soon 
find  himself  at  any  given  moment,  and  add  very 
much  to  his  own  interest  and  his  value  to  the 
service. 

In  every  orderly  room  there  are  a  number  of 
simple  manuals  on  the  subject  issued  by  the 
government.  The  private  soldier,  when  out  on 
patrol  or  scout,  can  soon  learn  from  his  noncom. 
not  only  how  to  read  a  map,  but  how  to  make 
one.  Some  of  these  simple  manuals  are,  "Mili- 
tary Map  Reading,  Field,  Outpost  and  Road 
Sketching,"  by  Beach;  "Military  Maps  Ex- 
plained," by  Eames ;  "Military  Sketching,  Etc.," 
by  Grieves.  All  may  be  obtained  from  the  Book 
Department,  Army  Service  Schools,  at  Fort 
Leavenworth. 

The  following  system  for  initiating  training 
in  map  sketching  is  suggested.  An  interested 
128 


Patrolling 

noncommissioned  officer  can  accomplish  much  in 
this  way. 

1.  Select  a  loop  several  miles  from  camp  and 
return.     Pick  out  half  a  dozen  of  the  keenest 
soldiers  and  send  them  around  the  loop  in  oppo- 
site directions,  three  each  way.     Direct  them  to 
start  at  a  certain  time  and  return  at  a  certain 
time.     Direct  them  to  observe  everything  and 
everybody  en  route ;  that  they  may  meet  other 
soldiers,  but  must  see  the  others  without  being 
seen  themselves ;  that  you  intend  to  ask  them  to 
describe  the  route  and  everything  and  everybody 
seen  en  route.    Direct  them  to  estimate  the  dis- 
tance traveled  and  the  ranges  to  every  prominent 
feature  on  the  route. 

2.  Give   a   trailing   problem.     Ask   questions 
about  signs  and  trails. 

3.  Send  your  individual  soldiers  to  different 
hills  and  on   their   return   ask   questions   about 
what  they  have  seen. 

4.  Send  them  to  various  places  in  the  vicinity 
at  night.    Direct  them  to  elude  each  other  if  met 
on  the  road.     Send  them  across  country  to  dif- 
ferent points.     Ask   them  questions  about   the 
points  of  the  compass,  the  prevailing  winds  by 
day  and  night,  the  general  trend  of  the  country 
and  of  the  streams,  and  general  direction  of  the 
main  roads. 

5.  Noncoms.:    What  they  provide  themselves 
with  before  going  on   patrol.     Mark  different 

129 

Vol.3— N.S.L.S 


National  Service  Library 

points  and  routes  on  the  map  for  them  to  use  in 
traveling  to  the  points  indicated  both  by  day  and 
night. 

6.  Test  in  map  reading  for  noncoms.:  Indicate 
the  steepest  slope  on  a  road  between  two  points. 
Could  a  patrol  at  a  certain  point  see  a  man  in 
the  road  near  another  point?    Point  out  on  the 
map    an    orchard ;    hedged    fence ;    barbed-wire 
fence;  telegraph  line;  cultivated  land;  improved 
road ;  embankment ;  cut ;  house ;  barn ;  double- 
track  railway ;  village ;  steepest  slope  on  the  map ; 
highest  hill. 

How  long  would  it  take  you  to  march  from 
A  to   B?     Orient  your  map.     How   far  is  it 

from  camp  B  via  the  road?  via   road 

A-B?  via  road  C-D?  What  is  the  scale  of 
your  map?  Show  me  the  bridges  across  River 
X?  Fords?  What  are  the  distances  to  hills  i, 
2  and  3  from  camp?  What  is  the  lowest  point 
on  the  map?  What  is  the  camp's  height  above 
sea  level  ?  above  River  X  ? 

7.  Test  in  map  making  for  noncoms.:     (i) 
Start  in  at  camp,  make  a  road  sketch  along  road 
A-B  to  X.     (2)    Our  battalion  is  on  outpost: 
General  line  A-C-D;  reserve,  two  companies,  at 
F;  line  of  resistance  the  bridge,  i,  2,  3.    Support 
No.  i,  one  company,  near  17;  support  No.  2,  one 
company,  near  21.     (a)  Draw  an  outpost  sketch 
of  support  No.  i.     (b)  Draw  an  outpost  sketch 
of  support  No.  2. 

130 


Patrolling 

8.  Test  in  writing  messages:  In  command  of 
a  reconnoitering  patrol  returning  to  camp.  Ser- 
geant So-and-so,  having  been  out  on  a  night 
patrol,  returning  to  camp  at  daybreak.  On  arriv- 
ing at  the  house  of  Juan  Garcia,  about  one  mile 
south  of  A,  he  informs  you  that  at  4  a.  m.  he 
was  visited  by  a  party  of  raiders  who  forced  him 
to  come  out  of  his  house  under  threat  of  opening 
fire  on  him ;  asked  him  some  questions  about  the 
whereabouts  of  soldiers  and  carried  off  his  Win- 
chester and  a  pony.  You  at  once  take  up  the 
trail  and  send  a  written  message  by  courier  to 
your  captain.  Write  the  message. 

You  are  commanding  a  flank  patrol  sent  out 
from  the  support  of  the  advance  guard  of  a 
force  marching  from  A  on  B  via  D  road.  When 
you  reach  7  you  see  a  mounted  patrol  of  the 
enemy  moving  north  at  a  trot.  This  is  the  first 
time  you  have  seen  the  enemy.  Write  the  proper 
message  to  your  commander. 

You  have  arrived  at  Cuevas  crossing  on  the 
Rio  Grande  at  daybreak  and  see  a  trail  from  the 
water's  edge.  On  arriving  at  Madera  a  native 
saloonkeeper  tells  you  that  a  party  of  raiders 
looted  Ojo  de  Agua  last  night,  terrorized  the 
natives  and  left  about  midnight.  Write  a  mes- 
sage to  send  to  your  commander  at  Camp  Mis- 
sion. You  have  in  your  possession  progressive 
military  map  of  the  district. 


VIII 
Camp  Expedients 

SOLDIERS  campaigning  in  the  winter  or  in  cold 
climates  are  apt  to  be  well  provided  to  meet  the 
bitter  conditions  both  in  clothing  and  shelter,  but 
the  careless  preparation  and  life  comes  to  the 
soldier  in  hot  summers  or  southern  climates  when 
the  contrasts  in  temperature  between  day  and 
night  are  great  and  lack  of  foresight  or  improper 
preparation  has  been  made.  Cold  and  damp  or 
wet  nights  following  hot  days,  or  nights  in  a 
high  altitude  following  clear,  hot  days,  endanger 
the  health  and  comfort.  The  easiest  provision  is 
one  suit  of  light  woolen  underclothing  for  night 
wear  on  duty  or  for  sleeping.  The  government 
provides  woolen  socks  and  the  flannel  shirt.  If 
the  soldier  keeps  stowed  away  the  extra  suit  of 
light  flannel  underclothing  it  may  be  a  life  saver. 

Always  endeavor  to  make  yourself  comfortable 
for  the  night.  If  two  hours'  preparation  will 
enable  you  to  have  six  hours'  sound  sleep  it  is 
much  better  to  make  the  effort  than  to  lie  down 
for  eight  hours  in  restless  tossing.  Therefore 
always  try  to  gather  brush  or  grass  to  put  under 
your  bed.  If  this  is  not  possible  take  an  intrench- 
132 


Camp  Expedients 

ing  tool  and  loosen  up  the  surface  of  the  ground, 
removing  rocks,  and  leaving  a  hollow  for  the 
hip.  The  bedding  carried  on  the  march  is  ade- 
quate for  sleeping  on  the  ground,  whereas  it 
would  be  inadequate  if  a  cot  were  provided.  If 
the  ground  be  damp  the  poncho  should  be  under- 
neath. If  there  be  indications  of  rain,  the  ground 
should  be  ditched.  In  a  strong  wind  the  blanket 
alone  has  very  little  warmth.  If  the  blanket  can 
be  covered,  however,  to  shed  the  wind,  the  sol- 
dier will  be  much  warmer. 

Soldiers  are  fire  worshipers  in  a  way. 
Whether  in  camp  with  your  comrades  or  off  in 
detachment  or  lost  in  a  strange  country,  as  all 
soldiers  are  on  occasion,  fire  is  his  best  friend — 
to  cook  by,  for  company  and  comfort,  and  to 
dream  by.  Seldom  is  the  soldier  caught  without 
matches,  but  very  often  he  finds  himself  wet  to 
the  skin,  and  matches  likewise.  So  to  be  on  the 
safe  and  comfortable  side,  keep  your  loose 
matches  or  box  wrapped  in  a  piece  of  oiled  silk, 
which  can  be  gotten  from  any  druggist  for  a  few 
cents,  or  use  a  water-tight  rubber  match  box 
which  can  be  had  from  the  dealers  in  sporting 
goods.  If  you  are  young  enough  to  have  been 
a  Boy  Scout,  you  will  have  learned  to  make  fire 
by  friction,  or  by  striking  sparks  with  flint  and 
steel,  or  with  your  knife  and  a  flinty  stone,  using 
as  tinder  the  scrapings  of  your  handkerchief  or 
a  piece  of  cloth,  or  by  using  your  watch  crystal 
133 


National  Service  Library 

or  some  other  piece  of  glass  as  a  burning  glass. 
Another  wrinkle  of  old  soldiers  is  using  the  pow- 
der from  a  cartridge  and  the  percussion  cap. 
But  best  of  all,  make  sure  of  your  matches. 

It  is  no  disgrace  to  be  lost,  but  it  is  to  stay  lost. 
Find  yourself  first.  Sit  down  and  cool  off.  If 
in  daylight  make  sure  of  your  direction  by  the 
sun,  or  the  prevailing  wind,  or  the  general  lay 
of  the  land.  Follow  your  back  trail,  or  a  stream 
course.  If  in  a  friendly  country  and  in  a  hurry 
or  hungry,  fire  your  piece  three  times.  If  at 
night,  and  starshine,  your  old  friend  the  Dipper 
will  give  you  the  North  Star,  or  the  moon  or  a 
planet  will  help  you  get  the  general  direction. 
If  still  bewildered,  light  a  fire,  make  yourself 
comfortable  for  the  night,  and  find  yourself  in 
the  morning. 

Fortunately  a  soldier  does  not  often  have  to 
cook  for  himself.  He  has  a  proper  feeling  of 
dependence  on  his  troop  or  company  cook,  who 
knows  how  to  handle  the  ration  and  cook  it 
satisfactorily  for  the  hungry  hundred.  But  every 
soldier  in  the  field  carries  in  his  field  kit  two 
reserve  rations,  which  are  there  for  a  purpose: 
for  the  emergency  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy, 
or  if  separated  on  patrol  or  other  detached 
service. 

If  you  have  been  a  Boy  Scout,  or  thrown  with 
regular  soldiers,  or  lived  much  in  the  open  and 
watched  an  Indian,  you  know  that  one  of  the 
134 


Camp  Expedients 

first  principles  of  individual  cooking  is  to  do  it 
over  a  small  fire,  instead  of  a  large  one,  or  better 
yet,  a  few  red  coals.  In  other  words,  cook  your 
food  instead  of  yourself.  You  will  usually  be 
hungry  enough  to  enjoy  your  own  cooking.  Most 
regular  soldiers  like  very  weak  coffee,  but  lots 
of  it  and  sweet.  That  is  easy  to  make  and  you 
have  the  tin  cup  to  do  it.  Put  in  coffee  to  your 
taste,  remembering  that  you  may  have  to  make  it 
last  two  days.  Let  it  boil  up  about  three  times 
and  dash  in  a  bit  of  cold  water  to  settle  it.  I 
have  seen  Cubans  make  delicious  coffee  by  pul- 
verizing it  between  stones,  and  pouring  boiling 
water  through  a  sock  holding  the  powder.  This 
indicates  that  you  should  get  ground  coffee  for 
your  pack  if  possible. 

Tea  is  a  most  heart-warming  and  wholesome 
drink  in  the  field;  it  weighs  little  and  is  alto- 
gether easy  to  handle  and  carry  about. 

But  your  bacon  is  going  to  be  your  mainstay, 
and  since  you  eat  a  good  deal  of  it,  learn  to  cook 
it  right,  and  not  have  a  greasy  mess.  Cut  slices 
about  five  to  the  inch,  three  of  which  ought  to 
be  enough  for  an  emergency  meal.  Place  in 
your  mess  pan  with  about  one-half  inch  of  cold 
water.  Let  come  to  a  boil  and  then  pour  the 
water  off.  Fry  over  a  brisk  fire,  turning  the 
bacon  and  browning  it.  Remove  the  bacon  to 
lid  of  mess  pan,  leaving  the  grease  for  frying 
anything  you  may  have  been  lucky  enough  to 
135 


National  Service  Library 

pick  up.  Variety  is  as  difficult  to  secure  on 
active  service  as  it  is  important  in  view  of  the 
depressing  effect  of  an  unappetizing  and  monot- 
onous diet.  Quick  assimilation  is  more  easily 
attainable  when  fresh  meat  is  issued  and  is  best 
obtained  by  the  use  of  stew.  The  valuable  influ- 
ence upon  digestion  of  the  "appetite  juice"  which 
follows  soup,  broth,  or  beef  tea  should  not  be 
lost  sight  of.  A  mincing  machine  is  a  very 
important  item  in  the  equipment  of  camp  kitch- 
ens. The  company  or  troop  kitchen  is  a  favorite 
place  for  soldiers  to  hang  out,  especially  on  cold 
or  wet  days,  and  most  soldiers  will  have  enough 
tours  of  kitchen  police  to  be  thoroughly  at  home 
about  the  kitchen ;  so  keep  your  eyes  open,  keep 
on  the  usual  good  terms  with  the  cook,  and  learn 
something  about  soldier  cooking  before  you  are 
thrown  on  your  own  resources. 


136 


Part  II — The  Commissioned 

§  Officer 


I 

The  Newly  Commissioned  Officer 

OATH  OF  OFFICE 

ONE  to  accompany  the  acceptance  of  every 
commissioned  officer  appointed  or  commissioned 
by  the  President  in  the  army  of  the  United 
States. 

I,  A B ,  having  been  appointed  a  Captain  of 

Infantry  in  the  military  service  of  the  United  States, 
do  solemnly  swear  (or  affirm)  that  I  will  support  and 
defend  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States  against 
all  enemies,  foreign  and  domestic;  that  I  will  bear  true 
faith  and  allegiance  to  the  same ;  that  I  take  this  obliga- 
tion freely,  without  any  mental  reservation  or  purpose 
of  evasion ;  and  that  I  will  well  and  faithfully  discharge 
the  duties  of  the  office  upon  which  I  am  about  to  enter : 
So  help  me  God. 

A.  B. 


Sworn  to  and  subscribed  before  me,  at- 
this day  of ,  191    . 


C.  D., 

Judge  Advocate  G.  C.  M. 

137 


National  Service  Library 

This  is  the  simple  form  of  dedication  of  every 
officer  from  the  First  in  War  down  to  John  Doe 
commissioned  from  the  ranks  by  the  President  as 
commander  in  chief  of  the  army  of  the  United 
States.  Having  held  up  his  hand,  from  that 
moment  he  belongs  to  Uncle  Sam  for  better  or 
worse,  and  although  remaining  subject  to  the 
laws  of  the  land,  his  life  and  conduct  also  fall 
under  the  Articles  of  War  and  code  of  military 
laws  and  customs  made  statutory  by  Congress. 

The  Articles  of  War  which  have  come  down 
from  Gustavus  Adolphus  through  England,  and 
which  have  governed  the  army  for  more  than 
one  hundred  years,  have  recently  been  modified 
and  amended  by  a  new  code  passed  in  1916  and 
which  became  effective  on  March  1st,  1917.  Like 
the  Prince  of  Wales,  his  proud  motto  is  "I  serve," 
and  like  him,  his  powers  and  privileges  are  care- 
fully regulated  and  subordinate  to  civil  power, 
but  by  the  same  token  he  becomes  a  leader  of 
men,  and  like  the  Roman  centurion  he  can  say: 
"To  one  man  Go,  and  he  goeth ;  to  another  man 
Come,  and  he  cometh."  He  joins  a  band  of 
comrades  who  live  and  play  together  with  the 
same  spirit  as  they  fight  together.  As  Lord 
Roberts  put  it,  he  is  one  of  those  happy  individ- 
uals who  love  to  call  themselves  poor  soldiers. 
He  already  has  the  proud  traditions  of  such  men 
as  Washington,  Hamilton,  Marshall,  Scott,  Jack- 
son, the  Lees,  Grant,  Sherman,  Sheridan,  Upton, 
138 


The  Newly  Commissioned  Officer 

Custer,  Lawton,  Chaffee,  Miles  and  Funston; 
men  who,  having  come  from  the  volunteers,  West 
Point  and  the  ranks  and  joined  the  sworn 
brotherhood  of  arms,  found  themselves  on  the 
same  social  and  official  footing  without  regard  to 
former  life  or  condition.  To  get  and  keep  the 
leadership  of  his  men  requires  a  lifetime  of  work 
and  training.  The  winning  of  a  commission 
implies  superior  education,  training  or  opportu- 
nity. The  new  officer,  if  not  already  excelling, 
must  set  about  attaining  superiority  at  once,  and 
must  become  expert  in  the  use  of  all  his  arms. 
He  must  shoot  better  with  rifle  and  pistol,  handle 
his  saber  better,  ride  and  march  better  than  any 
man  of  his  command.  This  superior  skill  requires 
constant  work  and  training.  He  must  become  a 
constant  student  of  his  varied  profession,  realiz- 
ing that  the  role  of  the  officer  to-day  is  to  be  that 
of  a  glorified  schoolmaster,  and  his  command  a 
constant  mill  through  which  passes  the  crude  man 
power  of  the  nation,  each  man  retiring  into  the 
reserve  fit  to  go  back  in  the  time  of  war  and  at 
his  country's  call. 

One  of  the  first  duties  and  not  the  least  impor- 
tant of  the  happy  warrior  is  looking  his  part,  set- 
ting an  example  in  life  and  appearance  to  his 
men,  who  naturally  and  instinctively  follow  his 
lead. 

One  of  the  first  thoughts  of  the  new  officer  is 
about  uniform  and  equipment.  He  should  sup- 
139 


National  Service  Library 

ply  himself  with  the  best  of  everything,  but  I 
strongly  advise  his  getting  only  a  service  uniform 
and  that  he  defer  completing  his  kit  until  after 
joining  his  command.  Like  a  sportsman  going 
into  the  North  woods  and  turned  loose  in  Aber- 
crombie  &  Fitch's,  he  is  apt  to  overload  himself 
with  many  useless  things.  If  he  has  the  oppor- 
tunity, it  would  be  well  for  him  to  visit  the  lead- 
ing outfitters,  leave  his  measurements  with  such 
as  Abercrombie  &  Fitch,  New  York,  the  army 
cooperative  stores  in  the  great  cities,  such  as  in 
New  York,  Washington  or  San  Francisco — H.  V. 
Allien  &  Co.,  New  York,  Wm.  H.  Horstmann 
Co.,  Philadelphia — and  good  uniform  tailors,  such 
as  Brook  Bros.,  New  York ;  John  G.  Haas,  Lan- 
caster &  Washington,  etc.,  etc.  E.  Vogel,  64 
Nassau  Street,  New  York,  or  Teitzel,  Junction 
City,  Kas.,  whose  boots  may  also  be  obtained 
through  the  army  cooperative  stores.  (See  Ap- 
pendix I  for  Individual  Field  Equipment  for 
Dismounted  Company  Officers,  and  Appendix  II 
for  Equipment,  Army  Officers'  Reserve  Corps.) 
Side  and  personal  arms  may  be  obtained  from 
the  Ordnance  Department  and  Officers'  Field 
Rolls  may  be  obtained  from  the  Quartermaster 
Department.  For  further  advice  on  like  matters 
address  the  adjutant  of  your  regiment  if  you 
have  already  been  assigned  to  a  command,  other- 
wise to  the  adjutant  general  of  a  military  depart- 
ment who  is  the  nearest  to  a  bureau  of  informa- 
140 


The  Newly  Commissioned  Officer 

tion  for  the  army,  and  who  will  be  glad  to  reply 
to  questions  concerning  the  service. 

All  official  publications,  drill  regulations  and 
other  manuals  of  the  service  may  be  obtained  by 
writing  to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents, 
Washington,  D.  C.,  who  will  furnish  a  list  of  all 
army  publications. 

Professional  books  not  published  by  the  gov- 
ernment may  best  be  obtained  from  the  Book 
Department,  Army  Service  Schools,  Fort  Leav- 
enworth,  Kas.,  who  will  also  furnish  list  on 
application. 

Upon  being  assigned  to  a  command,  the  offi- 
cer will  at  once  address  a  formal  letter  reporting 
to  the  commanding  officer,  quoting  the  order  from 
the  War  Department,  requesting  instructions. 

Forms  of  military  correspondence  are  peculiar, 
certain  models  of  which  are  given  in  Appendix 
III,  based  on  the  General  Order  23,  1912,  War 
Department,  which  covers  all  forms  of  such  cor- 
respondence in  full. 

You  will  receive  an  extract  of  an  order  from 
the  War  Department  directing  you  to  report  to 
your  proper  command  or  commanding  officer. 
You  will  feel  for  the  moment  like  a  boy  who  is 
going  off  to  school  with  the  uncertainty  of  his 
reception  and  the  possibility  of  going  through  a 
preliminary  kind  of  hazing  for  ignorance  or 
freshness.  But  if  you  are  of  the  right  sort  and 
becomingly  quiet  and  modest,  you  will  find  a 
141 


National  Service  Library 

real  warmth  of  reception  awaiting  you  from 
your  comrades  in  arms.  Everyone  from  the 
colonel  down  will  treat  you  with  a  distinguished 
courtesy  and  with  an  evident  desire  to  make  you 
feel  at  home.  The  adjutant  of  the  command  will 
be  glad  to  answer  every  question  and  put  you  in 
touch  with  the  little  wrinkles  and  life  of  the 
service. 

Very  quickly  you  will  realize  that  the  life  and 
work  is  largely  and  properly  an  instinctive  fol- 
lowing of  the  customs  of  the  service  as  in  all 
other  armies.  In  other  words,  the  customs  of  the 
service  are  certain  immemorial  conventions  which 
reduce  friction  of  all  kinds  and  classes  of  men 
living  together  on  terms  of  personal  equality  and 
rights  regulated  by  an  official  hierarchy.  Remem- 
ber that  these  conventions  are  just  as  closely 
observed  by  the  soldiers  as  by  the  officers,  a«Kl 
are  just  as  necessary  for  their  comfort  and  hap- 
piness and  convenience  as  for  those  of  their  offi- 
cial superiors.  The  ignorant  or  inexperienced 
civilian  often  rails  at  them  and  always  misunder- 
stands them.  They  are  what  makes  the  happy 
ship  of  the  navy  and  the  contented  company  of 
the  army. 

The  little  courtesies  of  intercourse  are  impor- 
tant where  men  are  so  closely  bound  together, 
and  the  officers  and  general  must  observe  those 
toward  enlisted  men  with  most  decided  particu- 
larity of  conduct.  The  captain  and  fellow  lieu- 
142 


The  Newly  Commissioned  Officer 

tenants  will  quickly  put  the  new  officer  on  to 
them.  His  relations  with  the  officers  will  follow 
easily,  but  the  new  officer  must  be  impressed  with 
his  relations  with  the  enlisted  men  of  his  own 
company.  He  must  show  a  respect  in  his  inter- 
course with  the  noncoms.,  especially  the  first  ser- 
geant and  the  soldiers,  and  it  will  soon  become  a 
feeling  one  on  both  sides.  He  should  at  once 
obtain  a  list  of  the  organization  and  memorize 
the  names  of  his  men  and  put  them  to  the  men 
as  quickly  as  possible.  He  should  interest  him- 
self in  the  history  of  the  organization  and  the  life 
histories  of  the  noncoms.  and  soldiers,  acquiring 
this  with  the  utmost  discretion.  The  American 
soldier  does  not  like  the  French  familiarity  nor 
the  English  patronizing  ways,  and  intercourse 
should  be  in  keeping  with  the  customs  of  the 
service.  The  popularity  seeker,  or  freely  familiar 
officer,  soon  acquires  the  disdain  or  contempt 
of  his  men.  If  he  is  going  to  lead  them  in  hard 
times  and  have  their  willing  and  instinctive 
respect  in  following,  he  must  exercise  a  quiet 
patience  and  an  insistence  on  their  rights  and 
privileges,  and  a  keen  interest  in  their  comfort 
and  welfare.  The  intimate  service  in  the  field 
will  give  him  every  opportunity  for  showing  this. 
It  must  not  be  forced. 

Self-control  is  the  most  important  faculty  of 
command    over    Americans — an    even    tone    of 
voice  and  a  quiet,  cool  way.     When  you  speak 
143 


National  Service  Library 

to  a  man,  use  his  name,  never  the  old-fashioned 
terms  of  "you  man"  or  "my  man"  or  any  other 
patronizing  expression  or  tone  of  voice.  Show 
a  lively  interest  in  everything  that  is  going  on  in 
the  way  of  both  work  and  sport,  and  cultivate 
the  utmost  discrimination  in  giving  rewards  and 
punishments. 

Study  the  temperament  and  characteristics  of 
your  men,  and  remember  that  punishment  itself 
is  not  an  end  but  a  means  for  better  work  and 
particular  reform.  Be  sympathetic  but  not  soft- 
hearted at  the  wrong  moment.  Remember  that 
enlisted  men  in  barracks  are  not  "plaster-of- 
paris  saints,"  but  have  all  of  the  little  faults  and 
at  the  same  time  the  fine  loyalty  and  often  splen- 
did qualities  of  the  young  American.  Most  of 
your  soldiers  are  not  much  more  than  boys,  and 
they  should  be  handled  as  such. 

Your  heart  will  warm  particularly  to  the  non- 
coms.  They  have  been  tried  by  fire  and  are 
usually  a  splendid  lot  and  stand  by  you  through 
thick  and  thin,  and  it  is  one  of  the  finest  expe- 
riences of  the  service  to  go  through  hard  times 
with  them. 

The  duties  of  a  subaltern  are  seldom  sharply 
defined.  He  is  a  leader  in  a  very  varied  life 
and  the  finest  life  on  earth,  if  he  takes  to  it — full 
of  adventure,  sport  and  travel,  with  periods  of 
great  stress  and  strain.  Remember  that  by  law 
an  officer  is  set  down  as  an  officer  and  gentle- 
144 


The  Newly  Commissioned  Officer 

man  and   with   that   high   privilege   there  goes 
noblesse  oblige. 

You  must  watch  your  company  commander 
and  profit  by  his  example.  If  he  is  an  expe- 
rienced commander  of  troops  you  will  note  the 
following : 

1.  First,  last  and  all  the  time  he  shows  a  keen 
interest  in  his  men  as  individuals.    The  old  man 
is  the  quick  philosopher  and  friend  of  his  troop- 
ers as  well  as  the  captain,  instructor,  discipli- 
narian and  judge. 

2.  His  men  feel  at  liberty  to  come  to  him  at 
any  time  with  any  question,  personal  or  official. 

3.  He  sees  to  it,  however,  that  the  appeal  and 
approach   is  always   made   in  a   soldierly   way, 
proper    military    courtesies    observed,    uniform 
neat,  etc.    Most  regular  soldiers  get  permission 
from  the  first  sergeant  or  noncom.  in  charge 
before  visiting  the  captain. 

4.  In  giving  routine  orders  he  does  it  through 
the   first   sergeant,   keeping   his    lieutenants   in- 
formed.    He  issues  as  few  orders  as  possible. 
He   keeps   from   nagging,   but   sees   that   every 
order  is  promptly  and  intelligently  obeyed.     If 
the  captain  receives  an  order,  he  is  responsible 
for  its  execution  and  must  see  it  through. 

5.  He  is  loyal  in  his  obedience  to  the  orders 
he  receives  from  his  superiors,  and  in  carrying 
the  orders  out  he  sees  that  each  of  his  subordi- 
nates thoroughly  understands  his  share  of  the 

145 


National  Service  Library 

work  and  does  it  well.  He  does  not  permit  an 
order  given  to  one  subordinate  to  be  transmitted 
by  that  subordinate  to  another  and  thereby  ab- 
solve himself  from  responsibility.  The  subor- 
dinate may  have  to  transmit  the  order  to  many 
others  but  the  captain  holds  responsible  the  one 
to  whom  it  was  originally  given. 

6.  He  never  reprimands  nor  punishes  unnec- 
essarily, and  when  he  does  he  is  quiet  and  calm 
about  it.     If  he  loses  his  temper  and  is  unjust 
to  a  man  he  does  not  consider  it  beneath  him  to 
ask  pardon  of  the  soldier. 

7.  He  is  unrelentingly  severe  upon  the  soldier 
who  is  insubordinate  or  willfully  neglectful,  but 
stands  ready  at  any  time  to  give  even  the  worst 
man  another  chance  if  the  proper  spirit  be  shown. 
He  never  permits  a  soldier  to  feel  that  he  has 
offended  so  deeply  as  to  make  it  impossible  for 
him  to  ever  regain  the  good  will  of  the  old  man. 

8.  When  called  upon  to  furnish  a  soldier  for 
special  detail,  he  endeavors  to  select  the  soldier 
best  qualified  regardless  of  the  fact  that  the  duty 
may  separate  such  soldier  from  the  organization. 
This  he  knows  will  enhance  the  reputation  of  the 
company,   troop,   or  battery  and   will   probably 
result  in  favorable  details  and  rapid  promotion 
coming  to  the  men  under  his  command. 

9.  Finally,  in  disciplining  his  soldiers  he  always 
impresses  upon  them  that  they  should  work  with 
him  for  the  good  of  the  service  as  a  whole  and 

146 


The  Newly  Commissioned  Officer 

the  reputation  of  the  organization  itself.  In 
other  words,  he  establishes  an  esprit  de  corps. 

The  younger  officer  should  not  hesitate  to  con- 
sult the  older  noncommissioned  officers  of  the 
company.  The  first  sergeant  will  think  none  the 
less  of  him  if  he  spends  some  leisure  hours  in 
the  company  office  working  on  the  company  rec- 
ords and  correspondence  and  consulting  the  com- 
pany clerk  about  the  routine  paper  work.  The 
company  supply  sergeant  will  respect  him  the 
more  highly  if  he  confess  that  he  does  not  know 
the  names  of  the  different  parts  of  the  equip- 
ment and  asks  the  older  soldier  to  lay  out  a  com- 
plete equipment,  show  him  the  parts,  and  how 
to  fit  them.  The  mechanic  or  artificer  will  feel 
proud  if  the  young  lieutenant  asks  him  to  instruct 
him  in  the  method  of  taking  apart  the  magazine 
rifle  and  reassembling  it.  All  these  soldiers  know 
that  the  officer  is  the  better  educated  and  that 
in  larger  matters  he  can  instruct  them.  A  desire* 
to  know  thoroughly  their  part  of  the  work  also 
will  gain  not  only  their  respect  but  their  cordial 
good  will,  and  no  officer  makes  any  progress  who 
has  not  both  the  respect  and  the  good  will  of  the 
enlisted  man. 

As  quickly  as  practicable  a  young  officer  should 
familiarize  himself  with  the  field  equipment  of 
his  organization  and  all  the  articles  which  must 
be  carried  in  campaign  both  on  the  person  and 
in  the  wagons.  Appendixes  IV  and  V  are  guides 


National  Service  Library 

to  the  present  requirements.  They  are,  of  course, 
subject  to  change. 

Above  all,  do  not  drink  or  gamble.  Both  take 
time,  and  time  is  what  the  modern  officer  has 
the  least  of.  Probably  no  harm  results  from  an 
officer  taking  a  drink  after  the  day's  work  is 
done,  but  it  is  difficult  to  tell  when  your  work  is 
done,  and  even  a  single  drink  lessens  one's  effi- 
ciency. Drinking  to  excess  or  to  the  extent  of 
making  it  impracticable  for  you  to  do  your  full 
share  will  certainly  win  you  the  distrust  of  your 
commanding  officer,  the  resentment  of  those  who 
have  to  do  the  work  you  neglect,  and  the  con- 
tempt of  the  soldiers  (though  these  last  may  be 
forced  to  conceal  their  true  feelings). 

This  book  is  for  the  citizen  soldier,  combined 
from  experiences  in  the  oldest  of  professions,  so 
that  he  may  help  himself  to  train  and  train  others. 
Soldiering  in  America  has  been  a  side  issue  and 
a  little  profession,  and  so  neglected  by  the  very 
men  who  will  now  show  interest  and  bring  a 
new  and  varied  intelligence  to  the  service. 

Many  will  take  to  it  with  a  will  and  enjoy  it, 
others  as  an  irksome  duty,  like  unto  jury  duty 
or  paying  taxes.  Such  enjoy  handling  ideas 
rather  than  men,  and  would  rather  stay  sheltered 
than  resolutely  venture  forth  into  the  blizzard  of 
life.  All  in  time  of  war  have  the  oldest  instinct 
of  going  forth  to  fight,  but  wilt  with  disgust 
under  the  work  and  routine  necessary  to  learn 
148 


The  Newly  Commissioned  Officer 

to  fight  effectively.  Many  a  National  Guards- 
man during  the  past  summer  on  the  border  has 
sworn  at  the  trying  training  and  camp  drudgery. 
"I  enlisted  to  fight,"  but  he  will  look  back  on  that 
six  months  of  getting  ready  as  the  outstanding 
lesson  of  a  lifetime. 

I  confess  I'm  taking  to  the  game.  ...  I  was  too 
highbrowed  about  this  war  business.  I  dream  now  of 
getting  a  commission. — "Mr.  Britling  Sees  It  Through" 
—Wells. 

Hugh's  letters  divided  themselves  pretty  fairly 
between  two  main  topics ;  the  first  was  the  inter- 
est of  the  art  of  war,  the  second  the  reaction 
against  warfare. 

After  one  has  got  over  the  emotion  of  it,  and  when 
one's  mind  has  just  accepted  and  forgotten  (as  it  does) 
the  horror  and  waste  of  it  all,  then  I  begin  to  perceive 
that  war  is  absolutely  the  best  game  in  the  world.  That 
is  the  real  strength  of  war,  I  submit.  Not  as  you  put  it 
in  that  early  pamphlet  of  yours,  ambition,  cruelty,  and 
all  those  things.  Those  things  give  an  excuse  for  war. 
they  rush  timid  and  base  people  into  war,  but  the 
essential  matter  is  the  hold  of  the  thing  itself  upon  an 
active  imagination.  It's  such  a  big  game.  Instead  of 
being  fenced  into  a  field  and  tied  down  to  one  set  of 
tools  as  you  are  in  almost  every  other  game  you  have 
all  the  world  to  play  with,  and  you  may  use  whatever 
you  can  use.  You  can  use  every  scrap  of  imagination 
and  invention  that  is  in  you.  And  it's  wonderful.  .  .  . 
But  the  real  soldiers  aren't  cruel.  And  war  isn't  cruel 
in  its  essence.  Only  in  its  consequences. 

Fortunately  the  art  of  war  is  not  an  exact 
science,  it  is  life  itself  in  its  most  varied  phases 
149 


National  Service  Library 

and  raised  to  the  nih  power.  Everyone  will  find 
his  place,  and  by  proper  organization  will  be  put 
in  it.  But  everyone  too  should  go  through  the 
soldier  training  for  his  body  and  soul's  sake 
before  the  national  tryout. 

Every  boy  picks  up,  in  playing  baseball,  foot- 
ball and  other  games,  short,  sharp  words  of  effec- 
tive slang  which  save  an  extensive  flow  of  lan- 
guage. Every  team  in  whatever  game  develops  a 
system  of  signals  which  insure  quick  and  distinc- 
tive response  to  the  captain.  In  all  our  games 
the  prime  importance  of  teamwork  is  impressed 
upon  us  from  boyhood,  and  the  necessity  of 
reacting  to  every  sound  and  signal,  and  the  team- 
work which  stands  for  victory  has  traditions  and 
years  of  work  behind  it,  either  in  college  or 
among  the  professionals. 

Why  does  not  the  average  American  under- 
stand the  much  greater  game  of  training  an  army 
— forcing  hundreds  of  thousands  of  men  to  react 
to  the  will  and  word  of  the  commander  in  chief? 
The  history  of  our  wars  is  one  of  disputes  over 
orders  and  disasters  due  largely  to  a  lack  of 
understanding  of  the  expressed  intention  of  the 
commanders.  In  other  words,  the  American  vol- 
unteers did  not  speak  the  same  language.  In 
the  regular  army,  from  close  association  and 
from  standardized  education  and  training,  there 
is  mutual  understanding  and  instinctive  team- 
work. The  higher  command  issues  an  order  in 


The  Newly  Commissioned  Officer 

simple  and  clear  language,  and  it  goes  filtering 
down  the  military  hierarchy,  and  the  will  of  the 
commander  is  quickly  and  quietly  carried  out. 
Ask  any  staff  officer  who  has  served  a  general 
commanding  green  troops  what  happened  when 
he  signed  an  order  directing  general  movement 
or  particular  action,  and  you  will  find  that 
nearly  every  colonel  to  whom  the  order  went 
called  up  headquarters  to  ask  questions  about  it — 
to  find  out  what  it  really  meant. 

Take  the  order  for  the  attack  of  the  Confed- 
erate general  before  Shiloh,  and  you  will  find  his 
adjutant  general  put  forth  a  document  so  full 
of  maxims  of  war  and  attempts  to  coordinate  a 
loose-jointed  force  that  nobody  had  time  or 
patience  to  find  out  what  it  meant,  and  in  conse- 
quence no  movement  occurred  on  time,  no  attack 
was  pulled  off  as  directed,  and  the  general  lost 
complete  control  of  his  force  from  the  start. 
Throughout  the  Civil  War  generals  were  obliged 
to  explain  so  carefully  and  direct  so  much  in 
detail  that  proper  discretion  was  not  given,  and 
changed  conditions  left  the  distinct  commands  in 
disorder  and  lacking  leadership.  Military  par- 
lance is  just  as  strange  to  the  uninitiated  as 
the  language  of  the  lawyer  or  the  doctor,  and 
it  is  only  by  the  close  association  in  the  service 
with  both  officers  and  men  that  it  can  be  acquired. 
Careful  reading  of  the  list  of  professional  books 
given  below  will  give  a  familiarity  with  the 


National  Service  Library 

more  formal  language  of  the  profession,  and  the 
courses  of  study  in  the  garrison  and  in  the  service 
schools,  and  working  out  problems  on  the  map 
will  be  of  great  help. 

As  in  every  profession,  the  would-be  officer 
of  regulars,  of  the  National  Guard  or  volunteers, 
or  the  self-sacrificing  citizen,  should  read  up  not 
only  on  his  particular  "pidgin,"  but  for  the  inter- 
est and  liberal  education  some  general  list  of 
standard  works.  These  books  should  be  read 
for  interest  and  instructive  habit  of  mind  only. 
When  in  the  camp  or  field,  don't  hark  back  and 
try  to  fit  the  actual  conditions  to  others'  expe- 
riences or  to  abstract  theory. 

Then  as  said  the  Squire  to  Doctor  Syntax: 

No  sir,  let  your  books  rest  themselves, 
In  known  content  shoulder  to  shoulder  on 
their  shelves. 

COURSE  OF  READING  FOR  MILITARY  MEN 

Professional  Books: 

Clausewitz  on  War. 

The  Bible  of  German  Militarism. 

(Deepest  and  most  profound  analysis  and 
description  of  war  that  has  ever  appeared 
in  any  language.) 

Jomini — Campaigns  of  Napoleon. 

(Jomini,  like  Clausewitz,  attempted  to  ex- 
plain and  interpret  the  genius  and  campaigns 
of  Napoleon.  Instead  of  producing  a  philos- 
152 


The  Newly  Commissioned  Officer 

ophy  of  war,  he  reduced  it  to  a  system  of 

maxims  and  principles.) 
Hallecks  Art  of  War. 
Mercur's  Art  of  War. 

(American  attempts  to  follow  Jomini's  lead.) 
Operations  of  War,  by  Hamley. 

(Following  Jomini's  lead  and  going  him  one 

better.) 

Influence  of  Sea  Power  on  History,  by  Mahan. 
Von  der  Goltz : 

Nation  in  Arms ; 

Conduct  in  War. 

Mahan's  Permanent  Fortifications. 
Annals  of  a  Fortress,  by  Violet-le-Duc. 
Upton's  Military  Policy. 
The  Military  Unpreparedness  of  the  United 

States,  Huidekoper. 
Valor  of  Ignorance,  Lea. 
Technique  of  Modern  Tactics,  by  Bond  and 

McDonough. 

De  Brack's  Cavalry — Outpost  Duties. 
Tactics — Infantry,  Balck. 
Studies  in  Troop,  Leading  War  Game,  etc.,  by 

Verdy  de  Verriois. 
Seventy    Problems    of    Infantry    Tactics,    by 

Morrisson. 

Leavenworth — Tactical  Studies  by  Fiske,  Con- 
ger and  Bjornstadt. 
Training  of  the  Mounted  Riflemen,  by  General 

James  Parker. 

153 


National  Service  Library 

Tactical  Principles  and  Problems,  by  Hanna. 

Fundamentals  of  Military  Service,  by  Andrews. 

Officers'  and  Noncommissioned  Officers'  and 
Privates'  Manual,  by  Moss. 

Encyclopaedia  Britannica:  Sketches  on  dif- 
ferent arms  of  the  service,  particularly 
under  caption  Infantry. 

Exercises  for  Systematic  Scout  Instruction, 
by  Capt.  H.  T.  McKenney. 

Field  Equipment  Manual  for  Individuals  and 
Organizations,  by  Conley. 

(By  communicating  with  the  secretary  of  the 
Service  Schools  at  Fort  Leavenworth,  pro- 
fessional notes  of  most  valuable  kind  and 
character  will  be  supplied  from  the  service 
schools  at  nominal  cost.) 

The  following  reviews  are  recommended: 

"Infantry  Journal," 

"Cavalry  Journal," 

"Journal  of  United  States  Service  Institution," 

"Military  Historian  and  Economist." 

Books    on    Military    History    and    of    general 
interest: 

The  Bible.  (The  Old  Testament  is  full  of 
military  interest,  and  its  chronicles  taken 
together,  give  a  remarkable  picture  of  minor 
campaigns  under  ancient  conditions,  includ- 
ing the  excellent  studies  of  leadership  and 
154 


The  Newly  Commissioned  Officer 

examples  of  all  ruses  and  stratagems  of 
war.) 

Wars  of  the  Jews,  by  Josephus. 

Thucydides. 

Herodotus. 

Iliad  and  Odyssey,  Homer. 

Anabasis  and  Horse  Training,  by  Xenophon. 

Plutarch's  Lives. 

Caesar's  Gaelic  Wars. 

Great  Captain  Series,  by  Dodge:  Alexander, 
Hannibal,  Caesar,  Gustavus  Adolphus,  Na- 
poleon. 

Napoleon:  Jomini;  Bourrienne ;  Ropes  (par- 
ticularly the  Waterloo  campaign)  ;  Account 
of  Waterloo  in  Victor  Hugo's  "Les  Misera- 
bles" ;  Bourgaud ;  Abbott ;  Sloan ;  Sargeant's 
Campaigns  of  '96  and  Marengo. 

Peninsular  Wars,  by  Napier. 

History  of  the  Thirty  Years'  War,  by  Gin- 
dely. 

Mississippi  Valley  in  the  Civil  War,  by  John 
Fiske. 

Lives  of :  John  Sobieski ;  Turenne  ;  Garibaldi, 
by  Trevelyn ;  Garibaldi  and  the  Thousand ; 
Cavour  and  his  Times,  by  Thayer;  Marl- 
borough,  Peterborough,  Macaulay's  Essays; 
Conde ;  Prince  Eugene ;  Cesare  Borgia  and 
the  Italian  Condottieri,  Sabatini ;  Genghis 
Khan;  Mohamet,  Muir;  Charles  XII.,  Vol- 
taire; Cromwell,  by  Morley  and  by  Roose- 
155 


National  Service  Library 

velt;  Give,  Nicholson,  Lawrence,  Builders 
of  Great  Britain  Series;  Jackson,  Parton; 
Winfield  Scott ;  Taylor ;  Daendals  ;  Raffles, 
Jacobs,  Builders  of  Great  Britain  Series; 
Rajah  Brooke,  Spenser  St.  John ;  Crimean 
War,  Kinglake. 

Memoirs  of:  Baber  the  Great;  Grant;  Sher- 
man ;  Sheridan ;  McClellan ;  Schofield ;  Nel- 
son A.  Miles ;  Fremont ;  J.  H.  Wilson ; 
Roberts's  Forty-one  Years  in  India;  Wolse- 
ley's  Story  of  a  Soldier's  Life;  Sir  Evelyn 
Wood ;  Sir  Harry  Smith's  Autobiography ; 
Marbot;  A  Soldier  of  the  Empire,  Coiquet; 
Bolivar,  San  Martin,  Dawson's  History 
South  American  Republics;  A  Confederate, 
by  Alexander;  Lee,  by  J.  N.  Page,  R. 
E.  Lee,  Jr.,  Long,  etc.;  Jackson,  by  Hen- 
derson; J.  B.  Stewart,  by  McClelland; 
Forrest,  by  Wyeth;  American  Campaigns 
by  Steele. 

The  following  books  by  Parkman: 
Conspiracy  of  Pontiac. 
La  Salle,  and  the  Discovery  of  the  Great 

West. 

The  Old  Regime  in  Canada. 
Montcalm  and  Wolfe. 
The  Oregon  Trail. 

Military  Papers  on  Colonial  Wars,  Huidekoper. 

Siege  of  Havana,  1762,  Diaries  published  by 
Dr.    E.    E.    Hale    and    paper   in    "Cavalry 
156 


The  Newly  Commissioned  Officer 

Journal,"    1903,    by    Lieut.    McCoy,    Tenth 

Cavalry. 
American  Revolution: 

Fiske. 

Trevelyn. 

Lossing. 

F.  V.  Greene. 

Arnold's  Expedition  to  Quebec,  Codman. 
Mexican  War: 

Ripley. 

Willcox. 

Donaphan's  Expedition,  Hughes. 

Life  on  the  Rio  Grande,  Thorpe. 
Expeditions  of  Cabeza  de  Vaca,  Expeditions 

of  Coronado,  Great  Explorers  Series. 
Winning  of  the  West,  and  War  of  1812,  by 

Roosevelt  (Naval). 
Winning  of  the  Far  West,  McElroy. 
Fur  Traders  and  Trappers,  Chittenden. 
Bonneville's   Expedition,   Washington    Irving, 
Civil  War: 

Battles  and  Leaders,  Century. 

Histories,  Comte  de  Paris. 

Ropes. 

Humphrey. 

Palfrey. 

Dana's  Recollections  of  the  Civil  War. 

Reminiscences,  Horace  Porter. 

Letters  of  Meade  (Mexican  War). 

Chancellorsville,  Bigelow. 
157 


National  Service  Library 

The  Wilderness,  Schaaf. 

Gettysburg,  Haskell. 
Indian  Wars  on  the  Western  Frontier. 
On  the  Border  with  Crook,  Bourke. 
German  General  Staff  Accounts  of : 

The  Franco-Prussian  Wars. 

The  Boer  War  in  South  Africa. 

The  Russo-Japanese  War. 
A  Staff  Officer's  Scrap  Book,  Ian  Hamilton. 
The  Russian  Army  in  the  Japanese  War,  by 

Kouropatkin. 
Spanish  War: 

Lodge. 

Santiago,  Sargent. 

Cuba  and  Philippines,  Funston. 
Mexico : 

Conquest  of  New  Spain,  Bernal  Diaz  del 
Castilo  (Hakluyt  Edition). 

Conquest  of  Mexico,  Prescott. 

Relations  between  United  States  and  Mexico, 
by  Rives. 

Hernando  Cortez   (Great  Leaders  Series). 

Memoirs  of  the  French  Intervention,  Niox, 
'6i-'67,  by  Blanchot. 

Terry's  Guide  Book. 

Letters  from  Mexico,  Caulderon  de  la  Barca. 

Monograph  of  General  Staff:   Mexico 
South  American  Republics,  Dawson. 
Russo-Turkish  War,  Greene. 
With  Kitchener  to  Khartoum,  Stevens. 
158 


The  Newly  Commissioned  Officer 

The  River  War,  Churchill. 

Facts    and    Fallacies    American    History,    by 

Leonard  Wood. 

Franco-German  War,  Von  Moltke. 
The  Great  War : 

Bernhardi :  Germany  and  the  Next  War. 

Foundations    of    the    Nineteenth    Century, 
Chamberlain. 

Ordeal  by  Battle,  Oliver. 

Elements  of  the  Great  War,  Belloc. 
The     First    Hundred    Thousand,    Ian    Hay 

(Beith). 

Kitchener's  Mob,  Hall. 
The  Dutch  Republic,  Motley. 
Rise    and    Fall    of    the   Eastern    Empire,    by 

Gibbons. 

Fall  of  Constantinople,  Pears. 
History  of  the  Mongols,  Curtin. 
Mikado's  Empire,  Griffis. 
History  of  China,  Boulger. 
Letters  of  Chinese  Gordon. 
American  Adventurers  in  the  Taiping  Rebel- 
lion, Ward,  etc. 
War  and  Peace,  Tolstoy. 
Pan  Michael,  Sienkiewicz. 
The  Deluge,  Sienkiewicz. 
Fire  and  Sword,  etc.,  Sienkiewicz. 
The  White  Company,  Conan  Doyle. 
Novels  of  Scott. 
Novels  of  Cooper. 

159 


National  Service  Library 

Old  Panama,  Anderson. 

History  of  the  Buccaneers  of  America,  Ex- 

quemelin. 
Don  Quixote. 
Kipling. 

Chanson  de  Roland. 

History  of  Bayard  (from  French  of  Larchey). 
Froissart's  Chronicles. 
Shakespeare    (particularly  Henry  IV  and  V, 

Richard  III,  Othello,  Macbeth). 
Creasy 's  Fifteen  Decisive  Battles. 
Marco  Polo,  Yule. 
The  Spirit  of  the  Sword,  and  other  Addresses, 

by  Mr.  Justice  Holmes. 

After  entering  the  service,  all  of  the  above 
books  can  be  obtained  from  War  College  Library. 
Most  of  the  early  books,  such  as  Herodotus, 
Homer,  Plutarch,  etc.,  are  in  Everyman's 
Edition. 


160 


II 

Routine  Duties  of  Officers 

ADMINISTRATION  (MAINTENANCE  AND 
GOVERNMENT) 

IN  approaching  the  matter  of  army  adminis- 
tration the  new  officer  should  remember  that  he 
cannot  expect  to  know  it  all  at  once,  but  he  can 
make  up  his  mind  to  do  his  intelligent  best  in 
every  matter  which  comes  to  him.  The  so-called 
army  red  tape  is  nothing  but  a  system  by  means 
of  which  the  interests  of  the  government  and  of 
the  individual  are  both  carefully  conserved.  You 
will  hear  many  absurdities  of  its  operation — you 
will  be  told  how  a  volunteer  officer  was  retained 
in  the  service  two  months  at  a  total  cost  to  the 
government  of  approximately  $500  in  an  effort 
to  make  him  account  for  a  small  item  of  prop- 
erty worth  about  one  dollar.  You  will  be  told 
how  tRrough  administrative  stupidity  equipment 
needed  by  soldiers  at  X  was  shipped  to  them 
from  Y,  while  similar  equipment  on  hand  at  X 
was  being  shipped  to  troops  at  Y.  Such  inci- 
dents stick  in  the  memory  while  the  stupendous 
amount  of  money  and  supplies  which  are  handled 
161 

Vol.  3— N.S.L.6 


National  Service  Library 

annually  so  smoothly  that  no  one  notices  is 
forgotten. 

Remember  that  all  large  businesses  have  their 
systems,  and  if  you  are  going  to  be  one  cog  of 
the  wheel,  make  up  your  mind  to  conform  until 
by  long  experience  you  are  certain  you  have 
found  some  method  promising  improvement. 

The  commanding  officer  of  the  company  is 
responsible  for  the  instruction,  tactical  efficiency, 
and  preparedness  for  war  service  of  his  com- 
pany; for  its  appearance  and  discipline;  for  the 
care  and  preservation  of  its  equipment ;  and  for 
the  proper  performance  of  duties  connected  with 
its  subsistence,  pay,  clothing,  accounts,  reports, 
and  returns.  In  the  absence  of  its  captain,  the 
command  of  the  company  devolves  upon  the  sub- 
altern next  in  rank  who  is  serving  with  him. 
Captains  will  require  their  lieutenants  to  assist 
in  the  performance  of  all  company  duties,  includ- 
ing the  keeping  of  records  and  the  preparation  of 
the  necessary  reports  and  returns. 

The  health,  happiness,  and  efficiency  of  an 
organization  in  the  army  are  directly  dependent 
upon  the  thorough  observance  of  the  regula- 
tions of  the  army  and  the  intelligent  interest 
of  the  company  officers  showing  responsible 
administration. 

All  administrative  work  in  the  army  is  stand- 
ardized ;  and  all  records,  returns,  etc.,  must  be 
made  out  on  the  blanks  furnished  by  the  adjutant 
162 


Routine  Duties  of  Officers 

general  of  the  army.  The  captain  is  responsible 
for  keeping  a  complete  list  of  these  on  hand, 
each  one  of  which  has  instructions  for  its  proper 
use  printed  on  it.  For  full  list  of  these  blanks, 
note  Appendix  V. 

The  morning  report  is  a  continuing  record  of 
the  command,  and  is  made  out  by  the  First  Ser- 
geant and  presented  to  the  captain  for  his  infor- 
mation, check  and  signature,  prior  to  being  turned 
in  to  the  sergeant  major. 

The  sick  report  should  be  handed  in  with  the 
morning  report,  those  men  on  the  sick  report 
reporting  at  the  same  time  to  the  captain  for  his 
inquiry  and  interest.  If  this  is  neglected  by  a 
careless  officer,  many  soldiers  will  take  the  oppor- 
tunity of  going  on  the  sick  report  for  the  purpose 
of  dead-beating  drill  or  fatigue. 

The  duty  roster  also  is  kept  by  the  First  Ser- 
geant, but  should  be  supervised  carefully  by  the 
company  commander  to  see  that  it  is  kept  prop- 
erly and  that  there  are  no  unjust  discriminations. 
The  captain  will  thus  keep  himself  informed  of 
the  routine  duties  of  his  men  and  that  his  men 
are  not  doing  guard  or  fatigue  duty  out  of  their 
proper  proportion. 

All  the  routine  records,  such  as  the  above,  with 
correspondence  books,  soldiers'  deposit  books, 
company  delinquency  books,  descriptive  lists  and 
individual  clothing  slips  should  be  laid  out  on 
the  captain's  desk  after  Saturday  morning  inspec- 
163 


National  Service  Library 

tion  to  see  that  they  are  made  out  properly  and 
up  to  date. 

Noncommissioned  officers  will  be  carefully 
selected  and  instructed,  and  always  supported 
by  company  commanders  in  the  proper  perform- 
ance of  their  duties.  They  will  not  be  detailed 
for  any  duty  nor  permitted  to  engage  in  any 
occupation  inconsistent  with  their  rank  and  posi- 
tion. Officers  will  be  cautious  in  reproving  them 
in  the  presence  or  hearing  of  private  soldiers. 

Company  noncommissioned  officers  are  ap- 
pointed by  regimental  commanders,  or  tempo- 
rarily appointed  by  battalion  commanders,  on  the 
recommendation  of  their  company  commanders ; 
but  in  no  case  will  any  company  organization 
have  an  excess  of  noncommissioned  officers  above 
that  allowed  by  law. 

To  test  that  capacity  of  privates  for  the  duties 
of  noncommissioned  officers,  company  command- 
ers may  appoint  lance  corporals,  who  will  be 
obeyed  and  respected  as  corporals,  but  no  com- 
pany shall  have  more  than  one  lance  corporal  at 
a  time,  unless  there  are  noncommissioned  officers 
absent  by  authority,  during  which  absences  there 
may  be  one  for  each  absence. 

The  captain  will  select  the  first  sergeant,  sup- 
ply sergeant,  mess  sergeant  and  stable  sergeant 
from  the  sergeants  of  his  company,  and  may 
return  them  to  the  grade  of  sergeant  without 
reference  to  higher  authority. 
164 


Routine  Duties  of  Officers 

A  noncommissioned  officer  may  be  reduced  to 
the  ranks  by  sentence  of  a  court-martial,  or,  on 
the  recommendation  of  the  company  commander, 
by  the  order  of  the  commander  having  final 
authority  to  appoint  such  noncommissioned  offi- 
cer, but  a  noncommissioned  officer  will  not  be 
reduced  because  of  absence  on  account  of  sick- 
ness or  injury  contracted  in  the  line  of  duty.  If 
reduced  to  the  ranks  by  sentence  of  court-mar- 
tial at  a  post  not  the  headquarters  of  his  regi- 
ment, the  company  commander  will  forward  a 
transcript  of  the  order  to  the  regimental  com- 
mander. The  transfer  of  a  noncommissioned 
officer  from  one  organization  to  another  carries 
with  it  reduction  to  the  ranks  unless  otherwise 
specified  in  the  order  by  authority  competent  to 
issue  a  new  warrant. 

Chief  mechanics,  cooks,  farriers,  horseshoers, 
mechanics,  artificers,  saddlers,  wagoners,  musi- 
cians, trumpeters  and  first-class  privates  are 
enlisted  as  privates,  and  after  joining  their  com- 
panies are  appointed  by  their  respective  com- 
pany commanders.  For  inefficiency  or  miscon- 
duct they  are  subject  to  reduction  by  the  same 
authority. 

The  following  named  books  of  record,  reports, 
and  papers  will  be  kept  in  each  company:  A 
correspondence  book,  a  sick  report,  a  morning 
report,  and  in  companies  supplied  with  public 
animals,  a  file  of  descriptive  cards  of  public  ani- 
165 


National  Service  Library 

mals,  also  a  company  council  book,  a  record  of 
individual  property  responsibility  of  enlisted 
men,  and  a  record  of  punishments  awarded  by 
the  company  commander,  to  be  furnished  by  the 
quartermaster  corps. 

There  will  be  kept  also  a  complete  record, 
description,  and  accounts  of  all  men  who  be- 
long to  or  have  belonged  to  the  company.  A 
record  of  vaccinations  will  be  kept  on  these 
blanks. 

There  will  be  kept  also  a  document  file,  orders 
and  instructions  received  from  higher  authority, 
and  retained  copies  of  the  various  rolls,  reports, 
and  returns  required  by  regulations  and  orders. 

There  will  be  kept  also  in  each  company  re- 
tained copies  of  all  returns  of  property  pertain- 
ing to  the  company  and  full  information  respect- 
ing all  quartermaster  and  other  supplies  held  on 
memorandum  receipt,  showing  list  of  articles, 
date  of  receipt,  from  whom  received,  and  the 
name  of  the  officer  who  signed  the  memorandum 
receipt  therefor;  also  an  account  of  all  articles 
turned  in,  expended,  stolen,  lost,  or  destroyed; 
and  the  company  commander  will  have  a  settle- 
ment with  the  staff  officers  concerned  quarterly 
and  when  relinquishing  his  command. 

All  quartermaster  property  is  held  on  mem- 
orandum receipt  from  the  post  or  other  supply 
officer.  The  supply  sergeant  is  charged  by  the 
captain  with  its  care,  and  the  captain  or  one  of 
166 


Routine  Duties  of  Officers 

his  troop  officers  should  make  a  quarterly  in- 
ventory to  insure  proper  care  and  responsibility. 

Ordnance  property  is  accounted  for  semian- 
nually  on  the  unit  equipment  return.  The  method 
obtained  in  caring  and  accounting  for  this  equip- 
ment is  laid  down  in  the  Unit  Accountability 
Manual  furnished  by  the  Ordnance  Department. 
The  supply  sergeant  sees  that  each  man  has  his 
individual  equipment  and  keeps  a  charge  slip 
against  each  one.  Such  equipment  should  be 
checked  up  at  Saturday  inspection,  or  at  least 
once  every  month. 

There  is  also  signal  and  engineer  property  that 
is  accounted  for  semiannually  on  blanks  fur- 
nished for  the  purpose.  In  a  company  there  are 
comparatively  few  articles  of  these  departments. 

A  complete  list  of  individual  equipment  is 
shown  in  Appendix  IV. 

There  is  never  any  particular  trouble  in  the 
regular  service  in  easily  keeping  straight  the 
careful  responsibility  as  outlined  above,  as  either 
officers  or  noncommissioned  officers  or  both  are 
experienced  and  thoroughly  trained,  but  with 
volunteer  and  militia  troops,  many  of  whom  have 
had  different  systems,  and  even  not  appreciating 
the  thorough  responsibility  and  accountability 
required  of  them,  there  is  always  much  to  be 
impressed  and  learned.  Government  property  is 
often  considered  by  them  as  common  property 
and  they  have  not  had  the  experience  of  lock- 
167 


National  Service  Library 

ing  horns  with  the  eternally  vigilant  Auditing 
Bureau  of  the  government. 

Up  to  the  time  of  Pitt  in  England  there  was 
no  honest  responsibility  in  the  British  army. 
There  was  no  standard  method  of  administration 
or  of  accountability,  and  even  the  officers  of  the 
British  army  were  liable  to  extreme  official  care- 
lessness and  what  is  nowadays  called  "graft." 
The  paymaster  general  of  the  forces  of  the  Brit- 
ish army  was  the  great  bonanza  of  the  British 
Government  and  by  the  perverted  system  politi- 
cal favorites  were  rewarded  by  the  full  control 
of  the  pay  of  the  army  and  the  purchase  of  sup- 
plies. These  methods  were  in  part  inherited  by 
the  American  army  and  were  a  frequent  source 
of  scandal  during  our  Revolution.  Washington 
and  Hamilton  made  earnest  efforts,  even  in  the 
earliest  days  of  our  army,  to  correct  these  abuses, 
and  when  Hamilton  became  Secretary  of  the 
Treasury  he  established  the  principles  of  account- 
ability and  audit  which  have  persisted  until  this 
day.  Whether  you  believe  in  such  red  tape  or 
not,  it  is  here  to  stay  in  one  form  or  other.  So 
make  the  best  of  it. 

To  give  a  striking  instance  of  the  determined 
and  automatic  vigilance  of  our  system,  General 
Fitzhugh  Lee  on  his  return  to  the  United  States 
service  in  1898,  after  forty  years,  had  his  pay 
stopped  by  the  auditor  to  refund  to  the  govern- 
ment certain  charges  made  against  him  when  he 
168 


Routine  Duties  of  Officers 

was  a  lieutenant  of  dragoons  before  the  Civil 
War.  The  items  listed  against  him  had  com- 
pletely passed  from  his  memory  and  were  due 
to  some  very  active,  and  no  doubt  proper  work, 
of  an  enterprising  young  quartermaster,  but  were 
done  without  the  necessary  red  tape  or  proper 
authority. 

The  following  report  indicates  the  effect  of 
carelessness  in  paper  work : 

"Recent  complaint  was  made  to  the  officer  in 
charge,  Militia  Affairs,  that  sometimes  pay  rolls 
were  returned  to  Company  Commanders  for  cor- 
rections so  evidently  necessary  and  so  simple  that 
they  could  have  been  made  by  the  Paying  Quar- 
termaster and  expedited  the  payment  of  the 
troops.  The  Quartermaster  was  questioned  as 
to  this  matter  and  replied  in  effect  as  follows : 
'To  alter  a  document  in  the  slightest  degree  over 
the  signature  of  another  is  technical  forgery  and 
unjustifiable  under  any  circumstances.'  Most  of 
the  corrections  referred  to  were  so  evident  that 
the  officers  signing  the  papers  should  have  had 
them  made  before  submitting  pay  rolls  or  final 
statements.  Most  of  the  errors,  at  least  80  per 
cent,  for  which  papers  are  returned  for  correc- 
tions are  made  because  officers  have  not  fol- 
lowed directions  printed  on  backs  of  blanks.  The 
Paying  Quartermaster  has  offered  to  instruct 
officers  or  their  clerks  in  proper  methods  of  mak- 
ing these  papers  but  very  few  have  availed  them- 
169 


National  Service  Library 

selves  of  the  offer.  He  has  also  passed  and  paid 
on  every  voucher  however  irregularly  made,  that 
gave  the  facts  necessary  to  ascertain  amounts 
due.  Though  he  considers  ample  time  and  oppor- 
tunity has  been  given  all  company,  troop,  battery 
and  detachment  commanders  to  learn  to  submit 
proper  documents,  upon  which  payment  is  to  be 
made,  and  that  in  future  he  will  expect  from 
state  organizations  the  same  compliance  in  form 
and  substance  as  is  required  of  regular  organi- 
zations. The  attention  of  all  officers  responsible 
for  the  rendering  of  pay  rolls  or  final  statements 
is  called  to  the  foregoing  statement.  Officers  are 
responsible  that  their  men  receive  their  just  dues 
while  in  the  service  and  when  about  to  be  sepa- 
rated from  it,  and  any  failure  to  secure  such  jus- 
tice through  carelessness  or  neglect  is  most  cul- 
pable on  the  part  of  an  officer.  For  the  sake  of 
the  men  dependent  upon  him,  as  has  been  repeat- 
edly emphasized,  every  officer  should  read  his 
orders,  read  instructions  on  all  documents,  carry 
them  out." 

The  officer  who  signs  a  pay  roll  as  being  cor- 
rect (generally  the  troop,  battery,  or  company 
commander)  is  responsible  that  it  is  correct,  and 
in  case  an  overpayment  is  tmade  and  cannot  be 
collected  from  the  man  overpaid  it  is  a  just  claim 
against  the  officer  signing  the  pay  roll,  and  under 
army  regulations  will  be  stopped  against  his  pay. 

Post  exchange  and  company  councils  of  admin- 
170 


Routine  Duties  of  Officers 

istration  are  assembled  to  audit  the  exchange 
company  funds  respectively,  to  ascertain  and  ex- 
amine sources  from  which  they  have  accrued 
and  to  recommend  expenditures  therefrom.  The 
post  exchange  officer  and  company  commanders 
are  respectively  the  custodians  of  the  exchange 
and  company  funds. 

The  post  exchange  and  company  councils  will 
meet  at  the  end  of  each  month  and  when  neces- 
sary. .  .  .  The  company  council  will  consist  of 
all  officers  on  duty  with  the  company. 

The  company  commander  will  keep  an  account 
of  the  company  fund  and  also  a  complete  list 
of  property  with  cost  thereof  purchased  from 
said  fund.  The  company  fund  account  will  be 
inspected  by  the  post,  regimental,  battalion  or 
squadron  commander  at  least  once  each  quarter. 

A  company  council  book  may  be  obtained  from 
the  quartermaster  and  a  record  should  be  kept 
as  laid  down  therein.  The  company  commander 
should  keep  this  council  record  himself,  but  it 
is  good  policy  to  leave  the  book  in  the  orderly 
room  subject  to  the  inspection  of  the  noncom- 
missioned officers  and  men.  As  far  as  possible 
company  funds  should  be  kept  in  the  bank  and 
the  company  commander  make  payments  wher- 
ever possible  by  check. 

Company  commanders  will  make  a  complete 
inspection  of  their  organizations  under  arms 
every  Saturday.  They  will  also  make  a  daily 
171 


National  Service  Library 

inspection  of  the  men's  quarters  and  kitchens, 
giving  particular  attention  to  cleanliness  and  the 
proper  preparation  of  food. 

He  will  cause  the  enlisted  men  of  the  company 
to  be  numbered  and  divided  into  squads,  each 
under  the  charge  of  a  noncommissioned  officer 
who  should  be  held  responsible  for  the  soldierly 
conduct  of  his  squad.  As  far  as  practicable  the 
men  of  each  squad  will  be  quartered  together. 

In  quarters  the  name  of  each  soldier  will 
be  attached  to  his  bunk,  arms  will  be  kept  in 
racks,  and  accouterments  will  be  hung  up  by 
the  belts. 

Strict  attention  will  be  paid  by  the  company 
commanders  to  the  cleanliness  of  the  men  and  to 
the  police  of  the  barracks  or  tents.  The  men 
will  be  required  to  bathe  frequently.  In  garri- 
son, and  whenever  practicable  in  the  field,  they, 
will  be  required  to  wash  their  hands  thoroughly 
after  going  to  the  latrines  and  before  each  meal, 
in  order  to  prevent  the  transmission  of  typhoid 
fever  and  other  diseases  by  germs  taken  into  the 
mouth  with  food  from  unclean  hands.  The  hair 
will  be  kept  short  and  the  beard  neatly  trimmed. 
Soiled  clothing  will  be  kept  in  the  barrack  bag. 

A  thorough  police  of  barracks  will  precede  the 
Saturday  inspection.  The  chiefs  of  squads  will 
see  that  bunks  and  bedding  are  overhauled, 
floors,  tables  and  benches  scoured,  arms  and  ac- 
couterments and  clothing  in  the  best  order,  and 

1/2 


Routine  Duties  of  Officers 

that  such  as  have  passes  leave  the  post  in  proper 
dress. 

Clothing,  equipments,  and  shoes  will  be  fitted 
to  the  men  under  the  direction  of  an  officer. 

Articles  of  public  property  issued  to  a  com- 
pany for  its  exclusive  use  will  be  marked,  when 
practicable,  with  the  number  or  letter  of  the  com- 
pany and  number  and  arm  of  the  regiment.  Such 
articles  issued  to  an  enlisted  man  (arms  and 
clothing  excepted)  will  be  marked,  when  practi- 
cable, with  the  number  of  the  man,  letter  or  num- 
ber of  the  company,  and  number  of  the  regiment. 
Haversacks,  canteens,  and  similar  articles  of 
equipment  will  be  uniformly  marked  on  the  out- 
side as  follows:  crossed  rifles  with  the  number 
of  the  regiment  above  and  the  letter  of  the  com- 
pany below  the  intersection.  The  design  will 
be  stenciled  in  black,  the  letters  and  numbers  in 
full-faced  characters.  The  design  will  be  placed 
above  the  letters  "U.S."  on  equipments,  and  the 
soldier's  number  in  characters  one  inch  high  be- 
low the  letters  "U.S." 

In  camp  or  barracks  the  company  commander 
will  supervise  the  cooking  and  messing  of  his 
men.  He  will  see  that  suitable  men  in  sufficient 
numbers  are  fully  instructed  in  managing  and 
cooking  the  ration  in  the  field ;  also  that  necessary 
utensils  and  implements  in  serviceable  condition 
for  cooking  both  in  garrison  and  field  are  always 
on  hand,  together  with  the  field  mess  furniture 
173 


National  Service  Library 

for  each  man.  By  proper  forethought  the  mess 
sergeant  and  cooks  should  have  had  a  course  at 
the  Army  School  for  Cooks.  Kitchens  will  be 
placed  under  the  immediate  charge  of  a  mess 
sergeant  who  will  be  held  responsible  for  their 
condition  and  for  the  proper  use  of  rations.  No 
one  will  be  allowed  to  visit  or  remain  in  the 
kitchen  except  those  who  go  there  on  duty  or  are 
employed  therein.  The  greatest  care  will  be  ob- 
served in  cleaning  and  scouring  cooking  utensils. 

Special  regulations  for  soldiers'  fare  cannot  be 
made  to  suit  each  locality  and  circumstance.  Per- 
sonal care  and  judgment  on  the  part  of  company 
officers  are  relied  on  to  prevent  waste  or  misuse. 
By  due  economy  the  ration  allowance  will  pro- 
vide sufficient  variety  of  diet. 

Kitchen  and  tableware  and  mess  furniture  will 
be  supplied  by  the  Quartermaster  Corps.  Allow- 
ances will  be  announced  in  orders.  Commanders 
will  enforce  rigid  economy  in  regard  to  such 
property.  Articles  broken,  lost  or  damaged  will 
be  charged  to  individuals  at  fault.  Such  propor- 
tions of  company  allowances  of  fuel,  illuminating 
supplies,  brooms,  and  scrubbing  brushes  as  may 
be  necessary  for  the  service  of  a  general  mess 
will  be  allotted  by  the  post  commander. 

The  Manual  for  Army  Cooks  contains  com- 
prehensive instructions  in  cooking  which  will  be 
observed  as  far  as  practicable.  (See  Appendix 
VI  for  Report  of  Administration.) 

174 


Ill 

The  Development  of  a  Military 
Policy 

IN  the  introductory  sketch  of  training  in  the 
United  States  army  it  was  evident  that  there  has 
been  no  national  policy,  and  the  only  consistent 
school  of  war  in  the  United  States  has  been  war 
itself,  and  with  the  exception  of  the  Civil  War 
all  were  minor  campaigns,  whose  lessons  were 
promptly  forgotten,  and  the  sacred  fire  of  expe- 
rience only  kept  burning  by  the  selected  few  of 
our  spirited  veterans,  who  themselves  hardly 
digested  and  interpreted  what  had  happened. 

After  each  war  there  was  a  Congressional  Com- 
mission of  investigation  whose  conclusions  were 
neglected  or  forgotten,  certainly  they  were  not 
taken  advantage  of,  and  until  Mr.  Root  became 
Secretary  after  the  Spanish  War  there  was  no 
statesman  who  tried  to  give  effect  to  the  plain 
and  pitiful  lessons  learned.  There  was  no  organ- 
ization or  body  of  officers  in  the  army  itself  that 
did  so.  There  was  thought  to  be  no  need  of  it, 
because  Americans  and  American  statesmen  be- 
lieved in  the  face  of  evidence  that  each  war  would 
be  the  last. 

175 


National  Service  Library 

After  each  war  also  the  nation  felt  strong  in 
the  training  and  power  given  it  by  the  war 
itself,  especially  after  the  Civil  War,  when  in 
the  pride  of  power  it  could  dictate  and  enforce 
its  policies.  And  it  was  apparently  confirmed  by 
the  Spanish  War  that  we  could  always  handle 
our  minor  campaigns  on  the  frontier  and  in  the 
islands  of  the  sea  with  one  hand  and  it  trusted  in 
Providence  and  the  latent  power  of  great  re- 
sources for  the  great  wars  with  first-class  powers 
which  was  easily  hoped  would  never  come.  Mr. 
Root,  however,  with  his  great  analytical  mind  and 
determined  statesmanship,  interpreted  the  na- 
tional misadventures,  and  after  the  report  of  the 
war  investigating  commission  at  the  end  of  the 
Spanish  War  proposed  to  Congress  a  well- 
thought-out  plan  and  policy  for  the  future.  He 
sent  abroad  to  the  armies  of  the  nations  in  arms 
selected  commissions  of  our  foremost  generals 
like  unto  those  of  General  Sheridan  and  others 
after  the  Civil  War,  whose  reports  had  been 
buried  in  the  files  of  the  War  Department  and 
only  resurrected  during  his  administration, 
among  them  that  most  valuable  and  far-reaching 
report  on  the  military  policy  of  the  United  States 
by  General  Emery  Upton. 

With  this  report  as  the  beacon  light,  and  the 

discriminating  experiences  of  such  generals  as 

Ludlow,  Sanger,  Young,  Wood,  Corbin,  Chaffee, 

Bell,  Bailey,  Wotherspoon,  Carter,  McClernand, 

176 


Development  of  a  Military  Policy 

Parker  and  others,  who  visited  the  army  maneuvers 
in  Europe  prior  to  the  Great  War,  he  and  his  suc- 
cessors tried  to  prepare  the  country  for  the  one 
great  problem  it  could  not  handle  out  of  hand, 
that  of  war  with  a  first-class  power.  The  regular 
army  itself  had  to  be  jolted  and  brought  to  a  real- 
izing sense  of  its  weakness  and  ineptitude  and 
made  to  think  on  a  great  scale  commensurate  with 
the  power  and  resources  of  the  country  in  men 
and  supplies. 

Mr.  Root  founded  the  War  College  and 
fathered  courses  of  work  and  studies  be- 
ginning with  the  academic  education  at  West 
Point  and  the  continued  professional  education 
of  the  army  through  the  different  army  schools, 
particularly  that  of  the  line  and  the  staff  at  Fort 
Leavenworth. 

In  1903  he  persuaded  Congress  to  a  rad- 
ical organization  of  the  army,  and  the  crea- 
tion of  a  chief  of  staff  as  the  military  adviser 
to  the  President  and  the  Secretary  of  War,  with 
the  assistants  of  the  General  Staff  appointed  at 
large  from  the  army  by  careful  and  discriminat- 
ing selection,  to  study  the  military  needs  of  the 
country  and  to  help  prepare  the  country  for 
war. 

The  chief  of  staff  was  made  the  coordinating 
head  of  the  army  and  given  great  power  and  pres- 
tige for  the  purpose  of  coordinating  and  super- 
vising the  staff  department  work,  so  that  the 
177 


National  Service  Library 

historic  failures  of  war  time  due  to  the  lack  of 
such  would  no  longer  occur. 

Up  to  this  time  there  had  never  been  any  at- 
tempt to  formulate  a  national  policy.  Upton's 
famous  report  on  the  military  policy  of  the 
United  States  showed  clearly  there  never  had 
been  such  a  thing,  and  his  proposals  for  such 
had  been  absolutely  neglected. 

In  the  years  since  the  organization  of  the  Gen- 
eral Staff,  national  policies  have  been  studied  and 
prepared  and  proposed  to  Congress,  such  as  that 
on  the  Organization  of  the  Land  Forces  of  the 
United  States  presented  to  Congress  in  1912,  a 
statesmanlike  paper  prepared  by  thei  General 
Staff  and  approved  by  the  Secretary  of  War 
after  conference  with  the  general  officers  of  the 
United  States  army.  With  this  as  a  basis  the 
General  Staff  has  formulated  policies  on  organi- 
zation, legislation,  education  and  training  which 
have  been  in  these  days  of  the  Great  War  the 
subject  of  general  information  and  discussion, 
and  have  finally  proposed  and  formulated  a 
plan  for  universal  service.  We  are  learning  the 
lessons  of  the  Great  War  now,  but  the  danger 
is  in  interpretation.  He  who  runs  may  read  all 
about  it  in  any  daily  paper. 

The  auxiliary  arms,  such  as  artillery,  flying, 
and  other  mechanical  forces,  have  been  devel- 
oped to  an  unimagined  degree.  War  correspond- 
ents, many  attaches  and  observers,  and  the  spir- 
178 


Development  of  a  Military  Policy 

ited  Americans  who  are  fighting  in  all  of  the 
continental  armies  insist  upon  our  learning  only 
from  their  own  particular  experiences.  Every 
kind  of  war  is  in  progress  in  every  part  of  the 
world  and  every  experience  should  be  studied 
and  considered  and  discriminated  for  our  own 
purposes.  I  am  minded  of  the  befuddled  Malay 
Rajah  in  Java,  disturbed  by  his  villagers  fleeing 
in  terror  from  a  great  new  beast,  dependent  in 
his  ignorance  on  the  excited  tales  poured  into 
his  ears.  One  in  the  darkness  had  felt  the  great 
beast's  tusk  and  represented  him  as  white  in 
color,  hard  as  marble  and  sharp  as  a  razor; 
another  punching  his  bulky  side  insisted  he  was 
big  and  bulky,  soft  and  tough,  black  and  hard, 
while  the  flabbergasted  man  who  had  felt  his 
tail  described  him  as  a  serpent.  So  in  the  fog 
of  this  war,  with  the  advantage  of  still  standing 
on  dry  land,  let  us  try  to  see  clearly  and  realize 
thoroughly  that  most  of  our  troubles  come  from 
the  scale  and  intensity  of  it. 

I  find  from  the  best  sources  that  all  the  great 
powers  deadlocked  or  mobile  and  victorious  are 
still  training  on  the  right  lines  of  common  expe- 
rience, and  in  general  may  be  said,  after  six 
months  of  intensive  training  of  the  soldier  in 
spirit  and  fitness  and  to  march  and  to  shoot,  he  is 
sent  to  the  front,  not  ready  for  every  kind  of 
war,  but  so  prepared  that  in  the  particular  terrain 
and  for  the  particular  experiences  into  which  he 
179 


National  Service  Library 

is  to  be  pushed  he  is  given  months  more  of  spe- 
cial training. 

For  our  purpose  I  propose  to  outline  the  Pro- 
visional Manual  of  Training  prepared  by  the 
General  Staff  and  published  under  the  authority 
of  the  Secretary  of  War  in  Official  Bulletin  No. 
2,  1914,  and  to  follow  it  with  the  experience  in 
the  Brownsville  district  where  General  James 
Parker  applied  the  abstract  principles  laid  down 
in  a  most  practical  way  on  the  largest  scale  here- 
tofore attempted  in  our  army,  and  trained  some 
thirty  thousand  American  soldiers  of  the  National 
Guard  successfully  under  the  most  trying  condi- 
tions of  system  and  climate,  so  that  in  less  than 
five  months,  although  not  ready  for  the  strain 
of  modern  war  itself,  they  were  handled  together 
in  division  maneuvers.  These  men  gathered  from 
States  as  far  distant  as  North  Dakota,  and  Vir- 
ginia, New  Hampshire  and  Texas,  Louisiana  and 
Nebraska,  Illinois  and  Colorado,  over  60  per  cent 
of  them  having  been  recruits  without  any  train- 
ing, and  having  very  different  characteristics ; 
marched  without  any  straggling,  worked  hard 
and  lived  in  the  open  without  any  sickness  to 
speak  of,  and  played  the  next  game  to  war 
so  as  to  give  a  feeling  of  pride  to  every  officer 
present. 

Synopsis  and  extracts   from  the   Provisional 
Manual  of  Training,  Bulletin  No.  2,  1914,  Vol- 
ume I,  No.  2,  Office  Chief  of  Staff: 
180 


Development  of  a  Military  Policy 

OUTLINE  OF  THE  SYSTEM 

The  training  of  troops  devolves  upon  the  officers. 
All  training  thus  centers  about  the  instruction  of  offi- 
cers. In  its  entirety,  such  instruction  presents  two 
aspects — that  received  while  serving  with  troops  and 
that  received  by  pursuing  a  special  course  of  instruction 
at  schools  established  for  the  purpose.  Regulations 
governing  the  several  established  schools  are  published 
in  War  Department  orders.  The  system  herein  laid 
down  pertains  to  the  training  of  officers  serving  with 
troops. 

Training  of  officers  serving  with  troops  begins 
with  entry  into  service  and  progresses  through  an  un- 
broken period  of  three  years  under  tutelage,  followed 
by  a  period,  not  necessarily  unbroken,  of  three  years  of 
personal  effort  under  precept  and  guidance,  with  finally 
an  indefinite  period,  extending  through  the  grade  of 
captain,  of  personal  elective  effort  under  supervision. 
It  is  assumed  that  the  periods  of  instruction  under 
tutelage  and  direct  guidance  will  serve  the  double  pur- 
pose of  establishing  a  sound  basic  knowledge  and  of 
instilling  habits  of  industry. 

The  duties  which  officers  are  called  upon  to  per- 
form are  grouped  under  the  three  heads  of  Routine 
( Duties ;  Care,  Management  and  Training  of  Troops ; 
and  Tactical  Handling  of  Troops).  The  training  of 
officers  in  the  performance  of  these  three  classes  of 
duties  consists  of  individual  instruction  in  the  theory 
and  practice  of  each  and  of  applied  training  carried  on 
simultaneously  with  the  instruction  of  the  troops. 

Routine  duties. 

Study   (self -directed  or  orderly). 

Law  and  Regulations :  Military  Law ;  International 
Law;  Rules  of  Land  Warfare;  Official  Orders, 
regulations,  manuals,  other  official  publications, 
bearing  directly  or  indirectly  upon  the  officer's 
duties.  . 

181 


National  Service  Library 

Military  Policy  and  Military  Art;  Military  Policy 
of  the  United  States ;  Strategical,  Tactical,  Lo- 
gistic, Technical,  and  Economic  Studies ;  Modern 
Languages. 

Practice. 

Command  (Organization  and  discipline) ;  Drill, 
Honors,  Courtesies,  Ceremonies,  Guard  Duty. 
Appointment  and  Reduction  of  noncommissioned 
officers  and  company  specialists.  Interior  Econ- 
omy and  Inspections  of  arms,  accouterments  and 
clothing. 

Administration  (Maintenance  and  Government) : 
Procurement,  Transportation  and  Issue  of  Sup- 
plies ;  Military  Courts  and  Commissions ;  Punish- 
ments and  Rewards. 

Training  of  Troops. 
Military  Technology. 
Individual  training: 

1.  Use  of  weapon — Small  Arms  Firing  Manual, 

fencing  manuals. 

2.  Use  of  equipment — Drill  Regulations,  General 

Orders  and  descriptive  pamphlets. 

3.  Development  of  physique  and  marching  power 

— Manual  of  Physical  Training. 

4.  Special  technique  of  the  arm  or  corps — Drill 

Regulations. 

5.  The  individual  specialist  in  the  arm  or  corps — 

Topographical  Sketching,  Signaling,  Mes- 
senger Duty,  First  Aid,  Telephony,  Agents  of 
Communication. 

Collective  training: 

Mobile  fighting  troops;  Infantry,  Cavalry,  and 
Field  Artillery — Drill  Regulations,  Manuals 
and  Orders  pertaining  to  each. 

182 


Development  of  a  Military  Policy 

Special  Troops ;  Harbor  Defense,  Signal,  Sani- 
tary, Engineers,  General  Service — Drill  Regu- 
lations, Manuals  and  Orders  pertaining  to 
each. 

Military  Economics. 
Personal  Measures : 

1.  Care  of   Person,   personal   hygiene   and   indi- 

vidual cooking — Hygiene. 

2.  Care  of  Horse,  knowledge  of  the  powers  and 

limitations  of  the  horse  and  the  conservation 
of  his  energies — Hippology. 

3.  Care    of    Equipment    and    Supplies — Care    of 

Arms,  clothing,  leather,  webbing,  and  metal 
equipment — Orders. 

General  Measures  : 

1.  Sanitary  measures  applied  to  the  command. 

2.  Prophylactic  measures  applied  to  the  command 

and  its  material. 

3.  Hippology   in    its    general    application    to   the 

command. 

Tactical  Handling  of  Troops. 
Leadership. 

Fighting  Troops :  Combat  operations  of  each  arm ; 
the  three  arms  combined ;  minor  operations.  Pro- 
tective operations ;  covering  and  exploring  de- 
tachments. Field  Service  Regulations,  Part  I. 
Drill  regulations  of  the  arm  in  conjunction  with 
those  of  other  arms. 

Special  Troops :  General  service  in  connection  with 
the  operations  of  fighting  troops.  Combat  service 
as  fighting  troops.  Field  Service  Regulations. 
Part  I.  Drill  regulations  of  the  arm  or  corps  in 
conjunction  with  those  of  all  other  arms  or  corps. 

Direction. 

Operations :  Field  Service  Regulations,  Part  II. 
Administration  :    Field  Service  Regulations,  Part  III. 


National  Service  Library 

Study. 

Instruction  from  textbooks. 
General  character  of  books. 
Regulations  dealing  with — 

1.  Drill  of  the  Arm. 

2.  Machine  Gun  Drill. 

3.  Field  Service. 

4.  Rules  of  Land  Warfare. 

5.  Tables  of  Organization. 

Manuals. 

1.  Interior  Guard  Duty. 

2.  Small  Arms  Firing. 

3.  Use  of  Hand  Arms. 

4.  Military  Hygiene. 

5.  Hippology. 

6.  Military  Topography.  [ments. 

7.  Ordnance   Pamphlets,   Arms,  and   Accouter- 

8.  Special  Manuals  of  the  Arm  or  Corps. 

9.  Instruction  orders. 

Instruction  in  the  use  of  reference  books. 
General  character  of  books. 
Regulations. 

1.  Drill  of  other  Arms  and  Corps. 

2.  Army. 

3.  Uniform. 

4.  Ordnance  Property. 

5.  Unit  Accountability. 

6.  Standing  orders  (all  sources). 

Manuals. 

1.  Equitation  and  Horse  Training. 

2.  Physical  Training. 

3.  Army  Horseshoer  (mounted  troops). 

4.  Special  Manuals  of  other  arms  and  corps. 

5.  Pack  Transportation. 

6.  Unit  Equipment  tables. 

7.  Ordnance  Supply. 

8.  Army  Cooks. 

9.  Army  Bakers. 

184 


Development  of  a  Military  Policy 

CHARACTER  AND  SCOPE  OF  THE  EXAMINATION  AS  TO  PRO- 
FESSIONAL FITNESS  OF  OFFICERS  NOT  OTHERWISE 
DECLARED  ELIGIBLE  FOR  PROMOTION. 

For  officers  of  Cavalry  and  Infantry  (including  Porto 
Rico  Regiment  of  Infantry) 

I.  ROUTINE   DUTIES — CHARACTER   AND    SCOPE    OF 
EXAMINATION 

I.  Study. 

(a)  Law  and  Regulations. 
(&)  Military  Art,  History,  and  Policy. 
Second  lieutenants : 
Manual  of  Courts-Martial.    Oral. 
Cavalry  Drill  Regulations.     Cavalry  only.     Oral. 
Definitions,   signals,   general   principles,   school 
of  the  soldier,  school  of  the  trooper,  school  of 
the  troop,  employment  of  Cavalry,  stable  duty, 
troop  inspection. 

Infantry  Drill  Regulations.  Infantry  only.  Oral. 
Part  I,  omitting  pars.  263  to  289,  and  327  to  341, 
inclusive ;  Part  II ;  Part  IV,  company  inspection 
only ;  Part  V,  Manuals  of  the  bayonet,  saber, 
tent  pitching  only. 

Army  Regulations,  Courtesies,  etc.  Oral.  Article 
XL  (1913). 

Manual  of  Interior-Guard  Duty.     Oral. 

Field  Service  Regulations.     Oral.     Part  I. 

Use  of  Special  Troops.  Oral.  Manual  of  Train- 
ing. 

Small  Arms  Firing  Manual.  Oral.  Part  III, 
Chapters  I,  II,  III,  only. 

First  lieutenants  : 

A  treatise  on  the  Military  Law  of  the  United 
States  (Davis).  Oral.  Chapters  XIII  to  XIX, 

185 


National  Service  Library 

inclusive.  The  examination  to  take  the  form  of 
presenting  concrete  cases  to  the  officer  for  an 
application  of  the  law. 

Cavalry  Drill  Regulations.  Cavalry  only.  Oral. 
The  School  of  the  Squadron ;  the  Regiment. 

Infantry  Drill  Regulations.  Infantry  only.  Oral. 
Those  portions  not  required  of  Second  Lieu- 
tenants. 

Army  Regulations.  Oral.  Articles  I  to  XV  and 
XXIX  and  XXX  (1913). 

Modern  Studies.  Choice  of  one  foreign  lan- 
guage ;  a  tactical  study ;  or  a  study  in  world 
politics.  Or,  in  lieu  of  any  of  the  above  any 
special  study  chosen  from  the  list  of  elective 
Special  Studies.  Manual  of  Training,  Elective 
Course.  Oral. 

Captains : 

International  Law.  Oral.  Elements  of  Inter- 
national Law  (Davis),  Chapters  I  to  IV,  in- 
clusive, and  IX  to  XIV,  inclusive.  Rules  of 
Land  Warfare. 

Military  History  and  Policy.    Written. 

i.  A  campaign  of  the  officer's  selection,  studied 
previous  to  examination  and  a  written  study 
presented  at  time  of  examination.  The  study 
to  cover : 

(o)  The  strategy  and  general  conduct  of  the 
campaign. 

(6)  Detailed  study  of  the  tactics  employed; 
a  deduction  of  basic  principles,  of  subsidiary 
principles  or  fallacies,  and  a  statement  of  the 
officer's  judgment  as  to  the  effect  of  modern 
arms,  equipment,  and  means  of  communication 
upon  application  of  principles.  Dates,  names, 
and  exact  strength  and  composition  of  forces 
are  not  required  to  be  memorized. 

186 


Development  of  a  Military  Policy 

II.  Practice, 
(a)  Command. 
(&)  Administration. 
Second  lieutenants: 

Paper  Work.  Written.  Preparation  of  the  or- 
dinary returns,  rolls,  requisitions,  and  other 
papers  with  which  an  officer  must  be  familiar 
in  order  to  perform  the  duties  of  a  battalion 
adjutant,  quartermaster,  and  commissary,  and 
company  commander  in  post  and  in  the  field. 
The  officer  will  be  furnished  the  necessary 
blank  forms  and  will  be  permitted  to  consult 
any  official  source  of  information  to  which  he 
would  in  practice  refer  in  the  preparation  of 
papers. 

Cavalry  Drill.  Practical.  The  officer  to  demon- 
strate his  ability  to  maneuver  a  platoon  or  troop 
at  war  strength. 

Infantry  Drill.  Practical.  The  officer  to  demon- 
strate his  ability  to  instruct  and  maneuver  a 
platoon  or  company  at  war  strength. 

The   introduction   to   the   manual   of   Training. 
Oral. 

Field  Service  Regulations,  Part  II. 
First  lieutenants: 

Paper  Work.  Written.  Preparation  of  regi- 
mental papers.  The  officer  will  be  permitted  to 
refer  to  any  official  sources  of  information  he 
may  desire. 

Cavalry  Drill.  Practical.  The  officer  to  demon- 
strate his  ability  to  instruct  and  maneuver  a 
troop  at  war  strength:  (a)  Close  Order;  (6) 
Extended  Order. 

Infantry  Drill.  Practical.  The  officer  to  demon- 
strate his  ability  to  instruct  and  maneuver  a 
company  at  war  strength:  (a)  Close  Order; 
(&)  Extended  Order. 

I87 


National  Service  Library 

Military  Policy  of  the  United  States  (Upton). 
Oral.  General  knowledge  only  required.  De- 
tails not  required. 

Field  Service  Regulations,  Part  III. 
Captains : 

The  officer's  record  of  administrative  ability  as 
shown  by  his  efficiency  record  will  be  furnished 
the  examining  board  who  will  determine 
whether  the  officer  should  be  further  examined. 

Cavalry  Drill.  Cavalry  only.  Practical.  The 
officer  to  demonstrate  his  ability  to  instruct  and 
maneuver  a  squadron  or  regiment  at  war 
strength:  (a)  Close  Order;  (&)  Extended 
Order. 

Infantry  Drill.  Infantry  only.  Practical.  The 
officer  to  demonstrate  his  ability  to  instruct  and 
maneuver  a  battalion  or  regiment  at  war 
strength:  (a)  Close  Order;  (&)  Extended 
Order. 

II.  TRAINING  OF  TROOPS — CHARACTER  AND  SCOPE 
OF  EXAMINATION 

I.  Technology. 

(o)  Individual  Technique: 

1.  General  Service. 

2.  Cavalry  and  Infantry. 

(fr)  Collective  Technique. 
Second  lieutenants : 

1.  Use  of  Weapons.     Practical.    The  officer  to 

illustrate  the  prescribed  methods  of  teach- 
ing individual  skill  with  the  rifle,  pistol, 
bayonet  or  saber. 

2.  Use  of  Equipment.    Practical.    The  officer  to 

illustrate  the  prescribed  method  of  fitting 
and  using  each  article  of  the  accouterment 
of  a  soldier  of  his  arm  of  service. 

188 


Development  of  a  Military  Policy 

3.  Development  of   Physique.     Practical.     The 

officer  to  illustrate  his  knowledge  of  the 
Manual  of  Physical  Training:  (a)  Special 
Training  to  correct  defects;  (&)  General 
results  to  cover  any  series  of  five  calisthenic 
movements,  stating  the  object  and  scope  of 
each. 

4.  Cavalry  and  Infantry  Technique.     Practical. 

(a)  General.  The  officer  to  illustrate 
methods  of  equitation  and  horse  training 
(cavalry)  ;  demonstrate  some  special  appli- 
cation of  principles  to  horse  training  (cav- 
alry) ;  to  illustrate  the  prescribed  methods 
of  constructing  intrenchments ;  any  five 
knots  shown  on  pp.  167-168,  Engineer  Field 
Manual ;  lashings,  p.  173,  EFM ;  Holdfasts, 
p.  174,  EFM;  camp  expedients. 
(&)  Special.  Military  Topography.  The 
officer  to  make  a  sketch  of  the  area,  if 
practicable,  over  which  the  practical  exer- 
cise in  tactical  handling  will  be  held ;  other- 
wise a  road  or  position  sketch  of  reasonable 
dimensions.  Signaling.  The  officer  to  send 
and  receive  a  message  of  10  words  more  or 
less.  Resourcefulness.  The  officer  to  illus- 
trate at  least  two  expedients  of  woodcraft 
that  would  prove  useful  in  scouting. 

5.  Collective  Technique. 

Saber  Attack  en  Masse.  Practical.  Platoon. 
Drill  ground  technique  without  regard  to 
tactical  considerations. 
Bayonet  attack  en  Masse.  Drill  ground 
technique  without  regard  to  tactical  con- 
siderations. 

Fire  Direction  and  Control.  Practical.  The 
expenditure  of  20  rounds  of  rifle  ammuni- 
tion per  man  for  a  platoon  of  32  men  is 
authorized.  The  officer  to  illustrate  with- 

189 


National  Service  Library 

out  regard  to  tactical  considerations  his 
ability  to  adjust  the  fire  of  his  platoon  in 
accordance  with  the  principles  laid  down  in 
Small  Arms  Firing  Regulations. 

First  lieutenants : 

1.  The  Officer's  Record.    The  officer's  efficiency 

record  as  submitted  to  the  board  will  in- 
dicate to  what  extent  if  any  the  officer 
should  be  examined  as  prescribed  for 
second  lieutenants,  and  is  necessary  to 
establish  the  officer's  fitness  and  is  discre- 
tionary with  the  board. 

2.  Field   Fortifications.     Practical.     The  board 

will  furnish  a  detail  of  men,  the  necessary 
tools  and  material.  The  officer  will  super- 
intend the  construction  of  I  yard  of  trench 
of  a  type  designated  by  the  board. 

3.  Packing.     Practical.     The  officer  to  be  pro- 

vided with  two  uninstructed  men  and  to  in- 
struct them  in  loading  and  lashing  a  pack 
animal. 

4.  Fire  Direction  and  Control.    Practical.    The 

expenditure  of  10  rounds  per  man  for  a 
troop  of  80  men  is  authorized.  The  officer 
to  conduct  the  fire  of  his  troop  upon  a 
target  or  targets  designated  by  the  board  to 
illustrate  adjustment,  effect  and  control. 

Captains : 

i.  Fire  Direction  and  Control.  Practical.  An 
exercise  in  the  distribution  and  control  of 
infantry  fire  to  obtain  a  maximum  of  effect 
upon  a  given  target.  The  board  will  desig- 
nate the  position  to  be  occupied  by  the 
squadron  or  battalion  and  the  targets.  The 
officer  will  conduct  a  simulated  fire  to  illus- 
trate adjustment,  control,  and  effect  of  fire. 
The  tactical  employment  of  infantry  fire  is 
part  of  the  examination  in  tactical  handling 
of  troops  which  follows. 
190 


Development  of  a  Military  Policy 

II.  Economics. 

(a)  Individual  Measures. 
(&)  General  Measures. 
Second  lieutenants : 
Military  Hygiene.     Elementary.     Oral.     Care  of 

the  person. 
Hippology.     Elementary.     Care  of  the  individual 

animal. 
Care  of  arms  and  accouterments  by  the  individual. 

First  lieutenants : 

1.  Military  Hygiene :  Oral.    Sanitary  Management 

by  the  company  commander. 

2.  Hippology.    Stable  and  Horse  management  by 

the  troop  commander. 

3.  Supplies,   arms   and   accouterment.     Handling 

with  a  view  to  preservation  and  safe  keeping 
by  the  company  commander. 

Captains : 
Hygiene.     Oral.     Conserving   strength   of   men 

and  animals  on  march  and  in  bivouac. 
Hippology.    Oral.    Forced  marches. 


191 


IV 

Suggestions  for  Tactical  Training 

IT  has  been  a  long  time  an  easy  and  pat  saying 
that  the  best  school  for  war  is  war,  and  from  our 
historical  sketch  we  realize  that  wars  have  beer) 
frequent  enough  to  keep  the  professional  soldier 
trained  more  or  less  and  the  spirit  alive  even  in 
peace-loving  America.  In  the  few  years  when 
there  have  been  no  wars  at  home,  many  of  our 
military  adventurers  have  hunted  trouble  the 
world  over.  Wherever  there  has  been  a  fight 
you  will  find  some  fighting  Americans  mixing 
in:  Paul  Jones  in  Russia,  Ward  in  China, 
Walker  in  Central  America,  Kearney,  Victor 
Chapman,  Alan  Seeger,  Stewart,  Wood  and  hun- 
dreds of  others  in  France,  Shelby  in  Mexico, 
Stone  in  Egypt,  Gardiner  in  India,  Funston, 
Osgood  and  Janney  in  Cuba,  and  many  another 
unsung  hero  wherever  there  was  a  fight  for  lib- 
erty or  a  fight  for  fun.  These  all  come  back 
and  line  up  to  train  and  lead  the  crowd  of  vol- 
unteers in  our  own  wars.  But  since  peoples 
have  begun  to  think  on  war  and  the  why  and 
wherefore,  and  democracies  have  begun  to  make 
war  of  their  own  volition  for  vital  interests,  the 
192 


Suggestions  for  Tactical  Training 

best  minds  of  the  nations  have  thought  out  a 
philosophy  and  with  it  an  attendant  system  of 
physical,  mental  and  moral  training  which  has 
resulted  in  a  thorough  progressive  development 
and  training  on  the  lines  of  common  sense  and 
human  nature. 

A  Frenchman,  Le  Bon,  gave  new  food  for 
thought  in  his  psychology  of  the  crowd,  and 
the  practical  soldiers  are  applying  his  prin- 
ciples with  full  intent,  and  carrying  along  the 
routine  and  progressive  training  of  the  soldier 
with  the  suggestion  and  tender  touch  of  imagi- 
nation. 

The  old  single-minded  soldier  of  high  honor 
and  stiff,  straight  lines  in  all  his  reactions  is  now 
up  against  the  best  minds  and  interest  of  the 
nations.  He  must  not  only  train  his  men,  but 
he  must  interest  them,  and  show  them  the  reason 
why. 

Formerly  the  greatest  attention  was  given  to 
close  order  drills  and  ceremonies.  In  fact  until 
the  last  few  years  training  in  the  military  schools 
and  the  National  Guard  was  almost  entirely  con- 
fined to  this  character  of  drill.  It  was  the  excep- 
tion when  even  the  mechanics  of  extended  order 
were  thoroughly  undisturbed.  In  recent  years 
this  was  all  changed.  Close  order  drill  is  con- 
fined to  that  necessary  for  discipline.  Extended 
order  drill  occupies  the  major  portion  of  the 
time  on  the  parade  ground  and  in  the  armory, 

193 

Vol.  3— N.S.L.  7 


National  Service  Library 

but  even  this  is  only  preparatory  to  the  real 
training  of  the  soldier,  which  is  in  the  field. 

As  soon  as  possible  the  soldier  is  trained  in 
field  problems  and  exercises.  Corporals  are  given 
their  squads  and  sent  on  a  definite  mission  with 
something  to  accomplish  which  requires  them  to 
think,  decide  and  act.  More  complicated  prob- 
lems are  given  platoon  leaders  and  company  com- 
manders and  the  training  is  extended  to  the 
higher  units. 

The  commander  of  any  force  utilizes  the  period 
of  inclement  weather  in  instructing  his  subordi- 
nates in  the  theory  of  tactical  problems.  There 
is  always  an  assumed  situation  in  which  certain 
information  is  given  of  the  supposed  position 
and  strength  of  the  enemy,  definite  information 
of  our  own  forces  and  resources,  and  the  orders 
to  be  carried  out.  This  theoretical  training  accus- 
toms the  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  to 
clear  thinking  and  quick  decision. 

An  infinite  number  of  problems  can  be  worked 
out  on  any  map  and  the  same  is  true  of  any  varied 
terrain.  Some  problems  are  designed  to  teach 
certain  specific  principles,  as  for  example — a 
problem  in  control  of  fire  which  for  the  sake  of 
illustration  is  outlined  as  follows: 

On  terrain  having  approximately  one  thousand 

feet  clear  space  there  are  stationed  at  one  end  a 

number  of  umpires  with  flags ;  the  troops  are 

formed  at  the  opposite  end.     Under  orders  of 

194 


Suggestions  for  Tactical  Training 

their  commander  they  advance.  As  long  as  the 
umpires'  flags  are  down  the  formation  can  be 
continued.  When  the  umpires  raise  their  flags 
this  is  an  indication  that  the  losses  of  the  assail- 
ants are  so  great  that  the  commander  must  change 
his  formation.  For  example,  if  he  has  been 
advancing  in  squad  columns  without  firing  he 
must  throw  a  portion  of  his  men  at  least  into 
skirmish  line  and  have  them  open  fire.  When 
this  has  been  done  the  umpires'  flags  may  come 
down  indicating  that  the  superiority  of  fire  is 
with  the  attack.  The  advance  continues  in  the 
new  formation  until  the  flags  are  raised  again. 
This  necessitates  another  change.  It  means  more 
rifles  must  be  put  into  the  firing  line.  In  this 
way  the  rush  by  company  may  have  to  be  changed 
to  a  rush  by  platoon  and  again  to  a  rush  by 
squad.  Finally  the  flags  come  up  and  remain 
up  in  spite  of  every  effort  the  commander  of 
the  attack  may  make,  and  every  maneuver  he 
may  undertake.  This  means  he  must  bring  up 
reenforcements  and  the  advance  of  these  reen- 
forcements,  also,  is  controlled  by  the  flags  of  the 
umpires.  With  the  strengthening  of  the  firing 
line  the  flags  are  lowered  again  and  again  the 
commander  of  the  attack  attempts  an  advance. 
If  his  dispositions  are  unskillful  the  flags  go  up 
again  and  again  until  in  the  opinion  of  the  um- 
pires he  has  maneuvered  himself  into  a  position 
to  enable  him  to  make  the  charge. 
195 


National  Service  Library 

It  may  be  easily  seen  that  such  a  problem  will 
teach  more  than  months  of  ceremonial  or  follow- 
ing any  fixed  regulations  for  drill. 

By  far  the  major  portion  of  the  field  prob- 
lems, however,  present  a  situation  in  which  the 
enemy  is  represented  by  another  body  of  troops, 
the  soldiers  bearing  some  distinctive  mark  such 
as  a  white  or  a  red  band  around  the  headdress. 
Each  commander  is  given  an  assumed  situation 
and  instructions  which  require  the  two  bodies  to 
meet  on  some  suitable  terrain.  The  opposing 
troops  move  out,  protecting  themselves  by  patrols 
and  advance  guards.  These  come  in  contact  and 
information  is  sent  back  to  the  commanding  offi- 
cers. The  situation  develops  until  the  two  bodies 
of  troops  are  in  contact.  The  officer  capable  of 
maneuvering  into  the  most  favorable  position  is 
the  winner  of  the  problem.  In  this  way  the 
instruction  is  made  intensely  interesting  both  to 
officers  and  men  and  it  is  impossible  to  anticipate 
what  the  developments  will  be. 

I  have  recently  heard  General  Parker  talking 
to  the  assembled  officers  of  a  National  Guard 
regiment,  say  that  after  forty  years  of  work 
and  interest,  he  felt  himself  learning  something 
new  every  day.  In  a  recent  sketch  of  the  Russian 
leader  the  writer  says: 

To  begin  with,  one  should  make  it  entirely  clear  that 
there  is  nothing  haphazard  or  extemporized,  no  element 
of  mere  luck,  in  what  General  Brusiloff  has  accom- 

196 


Suggestions  for  Tactical  Training 

plished ;  no  single  factor  of  effort  or  training  or  science 
has  been  lacking  in  his  lifelong  preparation,  and  no 
element  of  devotion  or  consecration.  Heredity,  too,  has 
played  its  part,  and  early  environment  has  had  a  share 
in  the  ripening  of  his  genius. 

So  that  no  matter  what  the  rank,  every  officer 
should  be  practicing  himself  in  peace  time  with 
the  means  at  hand.  Without  the  strain  and  great 
school  of  battle,  he  can  keep  preparing  himself 
and  his  men  much  better  to-day  than  ever  before. 
Most  of  the  great  armies  of  Europe  had  no  train- 
ing in  war,  but  everyone  of  them  which  has  shown 
effective  fighting  in  the  field  prepared  both  its 
officers  and  men  by  the  more  intelligent  and  mod- 
ern methods  of  progressive  training,  and  many 
of  the  most  successful  officers  and  staff  officers 
by  what  is  known  as  the  Applicatory  System.  It 
involves  the  map  problem,  terrain  exercise,  war 
game,  maneuver  and  battle  exercise. 

Few  officers  can  learn  their  profession  on  the 
battle  field,  the  best  of  all  schools,  and  the  appli- 
cation method  of  teaching  tactics  was  involved 
in  an  effort  to  reproduce  in  peace  the  situations 
which  would  confront  an  officer  in  war,  situations 
involving  most  essential  elements  and  conditions 
of  war  excepting  the  use  of  weapons. 

The  following  extracts  from  Major  H.  B. 
Fiske's  "Notes  on  the  Solution  of  Tactical 
Problems"  will  serve  as  a  guide  to  the  military 
student. 

197 


National  Service  Library 

In  the  field,  tactical  problems  of  greater  or  lesser 
importance  are  continually  being  solved  by  officers  of 
all  ranks,  from  the  supreme  command  down  through 
the  intermediate  grades  to  that  of  captain,  and  even 
within  the  company  by  those  in  charge  of  its  patrols,  its 
pickets,  and  its  other  detachments.  Every  time  the 
captain  deploys  his  company,  except  at  a  merely  me- 
chanical drill,  every  time  he  stations  his  company  as  an 
outpost  or  as  a  support  thereof,  every  time  he  is  as- 
signed a  task  on  the  general  duty  of  security,  or  makes 
any  new  dispositions  therein,  he  is  compelled  to  arrive  at 
a  tactical  decision,  which  can  be  reached  only  by  the 
solution  of  a  new  problem.  That  problem  may  be  solved 
without  much  conscious  use  of  reason ;  but  in  any  case, 
however  simple  the  process,  the  process  nevertheless  is 
there.  And  as  one  goes  up  in  the  hierarchy  of  rank,  the 
problems  presented  for  solution  are  of  constantly  in- 
creasing importance,  if  not  of  frequency. 

Unless  there  has  been  extended  training  in  the  solu- 
tion of  problems,  even  the  simplest  one  is  liable  to 
strike  vacant  the  mind  of  the  one  who  is  suddenly  con- 
fronted with  the  responsibility  for  its  solution.  Who 
has  not  seen  the  untrained  officer,  in  the  face  of  such  a 
necessity,  utterly  unable  to  grasp  any  idea  as  to  his 
proper  action?  And  yet  the  solution  may  be  tactically 
so  simple  as  to  be  solved  instantly  by  the  trained  mind 
and  almost  by  intuition.  Still,  while  the  situation  may 
be  simple  and  the  answer  axiomatic  to  the  man  who 
knows,  yet,  like  most  military  operations,  upon  its  cor- 
rect solution  depend  perhaps  many  lives.  The  nation 
that  sends  its  men  into  war  under  officers  untrained  in 
the  solution  of  tactical  problems  is  carrying  a  tre- 
mendous responsibility ;  and  so  likewise  does  the  officer 
who  neglects  to  acquire  all  possible  previous  training. 

No  amount  of  study  of  the  theory  alone  of  the  art 
will,  by  itself,  fit  one  to  meet  the  emergencies  of  war 
with  skill  and  certainty.  To  acquire  such,  not  only 
must  its  principles  be  learned,  but  the  habit,  as  well,  of 
their  application  to  concrete  cases  must  be  established. 
A  man  might  read  volumes  on  how  to  lay  brick,  but  he 

198 


Suggestions  for  Tactical  Training 

could  hardly  attain  skill  thereat  until  he  has  long  ex- 
perience in  the  actual  handling  of  his  trowel.  The 
military  mind,  like  the  mason's  hand,  requires  practice 
in  the  use  of  its  tactical  tools  to  acquire  dexterity. 

We  do  not  have  to  wait  for  war  to  present  its  vital 
problems  in  order  to  begin  the  training  of  our  officers 
in  applied  tactics.  But  the  teaching  of  tactics  in  time 
of  peace  by  application  to  concrete  situations  requires 
no  defense.  To  confound  the  critics  of  that  system, 
one  need  but  to  point  to  the  German  army,  and  to  the 
map  of  Europe  to-day. 

The  following  extract  on  the  value  of  tactical 
studies,  is  taken  from  the  introduction  to  Buddecke's 
Tactical  Decisions : 

"However  high  may  be  duties  which  come  to  an 
officer  in  the  departments  of  education,  instruction, 
administration  and  scientific  investigation,  he  neverthe- 
less enters  upon  the  activity  corresponding  to  the  real 
character  of  his  calling  only  when  he  exercises  com- 
mand of  troops  and  when  he  exercises  such  command 
in  the  presence  of  the  enemy.  It  must  be  the  aim  of 
every  officer  to  become  at  some  time  a  commander,  to 
become  a  responsible  leader  in  action. 

"For  this  purpose  he  needs,  in  addition  to  the  de- 
velopment of  peculiar  personal  characteristics  and  in 
addition  to  experience  and  service  with  troops,  before 
all  else,  a  thorough  tactical  education. 

"The  tactical  instruction  which  an  officer  gains  in 
military  schools  and  with  troops  is  not  alone  suffi- 
cient. Study  on  his .  own  part  must  be  added.  The 
tactician  has  need,  in  his  profession,  of  steady  and 
uninterrupted  training  in  order  both  to  preserve  and 
to  develop  his  powers  once  he  has  discovered  them. 
The  commander  receives  his  education  not  only  in  the 
saddle,  but  also  at  his  desk.  This  is  proved  by  illus- 
trious examples  of  celebrated  commanders. 

"Military  history  offers  inexhaustible  material  to 
the  officer  who  wishes  to  pursue  his  education  in  tactics. 
It  leads  him  directly  to  the  conditions  of  war  and,  "by 
showing  the  ever-changing  relations  between  cause  and 

199 


National  Service  Library 

effect,  brings  him  to  a  realization  of  the  conditions 
upon  which  success  and  failure  depend. 

"Military  history,  however,  offers  only  what  is 
finished  and  completed.  The  mental  activity  exercised 
in  its  study  is  a  reproductive  one  and  its  value  to  the 
student  depends  directly  upon  the  extent  to  which  he 
is  able  to  grasp  and  synthesize  the  real  conditions  and 
their  relations  and  to  enter  into  the  thoughts  of  the 
leading  personalities. 

"The  education  of  the  tactician  demands,  in  addi- 
tion to  this,  a  productive  activity,  in  the  exercise  of 
which  he  is  confronted  by  questions  still  unsolved, 
which  he  himself  must  solve.  Therein  lies  the  worth  of 
tactical  problems,  which  are  the  more  valuable  the 
nearer  the  conditions  approach  those  of  actual  warfare 
and  the  more  latitude  they  give  for  the  exercise  of 
judgment  and  decision.  They  must  provide  the  student 
with  the  means  of  developing  his  tactical  judgment  and 
of  gaining  practice  in  the  use  of  forms. 

"The  tactician  needs  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the 
fundamental  principles  to  build  on  as  well  as  the  faculty 
of  rightly  applying  them.  Through  uncultivated  genius 
alone,  which  pays  no  attention  to  form,  he  will  never 
become  equal  to  the  difficult  problems  of  a  serious 
crisis.  Still  less  will  the  mere  theorist  be  able  to  fill 
the  position  if  his  powers  be  limited  to  the  knowledge 
of  formal  tactics. 

"That  power  of  decision  and  action  which  is  able 
to  cope  with  all  the  situations  of  war  is  gained  only  by 
developing  the  ability  to  form  a  judgment  in  technical 
matters  with  certainty. 

"Therefore  tactics  is  an  art  to  be  learned.  Like 
every  other  art,  it  demands  a  measure  of  talent,  and 
the  highest  stage  of  perfection  can  be  reached  only  by 
those  highly  gifted  at  the  start.  In  spite  of  this,  how- 
ever, the  less  gifted  can,  through  practice,  gain  a  con- 
siderable degree  of  facility,  and  many  a  tactician  has 
only  begun  to  find  out  his  powers  as  he  advanced  in 
the  knowledge  of  his  profession.  Here  also,  one  may 
say:  'industry  is  genius.' 

200 


Suggestions  for  Tactical  Training 

"It  should  therefore  be  the  aim  of  every  officer  to 
progress  through  the  individual  study  of  tactics  and 
thus  prepare  himself  for  the  highest  duties  of  his 
calling." 

We  cannot,  in  time  of  peace,  simulate  or  present  any- 
thing adequate  to  take  the  place  of  the  tremendous 
strain  under  which,  in  war,  all  commanders  reach  their 
decisions ;  whether  on  the  firing  line  under  a  decimat- 
ing hostile  fire,  or  miles  to  the  rear  in  some  splendidly 
equipped  great  general  headquarters — a  strain  which 
confuses  and  deadens  the  ordinary  mind  and  character, 
but  which  with  those  few  minds  of  the  very  highest 
order,  seems  simply  to  clarify  and  stimulate  their 
workings.  Notwithstanding  this  war-time  stimulation, 
the  military  genius  has  always,  in  peace,  been  a  great 
student  and  critic  of  his  predecessors ;  and  while  per- 
haps in  many  cases  he  has  not  laid  himself  hypothetical 
problems  for  solution,  he  has  nevertheless  persistently 
studied  and  solved  the  actual  problems  which  history 
tells  him  were  presented  to  former  commanders.  How 
very  much  more  does  the  ordinary  mind,  which  is 
crushed  and  stupefied  by  the  appalling  circumstances 
of  war,  need  all  the  guides,  landmarks,  and  resources 
of  applied,  and  long  continued  peace  training,  along 
lines  and  through  incidents  which,  at  least,  are  similar 
to  those  it  is  then  encountering. 

As  with  the  strain,  so  it  is  in  other  respects  with 
much  of  the  realism  of  war;  it  cannot  be  very  closely 
simulated.  Actual  work  on  the  ground  with  troops  in 
maneuver  furnishes  us  the  nearest  approach  thereto. 
Next  in  realism,  come  those  exercises  in  the  form  of 
tactical  rides  or  terrain  exercises  where  the  actual 
ground  is  used,  but  the  troops  are  imaginary.  But  in 
tactical  rides  and  terrain  exercises  of  all  sorts,  much 
time  is  lost  by  the  necessity  for  moving  from  point  to 
point.  In  actual  maneuvers,  time  is  again  lost,  and  the 
labor  performed  by  the  troops  is,  in  the  aggregate, 
very  great.  Much  of  the  work,  moreover,  particularly 
of  the  higher  commanders  in  the  solution  of  their 
problems,  is  in  no  wise  affected  by  the  presence  or 

2OI 


National  Service  Library 

absence  of  troops,  or  even  by  being  in  the  neighbor- 
hood of  the  terrain  where  the  problem  is  laid.  In  all 
large  movements,  movements  in  which  more  than  a 
division  is  concerned,  the  problem  frequently  is  solved 
at  a  comfortable  headquarters  and  on  the  map.  And 
many  of  the  problems  of  much  smaller  bodies  will, 
even  in  war,  be  solved  on  the  map  without  reference  to 
the  terrain,  other  than  as  there  shown.  Consequently, 
when  from  the  map  and  in  peace  time  we  state  a  situa- 
tion and  arrive  at  a  decision  upon  the  questions  in- 
volved, the  departure  from  the  actualities  of  war  is 
not  so  great  as  to  detract  too  much  from  the  value  of 
the  training  so  acquired. 

Moreover,  by  first  solving  problems  on  the  map 
during  the  portion  of  the  year  when  maneuvering  is 
difficult,  proceeding  then  to  exercises  on  the  ground  in 
which  only  officers  take  part,  we  finally  arrive  at  the 
maneuver  ground  with  the  corps  of  officers  already 
pretty  well  trained ;  and  with  the  necessity  only  of 
completing  their  education  by  correcting  the  probable 
inconsistencies  that  have  crept  in  through  the  mistakes 
of  the  imagination,  and  of  the  many  unexpected  diffi- 
culties developed  by  actual  handling  of  human  beings 
instead  of  the  iron  war-game  soldier  of  the  map  room. 
In  this  way  we  obtain  a  maximum  of  training  with  a 
minimum  of  effort,  at  least  so  far  as  the  private  sol- 
dier is  concerned ;  for  to  maneuver  throughout  the 
year,  and  get  all  of  the  training  of  our  officers  by  field 
work  alone  is  impracticable.  Field  work  to  be  of  value 
must  imitate  the  characteristics  of  war,  which  call  upon 
the  individual  for  the  most  extraordinary  physical  and 
mental  exertions.  Such  periods  in  time  of  peace  can- 
not be  long  continued  if  well  done,  and  if  not  well  done 
they  do  more  actual  harm  than  good. 


202 


V 

Special  Training 

"THE  Great  War  has  been  terribly  hard  on  the 
textbooks."  About  the  only  military  china  that 
has  not  been  smashed  are  the  primary  functions 
of  discipline  and  its  drill,  drill,  DRILL.  But  even 
the  disciplined  soldier  is  not  fit  for  fighting  until 
he  can  shoot,  and  in  an  emergency  the  quickest 
way  to  teach  men  to  shoot  is  the  system  of  firing 
full  charges  at  miniature  targets,  which  should 
be  proceeded  by  a  thorough  course  of  aiming  and 
position  drills.  In  the  field  all  formations  from 
reveille  to  retreat  should  be  under  arms.  All 
setting-up  exercises  such  as  that  laid  down  for 
ten  minutes  after  reveille  should  be  with  rifles. 

An  English  officer  states :  "In  musketry,  con- 
centrate all  your  energy  in  taking  care  of  your 
rifle  and  practicing  rapid  fire."  Of  course,  his 
experience  was  in  the  trenches,  where  the  firing 
was  seldom  over  two  hundred  yards,  and  at  that 
range  effective  rapid  fire  is  the  most  destructive 
means  yet  devised  in  warfare. 

Every  officer  should  be  thoroughly  familiar 
with  the  firing  regulations,  the  gist  of  which  has 
been  given  in  the  chapter  on  Shooting  Straight, 
203 


National  Service  Library 

in  the  first  part  of  this  book.  For  his  own  inter- 
est and  amusement,  I  strongly  urge  every  officer 
to  read  the  seventh  chapter  of  "The  First  One 
Hundred  Thousand,"  and  for  the  information 
of  those  officers  who  have  not  had  the  advantage 
of  a  course  at  the  School  of  Musketry,  the  meth- 
ods used  at  the  school  for  fire  discipline,  direc- 
tion and  control  is  published  in  Appendix  X.  I 
recommend  also  the  use  and  certain  tests  of  the 
self-contained  range  finder  now  issued  to  each 
company. 

THE  MACHINE  GUN 

Although  this  weapon  has  largely  been  devel- 
oped by  American  inventors,  and  has  been  used 
in  one  form  or  another  in  our  armies  ever  since 
the  Civil  War,  it  has  been  more  or  less  a  stranger 
in  our  midst.  The  Catling  had  been  long  known 
in  the  army,  but  very  little  used.  It  was  occa- 
sionally let  fly  at  some  lively  Indian  without  much 
effect,  or  by  the  militia  in  mob  action,  and  it  was 
handled  most  effectively  at  the  psychological  mo- 
ment by  Captain  John  H.  Parker  at  San  Juan 
Hill  in  '98,  but  has  not  been  heard  of  since,  due 
to  the  quick  and  effective  development  of  a  large 
number  of  automatics,  notably  the  Colt,  which 
was  used  with  some  effect  in  minor  campaigns  in 
the  Moro  Islands,  and  by  the  navy  in  the  Samoan 
Islands,  where  the  guns  jammed  and  resulted 
in  a  bloody  lesson.  In  fact  all  machine  guns 
204 


Special  Training 

jam  under  certain  conditions  of  superheated 
action.  It  follows  that  we  must  have  the  best  of 
guns  and  the  best  of  training  in  handling  them, 
and  above  all,  thorough  fire  discipline  and  con- 
trol, for  being  let  loose  without  proper  control 
the  ammunition  supply  is  almost  sure  to  fail. 
They  are  omnivorous  as  well  as  carnivorous. 
The  Great  War  has  developed  them  to  a  degree 
unthought  of  before,  particularly  in  the  trench 
warfare,  where  they  are  used  mostly  in  cross, 
flanking  or  enfilading  fire,  rarely  in  frontal  fire. 
Every  warring  nation  is  getting  as  many  as  pos- 
sible, and  many  kinds.  Each  kind  has  its  use  at 
the  particular  place  and  moment,  the  lightest 
ones  for  airplane  work  and  mobile  work,  and 
the  heavier  ones  for  the  trenches  and  supporting 
works.  The  officers  and  men  are  hand-picked 
for  this  class  of  work,  where  discretion  and  dis- 
cipline are  so  absolutely  needed.  An  outline  of 
practical  and  theoretical  instruction  for  machine- 
gun  companies  and  duties  for  same  is  given  in 
Appendix  XI. 

BOMBS  AND  HAND  GRENADES 

The  Great  War  has  not  only  developed  a  vast 
number  of  new  inventions  and  carried  the  old 
methods  to  the  extreme,  but  has  resurrected 
every  device  and  improvision  from  museum  and 
history.  The  bomb  and  hand  grenade,  which 
have  been  known  from  the  days  of  the  fall  of  the 
205 


National  Service  Library 

Greek  Empire  and  used  so  generally  in  the  days 
of  permanent  fortifications,  have  come  back  with 
a  new  explosive  effect  only  made  possible  by  the 
extensive  use  of  the  highest  explosives  of  to-day. 

To  quote  Captain  Beith  once  more :  "In  future 
it  is  to  be  a  case  of  'for  every  man  a  bomb  or 
two,'  and  it  is  incumbent  upon  us,  if  we  desire  to 
prevent  these  infernal  machines  from  exploding 
while  yet  in  our  custody,  to  attain  the  necessary 
details  as  to  their  construction  and  tender  spots 
by  the  humiliating  process  of  conciliating  the 
bomb  officer." 

So  far  we  have  mastered  the  mysteries  of  the 
craft,  there  appear  to  be  four  types  of  bomb  in 
store  for  us — or  rather  for  Brother  Boche.  They 
are:  (i)  The  hairbrush;  (2)  the  cricket  ball; 
(3)  the  policeman's  truncheon;  (4)  the  jam  tin. 

The  hairbrush  is  very  like  the  ordinary  hair- 
brush, except  that  the  bristles  are  replaced  by  a 
solid  block  of  high  explosive.  The  policeman's 
truncheon  has  gay  streamers  of  tape  tied  to  its 
tail,  to  insure  that  it  falls  to  the  ground  nose 
downward.  Both  these  bombs  explode  on  im- 
pact, and  it  is  unadvisable  to  knock  them  against 
anything — say  the  back  of  the  trench — when 
throwing  them.  The  cricket  ball  works  on  a  time 
fuse.  Its  manipulation  is  simplicity  itself.  The 
removal  of  a  certain  pin  releases  a  spring  which 
lights  an  internal  fuse,  timed  to  explode  the 
bomb  in  five  seconds.  You  take  the  bomb  in  your 
206 


Special  Training 

right  hand,  remove  the  pin,  and  cast  the  thing 
madly  from  you.  The  jam-tin  variety  appeals 
more  particularly  to  the  sportsman,  as  the  ele- 
ment of  chance  enters  largely  into  its  successful 
use.  It  is  timed  to  explode  about  ten  seconds 
after  the  lighting  of  the  fuse.  It  is  therefore 
unwise  to  throw  it  too  soon,  as  there  will  be 
ample  time  for  your  opponent  to  pick  it  up  and 
throw  it  back.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  unwise 
to  hold  on  too  long,  as  the  fuse  is  uncertain  in 
its  action,  and  is  given  to  short  cuts. 

Such  is  the  tactical  revolution  promised  by  the 
advent  of  the  bomb  and  other  new  engines  of 
war.  As  for  its  effect  upon  regimental  and  com- 
pany organization,  listen  to  the  plaintive  voice 
of  Major  Kemp : 

I  was  once,  only  a  few  months  ago,  commander  of 
a  company  of  two  hundred  and  fifty  disciplined  sol- 
diers. I  still  nominally  command  that  company,  but 
they  have  developed  into  a  heterogeneous  mob  of 
specialists.  If  I  detail  one  of  my  subalterns  to  do  a 
job  of  work,  he  reminds  me  that  he  is  a  bomb  expert, 
or  a  professor  of  sandbagging,  or  director  of  the 
knuckle-duster  section,  or  Lord  High  Thrower  of 
Stink  Pots,  and  has  no  time  to  play  about  with  such  a 
common  thing  as  a  platoon.  As  for  the  men,  they 
simply  laugh  in  the  sergeant  major's  face.  They  are 
"experts,"  if  you  please,  and  are  struck  off  all  fatigues 
and  company  duty !  It  was  bad  enough  when  Ayling 
pinched  fourteen  of  my  best  men  for  his  filthy  ma- 
chine guns ;  now,  the  company  has  degenerated  into 
an  academy  of  variety  artists.  The  only  occasion  upon 
which  I  ever  see  them  all  together  is  pay  day! 

207 


National  Service  Library 

To-day,  out  here,  bombs  are  absolutely  dernier  cri. 
We  talk  of  nothing  else.  We  speak  about  rifles  and 
bayonets  as  if  they  were  so  many  bows  and  arrows. 
It  is  true  that  the  modern  Lee-Enfield  and  Mauser 
claim  to  be  the  most  precise  and  deadly  weapons  of 
destruction  ever  devised.  But  they  were  intended  for 
proper  and  gentlemanly  warfare,  with  the  opposing 
sides  set  out  in  straight  lines,  a  convenient  distance 
apart.  In  the  hand-to-hand  butchery  which  calls  itself 
war  to-day,  the  rifle  is  rapidly  becoming  de  mode.  For 
long  ranges  you  require  machine  guns ;  for  short,  bombs 
and  hand  grenades.  Can  you  empty  a  cottage  by  firing 
a  single  rifle,  shot  in  at  the  door?  Can  you  extermi- 
nate twenty  Germans  in  a  fortified  back  parlor  by  a 
single  thrust  with  the  bayonet?  Never!  But  you  can 
do  both  these  things  with  a  jam  tin  stuffed  with 
dynamite  and  scrap  iron. 

So  the  bomb  has  come  into  its  own,  and  has  brought 
with  it  certain  changes  tactical,  organic,  and  domestic. 
To  take  the  last  first,  the  bomb  officer,  hitherto  a  de- 
spised underling,  popularly  (but  maliciously)  reputed 
to  have  been  appointed  to  his  present  post  through  in- 
ability to  handle  a  platoon,  has  suddenly  attained  a 
position  of  dazzling  importance.  From  being  a  mere 
super  he  has  become  a  star.  In  fact,  he  threatens  to  dis- 
pute the  preeminence  of  that  other  regimental  parvenu, 
the  machine-gun  officer.  He  is  now  the  confidant  of 
colonels  and  consorts  upon  terms  of  easy  familiarity 
with  brigade  majors.  He  holds  himself  coldly  aloof 
from  the  rest  of  us,  brooding  over  the  greatness  of  his 
responsibilities,  and  when  he  speaks,  it  is  to  refer 
darkly  to  "detonators,"  and  "primers,"  and  "time 
fuses."  And  we,  who  once  addressed  him  derisively 
as  "anarchist,"  crowd  round  him  and  hang  upon  his 
lips. 

Bombs  and  hand  grenades  have  not  been  in 
use  in  our  army  since  the  Civil  War,  although 
improvised  bombs  made  of  the  exaggerated  clam 
208 


Special  Training 

shells  of  the  Philippine  Islands  and  filled  with 
home-made  powder  and  nails  and  stones  and 
glass  and  bits  of  china  were  heaved  at  us  by 
various  Philippine  tribes  and  Moros.  To  attain 
accuracy  and  range  in  throwing  hand  grenades 
requires  preliminary  practice  with  dummy  gre- 
nades, which  are  now  issued  to  the  service  as  well 
as  rifle  grenades  for  periods  of  training.  The 
extensive  presence  of  baseball  pitchers  and 
players  in  our  service  will  enable  us  to  train 
experts  in  their  use  rapidly.  Instructions  for 
throwing  the  hand  grenades  are  laid  down  in 
Appendix  XII. 

TRENCHES 

Some  vivid  pictures  of  actual  war  to  illustrate 
the  abstract  principles  and  show  the  real  role  of 
the  officer  of  to-day  and  to-morrow.  i 

Most  of  our  interest  in  the  Great  War  and 
much  of  our  information  comes  from  the  west 
front,  where  the  armies  have  been  immobile  since 
the  battle  of  the  Marne. 

Trench  warfare  has  been  carried  on  on  a 
greater  scale  than  ever  before  and  with  unim- 
aginable violence.  Attempts  at  reaching  deci- 
sions and  of  breaking  through  have  been  by  most 
violent  assaults,  prepared  by  most  thorough  and 
overwhelming  artillery  preparation  assisted  by 
every  mechanical  contrivance  and  invention — • 
one  surprise  following  another — but  to  every 
209 


National  Service  Library 

surprise,  no  matter  how  successful  at  the  given 
moment,  has  been  at  once  improvised  an  answer. 
No  matter  how  inspiring  or  ingenious  the  me- 
chanical contrivances  of  this  war,  the  ultimate 
answer  is  in  men  and  the  man  behind  the  gun.  But 
the  individual  man  must  be  armed  cap-a-pie  and 
fully  equipped.  The  army  of  men  must  be  com- 
plete in  all  its  parts.  The  army  is  the  great 
functioning  body  and  the  infantry  is  still  the 
backbone  and  larger  part.  All  other  branches 
are  still  auxiliary.  Communications  of  the 
Signal  Corps  have  become  much  more  vital.  If 
they  are  cut,  there  is  a  failure  in  the  nerves  and 
quick  reaction  failing  in  function.  If  the  dictum 
of  the  hasty  correspondent  is  taken  and  cavalry 
all  dismounted,  whatever  army  breaks  through 
will  find  itself  hampered  in  mobility.  At  Goritz, 
where  the  Italians  had  dismounted  their  cavalry, 
finding  themselves  in  siege  operations,  the  place 
was  finally  taken  by  a  coup-de-main  and  the  road 
to  Trieste  laid  open.  They  were  unable  to  take 
quick  advantage  of  it  through  lack  of  cavalry. 
During  the  push  on  the  Somme,  vast  mounted 
forces  were  held  in  leash  for  the  break  through. 
Flying  service  has  become  the  eye  of  command, 
and  everyone  realizes  and  appreciates  its  vital 
importance.  So  with  the  engineers  and  sanitary 
units,  all  equally  and  vitally  necessary.  So  that 
with  weakness  in  any  one  thing  which  the  wel- 
fare of  the  world  has  developed,  whatever  it 
210 


Special  Training 

may  be,  and  however  apparently  minor  it  may 
be  at  the  particular  point  and  time,  in  the  stress 
of  the  great  decisive  conflict  the  smallest  weak- 
ness will  be  revealed  and  the  strong  body  crip- 
pled. So  that  the  professional  soldier,  with  all 
his  pride  in  his  particular  arm  of  the  service,  must 
never  forget  that  war  on  a  great  scale  is  the  most 
intense  strain  on  every  part,  and  that  to  have  an 
efficient  army  it  must  be  a  complete  army  in  all 
its  parts — head,  eyes,  body,  arms  and  legs  com- 
pletely functioning,  and  a  soul  inspired  and 
sensed  with  the  highest  duty  and  patriotism. 

The  scale  of  this  Great  War  has  at  times  made 
all  of  us  lose  our  bearings.  This  trench  warfare 
is  a  development  as  all  other  war  doings.  Forti- 
fied places  are  as  old  almost  as  the  first  hill  from 
which  a  man  defied  his  enemy.  But  the  use  of 
field  intrenchments  by  a  mobile  army  and  on  a 
large  scale,  was  a  development  of  our  own  Civil 
War.  Our  early  colonials  and  frontiersmen 
learned  to  fight  from  cover,  behind  trees  and 
piles  of  fence  rails  and  over  the  stone  walls  at 
the  "red  coats." 

But  the  final  development  in  America  still  can 
be  seen  in  the  terrain  of  Grant's  campaign  against 
Richmond,  and  from  the  Wilderness  where  the 
trenches  were  hasty  and  shallow,  through  Spot- 
sylvania,  North  Anna,  Totopotomy,  Bethesda 
Church,  Cold  Harbor  to  Petersburg,  where  the 
works  assumed  character  and  extent  like  unto 
211 


National  Service  Library 

those  of  the  western  front  in  Europe,  and  can  be 
followed  and  seen  to-day  and  give  the  increasing 
use  and  importance  of  field  works  as  plainly  as 
the  war  pictures  of  to-day.  The  story  of  the 
campaign  can  be  read  in  the  furrowed  earth  by 
the  professional  soldier  to-day  just  as  plainly  as 
the  scientists  and  geologists  build  up  their  his- 
tories of  the  earth's  surface  and  the  life  of  pre- 
historic times. 

To  give  a  picture  of  the  trench  life,  I  quote 
from  one  of  Hugh's  letters  home  to  Mr.  Britling : 

And  now  about  those  trenches — as  I  promised.  The 
great  thing  to  grasp  is  that  they  are  narrow.  They  are 
a  sort  of  negative  wall.  They  are  more  like  giant 
cracks  in  the  ground  than  anything  else.  But  perhaps 
I  had  better  begin  by  telling  how  we  got  there.  We 
started  about  one  in  the  morning  ladened  up  with  every- 
thing you  can  possibly  imagine  on  a  soldier,  and  in 
addition  I  had  a  kettle — filled  with  water — most  of  the 
chaps  had  bundles  of  firewood,  and  some  had  extra 
bread.  We  marched  out  of  our  quarters  along  the  road 
for  a  mile  or  more,  and  then  we  took  the  fields,  and 
presently  came  to  a  crest  and  dropped  into  a  sort  of 
maze  of  zigzag  trenches  going  up  to  the  front  trench. 
These  trenches,  you  know,  are  much  deeper  than  one's 
height;  you  don't  see  anything.  It's  like  walking  along 
a  mud-walled  passage.  You  just  trudge  along  them  in 
single  file.  Every  now  and  then  some  one  stumbles 
into  a  soakaway  for  rainwater  or  swears  at  a  soft 
place,  or  somebody  blunders  into  the  man  in  front  of 
him.  This  seems  to  go  on  for  hours  and  hours.  It 
certainly  went  on  for  an  hour ;  so  I  suppose  we  did  two 
or  three  miles  of  it.  At  one  place  we  crossed  a  dip 
in  the  ground  and  a  ditch,  and  the  trench  was  built  up 
with  sandbags  up  to  the  ditch  and  there  was  a  plank. 

212 


Special  Training 

Overhead  the.re  were  stars,  and  now  and  then  a  sort 
of  blaze  thing  they  send  up  lit  up  the  edges  of  the 
trench  and  gave  one  a  glimpse  of  a  tree  top  or  a  fac- 
tory roof  far  away.  Then  for  a  time  it  was  more 
difficult  to  go  on  because  you  were  blinded.  Suddenly 
just  when  you  were  believing  that  this  sort  of  trade 
was  going  on  forever,  we  were  in  the  support  trenches 
behind  the  firing  line,  and  found  the  men  we  were 
relieving  ready  to  come  back. 

And  the  firing  line  itself?  Just  the  same  sort  of 
ditch  with  a  parapet  of  sandbags,  but  with  dugouts, 
queer  big  holes  helped  out  with  sleepers  from  a  near-by 
railway  track,  opening  into  it  from  behind.  Dugouts 
vary  a  good  deal.  Many  are  rather  like  the  cubby- 
house  we  made  at  the  end  of  the  orchard  last  sum- 
mer ;  only  the  walls  are  thick  enough  to  stand  a  high 
explosive  shell.  The  best  dugout  in  our  company's  bit 
of  front  was  quite  a  dressy  affair  with  some  woodwork 
and  a  door  got  from  the  ruins  of  a  house  twenty  or 
thirty  yards  behind  us.  It  had  a  stove  in  it  too,  and  a 
chimbley,  and  pans  to  keep  water  in.  It  was  the  best 
dugout  for  miles.  This  house  had  a  well,  and  there  was 
a  special  trench  ran  back  to  that,  and  all  day  long  there 
was  a  coming  and  going  for  water.  There  had  once 
been  a  pump  over  the  well,  but  a  shell  had  smashed 
that. 

And  now  you  expect  me  to  tell  of  Germans  and  the 
fight  and  shelling  and  all  sorts  of  things.  I  haven't 
seen  a  live  German ;  I  haven't  been  within  two  hundred 
yards  of  a  shell  burst,  there  has  been  no  attack  and  I 
haven't  got  the  V.  C.  I  have  made  myself  muddy  be- 
yond describing ;  I've  been  working  all  the  time,  but 
I've  not  fired  a  shot  or  fought  a  ha'porth.  We  were 
busy  all  the  time — just  at  work  repairing  the  parapet, 
which  had  to  be  done  gingerly  because  of  snipers, 
bringing  our  food  in  from  the  rear  in  big  carriers,  get- 
ting water,  pushing  our  trench  out  from  an  angle 
slantinotways  forward.  Getting  meals,  clearing  up  and 
so  on  takes  a  Jot  of  time.  We  make  tea  in  big  kettles 
and  in  the  big  dugout,  which  two  whole  companies  use 

213 


National  Service  Library 

for  their  cooking,  and  carry  them  with  a  pole  through 
the  handles  to  our  platoons.  We  wash  up  and  wash 
and  shave.  Dinner  preparations  (and  consumption) 
takes  two  or  three  hours.  Tea  too  uses  up  time.  It's 
like  camping  out  and  picnicking  in  the  park.  This  first 
time  (and  next  too)  we  have  been  mixed  with  some 
Sussex  men  who  have  been  here  longer  and  know  the 
business.  It  works  out  that  we  do  most  of  the  fatigue. 
Afterwards  we  shall  go  up  along  to  a  pitch  of  our  own. 

But  all  the  time  you  want  to  know  about  the  Ger- 
mans. They  are  a  quarter  of  a  mile  away  at  this  part, 
or  nearly  a  quarter  of  a  mile.  When  you  snatch  a  peep 
at  them  it  is  like  a  low  particolored  stone  wall — only 
the  stones  are  sandbags.  The  Germans  have  them  black 
and  white,  so  that  you  cannot  tell  which  are  loopholes 
and  which  are  black  bags.  Our  people  haven't  been  so 
clever — and  the  War  Office  love  of  uniformity  has 
given  us  only  white  bags.  No  doubt  it  looks  neater. 
But  it  makes  our  loopholes  plain.  For  a  time  black 
sandbags  were  refused.  The  Germans  sniped  at  us, 
but  not  very  much.  Only  one  of  our  lot  was  hit  by  a 
chance  shot  that  came  through  the  sandbag  at  the  top 
of  the  parapet.  He  just  had  a  cut  in  the  neck  which 
didn't  prevent  his  walking  back.  They  shelled  the 
trenches  half  a  mile  to  the  left  of  us  though,  and  it 
looked  pretty  hot.  The  sandbags  flew  about.  But  the 
men  lie  low,  and  it  looks  worse  than  it  is.  The  weather 
was  fine  and  pleasant,  as  General  French  always  says. 
And  after  three  days  and  nights  of  cramped  existence 
and  petty  chores,  one  in  the  foremost  trench  and  two  a 
little  way  back,  and  then  two  days  in  support,  we  came 
back — and  here  we  are  again  waiting  for  our  second  Go. 

The  night  time  is  perhaps  a  little  more  nervy  than 
the  day.  You  get  your  head  up  and  look  about,  and  see 
the  flat  dim  country  with  its  ruined  houses  and  its 
lumps  of  stuff  that  are  dead  bodies  and  its  long  vague 
lines  of  sandbags,  and  the  searchlights  going  like  white 
windmill  arms  and  an  occasional  flare  or  star  shell. 
And  you  have  a  nasty  feeling  of  people  creeping  and 
creeping  all  night  between  the  trenches. 

214 


Special  Training 

Some  of  us  went  out  to  strengthen  a  place  in  the 
parapet  that  was  only  one  sandbag  thick,  where  a  man 
had  been  hit  during  the  day.  We  made  it  four  bags 
thick  right  up  to  the  top.  All  the  while  you  were  doing 
it,  you  dreaded  to  find  yourself  in  the  white  glare  of  a 
searchlight,  and  you  had  a  feeling  that  something  would 
hit  you  suddenly  from  behind.  I  had  to  make  up  my 
mind  not  to  look  around,  or  I  should  have  kept  on 
looking  around.  Also  our  chaps  kept  shooting  over 
us,  within  a  foot  of  one's  head.  Just  to  persuade  the 
Germans  that  we  were  not  out  of  the  trench. 

Nothing  happened  to  us.  We  got  back  all  right. 
It  was  silly  to  have  left  that  parapet  only  one  bag  thick. 
There's  the  truth,  and  all  of  my  first  time  in  the 
trenches. 

To  train  for  such  conditions,  the  increasing 
importance  of  the  right  kind  of  discipline  is 
evident.  Force  of  circumstances  and  discriminat- 
ing intelligence  is  changing  our  discipline,  in 
military  life  as  well  as  in  civil  life,  from  one  of 
extreme  coercion  to  a  discipline  of  habit — a  will- 
ing and  instinctive  obedience  as  an  intelligent 
member  of  a  great  team,  training  for  a  national 
and  well  understood  purpose. 

The  American  soldier  must  be  trained  by  ap- 
pealing to  his  common  sense,  with  an  earnest 
effort  to  encourage  individual  intelligence  and 
excellence.  The  common  knowledge  of  the  great 
efforts  of  the  contending  powers  on  the  western 
front  has  borne  in  on  everyone  of  us  the  com- 
plicated and  desperate  nature  of  every  attack. 
We  all  know  that  superiority  of  fire  must  be  pre- 
pared and  maintained.  Where  the  artillery  leaves 
215 


National  Service  Library 

off,  the  infantry  and  machine-gun  fire  and  throw- 
ing of  grenades  and  bombing  must  keep  it  up. 
The  communications  must  be  maintained  midst 
terrible  confusion  and  soul-racking  noise.  No 
commands  can  be  heard.  The  attacking  lines 
must  be  handled  by  signals  which  presupposes 
absolute  training  and  teamwork — the  thorough 
cooperation  between  all  arms.  For  the  infantry 
who  gain  and  keep  the  superiority  of  fire,  every 
individual  soldier  must  handle  his  arm  instinc- 
tively and  rapidly  and  be  controlled  and  directed 
by  officers  and  noncoms.  The  teamwork  must 
function  in  the  dark,  advancing  and  crawling  by 
the  unseen  touch  of  training  and  discipline.  The 
possibility  must  be  attained  of  rushing  forth  from 
a  line  of  shelter  at  a  short  distance  from  the 
enemy  at  any  decisive  phase  of  the  combat.  The 
sacrifice  being  resolved  upon,  it  must  be  pushed 
through  to  a  finish  and  the  enemy  drowned  under 
successive  waves.  It  is  our  duty  as  officers  to 
train  men,  both  physically  and  morally,  so  that 
the  attacks  will  be  pushed  through. 

In  order  to  break  through '  completely  it  is 
necessary : 

(a)  To  take  the  first  line  of  hostile  defense 
(the  zone  of  first  trenches  and  centers  of  re- 
sistance). 

(6)  To  take  the  second  line  of  defense. 

1  Based  on  an  article  in  the  "Infantry  Journal"  following  the  account 
of  a  French  officer. 

2l6 


Special  Training 

(c)  To  prevent  the  enemy  from  forming  be- 
yond the  zone  already  fortified,  a  barrier  by  the 
aid  of  reenforcements  brought  up  in  haste. 

There  must  be  organized  : 

First:  A  line  of  attack  formed  in  several 
waves  of  assault,  with  preparation  for  the  assault 
by  formidable  artillery  minutely  regulated. 

Second :  A  second  line  of  attack  as  strong  as 
the  first,  sent  straight  to  the  front  all  in  one  piece 
like  the  first  line,  with  groups  of  light  guns  and 
machine  guns,  all  starting  as  soon  as  the  first 
trenches  are  taken. 

Third :  A  reserve  destined  to  reenforce  any 
point  and  conquer  any  particular  strong  point. 

Fourth:  Cavalry,  autocannon,  automachine 
guns,  battalions  of  infantry  on  motor  trucks  or 
automobiles  with  pioneer  crews  to  clear  the 
roads.  Large  units  ready  to  commence  new  com- 
bat, capable  of  being  brought  up  within  two  or 
three  hours.  The  assaulting  troops  themselves 
cannot  be  depended  upon  to  do  more  than  break 
through. 

The  successive  waves  of  assault  are  each  pre- 
ceded by  selected  soldiers  and  shots  in  skirmish 
formation  at  four  to  five  paces  interval.  The 
fighting  is  very  often  at  point-blank  range  and 
the  man  should  be  trained  to  use  his  rifle  in  close 
fighting.  Teach  him  to  watch  that  part  of  the 
parapet  and  loopholes  in  which  he  marches  in 
order  to  block  the  shots  of  the  enemy;  to  aim 
217 


National  Service  Library 

rapidly,  throwing  the  piece  to  the  shoulder  to  get 
his  shot  at  the  enemy  who  is  aiming  at  him;  to 
have  his  piece  always  ready  for  close  fighting; 
to  know  how  to  load  it  quickly  lying  down  or 
while  running. 

Lieutenants  in  training  themselves  and  their 
commands  in  front  of  any  resistance  whatever, 
best  assumed  by  an  indicated  line  with  blank 
cartridges,  the  standard  idea  should  be  rapidly  to 
take  a  position  for  the  assault  in  a  line  of  shelter 
at  assaulting  distance. 

To  Assault:  This  is  only  possible  by  a  rapid 
gaining  of  superiority  of  fire.  Develop  the 
ability  to  take  in  the  situation  quickly  and  to  act 
with  rapidity  and  make  a  rapid  reconnaissance 
of  resistances.  At  varying  stages  of  the  attack 
call  out:  "Enemy  resistance  on  such  a  line,  our 
first  elements  are  stopped  at  such  a  point" — 
"Hostile  machine  guns  in  such  a  region" — "Cav- 
alry to  the  right — in  rear,"  etc.  One  well-tried 
officer  in  the  present  war  stated  that  in  nine 
months  of  campaign,  only  twice  did  he  know  a 
company  capable  of  delivering  an  assault 
properly. 

In  addition  to  the  routine  training  of  soldiers 
for  individual  shooting,  endurance  and  dis- 
cipline, there  is  needed  to-day  for  each  special 
problem  a  particular  training  in  cohesion — 
actual  work  over  the  kind  of  ground  and  against 
the  kind  of  trenches  and  obstacles  he  will  be 
218 


Special  Training 

pushed  against.  In  order  that  a  body  of  troops 
may  be  capable  of  reaching  the  enemy  it  is  neces- 
sary for  each  man  to  be  intimately  convinced 
that  his  neighbor  will  march  along  with  him  and 
not  abandon  Irm.  This  cohesion  of  comradeship 
is  very  different  from  the  days  when  the  Gauls 
were  tied  together  by  chains  to  meet  the  on- 
slaughts of  the  Romans.  The  chain  to-day  must! 
be  that  of  training  and  instinctive  habit.  The 
company  should  also  be  tried  out  by  rough  ex- 
periences in  the  field,  so  that  everyone  may  have 
been  able  to  see  what  his  leaders  and  comrades 
are  worth  under  trying  conditions.  Though 
habit,  friendship,  and  confidence  make  no  differ- 
ence in  the  appearance  of  a  company,  in  battle 
these  qualities  appear  in  their  stanchness  and 
value. 

One  French  officer  of  experience  speaks  of  the 
life  in  the  trench  as  an  excellent  school  for  cohe- 
sion, but  it  must  be  alternated  with  a  period  of 
exercise,  where  there  will  be  exercises  by  entire 
units,  close-order  drill  and  passing  in  review, 
which  should  always  close  an  exercise  period. 
All  these  contribute  to  develop  the  sentiment, 
blunted  in  the  trenches,  that  the  soldier  belongs 
to  a  unit  compact  and  articulate.  The  trench 
produces  cohesion  in  a  smaller  group — the  period 
of  exercise,  cohesion  in  the  organization.  The 
Frenchman  insists  also  upon  exact  discipline 
during  the  period  of  exercise,  impossible  in  the 
219 


National  Service  Library 

trenches,  requiring  the  punctual  marks  of  respect 
and  great  care  as  to  the  daily  aspect  of  the  com- 
pany— carefully  uniformed  and  well  disciplined. 
All  these  details  have  a  prime  moral  importance. 
Nothing  is  more  demoralizing  for  the  soldier  than 
to  see  around  him  his  comrades  badly  dressed 
and  negligent  in  their  duty.  He  at  times  drops 
into  this  convenient  carelessness,  but  at  heart 
every  soldier  would  lack  confidence  in  a  troop 
without  faith  or  order,  and  he  will  realize  it  in 
moments  of  danger.- 

SKETCH  OF  AN  ASSAULT  BY  A  FOREIGN  OFFICER 

The  artillery  preparation,  roaring  on  the  horizon 
like  a  furious  storm,  ceases  sharply  and  a  tragic  silence 
falls  over  the  field  of  battle.  The  infantry  leaves  its 
parallels  in  a  single  movement  at  a  walk,  magnificently 
aligned,  crowned  with  the  scintillation  of  thousands  of 
bayonets.  Then  the  hostile  trenches  burst  out  suddenly 
with  fire,  the  fusillade  rattles  immediately,  madly, 
dominated  by  the  pitiless  crackle  of  the  machine  guns. 
The  wave  of  assailants  thins  out,  entire  units  dis- 
appear, mowed  down.  Some  lie  down  and  advance  no 
further,  while  others,  better  commanded,  march  ahead 
in  spite  of  all.  Some,  more  favored,  find  themselves  in 
places  where  the  artillery  preparation  has  cleared  the 
enemy  out.  They  reach  the  first  trench  and  it  is  hand- 
to-hand  fighting. 

The  second  wave  arrives  in  its  turn,  avoids  the  zone 
of  destruction,  is  absorbed  in  the  parts  where  the  re- 
sistance has  weakened,  and  thus  the  first  trench,  par- 
celled out  in  partially  surrounded  fragments,  is  def- 
initely submerged  by  the  second  wave.  They  re-form 
beyond  the  taken  trench,  they  start  forward  again ;  but 
it  is  unrestrained  combat  by  groups  in  the  midst  of 
shots  and  bullets  which  cross  each  other  in  every  sense. 

22O 


Special  Training 


The  second  trench  is  reached,  certain  parts  are  con- 
quered by  which  the  flood  of  assailants  spreads  out 
while  desperate  groups  resist  obstinately  in  some 
redoubts. 

Now  in  the  first  line  of  attack  there  is  no  more 
order,  the  dead  cover  the  ground,  here  mowed  down 
by  ranks,  there  hung  in  the  wire  entanglements  like 
grapes  on  the  vine,  or  forming  a  crown  at  the  summit 
of  the  parapets,  or  sown  here  and  there  by  the  scatter- 
ing of  the  hand-to-hand  fights ;  the  wounded  flow  back 
in  numbers  to  the  rear,  the  isolated  are  straggling  in 
all  corners  for  the  most  diverse  reasons ;  even  organi- 
zations are  stopped  in  the  conquered  trenches  by  their 
chiefs  finding  that  they  have  done  enough,  and  that  it 
is  high  time  to  get  out  of  the  trouble.  But  beyond  this 
immense  dispersion  some  heroic  groups,  weak  nuclei 
of  multiple  companies,  led  by  ardent  chiefs,  make  their 
way  further  into  the  hostile  territory.  They  suddenly 
appear,  urged  into  a  gallop  over  the  trenches ;  magnified 
ten  times  by  the  imagination  of  the  enemy  who  loses 
his  head,  they  run  beyond  into  the  open  fields,  receiv- 
ing some  shots  here  and  there  but  surprised  at  the 
emptiness  of  the  field  of  battle.  Behind  them  the  com- 
bat of  extermination  continues  in  places,  but  nothing 
follows,  only  some  groups  of  isolated  and  wounded  are 
returning.  Then  these  foremost  parties  feel  their  weak- 
ness and  take  note  of  it ;  the  emptiness,  the  silence,  the 
invisible  resistance  impress  them,  they  scent  the  ambush 
and  soon  stop. 

In  front  of  the  centers  of  resistance  the  fight  is  hard 
and  murderous ;  they  have  taken  one  or  two  trenches, 
carried  the  first  houses,  but  the  organizations  are 
melted  in  the  interminable  individual  fighting  in  the 
ruins ;  here  the  progress  has  been  almost  nothing  in 
spite  of  enormous  losses. 

Thus  the  first  line  has  made  its  effort ;  in  the  centers 
of  resistance  it  has  scarcely  gotten  a  good  hold  on  the 
exterior  borders ;  in  the  intervals,  on  the  contrary,  it 
has  largely  expanded  like  a  wave  which  had  broken 
through  a  dike  at  one  point.  But  it  has  been  stopped, 

221 


National  Service  Library 

out  of  breath,  in  front  of  the  second  line  of  defense, 
whose  resistance  is  organizing,  or  it  has  been  nailed  to 
its  place  by  flanking  fire  from  the  still  unconquered 
centers  of  resistance ;  it  is  composed  from  now  on  of 
feeble  groups  of  veritable  fighters,  just  strong  enough 
to  mark  out  here  and  there  the  limits  of  the  conquered 
ground,  and  of  a  multitude  of  isolated  individuals  and 
entire  units  which  are  scattered  over  the  whole  zone  of 
attack. 

This  has  all  lasted  perhaps  less  than  an  hour. 

Action  of  the  Second  Line  of  Attack:  With  the 
enemy  all  in  disorder,  the  batteries  flee  at  a  gallop 
before  the  tide  which  has  carried  away  all  the  ob- 
stacles prepared  long  ago  and  judged  impregnable;  all 
confidence  disappears ;  the  adversary,  feeling  the  re- 
sistance giving  way  around  him  no  longer  dares  to  hold 
out  desperately,  from  now  on  the  least  thing  induces 
him  to  turn  tail.  However,  on  some  points  reserves 
have  come  up,  have  manned  their  positions  of  the 
second  line  and  have  attempted  some  timid  counter- 
offensive.  Machine  guns,  rapidly  brought  up,  are  in- 
stalled and  fire  with  all  haste  to  prevent  access  to  the 
open  zones  of  the  defender  and  to  gain  time.  The 
tottering  resistance  tries  to  hold  on ;  now,  one  more 
great  brutal  push  along  the  whole  point  like  the  at- 
tack of  the  first  line,  and  then  will  come  the  desper- 
ate rout. 

It  is  then  that  the  second  line  appears;  starting  out 
in  its  turn  from  the  parallel,  it  advances  by  immense 
and  successive  waves  of  thin  lines,  calm  and  unshakable 
among  the  rafales  of  shells  and  spent  bullets. 

Already  numerous  detachments  of  machine  guns 
and  light  cannon  have  preceded  it.  Creeping  through, 
following  up  the  first  line,  they  have  been  able  to  un- 
ravel the  situation  and  take  account  of  the  points 
where  the  resistance  seems  to  be  desperate  and  needs 
to  be  immediately  swept.  The  light  cannon  orient  them- 
selves directly  on  the  rattling  of  the  machine  guns, 
which  they  endeavor  to  overwhelm  with  a  shower  of 
their  small  shells. 

222 


Special  Training 

The  accompanying  batteries  have  started  as  soon  as 
the  first  trenches  are  taken ;  they  are  soon  oriented  by 
the  signals  of  the  special  agents  of  liaison — artillery 
men  who  follow  the  infantry.  The  remainder  of  the 
artillery  cuts  off  the  approaches  by  a  barrier  of 
asphyxiating  shells  and  carries  its  fire  on  to  the 
second  line  marked  out  according  to  the  directing 
plan. 

Thus  the  second  line  arrives  close  up  to  the  advanced 
elements  of  the  first  line  under  cover  of  sufficient  fire. 
The  second  line  pushes  straight  to  the  front  on  the 
objectives  fixed  long  before  and  which  should  claim  its 
whole  attention. 

Certain  of  the  units  have  a  mission  to  block  off  the 
centers  of  resistance  by  finishing  up  the  conquest  of 
their  exterior  borders,  while  the  great  majority  is 
absorbed  in  the  intervals,  instead  of  being  halted  and 
played  out,  playing  the  game  of  the  adversary  in  his 
inextricable  points  of  support. 

To  quote  an  expression  in  "A  Midsummer  Night's 
Dream,"  modifying  it  slightly,  a  center  of  resistance  is 
a  filter  into  which  one  pours  battalions  and  regiments; 
it  will  yield  only  a  few  drops. 

The  organizations  passing  through  the  intervals 
arrive  in  front  of  the  second  line  of  defense,  which  is 
not  in  general  occupied  in  a  continuous  manner.  They 
run  against  lively  and  sudden  resistances,  or  else  en- 
counter empty  spaces  through  which  they  boldly  pene- 
trate, pushing  straight  on  always  to  the  front,  without 
being  intimidated  by  the  silence  or  distracted  by  the 
resistance  on  the  right  or  left.  The  units  stopped, 
rapidly  organize  the  assault  and  attack  by  main  force 
like  the  first  waves  of  the  attack,  without  trying  to 
maneuver,  a  temptation  of  weakness  and  indecision. 
Here  again  is  found  hesitation ;  units  held  up  by  only 
a  semblance  of  resistance  or  trying  to  avoid  it;  others 
having  approaches  to  assaulting  distance  dig  in  and 
dare  not  go  forward  openly  into  a  supreme  charge. 
Others  are  turned  away  from  their  objective  to  get  into 
another  combat,  which  absorbs  them. 

223 


National  Service  Library 

However,  the  second  line  of  hostile  defense  finds 
itself  in  its  turn  disabled,  broken  in  and  notably  passed 
by  in  certain  localities,  assailed  vigorously  on  all  points 
where  a  resistance  is  improvised  in  haste ;  it  is  soon 
parcelled  out  in  islands  and  surrounded  in  all  parts. 

Action  of  Reserves:  We  are  now  nearly  in  open 
ground ;  we  must  still  definitely  clear  away  the  last 
resistances  which  the  hostile  reenforcements  now  com- 
ing up  in  haste  will  strengthen  and  soon  convert  into 
an  insuperable  barrier  if  we  give  them  a  few  hours' 
respite. 

It  is  for  this  purpose  that  we  employ  the  reserves. 

Officers  of  liaison,  who  are  not  afraid  to  traverse 
the  battle  field  to  find  out  how  things  are  going  on,  and 
who  do  not  abandon  the  troops  to  their  own  resources 
until  tardy  reports  come  in,  obtain  the  information  for 
the  superior  commander,  who  directs  his  reserves  to 
the  precise  points  where  they  are  most  needed. 

Thus  are  definitely  broken  by  the  reserves  the  last 
resistances  which  the  second  attacking  line,  occupied 
with  marching  straight  ahead,  was  not  able  to  encircle. 

Exploitation  of  the  Success:  Finally,  we  have  arrived 
in  the  zone  of  open  country,  the  gigantic  assault  of 
five  or  six  kilometers  is  ended.  Now  it  will  be  the 
surprise,  the  rapidity  of  movements,  the  skill  of 
maneuver  which  will  gradually  produce  panic. 

MARCHING  AND  MOVEMENT  OF  INFANTRY 

•Marching  experience  and  discipline  have  been 
rather  fully  covered  in  the  part  on  that  subject 
in  the  first  part  of  the  book,  but  several  additional 
points  come  to  mind  may  be  added.  During 
the  maneuvers  in  the  Brownsville  district,  several 
Iowa  battalions  developed  the  happy  habit  of 
singing  while  on  the  march,  cheering  them  up 
and  preventing  tediousness  and  fatigue,  which 
224 


Special  Training 

originate  in  the  mind  as  well  as  in  the  body. 
Just  as  "A  Hot  Time  in  the  Old  Town  To-night" 
quickly  became  the  popular  soldier  song  of  the 
Spanish  War,  so  the  regimental  tune  and  song  of 
the  Third  Cavalry  (mounted  rifles)  "Green  Grow 
the  Rushes  O !"  was  sung  by  the  army  through- 
out the  Mexican  War  and  gave  the  Mexicans 
their  popular  term  gringo.  General  Parker  sug- 
gested  that  in  each  battalion  a  quartet  or  sextet 
of  trained  singers  be  organized  to  lead  in  singing 
a  list  of  airs  known  to  the  men,  such  as  college 
songs,  negro  melodies,  and  Civil  War  songs,  as 
"Tramp,  Tramp,  Tramp,  the  Boys  Are  March- 
ing," "Rally  Round  the  Flag,"  etc.,  be  selected. 
Special  privileges  were  given  to  encourage  the 
singers.  The  proper  place  for  the  selected  band 
is  a  little  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  column  in 
order  that  their  voices  may  be  heard  from  front 
to  rear. 

During  the  past  summer  on  the  border  large 
bodies  of  troops  were  moved  quickly  over  great 
distances  in  motor  trucks.  Three-ton  trucks  be- 
ing lined  up  in  column,  whole  regiments  were 
loaded  in  less  than  a  minute  by  the  following 
system:  Regiments  to  be  lined  up  opposite  the 
trucks  and  thirty  men  being  assigned  to  each 
truck,  the  front  rank  mounted  the  truck  from  the 
front  end  and  the  rear  rank  mounted  from  the 
rear  end,  the  rations  and  equipments  being  in  the 
bottom  of  the  truck,  and  being  in  some  cases 
225 

Vol.3— N.S.L.8 


National  Service  Library 

used  for  seats.  In  some  instances  baled  hay  was 
so  used  and  for  long  distances  cross  seats  pro- 
vided. 

In  our  country  such  long  distances  are  trav- 
eled by  rail  that  it  seems  proper  to  lay  down 
rules  for  the  conduct  of  troops  traveling  by  rail- 
road. (Appendix  XV.) 


226 


VI 

A  System  of  Intensive  Training 

THE  following  is  a  general  outline  of  the 
practical  training  of  General  Parker's  command 
in  the  Brownsville  district,  from  July  I  to  Decem- 
ber i,  1916. 

OUTLINE  OF  TRAINING:  PERSONNEL 

General  Parker  in  command  of  the  Brownsville 
district,  which  extended  along  the  Rio  Grande 
from  its  mouth  for  some  hundreds  of  miles,  with 
a  command  of  four  regiments  of  infantry,  three 
scattered  batteries  of  artillery,  and  various 
auxiliary  detachments  of  the  auxiliary  arms,  was 
engaged  in  patrolling  and  protecting  the  border, 
when  he  was  suddenly  confronted  with  the  prob- 
lem of  handling,  supplying,  and  training  some 
thirty  thousand  National  Guard  troops,  hurriedly 
pushed  into  the  district  from  States  all  over  the 
Union,  the  highest  commands  arriving  being  bri- 
gades, together  with  regiments  of  infantry,  de- 
tachments of  all  other  arms,  mostly  without 
animals  or  other  transportation,  partly  equipped 
and  supplied.  Over  60  per  cent  of  these  troops 
were  raw  recruits,  most  of  the  officers  inexperi- 
227 


National  Service  Library 

enced  in  any  but  the  ordinary  State  militia  func- 
tions, with  many  divergent  systems  of  supply  and 
administration,  and  under  laws  and  regulations  of 
many  different  States.  As  they  arrived  they  were 
at  once  organized  into  a  division  and  several  sep- 
arate brigades.  General  Parker  at  once  increased 
his  general  staff  and  technical  staff  by  a  training 
staff  of  hand-picked  regular  officers,  at  the  head 
of  which  was  Major  L.  F.  Kilbourne,  Twenty- 
sixth  Infantry,  a  graduate  of  West  Point  and  the 
Service  Schools  of  Fort  Leavenworth,  and  re- 
cently having  had  the  valuable  experience  of 
serving  in  the  Fifth  Brigade  of  Galveston  under 
General  George  F.  Bell.  His  assistants  were  offi- 
cers of  all  arms  of  the  service,  including  many 
officers  of  General  Parker's  First  Cavalry  Bri- 
gade, who  have  had  the  experience  of  his  methods 
of  inspiring  and  competitive  training.  One  of 
these  regular  officers,  with  certain  experienced 
noncoms.  of  the  regulars,  was  assigned  to  each 
incoming  National  Guard  regiment  as  inspector 
and  instructor.  A  senior  inspector  and  instructor 
for  the  purpose  of  supervision  and  coordination 
was  assigned  to  the  staff  of  each  division  and 
camp  commander.  The  spirit  of  the  State  troops 
and  their  officers  was  fine.  They  took  kindly 
and  intelligently  to  the  training  work.  The  first 
weakness  shown  was  in  their  administrative 
work.  The  average  officer  has  no  use  for  red 
tape,  and  does  not  realize  that  supply,  health,  and 
228 


A  System  of  Intensive  Training 

comfort  of  his  men  are  absolutely  dependent  on 
it.  So  that  to  the  training  staff  were  shortly 
added  experienced  officers  known  as  inspectors 
of  records,  but  who  were  really  instructors  in 
administration.  As  thousands  of  animals,  mules, 
and  horses  were  supplied  the  troops  their  lack  of 
experience  in  handling  these  precious  impedi- 
menta were  shown,  and  in  each  camp  inspectors 
of  transportation  were  appointed  whose  duty  it 
was  to  train  and  supervise  in  the  handling  of 
public  animals. 

Although  there  was  not  much  choice  in  the 
hot,  alluvial  delta  of  the  Rio  Grande  for  camps 
of  large  bodies  of  men,  camp  sites  were  selected 
with  regard  to  the  health  and  comfort  of  the 
commands,  and  railroad  and  water  facilities  sup- 
plied. Camp  sanitary  inspectors  were  appointed 
from  regular  medical  corps.  Camp  sites  were 
cleared  of  chaparral  and  near-by  pools  and  low 
places  drained  and  oiled.  The  auxiliary  branches 
were  supplied  with  instructors  and  inspectors 
from  the  regulars  for  their  corresponding  branch 
of  the  service.  Cooks  and  horseshoers  and  clerks 
were  loaned  by  the  regulars.  The  regulars  and 
National  Guard  were  camped  together  where 
practicable,  so  that  the  regulars  could  serve  as 
a  model,  and  inexperienced  National  Guardsmen 
see  with  their  own  eyes,  and  also  pick  up  the 
little  wrinkles  of  the  old  soldiers  by  intimate 
association.  Most  citizen  soldiers  thoroughly 
229 


National  Service  Library 

appreciate  the  value  of  this  association  and  com- 
radeship with  regular  officers  and  men,  and  it 
should  be  impressed  upon  every  one  of  them  that 
in  the  excitement  and  emergency  of  preparation 
that  full  advantage  must  be  taken  of  every  such 
opportunity. 

In  the  Spanish  War  the  best-known  volunteer 
organization,  the  Rough  Riders,  owed  much  of 
its  quick  preparation  to  the  fact  that  its  com- 
mander was  wise  enough  to  entice  as  many  old 
regular  noncoms.  and  soldiers  as  possible,  and 
divided  them  among  his  troops.  Every  man  who 
has  had  the  Plattsburg  experience  will  testify  to 
the  value  of  the  regular  noncom.  Indeed,  one  of 
them,  a  professor  at  Princeton,  who  wrote  a 
most  interesting  article  on  his  experience  in  the 
first  Plattsburg  camp,  held  that  the  most  efficient 
man  he  had  ever  known  in  any  walk  of  life  was 
a  sergeant  of  the  regulars  assigned  to  his  com- 
pany. Most  citizens  have  this  humility  of  the 
high  intelligence  and  are  glad  to  learn  from 
those  very  fine  men  and  soldiers,  the  noncoms. 
of  the  regular  service,  at  the  thought  of  whom 
even  every  regular  officer  feels  his  heart  warm 
with  pride  and  gratitude,  for  they  are  loyal, 
patient,  efficient,  as  every  regular  knows,  and  is 
a  fact  becoming  appreciated  by  the  citizens  who 
have  had  the  good  luck  to  associate  with  them. 

I  must  insist  that  this  is  in  no  sense  a  manual 
of  training.  I  hope  General  Parker  or  Major 
230 


A  System  of  Intensive  Training 

Kilbourne  will  shortly  publish  such  a  manual 
based  on  their  various  successful  experiences, 
but  I  simply  indicate  the  outline  of  their  experi- 
ences, so  that  the  aspirant  officer  may  realize  the 
scope  of  such  training,  the  reasons  for  it,  and 
that  he  must  make  himself  the  leader  of  his  men 
by  force  of  character,  making  the  most  of  his 
personality,  and  training  himself  to  be  superior 
to  his  men  in  intelligence,  education,  and  in  the 
handling  of  his  command  under  every  circum- 
stance of  peace  or  war.  It  is  difficult  for  any 
man  to  excel  one  hundred  men  of  his  company 
in  every  respect.  Assuming  that  every  officer 
has  been  picked  for  those  reasons,  although  he 
may  be  a  subaltern  for  some  time  he  must  at 
once  not  only  know  the  duties  of  a  lieutenant, 
but  absorb  those  of  the  company  commander, 
and  know  them  in  outline  from  the  start,  for  he 
will  very  often  be  by  force  of  circumstances  the 
acting  company  commander  and  administrator 
of  the  largest  one-man  command  in  which  the 
chief  deals  intimately  with  the  man.  The  very 
meaning  of  lieutenant  indicates  that,  but  with 
his  captain  present  he  is  assistant  in  training  and 
instruction  and  commands  his  unit  or  platoon  in 
training  and  action.  Although  the  captain  as  ad- 
ministrative head  deals  directly  with  the  first 
sergeant  and  incidentally  with  the  company  clerk 
and  mess  sergeant  in  the  affairs  of  interior 
economy,  the  lieutenant  must  sit  by  the  first  ser- 
231 


National  Service  Library 

geant  and  troop  clerk  and  become  familiar  with 
all  their  work  and  learn  from  the  experienced 
mess  sergeant  the  details  of  obtaining  rations 
and  handling  and  cooking  them.  The  captain 
will  frequently  delegate  all  his  duties  to  the 
lieutenant. 

The  company,  the  smallest  administrative  unit, 
must  have  all  the  copies  of  textbooks,  regula- 
tion manuals,  and  at  least  three  months'  supplies 
of  blanks  as  laid  down  in  Appendix  IV.  Each 
blank  has  it  clearly  stated  on  its  back  how  it 
should  be  made  out  and  used.  There  must  be 
for  each  soldier  an  individual  record,  clothing, 
and  descriptive  lists  carefully  made  out  and  kept 
up  to  date.  If  it  has  not  already  been  done, 
officers  see  that  each  man  is  vaccinated  and  inocu- 
lated for  typhoid  and  parityphoid.  Each  officer 
and  man  must  have  complete  his  arms,  uniform, 
and  equipment.  From  these  reports  of  admin- 
istration and  lists  of  blank  forms  and  from  the 
manuals  of  the  Supply  Department  the  particu- 
lars of  administration  will  be  evident.  In  gen- 
eral, rations,  supplies,  and  equipment  come  from 
the  Quartermaster's  Corps,  arms  and  munitions 
from  the  Ordnance  Department.  Minor  sup- 
plies will  be  indicated  by  the  blanks  listed  and 
supplied. 

In  garrison  and  semipermanent  camps  the 
rationing  and  messing  are  at  the  discretion  of  the 
company  commander,  limited  by  the  monthly 
232 


A  System  of  Intensive  Training 

allowance  for  rations  and  published  each  month 
by  the  Quartermaster's  Corps,  varying  from 
twenty-five  to  thirty  cents  a  man.  The  captain 
normally  prepares  a  ration  return  for  his  com- 
mand for  one  month,  and  he  can  purchase  his 
supplies  through  his  mess  sergeant,  whom  he 
carefully  supervises,  anything  he  desires,  sub- 
ject to  certain  regulations  published  from  time  to 
time.  Articles  and  supplies  kept  on  hand  in  the 
commissary  must  be  bought  there  if  used  at  all. 
Articles  not  supplied  by  the  commissary  depart- 
ment, such  as  fresh  vegetables,  fruit,  fish,  etc., 
may  be  purchased  anywhere  from  the  company 
fund,  which  accrues  from  the  savings  made 
monthly  on  the  ration  allowance  or  from  author- 
ized income  for  the  company  fund,  such  as 
shares  of  the  post  or  camp  exchange,  receipts 
from  the  library  or  billiard  table,  etc. 

The  company  fund  must  be  kept  in  the  custody 
of  the  company  commander,  and  must  be  audited 
each  month  by  the  company  council  in  a  manner 
laid  down  by  regulations.  The  mess  sergeant 
should  keep  a  running  account  so  that  each  day 
the  captain  may  know  how  he  stands  and  be  able 
to  arrange  the  rationing  and  messing  equitably 
through  the  month. 

In  the  field  during  maneuvers  or  war  the  supe- 
rior commander  orders  issued  a  standard  ration 
in  kind.  The  company  is  the  family  of  the  army, 
and  the  captain  has  great  discretion  in  handling 
233 


National  Service  Library 

it,  and  in  exercising  his  ingenuity  in  causing  it  to 
live  well  and  happily.  There  is  much  human 
nature  and  common  sense  to  be  exercised,  and  a 
deep  personal  interest  is  the  measure  of  it.  It 
should  be  a  happy  family  in  the  best  sense.  As 
a  naval  officer  speaks  of  a  happy  ship,  not  mean- 
ing that  the  individuals  are  lightly  happy,  but  that 
the  organization  is  keenly  efficient,  the  interior 
friction  of  the  family  diminished  to  the  lowest, 
and  the  ship  ready  for  action  with  a  cheer. 

OUTLINE  AS  SHOWN  BY  ORDERS  OF  BROWNS- 
VILLE DISTRICT 

The  following  orders  are  published  without 
much  comment  as  the  reasons  are  therein  stated 
most  effectively.  The  system  is  given  and  the 
reasons  given,  and  it  has  been  thoroughly  jus- 
tified by  the  successful  condition  of  the  com- 
mand. 

The  keen  interest  of  the  higher  command  was 
felt  throughout,  soldierly  and  sportsmanlike 
competitions  and  conscious  emulation  aroused 
added  much  to  develop  the  keen  spirit  of  the 
men.  Monthly  tests  showed  up  the  weaknesses 
and  the  further  training  was  based  upon  provid- 
ing for  them. 

Due  to  the  circumstances  of  these  men  coming 

to  the  border,  their  probable  short  time  ahead  for 

training,  the  emergency  special  courses  B,  1908, 

Small  Arms  Firing  Regulations,  was  used  as  soon 

234 


A  System  of  Intensive  Training 

as  they  had  had  a  short  number  of  preliminary 
instructions  on  aiming  and  firing  drills. 

Those  troops  that  remained  on  the  border  for 
the  maneuvers  of  November  were  more  effec- 
tively trained  by  the  use  of  frequent  combat 
exercises,  including  firing  problems. 

Having  been  somewhat  critical  of  this  system 
at  first,  I  am  now  convinced  that  it  is  on  the 
right  lines  for  our  training  on  a  large  scale,  and 
I  believe  not  only  in  line  with  our  own  general 
abstract  policy  as  laid  down  by  the  General  Staff, 
but  after  having  had  the  opportunity  of  reading 
reports  from  the  most  critical  observers  in  all 
the  European  armies,  I  believe  it  is  consistent 
with  the  best  experience  abroad.  Some  of  the 
minor  points  that  I  find  fault  with  were  the 
statement  of  so  many  minor  details  apparently 
limiting  the  freedom  and  discretion  of  the  com- 
pany commander,  but  in  a  force  of  so  many 
varied  kinds  of  troops  and  with  so  many  inex- 
perienced officers  as  were  there  present,  I  believe 
it  is  necessary  to  standardize  properly  and  make 
uniform  the  training  so  that  the  will  of  the  chief 
may  be  known  and  understood  and  made  use  of 
in  action. 

NOTES  ON  SELECTION  OF  CAMPS 

Billeting,  as  in  certain  foreign  countries,  is  not 
practicable  in  this  country,  certainly  not  with 
large  bodies  of  troops,  but  even  for  commands 
235 


National  Service  Library 

not  larger  than  regiments  I  believe  it  would  be 
better  to  camp  them  in  towns  quartered  in  large 
public  buildings  or  rented  buildings,  such  as 
warehouses,  etc.,  rather  than  the  old  American 
custom  of  always  assuming  that  soldiers  must 
be  in  camps.  This  is  made  possible  by  the  availa- 
bility of  large  buildings  in  most  of  our  towns, 
and  the  very  much  better  discipline  and  attendant 
conduct  of  our  troops,  especially  in  towns  where 
there  are  no  saloons,  but  even  in  towns  where 
there  are  saloons  nowadays  the  character  and 
training  of  the  troops  causes  little  difficulty  when 
under  proper  officers.  Through  the  Brownsville 
district  during  the  past  summer,  with  large  bodies 
of  troops  around  the  small  towns,  many  of  them 
being  open  towns,  there  has  been  no  particular 
trouble,  and  the  citizens  of  these  towns  have 
united  in  high  praise  of  the  good  conduct  and 
pleasant  associations  with  our  high-class  soldiers. 
Where  there  are  troops  in  or  near  a  town,  ar- 
rangements should  be  made  with  the  civil  author- 
ities for  furnishing  a  small  number  of  military 
police,  supplied  with  a  blue  and  white  brassard 
and  working  in  close  association  and  understand- 
ing with  the  civil  authorities.  It  is  very  easy  to 
select  a  camp  site  with  a  small  command,  having 
regard  to  the  health  and  comfort  of  the  command 
and  the  facilities  for  properly  handling  and  sup- 
plying them,  but  in  commands  of  a  brigade  or 
more  there  is  often  not  much  choice  of  site,  and 
236 


A  System  of  Intensive  Training 

in  all  camps  of  a  semipermanent  nature  the 
drainage  details  and  raised  walks  and  roads 
should  promptly  be  supplied.  Mosquito  nets 
should  always  be  supplied  and  used.  Kitchens, 
latrines,  exchanges,  mess  rooms,  etc.,  should  be 
screened  as  quickly  as  possible,  tents  floored,  cots 
requisitioned  for  at  once  and  proper  store  tents 
or  storehouses  and  room  provided  for.  Where 
practicable  the  officer  and  orderly  rooms  should 
be  in  rooms  or  buildings  rather  than  tents. 

Remember  that  the  sun  is  the  best  disinfectant, 
and  although  not  so  pleasant  or  comfortable, 
large  and  semipermanent  camps  should  be  in 
open  and  sunswept  sites.  All  brush  and  under- 
growth should  be  cleanly  and  quickly  removed. 
A  carefully  supervised  dump  where  everything 
should  be  burned  should  be  provided.  Crude  oil 
will  always  be  supplied  by  the  supply  officer  for 
sanitary  purposes.  Latrines  should  always  be 
dug,  and  carefully  watched  by  the  sanitary  in- 
spector and  by  company  officers.  Regular  troops 
even  on  the  march  carry  a  screen  of  condemned 
canvas  for  placing  around  latrines.  In  semi- 
permanent camps  they  should  be  the  first  covers 
and  protection  erected.  They  should  either  be 
burned  out  daily  or  sprayed  with  oil  and  lamp 
black.  The  New  York  division  found  that  this 
was  the  better  method,  and  that  the  latrines  of 
the  division  could  be  sprayed  and  kept  sanitary 
by  this  method  much  easier  than  by  -burning  o-t 
237 


National  Service  Library 

with  crude  oil.  Medical  officers  can  inform  as 
to  the  details  of  this  method. 

Often  with  infantry  commands  there  are  large 
numbers  of  animals,  and  these  should  be  supplied 
with  shelter  as  soon  as  possible.  Frame  or  paper 
roofs  if  possible,  or  if  the  government  will  not 
supply  the  lumber  and  materials,  poles  and  brush 
can  be  cut,  and  in  very  hot,  sunny  countries,  if 
there  is  not  sufficient  and  convenient  brush,  grain 
sacks  can  be  stretched  over  the  poles  and  brush 
frames. 

Supply  officers  should  insist  upon  No.  i  forage 
for  their  animals,  and  see  that  it  is  not  fed  off 
the  ground,  but  either  in  feed  boxes  or  nose 
bags.  Remember  that  the  ordinary  horse  nose 
bags  will  not  be  large  enough  for  mules.  Daily 
grooming  and  monthly  horseshoeing  should  be 
insisted  upon  for  each  and  every  animal,  whether 
mule  or  horse.  If  by  misadventure  your  requi- 
sitions are  not  filled  for  anything,  responsible 
officers  should  insist  on  the  camp  supply  officer 
supplying  urgent  needs,  and  red  tape  can  always 
be  cut  if  intelligence  and  tact  is  displayed. 

Subaltern  officers  and  supply  sergeants  should 
have  temporary  duty  with  regular  supply  officers, 
and  such  assistance  and  training  will  always  be 
given  on  request. 

The  appendixes  which  follow  all  contain  in- 
formation of  vital  importance  to  the  military 
man.  While  it  cannot  be  claimed  for  the  method 
238 


A  System  of  Intensive  Training 

of  presentation  that  it  is  the  most  interesting, 
nevertheless  it  is  believed  the  arrangement  is  the 
best  which  could  be  made  for  practical  purposes. 
This  is  the  information  which  it  was  found  by 
experience  on  the  border  civilian  soldiers  were 
most  in  need  of  and  the  great  success  of  the 
training  in  the  Brownsville  district  is  proof  of 
the  efficacy  of  the  system.  Few  officers  of  the 
regular  army  would  be  able  off-hand  to  state 
where  all  of  the  data  given  herein  can  be  readily 
obtained. 


239 


Appendix  I 

INDIVIDUAL  FIELD  EQUIPMENT  FOR  DISMOUNTED 
COMPANY  OFFICERS 

Equipment  "A,"  carried  on  person  and 
wagons:  Ammunition  as  ordered;  I  barrack  bag, 
optional ;  I  mosquito  bar ;  i  canvas  basin ;  I  bed- 
ding roll,  or  combination  bedding-clothing  roll 
with  contents  not  to  exceed  50  pounds,  G.  O.  8, 
W.  D.  1915;  i  bed  sack,  optional;  i  pistol  belt,1 
model  1912;  I  waist  belt;  I  blanket,  O.  D. ;  i 
pair  breeches ;  i  hair  brush ;  i  canvas  bucket ; ; 
i  can  bacon;  i  can  condiment;  i  can  meat;  i 
canteen ;  i  canteen  cover,  dismounted ;  i  comb ; 
i  compass ;  i  cup ;  i  dispatch  case,  optional ;  3 
pair  drawers;  i  field  glass;  i  first-aid  packet; 
i  fork;  2  handkerchiefs;  i  pair  woolen  gloves  (if 
ordered)  ;  i  haversack  and  pack  carrier;  i  head- 
net  (if  mosquito,  bar  not  furnished)  ;  i  knife;  i 
pocket  knife;  i  extra  pair  shoe  laces;  i  lan- 
tern, combination ;  2  pistol  magazines,  extra ;  I 
message  blank  book;  i  mirror;  i  notebook  and 
indelible  pencils ;  i  package  toilet  paper ;  10 
shelter-tent  pins ;  i  automatic  pistol ;  i  pistol 

1  This  belt,  with  or  without  saber  ring,  includes  the  magazine  pocket, 
web  double. 

24O 


Appendix 

holster ;  2  shelter-tent  poles ;  I  pouch  for  first- 
aid  packet;  i  poncho,  cape  or  rain  coat;  2  re- 
serve rations  (when  ordered)  ;  i  flannel  shirt, 
O.  D. ;  i  pair  marching  shoes ;  i  cake  soap 
in  box ;  i  spoon ;  5  pairs  stockings ;  i  sweater, 
optional;  i  identification  tag;  i  tape  for  identi- 
fication tag;  2  tents  (shelter  halves)  and  2 
ropes;  i  toothbrush  and  powder;  3  face  towels; 
3  undershirts ;  i  watch ;  i  whistle  and  chain. 

Equipment  "B,"  carried  on  wagon:  i  blanket, 
O.  D. ;  i  pair  breeches ;  i  cot ;  i  pair  drawers ; 
i  extra  pair  shoe  laces ;  i  locker  trunk  for  extra 
clothing ;  i  flannel  shirt,  O.  D. ;  i  pair  marching 
shoes ;  i  pair  stockings ;  i  undershirt. 

Note:  Clothing  enumerated  under  "A"  and 
"B"  does  not  include  that  worn  on  the  person. 

Some  of  articles  which  may  be  carried  with 
Equipment  "A"  up  to  the  5o-pound  allowance: 
6  candles ;  i  folding  chair ;  i  cot ;  extra  bedding ; 
extra  clothing;  3  handkerchiefs;  i  housewife; 
i  box  matches;  i  mattress  (light  weight);  i 
pillow ;  i  shaving  outfit ;  i  pair  slippers ;  i  wall 
pocket;  i  package  writing  materials,  envelopes, 
paper,  stamps. 


241 


Appendix  II 

UNIFORM  AND  EQUIPMENT  OF  OFFICERS' 
RESERVE  CORPS 

The  only  equipment  required  at  present  of 
officers  in  the  O.  R.  C.  are  the  uniforms  of  the 
corresponding  grades  in  the  regular  army.  In 
other  words,  a  major,  O.  R.  C.,  should  provide 
himself  with  the  uniform  specified  in  the  Army 
Regulations,  for  a  major,  U.  S.  A.  If  a  complete 
equipment  is  desired  by  the  appointee  he  can 
make  arrangements  for  securing  it  from  the 
Quartermaster  General's  Office. 

Scores  of  inquiries  are  being  received  by  the 
adjutant  general  along  this  line  and,  in  reply, 
the  applicants  are  referred  to  the  revised  edition 
"Regulations  for  the  Uniform  of  the  United 
States  Army"  (which  can  be  secured  from  the 
Superintendent  of  Documents,  Washington, 
D.  C.,  at  ten  cents  per  copy)  ;  and  to  Changes  No. 
18,  Uniform  Regulation,  War  Dept.,  Dec.  30, 
1916.  We  give  below  the  paragraphs  (as 
amended)  from  Changes  No.  18  which  relate 
to  the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps: 

Insignia  on  Collar  of  Coat — All  insignia  will 
be  of  metal. 

242 


Appendix 

For  the  regular  army  the  letters  "U.  S.";  for 
the  volunteer  army  the  letters  "U.  S.  V.";  for 
the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps  and  the  Enlisted 
Reserve  Corps  the  letters  "U.  S.  R.";  for  the 
National  Guard  while  in  the  service  of  the  United 
States,  the  letters — not  to  exceed  four — forming 
the  abbreviation  of  the  name  of  the  state,  terri- 
tory, or  District  of  Columbia. 

(a)  Officers— The  letters  "U.S."  will  be  worn 
I  inch  from  each  end  of  the  collar,  with  a  suita- 
ble space  between  the  letters,  and  placed  midway 
between  the  upper  and  lower  edges  of  the  collar. 
The  letters  "U.  S.  V."  or  "U.  S.  R."  will  be  simi- 
larly worn,  but  five-eighths  of  an  inch  from  each 
end  of  collar. 

If  the  abbreviation  of  the  name  of  a  State, 
Territory,  or  the  District  of  Columbia  consists 
of  but  two  letters,  it  will  be  worn  at  i  inch  from 
the  end  of  the  collar;  in  other  cases  at  five- 
eighths  of  an  inch. 

The  insignia  of  the  corps,  department,  or  arm 
of  service  and  the  insignia  of  aids,  chiefs  of  staff, 
and  chaplains  will  be  worn  five-eighths  inch  from 
the  letters  "U.  S.,"  and  one-half  inch  from  the 
letters  "U.  S.  V.,"  or  "U.  S.  R.,"  next  to  letter 
farthest  from  opening  of  collar. 

The  same  rule  will  establish  intervals  from 
State,  Territory,  and  District  of  Columbia  ab- 
breviations. 

(b)  The  gold  or  gilt  insignia  will  be  worn  on 

243 


National  Service  Library 

the  collar  of  the  dress  and  white  uniforms,  and 
the  bronze  insignia  on  the  collar  of  the  service 
uniforms,  except  that  chaplains  will  wear  the 
silver  Latin  cross  on  all  uniforms. 

Insignia  on  Collar  of  Shirt  (when  the  shirt 
is  worn  without  the  coat). — See  par.  102  (a) 
as  changed  by  C.  U.  R.  No.  16,  War  D.,  1916. 
The  insignia  of  rank  worn  on  the  collar  of  the 
shirt  will  be  of  metal  and  will  be  worn  as  follows : 

(a)  Officers. 
(i)  Regular  Service. 

Lieutenant  colonel.1 — On  the  right  side,  in  the 
middle  of  the  collar,  the  letters  "U.  S."  and  a 
silver  oak  leaf,  point  up;  the  left  side,  in  the 
middle  of  the  collar,  and  i  inch  from  the  end, 
the  insignia  of  corps,  department,  or  arm  of 
service. 

Major. — Same  as  lieutenant  colonel  (substi- 
tuting "a  gold  oak  leaf"). 

Captain. — Same  as  lieutenant  colonel  (substi- 
tuting "two  bars,  one- fourth  inch  apart  and 
parallel  to  the  end  of  the  collar"). 

First  lieutenant. — Same  as  lieutenant  colonel 
'(substituting  one  bar  parallel  to  the  end  of  the 
collar"). 

Second  lieutenant. — On  the  right  side,  in  the 

1  Highest  rank  in  Reserve  Corps  is  major.  See  Major.  Cap- 
tain, and  First  Lieutenant. 

244 


Appendix 

middle  of  the  collar,  and  i  inch  from  the  end, 
the  letters  "U.  S."  On  the  left  side,  in  the 
middle  of  the  collar,  and  i  inch  from  the 
end,  the  insignia  of  corps,  department,  or  arm 
of  service. 

General  staff  officers,  chiefs  of  staff,  aids,  and 
chaplains. — The  letters  "U.  S.,"  to  be  i  inch 
from  the  end  of  the  collar  (substitute  on  the 
left  side  of  the  collar  the  proper  device  in  place 
of  the  insignia  of  corps,  department,  or  arm  of 
service). 

(2)    National  Guard  Service. 

Same  as  for  officers  of  the  regular  service, 
except  that  the  letters — not  to  exceed  four — 
forming  the  abbreviation  of  the  name  of  the 
State,  Territory,  or  District  of  Columbia  will  be 
substituted  for  the  letters  "U.  S." 

(3)  Volunteers  or  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

Same  as  for  officers  of  the  regular  service, 
except  that  the  letters  "U.  S.  V."  or  "U.  S.  R." 
will  be  substituted  for  the  letters  "U.  S." 

i.  Based  on  the  requirements  of  the  uniform 
regulations,  equipment  manuals  and  on  the  re- 
quirements of  the  service  the  following  is  a 
detailed  list  of  the  minimum  clothing  and  equip- 
ment necessary  for  an  officer  of  the  Army  Re- 
serve Corps  to  have  in  his  possession  to  be 
ready  for  any  service  required  of  him. 
245 


National  Service  Library 

ORDNANCE  EQUIPMENT — FOR  EACH  DIS- 
MOUNTED OFFICER 

New  Model  Equipment1 — I  can  bacon ;  i  can 
condiment ;  I  canteen ;  I  canteen  cover,  dis- 
mounted; i  pistol  belt  with  magazine  pocket, 
web  double;  i  cup;  i  knife;  i  fork;  i  spoon;  i 
meat  can;  i  haversack  (except  mounted  offi- 
cers) ;  i  pack  carrier  (except  mounted  officers)  ; 
i  pouch  for  first-aid  packet;  i  pistol  holster;  i 
pistol,  caliber  .45 ;  2  extra  magazines. 

Old  Model  Equipment — i  canteen  with  strap, 
I  cup;  i  haversack  (except  mounted  officers)  ;  i 
haversack  strap  (except  mounted  officers),  or 
suspenders  for  belt;  i  meat  can;  i  knife;  i  fork; 
i  spoon ;  i  pouch  for  first-aid  packet ;  i  pis- 
tol belt  with  magazine  pocket,  web  double;  i 
pistol  holster ;  i  pistol,  caliber  .45 ;  2  extra 
magazines. 

Quartermaster  Property — i  mosquito  bar;  i 
bedding  roll  * ;  i  bed  sack ;  i  canvas  bucket ;  i 
lantern ;  i  clothing  roll ;  i  cot ;  i  identification  tag 
with  tape ;  i  shelter  tent  complete  with  poles  and 
pins;  i  poncho  or  slicker;  i  whistle  (company 
officers  and  battalion  commanders  of  infantry)  ; 
clothing;  2  blankets;  i  canvas  basin;  I  pair 
leggins;  3  undershirts;  3  pairs  drawers;  2  pairs 

1  Either  model  of  equipment  is  permissible. 

*  The  bedding  roll  supplied  by  the  Quartermaster  Corps  or 
any  other  canvas  roll  may  be  used  as  a  combination  bedding- 
clothing  roll. 

246 


Appendix 

shoe  laces;  5  pairs  stockings;  I  service  hat;  I 
hat  cord ;  i  woolen  coat,  O.  D. ;  i  cotton  coat, 
O.  D. ;  i  woolen  breeches,  O.  D. ;  i  woolen  over- 
coat, O.  D. ;  i  waist  belt ;  2  flannel  shirts,  O.  D. ; 
i  pair  russet  leather  shoes. 

Medical — i  first-aid  packet. 

Miscellaneous — i  compass ;  i  pair  field  glasses ; 
i  notebook  and  pencil;  i  watch. 

Toilet,  Articles — i  comb ;  i  housewife ;  i  mir- 
ror ;  i  toothbrush  with  paste ;  i  package  toilet 
paper ;  3  towels ;  i  cake  soap ;  i  shaving  outfit. 

ORDNANCE  EQUIPMENT — FOR  EACH   MOUNTED 
OFFICER 

In  addition  to  above:  i  set  of  horse  equip- 
ment, consisting  of  i  cavalry  bridle ;  i  watering 
bridle  (not  required  if  model  1909  bridle  is  on 
hand);  i  currycomb;  i  nose  bag  (or  feed  and 
grain  bag);  I  halter  headstall;  i  halter  strap 
(or  halter  tie  rope)  ;  i  horse  brush;  i  lariat;  i 
lariat  strap;  i  link;  i  picket  pin;  i  saddle 
(McClellan  or  Whitman);  i  pair  saddle  bags; 
i  saddle  cloth  with  insignia;  i  saddle  blanket; 
i  surcingle. 

2.  The  unit  equipment  manuals  for  the  various 
arms  authorize  organization  commanders  to  keep 
on  hand  such  of  the  following  articles  authorized 
by  paragraph  1522,  A.  R.  (articles  of  ordnance 
furnished  by  the  government  for  use  of  officers 
serving  with  troops),  as  may  be  necessary  to 
247 


National  Service  Library 

properly  equip  the  officers  on  duty  with  these 
organizations : 

Pistols,  caliber  .45. 

Extra  magazine. 

Pistol  belts. 

Pistol  holsters. 

3.  The  horse  equipment  required  by  mounted 
officers  below  the  grade  of  major  are  included  in 
the  ordnance-unit  accountability  of  the  organiza- 
tion to  which  they  may  be  assigned. 

4.  It  is  not  necessary  for  reserve  officers  to 
purchase  the  horse  equipment  and  articles  men- 
tioned in  paragraph  3  above,  but  they  may  pur- 
chase such  articles  and  use  them  if  they  so  desire. 

5.  Officers  of  infantry  are  not  required  to  have 
a  saber  and  scabbard  when  on  field  service.   Cav- 
alry officers  are  required  to  have  a  saber  and 
scabbard  and  are  advised  to  purchase  the  new 
model  saber  which  may  be  procured   from  the 
Ordnance  Department. 

6.  Officers   of  the   Reserve   Corps   may   pur- 
chase uniforms  and  equipment  from  the  supply 
department  of  the  army. 


248 


Appendix  III 
CORRESPONDENCE  MODEL  G.  O.  23,  1912 

Company  B,  4Oth  Infantry, 
(File  number)        Fort  William  H.  Seward, 

Alaska,  July  19,  1912. 

From :  The  Commanding  Officer,  Co.  B,  4Oth  Inf. 
To:  The  Adjutant  General  of  the  Army, 
(Through  military  channels.) 

Subject :    Philippine   campaign   badge,    Corporal 
John  Doe. 

Inclosed  are  lists  in  duplicate  of  enlisted  men 
of  Company  B,  4Oth  Infantry,  entitled  to  the 
Philippine  campaign  badge. 

JOHN  A.  BROWN, 
2  Incls.  Capt.,  4Oth  Inf. 

(File  number)  ist  Ind. 

Hq.  Ft.  William  H.  Seward,  Alaska,  July  19, 
1912 — To    the    Comdg.    Gen.,    Dept.    of    the 

Columbia.  c    ,.,   „, 

o.   r .    1 . 

2  Incls.  Col.,  40th  Inf.,  Comdg. 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  Dept.  Columbia,  July  27,  1912. 
249 


National  Service  Library 
(File   number)  2nd   Ind. 

Hq.  Dept.  Columbia,  Vancouver  Bks.,  Wash., 
July  28,  1912 — To  the  Comdg.  Gen.,  Western 
Division. 

A.  F.  R. 

2  Incls.  Brig.  Gen.,  Comdg. 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  Western  Div.,  July  30,  1912. 

(File  number)  3d  Ind. 

Hq.  Western  Division,  San  Francisco,  Cal., 
July  31,  1912 — To  the  Adjt.  Gen.  of  the  Army, 
Washington,  D.  C. 

ARTHUR  E.  GREEN, 
Col.  Gen.  Staff,  in  absence  of 
2  Incls.  the  Division  Commander. 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  A.  G.  O.,  Aug.  5,  1912. 

(  File  number)  4th  Ind. 

W:u-  Dept.,  A.G.O.,  Aug.  8,  1912— To  the  CO., 
Co.  I,  5<Dth  Inf.,  through  the  Comdg.  Gen., 
Philippines  Division. 

i — Information   is   requested   as    to   whether 
the    records    of   the    company    show    that    Cor- 
poral   Doe    served   in   the   field   against   hostile 
250 


Appendix 

natives   on  the   Island   of   Panay   during  July, 
1907. 

2 — The  early  return  of  these  papers  is  desired. 
By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

THOMAS  H.  SMITH, 
2  Incls.  Adjt.  Gen. 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  Phil.  Div.,  Sept.  14,  1912. 


(File  number)  5th  Ind. 

Hq.  Philippines  Division,  Manila,  P.  I.,  Sept.  15, 
1912 — to  the  C.  O.  Co.  I,  50th  Inf.,  through 
the  Comdg.  Gen.,  Dept.  of  Mindanao. 

2  Incls. 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  Dept.  Mind.,  Sept.  24,  1912. 


(File  number)  6th  Ind. 

Hq.  Dept.  of  Mindanao,  Zamboanga,  P.  I., 
Sept.  25,  1912— To  the  C.  O.  Co.  I,  soth  Inf., 
Camp  Keithley,  Mind.,  P.  I.,  through  the  Post 
Commander. 

2  Incls. 

To  the  C.  O.  Co.  I,  soth  Inf. 

(Stamp)    Rec'd    Co.    I,    soth    Inf.,    Sept.    26, 
1912. 

251 


National  Service  Library 
(File  number)  7th  Inf. 

Co.  I,  5Oth  Inf.,  Camp  Keithley,  Mind.,  P.  I., 
Oct.  4,  1912 — To  the  Comdg.  Gen.,  Dept.  of 
Mindanao,  through  the  C.  O.,  Camp  Keith- 
ley,  P.  I. 

I — Inclosed  are  extracts  from  the  post  orders 
and  morning  report  of  this  company,  which  con- 
tain all  that  there  is  of  record  regarding  the 
service  of  Corporal  Doe  referred  to  herein.  In- 
closed also  is  affidavit  of  Corporal  Jones  as  to 
Corporal  Doe's  service. 

2 — It  is  believed  that  the  records  of  the  head- 
quarters, Department  of  Mindanao,  may  contain 
the  information  desired. 

(3  Incls.  added.)  EDWARD  FRENCH, 

,     .  Capt.,  50th  Inf.  Comdg. 


(File  number)  8th  Ind. 

Hq.    Camp    Keithley,    Mind.,    P.  I.,    Oct.    5, 
1912 — 

To  the  Comdg.  Gen.,  Dept.  of  Mind. 

5  Incls.  A.  C.  D. 

Maj.,  5Oth  Inf.,  Comdg. 

(Stamp)     Rec'd    back,    Dept.    Mind.,    Oct.    6, 
1912. 

252 


Appendix 
(File  number)  gth  Ind. 

Hq.  Dept.  of  Mindanao,  Zamboanga,  P.  I.,  Oct. 
12,  1912 — To  the  Comdg.  Gen.,  Philippines 
Division. 

There  is  nothing  on  file  at  these  headquarters 
bearing  on  the  service  of  Corporal  Doe  referred 
to  herein. 

WILLIAM  TONES, 

5  Incls-  TD  •     r~        r      j 

Brig.  Gen.,  Comdg. 

(Stamp)     Rec'd    back,     Phil.     Div.,    Oct.    23, 
1912. 


(File  number)  loth  Ind. 

Hq.  Philippines  Division,  Manila,  P.  I.,  Oct.  24, 
1912 — To  the  Comdg.  Gen.,  Dept.  of  Min- 
danao, with  directions  to  withdraw  the  affi- 
davit of  Corporal  Jones,  it  being  proposed  to 
inclose  an  affidavit  from  Sergeant  Blank,  who 
is  on  duty  at  these  headquarters  and  who  is 
prepared  to  furnish  a  more  complete  affidavit 
than  that  furnished  by  Corporal  Jones.  By 
command  of  Major  General  White: 

5  Incls.  ANDREW  BROWN, 

Adjt.  Gen. 

(Stamp)    Rec'd    back,    Dept.    Mind.,    Nov.    3, 
1912. 

253 


•\ 

National  Service  Library 
(File  number)  nth  Ind. 

Hq.  Dept.  of  Mindanao,  Zamboanga,  P.  I., 
Nov.  4,  1912 — To  the  Comdg.  Gen.,  Philip- 
pines Division,  the  foregoing  directions  hav- 
ing been  complied  with. 

(Incl.  5  withdrawn.)          WILLIAM  JONES, 
4  Inds  Brig.  Gen.,  Comdg. 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  back,  Phil.  Div.,  Nov.  15,  1912. 


(File  number)  I2th  Ind. 

Hq.  Philippines  Division,  Manila,  P.  I.,  Nov.  16, 
1912 — To  the  Adjutant  General  of  the  Army, 
inviting  attention  to  the  preceding  indorse- 
ments and  to  the  accompanying  inclosures. 

(i  Incl.  added.)  JAMES  O.  WHITE, 

Mai.  Gen.,  Comdg. 
5  Incls. 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  back,  A.  G.  O.,  Dec.  23,  1912. 


254 


Appendix  IV 

INDIVIDUAL  EQUIPMENT  FOR  ENLISTED  MEN  OF 
A  COMPANY 

Ordnance:  Can  bacon,  carried,  I  ;  can  condi- 
ment, carried,  i ;  canteen,  carried,  I ;  canteen 
cover,  carried,  I  ;  cup,  carried,  I ;  fork,  carried, 
i ;  haversack,  carried,  i ;  knife,  carried,  I ; 
meat  can,  carried,  i ;  pack  carrier,  carried, 
i ;  pouch  first-aid  packet,  carried,  i ;  spoon, 
carried,  i. 

Quartermaster:  Waist  belt,  worn,  i ;  breeches, 
worn,  i  pair ;  hat  cords,  worn,  i ;  drawers, 
worn,  I ;  carried,  i ;  gloves,  O.  D.  (when  pre- 
scribed), worn,  i ;  service  hats,  worn,  i ;  canvas 
leggins,  worn,  i  pair;  overcoat  (when  pre- 
scribed) worn,  i ;  shirts,  O.  D.,  worn,  i ; 
russet  shoes,  worn,  i  pair;  stockings,  worn,  i 
pair;  carried,  2;  sweater  (when  prescribed) 
worn,  i ;  undershirts,  worn,  i  ;  carried,  i ; 
blankets,  O.  D.,  carried,  I ;  identification  tag  and 
tape,  worn,  i ;  poncho,  carried,  i  ;  shelter  tent 
half,  carried,  i ;  shelter-tent  pins,  carried,  5 ; 
shelter-tent  pole  (if  not  armed  with  rifle),  car- 
ried, I ;  shelter-tent  guy  rope,  carried,  I. 


National  Service  Library 

Toilet  Articles:  Comb,  carried,  i  ;  soap,  car- 
ried, i  cake ;  toothbrush,  carried,  I ;  towel,  car- 
ried, i. 

Medical:  First-aid  packet,  carried,  i. 

Rations:  Emergency  (as  ordered) ;  reserve, 
carried,  2. 

Surplus  Kit:  i  breeches,  i  drawers,  i  O.  D. 
shirt,  i  shoes,  i  pair  shoe  laces  (extra),  2  pairs 
stockings  L.  W.,  i  undershirt.  Surplus-kit  bags : 
i  per  squad,  i  for  sergeants  and  i  for  cooks  and 
buglers  of  companies  and  i  for  every  8  men  of 
detachments. 

Ordnance:  Bayonet  and  scabbard,  sergeants 
i,  corporal  i,  cooks  i,  mechanic  i,  squad  leaders 
i,  privates  i ;  bolo  and  scabbard  (No.  3  rear 
rank  each  odd-number  squad)  ;  brush  and  thong, 
sergeants  i,  corporal  i,  cooks  i,  mechanic  i, 
squad  leaders  i,  privates  i ;  cartridges,  caliber 
.30,  sergeants  100,  corporal  100,  cooks  100,  me- 
chanic loo,  squad  leaders  100,  privates  100;  car- 
tridges, caliber  .45,  ist  sergeant  21,  bugler  21; 
cartridge  belt,  caliber  .30,  dismounted,  sergeants 
I,  corporal  I,  cooks  i,  mechanic  i,  squad  leaders, 
i,  privates  i;  cleaning  rod1  jointed  and  case 
(No.  4  rear  rank  each  squad)  ;  drift  slides, 
(squad  leader  2  No.  45,  2  No.  6s)  ;  front-sight 
cover,  sergeants  i,  corporal  i,  cooks  i,  mechanic 

iWhen  surplus  kits  do  not  accompany  command. 
256 


Appendix 

I,  squad  leaders  i,  privates  i  ;  gun  sling,  sergeants 
i,  corporal  i,  cooks  i,  mechanic  i,  squad  leaders 
i,  privates  i  ;  hand  ax  and  carrier  (No.  3  each 
even-number  squad)  ;  magazines,  pistol  extra, 
ist  sergeant  2,  bugler  2;  oiler  and  thong  case, 
sergeants  I,  corporal  i,  cooks  i,  mechanic  i, 
squad  leaders  i ,  privates  i ;  pick  mattock  and  car- 
rier (No.  i  rear  rank  each  squad)  ;  pistol  and 
holster,  ist  sergeant  i,  bugler  i  ;  pistol  belt  with 
saber  ring,  ist  sergeant  i ;  pistol  belt  without 
saber  ring,  bugler  i  ;  rifle,  United  States  caliber 
30,  sergeants  I,  corporal  i,  cooks  i ;  mechanic  i, 
squad  leaders  i,  privates  i ;  rifle  fitted  for  tele- 
scopic sight  (i  for  each  two  men  best  qualified 
to  carry  them)  ;  screwdriver,  rifle,  squad  leaders 
i;  shovel  and  carrier  (i  to  Nos.  i,  2,  3,  front 
rank  each  squad)  ;  steel  tape,  5  feet,  ist  sergeant 
I ;  telescopic  sight  and  pouch  ( i  for  each  man 
carrying  rifle  fitted  with  telescopic  sight)  ;  wire 
cutter  and  carrier  (i  for  No.  2  rear  rank  each 
squad  and  i  for  each  bugler). 

Quartermaster:  Bugle  and  sling  chevrons, 
bugler  i  pair ;  housewife,  squad  leaders  i ;  note- 
book, ist  sergeant  i ;  pencil,  ist  sergeant  i,  ser- 
geants, i,  corporal  i,  bugler  i,  squad  leaders  i; 
whistle,  ist  sergeant  i,  sergeants  i,  bugler  i. 

Signal:  Field  glasses  (i  EE  to  ist  sergeant, 
2  EE  to  two  sergeants,  i  A  or  B  to  bugler) ; 
field  message  book  or  notebook,  sergeants  I, 

257 

Vol.  3— N.S.L.  9 


National  Service  Library 

corporal  i,  squad  leaders  i ;  field  message  book, 
squad  leaders  I ;  flag  kit  (infantry)  combination. 

Medical:     Foot    plaster    and    powder,    squad 
leaders  i. 

Engineer:  Watch  compass,  sergeants  I. 


258 


Appendix  V 

CONTENTS    OF    FIELD    DESK    (COMPANY)    FOR 
PERIOD  OF  THREE  MONTHS  (ESTIMATED) 

Records:  Morning  report;  duty  roster;  sick 
report ;  summary  court  manual ;  company  council, 
check  and  bank  books ;  field  service  regulations ; 
unit  accountability  equipment  manual;  corre- 
spondence book  and  document  file ;  soldiers'  de- 
posit books ;  retained  copy  of  all  allotments ;  copy 
of  all  court-martials;  copy  last  muster  roll,  pay 
roll  and  monthly  return;  last  clothing  order; 
G.  O.  39,  WD,  1915  (tear  out  all  parts  that  don't 
concern  company);  ration  return  blank;  data 
cards  for  muster  and  pay  rolls ;  last  returns  of 
unit  equipment;  list  of  QM  property  held  on 
memo,  receipt ;  list  of  ordnance  property  held  on 
memo,  receipt;  Army  Regulations;  copies  of 
WD,  Reg.  and  other  orders  likely  to  be  needed. 

Blanks,  A.  G.  O.  (see  Army  Regulations) : 
12  descriptive  lists;  3  descriptive  lists  (desert- 
ers) ;  discharges,  honorable,  dishonorable,  with- 
out honor  (estimated  for  period  required) ;  6 
furloughs  to  army  reserve;  12  inventory  effects 
deceased  soldier;  3  morning  report  blanks;  4 
muster  roll  blanks;  3  company  return  blanks; 
259 


National  Service  Library 

i  sick  report  blank;  3  statements  of  service;  12 
summary  court  blanks;  12  reports  of  survey 
blanks ;  8  unit  equipment  return  blanks ;  2  notifi- 
cation of  discharge  blanks ;  final  statements 
(estimated  for  period  required). 

Blanks,  QMC.  (see  Circular  12,  QMC,  1916)  : 
9  pay  rolls,  outside  sheets;  36  pay  rolls,  inside 
sheets;  6  advice  soldiers'  deposit;  6  soldiers' 
allotment  blanks ;  4  soldiers'  allotment  discon- 
tinuance blanks ;  6  deposit  books ;  3  copies  of 
furlough ;  3  statements  of  clothing  charged ;  4 
statements  of  charges ;  6  requisitions  for 
clothing. 

Blanks,  Chief  of  Ordnance:  3  form  94,  state- 
ment of  charges;  6  form  146,  transfer  of  ord- 
nance; 3  requisitions  for  ordnance;  6  form  152, 
transfer  of  ordnance  (see  A.  R.  1535). 

Stationery  (see  page  565,  G.  O.  39,  WD. 
1915):  i  box  rubber  bands;  i  book  duplicating 
letter  size ;  i  rubber  eraser ;  2  packages  black  ink 
powder ;  I  tube  mucilage ;  3  indelible  pencils ;  2 
blue  and  red  pencils ;  24  steel  pens ;  i  office 
shears ;  3  ounces  sealing  wax ;  2  scratch  pads ;  30 
penalty  envelopes ;  i  box  paper  fasteners ;  i 
package  red  ink  powder;  3  blotters;  2  lead 
pencils;  3  penholders;  i  1 2-inch  office  ruler;  i 
spool  office  tape;  i  ball  twine. 


260 


C 

u 


Appendix 


n 


2 


•dsoH 


fl  ;i 

.*;  M  • a 


261 


S  0  0  0.2  0  S'S'J  aj3^^W  o 

«    QQuu    U 


National  Service  Library 


WO 


s: 


111 


Appendix  VII 
ORDER  GOVERNING  DETAILS  OF  INSTRUCTION 

Headquarters  Brownsville  District, 

Brownsville,  Texas,  August  23,  1916. 

General  Orders 

No.  33 

i.  The  following  list  of  service  and  roll  calls 
for  troops  of  this  command,  effective  September 
i,  1916,  is  announced: 

Reveille,  ist  call 5.30  A.  M. 

march  5.35  A.  M. 

assembly   5.40  A.  M. 

Mess  call,  breakfast 6.00  A.M. 

Drill,  ist  call 6.55  A.  M. 

assembly   7.00  A.  M. 

Privates'   school   call,    Mondays  and 

Wednesdays  10.30  A.  M. 

Sick  call ii.oo  A.  M. 

Mess  call,  dinner 12.00  Noon 

Noncommissioned  officers'  school  call, 

Tuesdays  and  Thursdays i  .00  P.  M. 

Officers'  school  call,  Mondays,  Wed- 
nesdays and  Fridays i.oo  P.  M. 

Drill,  ist  call ; . .  .  4.15  A.  M. 

263 


National  Service  Library 

Drill,  assembly 4.20  P.  M. 

recall    5.20  P.  M. 

Mess  call,  supper 5.30  P.  M. 

Parade  or  Retreat,  ist  call 6.10  P.  M. 

assembly    6.15  P.  M. 

Retreat  (when  no  parade)  under  arms.  6.20  P.  M. 

Guard  mounting immediately  after  Retreat 

Tattoo   9.30  P.  M. 

Call  to  quarters IO-45  P-  M. 

Taps    1 1 .00  P.  M. 

Saturday  Inspection: 

ist  call 7.55A.M. 

Assembly   8.00  A.  M. 

Immediately  following  Reveille  roll  call,  ten 
(10)  minutes'  calisthenic  exercises  will  be 
held. 

If  practicable  men  will  have  six  (6)  hours  of 
training  daily,  to  include  four  (4)  hours  under 
arms. 

2.  The  period  September  i,  1916,  to  March  31, 
1917,  is  designated  as  a  field  training  period,  but 
schools  will  be  held  daily,  Saturdays  and  Sun- 
days excepted. 

3.  The  provisions  of  General  Orders  No.  17, 
War  Department,  1913,  prescribing  subjects  and 
methods  of  instruction,  will  be  complied  with. 
Instruction   bulletins    from   these   headquarters, 
issued  from  time  to  time,  prescribe  classes  of 

264 


Appendix 

field  exercises  to  be  used,  and  suggest  methods. 
These  bulletins  are  issued  primarily  for  assistance 
in  instructing  State  troops,  and  are  not  intended 
to  restrict  the  initiative  of  officers  in  instructing 
their  commands. 

4.  The  provisions  of  General  Orders  No.  19, 
1916,  these  headquarters,  will  govern  where  not 
in  conflict  with  these  orders. 

5.  An  allotment  of  time  for  instruction  of  dif- 
ferent tactical  units  will  be  made  by  each  division 
commander  or  commander  of  a  unit  not  part  of 
a  division,  at  the  rate  of  six  (6)  days  a  week,  in 
the  proportion  of  one-half  (l/2)  to  a  company, 
troop  or  battery  instruction  and  one-half  (^)  to 
instruction  of  larger  units. 

In  making  this  allotment  the  days  or  fraction 
of  a  day  will  be  so  assigned,  that  the  instruction 
of  higher  and  smaller  units  will  progress  simul- 
taneously. 

The  allotment  of  time  having  been  made,  the 
commander  of  each  unit  will  submit  each  Friday, 
to  his  next  higher  commander,  a  schedule,  show- 
ing in  detail  for  each  day  of  the  ensuing  week, 
the  classes  of  instruction  to  be  given,  the  number 
of  hours  to  be  devoted  to  each.  These  schedules 
will  be  made  in  the  form  of  the  schedules  now 
being  submitted  by  inspector  instructors  of  State 
troops,  and  will  be  approved  or  revised  by  the 
commander  to  whom  submitted.  Besides  show- 
ing the  work  proposed  for  the  ensuing  week,  the 
265 


National  Service  Library 

schedules  will  contain  a  report  of  the  work  done 
during  the  week  just  past. 

6.  For  convenience,  instruction  is  classified 
under  the  following  headings: 

DRILL 

There  will  be  four  (4)  hours  drill  or  four  (4) 
or  more  hours  field  exercises  daily,  Saturdays 
and  Sundays  excepted,  the  cooler  hours  before 
ii  a.  m.  and  after  4  p.  m.  being  utilized  for 
drill. 

For  infantry  there  will  be  one  or  more  practice 
marches  of  twelve  (12)  miles  by  regiment  or 
brigade  per  week.  These  marches  will  be  con- 
ducted as  prescribed  in  F.  S.  R.,  paragraph  96  to 
105.  They  are  for  instruction  in  march  disci- 
pline, and  all  rules  will  be  obeyed.  The  uniform 
rate  of  three  (3)  miles  per  hour  (2l/2  in  50 
minutes)  actual  marching  will  be  maintained. 

For  cavalry  and  field  artillery,  there  will  be 
one  (i)  practice  march  per  week.  The  pro- 
visions of  Drill  and  Field  Regulations  will  be 
strictly  enforced.  At  least  one-half  (l/2)  hour 
per  day  of  the  time  allotted  to  them  will  be  de- 
voted by  cavalry  troops  and  infantry  and  engi- 
neer companies  to  preliminary  exercises  for  tar- 
get practice  (position  and  aiming,  pointing  and 
sighting  exercises,  S.  A.  F.  M.)  to  be  continued 
after  the  completion  of  the  prescribed  Special 
Course  "B,"  or  other  target  practice. 
266 


Appendix 

This  practice  is  an  excellent  means  of  main- 
taining proficiency  in  rifle  and  pistol  practice. 
The  subjects  embraced  in  subhead  "A,"  para- 
graph 4,  General  Orders  17,  1916,  will  be  taken 
up  under  the  head  of  Drill  as  follows : 

Drill  of  company,  battery,  troop  and  all  units 
thereof,  mounted  and  dismounted;  bayonet  and 
saber  combat,  signaling,  equitation  and  horse 
training,  packing,  tent  pitching,  swimming  where 
practicable. 

Close-order  drill  will  be  limited  to  the  amount 
necessary  to  preserve  discipline  and  precision  of 
movement. 

FIELD  EXERCISES 

Field  exercises  when  held,  will  be  in  lieu  of 
drill.  During  the  period  devoted  to  field  exer- 
cises, drills  will  not  be  neglected.  Short  field 
exercises  by  small  units  may  be  held  on  the  same 
day  as  drills  are  held,  for  example:  Simple 
patrol  exercises  may  be  held  in  part  of  the  drill 
hours.  Paragraph  5,  General  Orders  17,  War 
Department,  1913,  prescribes  the  subjects  appro- 
priate to  this  period.  The  immediately  important 
ones  are  "Security  and  Information,"  best  studied 
by  means  of  practical  exercises  in  advance  and 
rear  guard,  outpost,  patrolling  and  scouting,  re- 
treat and  pursuit,  combat  exercises  and  the  main- 
tenance of  communication  between  the  different 
elements  of  a  command ;  instruction  in  construc- 
267 


National  Service  Library 

tion  of  hasty  intrenchments  and  more  permanent 
field  works ;  men  should  be  taught  at  once  to  get 
cover  by  use  of  intrenching  tools,  by  digging, 
lying  down. 

Of  special  importance  to  infantry  and  cavalry 
are  the  use  of  very  extended  skirmish  lines  in 
combat  and  the  use  of  the  leaf  sight,  100  yards 
elevation  in  close  work,  instead  of  the  battle 
sight.  These  will  be  practiced  in  all  extended 
order  drills  and  combat  exercises. 

Night  exercises  will  be  held  when  practicable 
— forces  involved  varied  from  the  company  or 
troop  to  include  the  division. 

In  all  combat  exercises,  both  sides  should  be 
represented. 

All  field  exercises  should  be  carried  out  to  a 
logical  conclusion,  regardless  of  hours.  When 
likely  to  last  into  the  afternoon,  cooked  lunches 
will  be  carried.  When  they  will  last  into  the 
next  day,  full  field  kit  and  full  equipment  "A" 
will  be  carried.  A  critique  will  be  held  after 
each  exercise. 

If  wagons  are  not  available,  application  will 
be  made  to  these  headquarters  for  autotrucks 
sufficient  for  the  command,  three  (3)  days  in 
advance  of  the  date  of  the  proposed  exercise. 

SCHOOLS 

(/)    The  Privates'  School:     To  embrace  the 
subjects  prescribed  in  (C)  paragraph  2,  General 
268 


Appendix 

Orders  No.  19,  these  headquarters,  if  this  course 
has  not  been  completed  with  repetition,  where 
desired. 

The  day  preceding  each  field  exercise,  an 
explanation  of  the  nature  of  the  exercise 
and  the  duties  required  of  the  soldier  in 
any  position  likely  to  be  assigned  to  him,  will 
be  explained.  A  critique  will  follow  each  ex- 
ercise. 

Whenever  the  company,  troop  or  battery  has 
engaged  in  an  exercise,  as  part  of  a  large  com- 
mand, the  full  exercise  and  the  part  played  by 
the  organization  will  be  explained  next  school 
day,  and  the  men  will  be  asked  as  to  their  knowl- 
edge of  the  exercise,  and  permitted  to  express 
their  views,  the  officer  explaining  any  points  not 
understood. 

This  not  only  instructs  the  men,  but  is  a  valu- 
able means  of  enabling  the  officer  to  judge  of  the 
interest  the  man  takes  in  his  duty,  as  well  as  of 
the  intelligence  of  the  man. 

Instruction  in  making  brush  revetments,  ga- 
bions, fascines,  hurdles,  etc.,  instruction  of  men 
detailed  especially  as  signalmen,  packers  and  any 
other  special  work  will  be  given  during  school 
hours. 

(2)  Noncommissioned  Officers'  School:  So 
much  instruction  as  is  prescribed  in  (C)  para- 
graph 2,  General  Orders  No.  19,  1916,  these 
headquarters,  as  has  not  been  completed,  will 
269 


National  Service  Library 

be   completed,    and   as    much   as    is    necessary, 
repeated. 

After  the  completion  of  the  courses  prescribed 
in  General  Orders  No.  19,  referred  to  above, 
noncommissioned  officers  will  not  attend  privates' 
school,  except  as  assistants  to  the  instructor,  but 
subjects  will  be  so  arranged  that  noncommis- 
sioned officers  will  receive  at  least  rudimentary 
instruction  in  each  subject  before  the  subject  is 
introduced  in  the  privates'  school. 

(j)  Officers'  School:  Where  practicable,  there 
will  be  a  branch  of  this  school  for  field  officers 
and  one  for  captains  and  subalterns. 

In  each  of  these  schools,  instruction  prescribed 
for  officers'  school  in  (E)  paragraph  2,  General 
Orders  No.  19,  1916,  above  referred  to,  will  be 
completed.  The  subjects  will  be  enlarged  upon 
by  use  of  instruction  bulletins  and  by  lectures  by 
inspector-instructors. 

After  each  field  exercise  there  will  be  a  dis- 
cussion in  the  officers'  school  hour  of  the  exer- 
cise and  the  duties  pertaining  to  each  officer  and 
unit  which  may  not  have  been  made  clear  in  the 
critique  immediately  following  the  exercise.  Also 
the  school  day,  prior  to  the  holding  of  any  field 
exercise,  the  duties  pertaining  to  each  officer  and 
unit  of  the  command  will  be  studied  and  ex- 
plained in  the  officers'  school. 

The  hour  designated  to  officers'  school  will  be 
largely  devoted  to  these  matters 
270 


Appendix 

CEREMONIES  AND  INSPECTIONS 

Weather  permitting,  there  will  be  held  four  (4) 
parades  each  week  as  follows: 

Monday ist  battalion  or  squadron 

Tuesday 2d  battalion  or  squadron 

Wednesday 3d  battalion  or  squadron 

Thursday regiment 

Whenever  parade  cannot  be  held,  retreat  for- 
mation will  be  under  arms,  and  will  be  attended 
by  all  company,  troop  or  battery  officers  of  State 
troops.  An  inspection  of  arms  and  clothing 
will  be  made  before  the  organizations  are  dis- 
missed. 

Other  ceremonies  prescribed  by  Drill  Regula- 
tions of  the  different  arms  will  be  substituted  for 
parades  from  time  to  time. 

Each  battalion  or  squadron  commander,  ac- 
companied by  the  company,  troop  or  battery  com- 
mander will  inspect  the  quarters,  kitchens,  la- 
trines and  grounds  of  his  organization,  before 
noon,  each  day.  He  will  assure  himself  that  all 
sanitary  and  other  regulations  have  been  com- 
plied with.  He  will  also  make  the  afternoon 
inspection  prescribed  in  General  Orders  No.  13, 
Southern  Department,  1916.  Company,  troop 
and  battery  commanders  will  pay  minute  atten- 
tion to  the  economical  handling,  and  proper 
preparation  of  the  food. 
271 


National  Service  Library 

On  Saturday  mornings  there  will  be  inspection 
and  drill  for  three  (3)  hours,  two  (2)  of  which 
will  be  under  arms.  At  least  one-half  (l/2}  of 
the  Saturdays  will  be  allowed  troop,  battery  and 
company  commanders  for  their  inspections. 

Every  Saturday  morning,  all  regimental  and 
detachment  supply  officers  will  thoroughly  in- 
spect their  organizations  and  equipment,  espe- 
cially their  transportation.  For  this  purpose,  the 
wagons  will  be  hitched  up  and  the  equipment  and 
separate  parts  of  the  wagons  and  harness,  shoe- 
ing of  animals,  will  be  minutely  examined,  and 
any  repairs  or  replacements  necessary  will  be  at 
once  attended  to.  This  inspection  is  of  more  im- 
portance than  the  inspection  of  companies  etc., 
as  without  transportation  in  fit  condition,  the 
troops  are  of  little  use.  All  commanding  officers 
will  so  arrange  the  routine  of  camp  supply,  as  to 
allow  Friday  afternoons  for  preparation  for  this 
inspection,  and  Saturday  mornings  for  the  in- 
spection. Only  serious  emergency  will  be  per- 
mitted to  interfere  with  this  duty.  Nothing  in 
this  paragraph  will  be  construed  to  relieve  com- 
manding officers  of  their  responsibility  for  the 
condition  of  all  parts  of  their  commands. 

TESTS 

Inspector-instructors  on  duty  with  State 
troops  will  carefully  observe  the  conduct  of  drills 
and  exercises  of  each  company,  troop  and  battery 

272 


Appendix 

under  their  instruction,  with  a  view  to  selecting 
the  most  proficient  to  represent  the  regiment  or 
smaller  unit,  in  a  competitive  test  to  be  held  at 
a  date  to  be  designated  later  by  these  headquar- 
ters. Tests  of  comparative  efficiency  will  be  con- 
ducted for  this  purpose  where  necessary. 

ADMINISTRATION 

In  order  that  the  important  and,  at  present, 
heavy  work  of  administration  and  accountability 
may  not  be  delayed  or  neglected,  officers  charged 
with  administrative  responsibilities,  and  their 
authorized  enlisted  clerks  will,  under  the  super- 
vision of  brigade  and  regimental  commanders,  be 
excused  from  other  duties  in  the  afternoon,  for 
such  time  as  is  necessary  for  the  proper  perform- 
ance of  their  administrative  duties. 

7.  Details  for  the  instruction  and  training  of 
staff  troops  will  be  arranged  by  the  staff  officers, 
assigned  to  this  duty  by  these  headquarters. 

All  staff  corps  troops  will  participate  in  all 
field  work  of  the  tactical  units  to  which  they  are 
attached.  They  will  be  assigned  to  duty  appro- 
priate to  their  qualifications. 

8.  Saturday    afternoons    will    be    devoted    to 
athletic   sports   and   amusements,    organized   by 
regimental     commanders     or     commanders     of 
smaller  separate  units. 

No  functions  under  arms  will  take  place  Satur- 
day afternoons. 

273 


National  Service  Library 

The  afternoon  of  the  second  (2d)  and  fourth 
(4th)  Saturdays  of  each  month  are  set  aside 
for  regimental  athletic  meets.  Regimental  com- 
manders and  commanders  of  smaller  separate 
units  will  arrange  for  the  conduct  of  these  meets. 
(See  General  Orders  No.  22,  July  28,  1916, 
these  headquarters.) 

9.  Sundays:     One  and  one-half  (ij^)  hours 
•will  be  set  aside  for  devotional  exercises.  During 
the  day,  three  ( 3 )  hours  for  amusement  and  en- 
tertainment will  be  set  aside.    The  entertainment 
will  be  organized  under  direction  of  regimental 
commanders  and  commanders  of  smaller  separate 
units. 

10.  It  is  as  much  the  duty  of  commanding  offi- 
cers to  provide  healthy  amusement  and  diversion 
for  the  men,  outside  of  instruction  hours,  as  to 
provide  the  instruction  for  these  hours. 

Such  forms  of  entertainment  as  vaudeville 
features,  boxing  and  wrestling  matches  and  stag 
dances  are  a  few  of  the  means  for  providing  en- 
tertainment. A  search  should  be  made  in  each 
regiment  for  talent  among  the  officers  and  men 
which  can  be  used  in  this  connection. 

1 1 .  Attention  is  called  to  paragraph  9,  Manual 
of  Interior  Guard  Duty.    In  all  camps,  one  (i) 
company  of  troop  will  furnish  the  entire  guard, 
the  remainder  of  the  company  or  troop  so  de- 
tailed, will  be  available  for  general  fatigue  and 
police  of  camp.     Men  not  necessary  for  fatigue 

274 


Appendix 

will  be  given  drill  in  Manual  of  Arms,  Bayonet 
and  Saber,  Fencing  or  other  appropriate  in- 
struction. 

The  fact  that  a  company  or  troop  is  on  guard 
is  no  excuse  for  absence  from  drill  of  men  not 
on  guard  or  fatigue. 

By  command  of  Brigadier  General  Parker : 

F.  R.  McCoy, 
Captain,  3d  Cavalry,  Chief  of  Staff. 

Official : 

R.  K.  EVANS, 

Lieutenant  Colonel,  Adjutant  General, 
District  Adjutant. 


275 


Appendix  VIII 

SUGGESTIONS  FOR  AN  INSPECTION  OF  EQUIPMENT 

"A"  AND  SURPLUS  KITS  PRESCRIBED  IN 

EQUIPMENT  "B" 

(In  submitting  answers  questions  will  not  be 
written  as  the  numbering  of  answers  is  sufficient. 
Every  defect  will  be  corrected  without  delay  and 
report  will  be  made  of  action  taken  upon  paper 
containing  answers.) 

Battalion:  Questions  to  be  answered  after  a 
monthly  field  inspection  of  the  personnel,  mounts 
and  material  of  a  battalion,  and  submitted  to 
brigade  headquarters  (through  regimental  com- 
mander) . 

1.  How  many  officers  at  inspection  ? 

2.  (a)   Did  each  officer  have  full  equipment 
prescribed?     (b)   State  shortages. 

3.  How  many  enlisted  men  at  inspection? 

4.  What  was  the  appearance  of  enlisted  men 
as  regards:    (a)   Clothing  worn?     (b)    Set-up? 
(c)  Fit  and  packing  of  equipment?     (d)  Neat- 
ness? 

5.  At  inspection  how  many  men  had  corns  or 
needed  treatment  for  their  feet? 

276 


Appendix 

6.  What  was  the  general  appearance  and  con- 
dition of  feet  at  inspection? 

7.  (a)  Were  any  cases  of  "dhobie"  or  other 
itch  found  on  feet?     (b)  How  many? 

8.  Are  all  men  receiving  treatment  for  bad 
feet  when  needed? 

9.  (a)  Were  all  stockings  worn  at  inspection 
in  good  condition?     (b)  How  many  were  in  bad 
order  ? 

TO.  How  many  men  did  not  wear  woolen 
stockings?  If  any,  state  by  whom  authority  to 
wear  other  than  woolen  was  given  and  necessity 
for  same. 

1 1 .  Were  all  shoes  worn  at  inspection  "broken 
in"  and  in  serviceable  condition? 

12.  Was  all  clothing  serviceable  and  only  that 
prescribed  ? 

13.  Was  ammunition  in  belts  the  amount  pre- 
scribed, and  was  it  carried  properly  in  every 
pocket  ? 

14.  Were  there  any  defective  pockets  in  the 
ammunition  belts? 

15.  Were  canteens  full  and  in  good  condi- 
tion? 

1 6.  Were  cups  in  good  condition? 

17.  Were  any  canteen  covers  unserviceable? 

1 8.  Were  all  first-aid  pouches  in  serviceable 
condition  and  carried  as  prescribed? 

19.  (a)  Were  all  first-aid  packets  serviceable? 
(b)  How  many  unserviceable? 

277 


National  Service  Library 

20.  How  many  rifles  at  the  inspection? 

21.  Was  every  rifle  clean  and  in  serviceable 
condition  ? 

22.  Did  every  rifle  have  brush  and  thong; 
also  oil  as  prescribed? 

23.  (a)   Were  the  two  telescopic  sights  and 
the  two  rifles  in  each  company  fitted  for  those 
sights  carried?    (b)  If  not,  why  not? 

24.  Were  the  bayonets  and  scabbards  clean 
and  in  good  condition? 

25.  Was    the    entire    equipment    uniformly 
carried  ? 

26.  Were    the    haversacks    uniformly    and 
properly  packed,  and  were  all  straps  for  carrying 
them  serviceable  in  every  way? 

27.  Were  all  articles  prescribed   for  haver- 
sacks carried  and  were  they  in  good  serviceable 
condition  ? 

28.  Were  the  contents  of  the  condiment  bags 
or  cans  as  prescribed  for  number  of  days'  rations 
ordered  ? 

29.  Was  the  bacon  can  carried  top  up,   if 
furnished  ? 

30.  Was  anything  carried  in  meat  cans  to 
prevent    rattling    of    knife,    fork    and    spoons, 
and  was  pocket   for  meat  can,  the  can  itself, 
and    its    contents    all    complete    and    in    good 
condition  ? 

31.  Was  the  pack  properly  and  uniformly 
packed  ? 

278 


Appendix 

32.  (a)  Were  all  prescribed  articles  carried 
in  the  pack?     (b)  Were  they  all  in  good  condi- 
tion and  serviceable? 

33.  Were  intrenching  tools  complete  in  each 
squad  and  carried  as  prescribed? 

34.  Did  every  man  have  a  properly  marked 
identification  tag  with  his  name,  company,  rank, 
etc.? 

35.  Was  all  equipment  properly  marked  as 
prescribed  with  company,  regiment,  and  number? 
(All  articles  are  not  required  to  be  marked  ex- 
actly alike,  but  each  kind  of  article  should  be 
marked  in  the  same  place  and  manner.    Articles 
should  be   marked   only  as   prescribed   for  the 
article  itself.) 

36.  Did  first  sergeants  and  musicians  have 
pistols ;  were  they  clean  and  serviceable,  and  was 
prescribed  ammunition  carried  properly? 

37.  Did   each   first   sergeant  carry   a   watch 
compass,  a  pair  of  field  glasses  "EE,"  a  Weldon 
range  finder  and  pouch,  a  five-foot  and  fifty-foot 
tape,  a  field  message  book,  a  notebook,  a  pencil 
and  a  whistle? 

38.  Did  each  sergeant  carry  a  compass  watch, 
a  field  message  book,  a  pencil  and  a  whistle? 

'  Two   sergeants    in   each    company    should    also 
each  carry  a  field  glass  "EE." 

39.  Did    each    company    musician    carry    a 
bugle,  a  bugle  sling,  a  field  glass  ("A"  or  "B"),  a 
flag  kit,  infantry  combination,  a  wire  cutter  and 

279 


National  Service  Library 

carrier,   a  field   message   book,   a  pencil  and   a 
whistle  ? 

40.  Did    each    squad    leader   carry   a    screw 
driver   (rifle),  two  No.  4  and  two  No.  6  drift 
slides,  a  roll  of  adhesive  tape,  a  box  of   foot 
powder,  a  housewife,  a  field  message  book  or 
notebook,  and  a  pencil? 

41.  Did  number  4  rear  rank  carry  jointed 
cleaning   rod    and    case,    or   were    surplus   kits 
carried  ? 

Surplus  Kit: 

42.  Did  each  man  inspected  have  a  surplus 
kit  complete  as  prescribed? 

43.  (a)  Was  each  pair  of  shoes  in  surplus  kit 
"broken   in"   and   serviceable?  (b)    How   many 
were  found  unserviceable? 

44.  (a)  Was  every  pair  of  woolen  stockings 
in  surplus  kit  inspected?     (b)  How  many  were 
found  unserviceable? 

45.  (a)   Was  every  suit  of  underclothing  in 
surplus   kit   inspected?      (b)    How   many   were 
found  unserviceable? 

46.  (a)    Was  every  O.   D.   shirt  in  surplus 
kit   inspected?      (b)    How    many    were    found 
unserviceable  ? 

47.  (a)  Was  every  pair  of  breeches  in  sur- 
plus kit  inspected?     (b)  How  many  were  found 
unserviceable  ? 

48.  (a)  Was  every  extra  pair  of  shoe  laces 

280 


Appendix 

in  surplus  kit  inspected?     (b)  How  many  were 
found  unserviceable  ? 

Note:  Battalion  sergeant  major  and  mounted 
orderlies  should  be  inspected,  but  report  of  re- 
sult of  inspection  will  be  given  in  report  of  in- 
spection of  headquarters  company. 

49.  Did  each  company  have  all  the  articles 
given  below?  If  not,  state  what  articles  are  short. 

Quartermaster:  Axes  and  helves,  2;  water 
bags,  sterilizing,  i  ;  mosquito  bars,  single,  at 
least  one  for  each  two  men ;  bedding  rolls,  I  for 
each  officer;  buckets,  G.  I.,  2;  candles  (if  no  oil 
carried)  ;  cooking  utensils,  march  kit,  i  G.  O. 
39-15,  8-15,  22-15;  field  desk,  small,  and  con- 
tents, i  G.  O.  39-15,  8-15 ;  mosquito  head  nets,  7 ; 
combination  lanterns,  complete,  2;  matches, 
boxes,  24 ;  mineral  oil,  gallons,  3 ;  neat's-f oot  oil, 
pints,  2;  pickaxes  and  helves,  2;  powder,  hypo 
of  lime,  tubes,  50;  shovels,  S.  H.,  2;  soap,  issue, 
Ibs.,  12;  shoe  stretcher,  i;  shelter  tents,  com- 
plete, 3 ;  fly-wall  tent,  i  ;  barber  kit,  i  G.  O.  39- 
15;  litters,  i. 

Rations:  Field,  days  per  man,  2 ;  reserve,  days 
per  man,  i. 

Ordnance:  Stencil,  personal,  equipment-rifle, 
i  ;  ball  cartridges,  caliber,  .30,  per  rifle,  120;  ball 
cartridges,  caliber,  .45,  per  pistol,  21 ;  range  finder 
(B.  &L.),  i. 

281 


National  Service  Library 

50.  Did  each  battalion  headquarters  have  all 
the  articles  given  below?    If  not,  state  what  ar- 
ticles were  short : 

Quartermaster:  Axes  and  helves,  8;  bedding 
rolls,  2;  buckets,  G.  I.,  i ;  candles  (if  no  mineral 
oil)  ;  colors,  i ;  field  desk,  small,  and  contents,  i ; 
handcuffs,  pairs,  i ;  combination  lanterns,  com- 
plete, i ;  matches,  boxes,  6 ;  harness  mender,  i ; 
horseshoe  nails,  Ibs.,  2;  mineral  oil,  gallons,  2; 
pickaxes  and  helves,  8 ;  rock  salt,  Ibs.,  i  ;  horse 
shoes,  extra,  Ibs.,  2;  mule  shoes,  fitted,  Ibs.,  16; 
mule  shoes,  extra,  Ibs.,  4;  shovels,  S.  H.,  8;  sling, 
color  C.  D.,  i ;  pyramidal  tent,  small,  complete,  i. 

Ordnance:  Packs,  small  arms  ammunition,  2; 
repair  material,  combat  chest  or  box  (arm-repair 
chest),  i. 

Medical:    Box  reserve  dressings,  i ;  litters,  3. 
Engineer:    Reconnaissance  outfit,  i. 
Grain:    Reserve,  days  (each  wagon),  2. 

Rations:  Reserve,  2;  field,  days  per  man  on 
ration  section,  2;  reserve,  days  per  man  on  ra- 
tion section,  i. 

51.  How  many  rifles  are  equipped  with  spare 
part  containers?     (All  rifles  manufactured  since 
October,    1910,  will  hold  either  the  spare  part 
container  or  the  oil  and  thong  case.    With  com- 

282 


Appendix 

mands  equipped  with  these  rifles  the  odd-num- 
ber men  should  carry  oil  and  thong  cases  and 
the  even-number  the  spare-part  container.) 

52.  In  these  reports  unnecessary  paper  work 
will  be  avoided ;  therefore,  in  submitting  answers 
questions  will  not  be  written.    The  numbering  of 
answers  is  sufficient.     Each  officer  will  prepare 
the  answer  sheets  for  his  organization. 

53.  As  an  example,  a  battalion  report  would 
be  something  like  this: 

MERCEDES,  TEXAS,  June  20,  1916. 
Third  Battalion,  Second  Infantry. 

'  No.  i.  Two.— No.  2.  (a)  Yes.  (b)  No  short- 
ages.— No.  3.  243. — No.  4.  (a)  Very  good, 
(b)  Fair,  (c)  Good,  (d)  Excellent.— No.  5. 
Two. — No.  6.  Very  good. — No.  49.  No  short- 
ages.— No.  60.  No  shortages. 

A.  B. 
Major,  4th  Infantry. 


283 


Appendix  IX 

ORDER  FOR  ATHLETIC  COMPETITION  AND  OTHER 
AMUSEMENTS 

General  Orders 
No. — 

1.  Wednesday,  August  i6th,  1916,  and  Wed- 
nesday, August  3Oth,   1916,  are  designated  ath- 
letic  field   days   in   all   regiments   and   separate 
smaller  commands  in  this  district. 

2.  Regimental  and  other  commanders  and  in- 
spector-instructors will  arrange  for  the  selection 
of  competitors  from  each  battery,  troop,  or  com- 
pany of  each  command  to  take  part  in  the  compe- 
titions, prescribed  below,  and  also  make  all  other 
arrangements  for  the  successful  conduct  of  the 
field-day  exercises. 

3.  Suitable  prizes  when  necessary  will  be  given 
the  winners  of  each  event,  the  money  being  raised 
from    exchange    appropriations    or    donations 
from  company  funds,  or  such  other  means  as 
may  be  available. 

4.  For  the  first  meet,  the  events  will  be  as 
follows:     zoo-yard  dash,  22O-yard  dash,  running 
broad  jump,  running  high  jump,  quoit  pitching 
(horseshoes  to  be  used),  wall  scaling  (i  squad, 

284    • 


Appendix 

8-ft.  wall),  boxing,  wrestling,  and  such  other  con- 
tests as  are  considered  desirable. 

5.  In  addition  to  preparation  for  the  set  field 
days,  regimental  and  other  commanders  will  en- 
courage the  organization  of  baseball,  volley  and 
basketball   teams,    fencing  clubs,   etc.,    in   their 
commands. 

6.  Company,  troop  and  battery  commanders 
will  arrange   for  the  amusement  of  their  men 
by  providing  amusement  tents  or  rooms  in  which 
books,   magazines  and  papers  can  be  obtained. 
If  funds  can  be  obtained  by  subscription  or  other- 
wise, phonographs  and  pool  tables  may  also  be 
provided. 


Appendix  X 

NOTES  ON  TRAINING  IN  FIRE  CONTROL  AND 
DIRECTION 

Target  Designation 

Horizontal  Clock  Face  System  (used  with  vis- 
ible targets)  : 

System  Example 

1.  Announce  direction.        "At  2  o'clock." 

2.  Announce  range.  "Range  1,000." 

3.  Announce  objective.        "A  troop  of  cavalry 

dismounted." 

Procedure 

1.  All  look  along  a  line  pointing  towards  2 
o'clock  of  a  horizontal  clock  face  whose  center  is 
at  the  firing  point  and  whose  12  o'clock  mark  is 
directly  perpendicular  to  the  front  of  the  firing 
line. 

2.  All  look  at  a  point  about  1,000  yards  away 
on  the  2  o'clock  line,  and — 

3.  At  1,000  yards  on  the  2  o'clock  line  find  the 
objective. 

Vertical  Clock  Face  System  (used  against  small 
or  indistinct  targets)  : 

286 


Appendix 


Example 

"To   our   right    front" 
(or  at  2  o'clock). 

"A    stone    house    with 
two  chimneys." 


"At  3  o'clock." 


System 

1.  Announce   the   gen- 

eral direction  of 
reference  point. 

2.  Designate   a   refer- 

ence point  the 
most  prominent 
object  in  the  zone 
indicated. 

3.  Announce  the  posi- 

tion of  the  target 
with  respect  to  the 
reference  point. 

4.  Announce  the  range.     "Range  1,000." 

5.  Announce  the  objec-     "A    hostile    patrol    of 

tive.  four  men." 

Procedure 

1.  All  men  look  to  their  right  front  (or  along 
the  2  o'clock  line). 

2.  The  reference  point  (stone  house)  is  found 
in  the  indicated  direction. 

3.  A  clock  face  (vertical)   is  imagined  cen- 
tered on  the  reference  point  and  the  men  look 
along  the  line  leading  from  2  o'clock  center  to  3 
o'clock,  and, — 

4.  1,000   yards   away, 

5.  Find  the  hostile  patrol. 

Finger  System  (used  with  indistinct  or  invis- 
ible targets  and  to  define  sectors)  : 
287 


National  Service  Library 


1.  Announce    direction 

to  reference  point 
as  in  the  vertical 
clock  face  system. 

2.  Announce  reference 

point. 

3.  Announce      angular 

distance  and  direc- 
tion from  the  ref- 
erence point  to  the 
target. 

4.  Announce  range. 

5.  Announce  objective. 


Example 

"To  our  right  front  at 
i,oooyards." 


"A  stone  house  with 
two  chimneys." 

"Four  o'clock,  three 
fingers  (90  mils,  2 
inches,  etc.) 


"Range  1,000." 

"A  skirmish  line  along 
side  of  the  fence, 
length  about  two 
fingers,  right  at  the 
dark  bush." 


Procedure 

The  reference  point  is  found  as  explained  and 
the  vertical  o'clock  line  upon  which  the  target 
will  be  found.  The  arm  is  extended  to  its  full 
extent,  palm  of  the  hand  upwards,  fingers  held 
vertically  with  one  side  of  the  hand  "against"  the 
reference  point.  The  target  will  be  found  on  the 
4  o'clock  line  and  touching  the  third  finger  at 
1,000  yards  distance,  its  right  flank  at  the  bush 
and  its  left  flank  about  100  yards  farther  to  the 
288 


Appendix 

right.  Where  the  mil  system  is  used  mils  are 
measured  either  from  a  ruler,  graduated  pencil, 
or  other  graduated  line  held  at  a  certain  distance 
from  the  eye  after  the  manner  of  the  battery  com- 
mander's ruler,  or  the  soldier  is  taught  the  number 
of  mils  which  are  covered  by  one  of  his  ringers 
when  held  at  arm's  length.  One  point  of  windage 
is  approximately  one  mil. 

Auxiliary  Aiming  Point  System:  This  does 
not  differ  from  the  other  systems  so  far  as  the 
designation  of  the  aiming  point  is  concerned.  It 
is  used  where  the  target  is  invisible  or  offers  an 
aiming  point  which  is  so  indistinct  as  to  render 
the  fire  ineffective  because  of  the  lack  of  a  suit- 
able holding  point.  In  such  a  case,  and  when  the 
landscape  affords  a  suitable  aiming  point  which 
is  within  the  same  sector  as  the  target,  men  are 
told  to  aim  at  the  good  aiming  point  or  line  but 
with  such  a  sight  setting  that  the  bullets  will  fall 
on  the  target  instead  of  on  the  aiming  point. 
Within  limits  an  aiming  point  may  be  chosen 
which  is  slightly  to  one  side  or  the  other  of  the 
target,  an  approximate  deflection  being  set  off  on 
the  wind-gauge. 

Example:  The  enemy  is  on  a  line  300  yards 
in  front  of  a  white  road,  a  hedge,  etc.  The  small 
target  furnished  by  the  line  of  heads  will  not 
afford  a  good  aiming  point,  while  the  white  road, 
the  hedge,  etc.,  300  yards  directly  in  rear  is  a 
289 

Vol.  3— N.S.L.  10 


National  Service  Library 

good  aiming  point.  Here  the  men  might  be  di- 
rected to  aim  at  the  road  with  a  sight  setting 
slightly  less  than  the  true  range  to  the  target, 
it  being  assumed  that  the  terrain  is  flat.  Where 
the  auxiliary  point  is  above  the  target  a  lower 
sight  setting  will  be  required  than  the  true  range, 
and  conversely  where  the  aiming  point  is  below 
the  target  a  higher  sight  setting  will  be  required. 
To  avoid  a  negative  sight  setting,  the  aiming  point 
should  be  below  the  target  if  possible.  The  cor- 
rect sight  setting  is  a  matter  of  judgment.  Vari- 
ous mechanical  devices  exist  which  give  a  correct 
sight  setting,  but  judgment,  reenforced  by  obser- 
vation of  the  effect  of  the  fire,  will  generally  be 
the  only  method  available. 

Covering  Fire:  It  is  a  cardinal  principle  that 
the  whole  target  must  be  kept  under  fire  during 
an  advance.  To  this  end  the  whole  target  is  usu- 
ally divided  into  company  sectors  and  a  definite 
part  of  the  company  sector  is  assigned  to  each  fire 
unit.  When  any  fire  unit  ceases  its  fire,  as  when 
advancing  for  example,  arrangements  must  be 
made  for  some  other  unit  to  take  up  the  work  in 
its  assigned  sector.  (Par.  413,  I.D.R.) 

This  may  be  accomplished  by  one  of  two  gen- 
eral methods:  I.  By  assigning  more  than  one 
fire  unit  to  each  sector  (overlapping  method). 
2.  By  assigning  one  platoon  to  the  duty  of  re- 
placing the  fire  lost  by  the  cessation  of  the  fire 
in  the  other  platoons  (switch  method).  Each 
290 


Appendix 

method  has  many  variations,  and  each  has  its 
appropriate  occasions,  but  care  should  be  exer- 
cised that  in  adopting  a  variant,  one  is  chosen 
that  is  simple,  practicable,  and  does  not  endanger 
advance  portions  of  the  line.  The  following  are 
typical  examples  of  the  two  methods  in  detail. 

Overlapping  Method:  (Par.  413,  I.D.R.) 
With  four  platoons  in  the  company  the  company 
sector  is  divided  into  two  parts,  each  of  which  is 
covered  by  two  adjacent  platoons.  When  one  of 
these  platoons  ceases  fire  to  advance,  the  other, 
having  the  same  sector,  replaces  the  lost  rifles  by 
firing  faster.  With  three  platoons  the  company 
sector  is  divided  into  two  parts,  one  is  assigned 
to  each  flank  platoon  and  the  whole  company  sec- 
tor to  the  center  platoon.  With  two  platoons, 
each  takes  the  whole  company  sector. 

Switch  Method:  The  company  sector  is  di- 
vided into  a  number  of  parts  one  less  than  the 
number  of  platoons  in  the  company.  One  platoon 
is  designated  as  the  "switch"  and  swings  its  fire 
automatically  into  that  sector  from  which  the  fire 
of  its  assigned  unit  is  withdrawn.  Thus  with 
four  platoons  and  platoon  rushes  to  start  from 
the  right,  the  company  sector  is  divided  into  three 
parts  assigned  to  the  first,  second  and  third  pla- 
toons, the  fourth  being  the  "switch."  Number  one 
ceases  fire  to  advance,  number  four  fires  at 
number  one's  target,  number  two  ceases  and 
291 


National  Service  Library 

number  four  fires  at  number  two's  target,  then 
at  number  three's  target,  and  finally  number 
four  advances. 

Variants  which  call  for  more  complicated  solu- 
tions than  this  generally  will  fail  in  action,  and 
even  this  can  be  used  only  by  trained  troops  well 
in  hand.  Danger  to  advanced  or  advancing  por- 
tions of  the  line  is  minimized  by  this  method,  but 
control  by  the  corporals  at  platoon  divisions  must 
be  the  best  protection  in  all  cases. 

PRELIMINARY  MUSKETRY  TRAINING — FIFTH 
BRIGADE 

Ranging — Exercise  i ;  Exercise  2. 
Target  Designation — Exercise  3 ;  Exercise  4. 
Communication — Exercise  5;  Exercise  6. 
Fire  Discipline — Exercise  7. 

The  problems  included  in  this  bulletin  are  pub- 
lished as  suggestions  for  the  elementary  training 
of  individuals  and  squads.  To  assist  organization 
commanders  in  their  work  of  formulating  prob- 
lems for  larger  units,  the  following  general  rules 
are  included  and  their  attention  is  directed 
to  the  field-firing  problems  published  in  the 
S.A.F.M.,  nearly  all  of  which  can  be  slightly 
altered  so  as  to  serve  as  preliminary  train- 
ing problems  without  ammunition  or  special 
apparatus. 

292 


Appendix 

Targets 

1.  As  silhouettes  are  not  available,  it  will  be 
necessary   to   represent   targets   with    individual 
soldiers;  with  this  in  view,  it  is  recommended 
that   regimental   and  battalion   commanders  ar- 
range the  instruction  in  their  organizations  so 
that  sufficient  men  will  be  available  for  use  as 
targets. 

2.  With  reference  to  their  visibility,  the  battle 
field  will  present  three  classes  of  targets:     (a) 
Those  which  are  visible  throughout,     (b)  Those 
which  are  visible  in  part,     (c)  Those  which  are 
invisible,  but  whose  location  might  be  described. 

In  these  preliminary  exercises,  targets  should 
be  arranged  to  simulate  one  of  the  enumerated 
classes.  Instruction  should  begin  with  simple 
exercises  in  which  the  target  presented  is  plainly 
visible  and  represents  only  the  objective  of  the 
unit  undergoing  instruction.  It  should  progress 
to  the  more  difficult  exercises  in  which  the  target 
is  invisible  and  the  line  of  figures  is  prolonged  to 
include  the  objective  of  units  on  the  right  or  left. 

3.  The   limits  of   indistinct  targets   may   be 
shown  to  unit  commanders  by  the  use  of  com- 
pany  flags.     These   flags,   however,   should  be 
withdrawn   from  sight  before  a  description  of 
the  target  or  an  estimate  of  the  range  is  attempted 
and  before  any  one  but  the  commander  of  the 
unit  undergoing  instruction  sees  their  location. 

293 


National  Service  Library 

4.  At  the  conclusion  of  each  exercise,  in  which 
flags  are  used  to  mark  the  limits  of  the  target  or 
its  subdivisions,  they  should  be  displayed,  in  or- 
der  that    any    existing   errors    may   be    readily 
pointed  out. 

5.  To  determine  proficiency  in  target  designa- 
tion, the  instructor  will  provide  a  sufficient  num- 
ber of  rifles,  placed  on  sand  bags  or  other  suitable 
rests,  and  require  those  charged  with  fire  direction 
and  control  to  sight  them  at  the  limits  of  their 
objective.     An  inspection  by  the  instructor  will 
at  once  detect  errors.     Similarly,  in  those  exer- 
cises in  which  all  the  members  of  the  firing  unit 
participate,  the  percentage  of  rifles  aimed  at  the 
correct  target  may  be  determined. 

6.  In  these  preliminary  exercises  no  method 
of  communication  will  be  permitted  that  could 
not  be  used  under  the  conditions  assumed  in  the 
problem. 

Exercise  I — Ranging 

Object:  To  train  the  individual  to  set  his  sight 
quickly  and  accurately  for  the  announced  range 
and  windage ;  and  to  accustom  leaders  to  the  giv- 
ing of  windage  data. 

Situation:  The  company  is  formed  in  single 
rank  at  the  "Ready"  with  the  rear  sight  set  at 
zero  and  the  slide  screw  normally  tight. 

Action:    The  range  and  windage  is  announced, 
sights  are  set  accurately  in  accordance  therewith 
294 


Appendix 

and  as  rapidly  as  may  be,  each  man  coming  to 
port  arms  immediately  upon  completing  the 
operation. 

Time:  Time  is  taken  from  the  last  word  of  the 
command. 

Standard:  Sights  should  be  correctly  set 
within  15  seconds. 

Note:  Of  the  two  elements,  time  and  accuracy, 
the  latter  is  the  more  important. 

Par.  411,  I.D.R.,  implies  complete  use  of  the 
rear  sight,  that  is,  utilization  of  the  wind  gauge, 
and  sight  setting  to  the  least  reading  of  the  rear 
sight  leaf,  i.e.,  25  yards.  Sight  setting  therefore 
in  this  exercise  should  include,  more  often  than 
not,  "fractional  ranges"  and  windage  data. 

Exercise  2 — Ranging 

Object:  To  familiarize  officers  and  noncom- 
missioned officers  in  the  use  of  an  auxiliary  aim- 
ing point. 

Situation:  Two  men  with  the  company  flags 
are  stationed  to  mark  the  enemy's  invisible  posi- 
tion. This  position  should  be  suitably  located 
with  reference  to  a  practicable  aiming  point. 

Action:    The  markers  are  signaled  to  display 

their  flags.    An  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer 

is  called  up  and  the  enemy's  position  is  pointed  out. 

The  flags  are  then  withdrawn  and  the  officer  or 

295 


National  Service  Library 

noncommissioned  officer  selects  an  auxiliary  aim- 
ing point  and  gives  his  commands  for  firing  at 
that  point. 

Exercise  3 — Target  Designation 

Object:  To  train  the  individual  soldier  to  lo- 
cate a  target  from  a  description  solely.  To  do  so 
quickly  and  accurately  and  fire  thereon  with  ef- 
fect, and  to  train  officers  and  noncommissioned 
officers  in  concise,  accurate  and  clear  description 
of  targets. 

Situation:  The  men  are  so  placed  as  not  to  be 
able  to  see  the  target.  The  instructor  places 
himself  so  as  to  see  the  objective. 

Action:  The  instructor,  to  one  man  at  a  time, 
describes  the  objective,  and  directs  him  to  fire  one 
simulated  round.  The  man  immediately  moves  so 
as  to  see  the  target,  locates  it,  estimates  the  range 
and  fires  one  simulated  shot. 

Standard:  For  ranges  within  battle  sight, 
time  20  seconds;  beyond  battle  sight,  time  30 
seconds.  Not  more  than  15  per  cent  error  in 
the  estimation  of  the  range.  Objective  cor- 
rectly located. 

Note:  Arrangements  made  so  that  the  descrip- 
tion of  the  target  is  heard  by  only  the  man  about 
to  fire.  After  firing  the  man  will  not  mingle  with 
those  waiting  to  fire. 

296 


Appendix 

Exercise  4 — Target  Designation 

Object:  To  train  the  squad  leader  in  promptly 
bringing  the  fire  of  his  squad  to  -bear  effectively 
upon  the  target  presented.  To  train  the  indi- 
viduals of  a  squad  to  fire  effectively  from  orders 
of  the  squad  leader  and  automatically  to  obtain 
effective  dispersion. 

Situation:  The  squad  is  deployed,  the  squad 
leader  being  in  the  firing  line.  Position  prone. 
A  sighting  rest  is  provided  for  each  rifle. 

Action:  Upon  the  appearance  of  the  target 
the  squad  leader  gives  the  necessary  orders  for 
delivering  an  effective  fire.  The  men  under  these 
orders  sight  their  rifles  and  then  rise.  The  in- 
structor then  examines  the  position  and  sighting 
of  each  rifle. 

Time:  Time  is  taken  from  the  appearance  of 
the  target  until  the  last  man  has  risen. 

Target:  A  squad  of  men  to  outline  a  partially 
concealed  enemy  emerges  from  cover,  advances 
a  short  distance  and  lies  down. 

Standard:  Ninety  per  cent  of  the  rifles  should 
be  sighted  in  conformity  with  the  orders  of  the 
squad  leader  and  should  evenly  cover  the  whole 
front  of  the  objective.  The  squad  leader's  esti- 
mate of  the  range  should  not  be  in  error  over 
15  per  cent. 

297 


National  Service  Library 

Note:  The  squad  leader  should  not  in  general 
be  allowed  to  divide  the  target  into  sectors,  but 
to  obtain  distribution  by  training  the  men  to  fire 
at  that  portion  of  the  objective  directly  related  to 
the  position  they  occupy  in  their  own  line.  The 
exercise  should  be  repeated  with  the  squad  leader 
in  rear  of  the  squad  and  not  firing.  As  to  this,  it 
is  to  be  noted  that  musketry  school  experiments 
prove  that  in  small  groups  the  directed  fire  of 
say  seven  (7)  rifles  is  more  effective  than  the  par- 
tially undirected  fire  of  eight  (8)  rifles  obtained 
when  the  group  leader  is  himself  firing. 

Exercise  5 — Communication 

Object:  To  teach  prompt  and  accurate  trans- 
mission of  firing  data  without  cessation  of  fire, 
and  also  to  teach  automatic  readjustment  of  fire 
distribution. 

Situation:  A  squad  deployed  in  the  prone  po- 
sition and  with  sighting  rests,  is  firing  at  a  desig- 
nated target. 

Action:  A  squad  with  sights  set  at  zero  is  de- 
ployed and  brought  up  at  the  double  time  into  the 
intervals  of  the  firing  line  and  halted.  The  firing 
data  is  transmitted  to  them  without  cessation  of 
fire.  At  the  command  "Rise,"  given  20  seconds 
after  the  command  "Halt,"  the  first  squad  rises 
and  retires  a  short  distance  to  the  rear.  At  the 
same  time,  the  supports  cease  fire  and  adjust  their 
298 


Appendix 

rifles  in  the  rests  so  as  to  be  aimed  at  the  target 
as  they  understand  it.  They  then  rise  and  their 
rifles  are  examined  by  the  instructor  for  range 
and  direction. 

Standard:  Eighty  per  cent  of  the  rifles  should 
be  sighted  according  to  the  transmitted  data  and 
aimed  according  to  the  principles  of  fire 
distribution. 

Target:  One  target  equal  to  a  squad  front, 
which  is  increased  to  two  squads  prior  to  the  ar- 
rival of  the  supports  in  the  firing  line. 

Note:  This  exercise  should  be  repeated  with 
the  supporting  squad  reenf orcing  on  a  flank.  To 
determine  whether  the  original  squad  is  able  to 
keep  its  assigned  sector  during  an  advance,  this 
exercise  should  be  repeated,  the  supports  being 
thrown  in  after  a  series  of  short  advances  by  the 
original  squad.  Care  should  be  exercised  to  pre- 
vent the  transmission  of  firing  data  in  a  manner 
under  which  service  conditions  would  be  imprac- 
ticable. (See  Exercise  6.) 

Exercise  6 — Communication 

Object:  To  train  the  squad  leader  in  receiving 
and  transmitting  instructions  by  visual  signals 
alone. 

Situation:  A  squad  with  its  leader  in  the  firing 
line  is  deployed  in  the  prone  position  firing  at 
will. 

299 


National  Service  Library 

Action:  The  instructor,  without  sound  or  other 
cautionary  means,  signals  (visually)  to  the  squad 
leader  at  various  intervals  to:  First — Change 
elevation,  swing  the  fire  to  the  right  or  left,  sus- 
pend the  firing,  etc.,  etc.  The  squad  leader,  upon 
receiving  a  signal,  causes  his  squad  to  execute  it 
without  verbal  command  or  exposing  himself. 

Time:    No  specified  time  limit. 

Standard:  The  squad  leader  should  fire  with 
his  squad,  but  after  each  shot  should  look  towards 
his  platoon  leader  for  any  signal,  then  observe 
the  fire  and  conduct  of  his  men,  then,  after  glanc- 
ing again  at  his  platoon  leader,  fire  again.  This 
the  squad  leader  should  do  without  exposing  him- 
self. By  lying  about  a  head's  length  ahead  of 
his  men  he  can  see  his  squad  front.  In  trans- 
mitting orders  he  can  accomplish  it  by  nudging 
the  men  on  his  right  and  left  and  signaling  to 
them  with  his  hand. 

Xote:  This  exercise  is  essential  to  prepare  men 
for  the  deafening  noise  of  a  heavy  action  when 
speech  or  sound  signals  are  largely  futile. 

Exercise  7 — Fire  Discipline 

Object:    To  train  men  to  carry  out  strictly  the 
fire  orders  given  them,  and  to  refrain  from  start- 
ing, repeating  or  accepting  any  change  therefrom 
without  direct  orders  from  a  superior. 
300 


Appendix 

Situation:  A  squad  deployed  in  the  prone 
position. 

Action:  While  the  squad  is  firing  at  an  indis- 
tinct but  specified  target,  another  and  clearly 
visible  target  appears  in  the  vicinity  of  the  first 
target  but  not  in  the  same  sector.  Upon  the  ap- 
pearance of  this  second  target,  the  instructor  sees 
that  the  men  continue  firing  at  the  assigned  target. 
The  corporal  should  check  any  -breach  of  fire 
discipline. 

Note:  Variations  of  this  exercise  should  be 
given  to  test  the  fire  discipline  of  the  men  in  other 
phases,  such  as  rate  of  fire  (Par.  147, 1.D.R.),  etc. 

The  Finger 

The  "finger"  is  the  width  of  the  forefinger 
held  at  such  a  distance  from  the  eye  that  it  sub- 
tends 50  mils.  It  is  also  the  width  of  the  rear 
sight  leaf  seen  in  the  position  of  aiming,  which 
in  the  average  case  covers  50  mils  (1-20  of  the 
range). 

Communication 

Due  to  the  tremendous  uproar  and  confusion 
of  modern  battle,  the  use  of  every  class  of  signals 
has  become  indispensable.  Unbroken  communi- 
cation is  essential  to  efficiency  throughout  the 
entire  military  organization.  This  is  maintained 
by  systems  adapted  to  the  fields  in  which  used. 
301 


National  Service  Library 

In  a  well-organized  military  force,  contact  is 
regularly  maintained  between  the  War  Department 
in  the  capital  of  the  country  and  the  most  distant 
patrol  in  the  field.  Each  subordinate  maintains 
contact  with  his  commander.  This  principle  is 
maintained  from  private  through  squad,  platoon, 
company,  battalion,  regiment,  brigade,  division, 
field  army,  army  and  base  of  operations  to  the 
capital.  The  only  equality  in  rank  in  the  mili- 
tary service  is,  possibly,  to  be  found  among  the 
private  soldiers.  Every  military  man  has  a 
higher  authority  to  whom  he  reports  and  from 
whom  he  receives  orders.  It  is  this  principle 
that  makes  an  army  a  unit — without  it,  a  force 
lacking  cohesion. 

The  systems  used  for  conveying  military  in- 
formation are: 

First,  electricity ;  second,  messengers ;  third, 
visual  signals ;  fourth,  sound  signals ;  fifth,  vocal 
commands. 

The  means  and  particulars  of  these  systems  are 
set  forth  at  length  in  the  various  service  manuals, 
and  in  a  particular  manual  on  communications 
published  by  the  School  of  Musketry,  of  which 
the  following  resume  will  give  a  general  idea: 

Efficiency  in  the  means  of  communication  is 
essential  to  the  coordination  of  units  and  the 
attainment  of  success  in  battle. 

All  systems  of  communication  contribute  to  a 
common  end — the  efficiency  control  of  troops  in 
302 


Appendix 

attack  and  defense.  By  efficient  intercommuni- 
cation, the  movements  of  all  the  armies  in  the 
theater  of  operations  are  coordinated.  Within 
each  force,  great  or  small,  the  lines  of  informa- 
tion permit  the  commander  to  utilize  his  forces 
as  a  unit.  By  combining  reports  from  the  de- 
tachments in  contact  with  the  enemy  the  com- 
mander keeps  informed  of  events  along  his  en- 
tire front.  Information  passes  continually  from 
front  to  rear.  Instructions,  orders,  and  com- 
mands pass  from  headquarters  to  the  front, 
spreading  fanlike  until  the  will  of  the  commander 
is  known  at  the  most  distant  points. 

On  a  modern  battle  field,  stretching  over  miles 
of  front,  communication  is  an  important  and 
highly  developed  science.  Regiments  no  longer 
carry  streaming  banners  to  indicate  their  progress 
and  location.  It  is  true  that  each  headquarters 
may  display  a  distinctive  flag,  but  this  will  mark 
the  position  of  brigade  and  higher  commanders 
in  a  modest  manner  for  the  benefit  of  mes- 
sengers. 

After  the  supreme  commander  has  assigned 
missions  or  sectors  to  the  various  units  of  his 
command  and  ordered  the  advance  he  observes 
the  progress  of  events  closely  and  handles  his 
reserves  as  the  conditions  warrant.  All  the 
information  comes  to  him  over  the  lines — tele- 
graph, radio,  telephone,  buzzer  and  messenger — 
established  by  the  Signal  Corps.  These  lines, 
303 


National  Service  Library 

however,  do  not  extend  far  into  the  zone  of  hos- 
tile fire. 

To  the  front  of  brigade  headquarters — in  the 
second  zone — the  information  is  transmitted  by 
messenger,  visual  signaling  or  bugle.  The  bri- 
gade commander  divides  his  objective  among  the 
regiments  constituting  the  firing  line.  The  colo- 
nel usually  places  one  battalion  in  the  regimental 
reserve  and  gives  each  of  the  two  battalions 
sent  forward  one-half  of  the  regimental  objec- 
tive. The  major,  holding  back  a  support,  divides 
the  battalion  sector  between  his  companies  on 
the  firing  line  and  pushes  the  attack  against  the 
target  assigned  him.  The  captain  assigns  the 
company  target  among  his  four  platoons  in  such 
a  way  as  to  insure  the  maximum  fire  effect  dur- 
ing the  advance.  The  platoon  chief  points  out 
the  position  of  the  target  assigned  to  each  of 
his  four  squads,  and  the  corporals  require  each 
man  to  fire  at  the  part  of  the  squad  target  be- 
fore him. 

During  the  fire  fight,  the  messengers  and  sig- 
nalists  maintain  connection  between  brigade  and 
regimental  headquarters. 

For  this  purpose  the  brigade  commander  is 
furnished  three  staff  officers  and  authorized  en- 
listed men. 

The  colonel  has  with  him  one  staff  officer 
and  three  or  four  enlisted  men,  including  a 
mounted  sergeant,  all  trained  messengers  and 
304 


Appendix 

signalists,  for  communication  back  to  brigade 
headquarters  and  forward  to  the  battalions. 

The  battalion  is  in  a  zone  of  hostile  fire — 
the  third  zone.  Here  messengers  must  move 
with  caution,  if  at  all.  The  wigwag  and  sema- 
phore can  be  used  only  when  concealed  from 
view  of  the  enemy.  The  major  and  his  staff — 
one  officer  and  two  enlisted  men — avoid  exposing 
themselves  unnecessarily  to  the  view  of  the 
enemy.  Flag  communication  with,  and  vocal 
control  over,  the  companies  on  the  firing  line 
being  out  of  the  question,  the  major,  his  adjutant 
and  sergeant  major  carry  whistles,  a  short  note 
of  which  attracts  the  attention  of  the  captains. 
The  sergeant  major  is  especially  charged  with 
the  duty  of  maintaining  communication  with  the 
firing  line  and,  when  there  is  but  one  range  finder 
to  a  battalion,  of  obtaining  ranges.  The  orderly, 
a  trained  messenger  and  signalist,  maintains  com- 
munication with  regimental  headquarters.  The 
adjutant  performs  such  duties  as  the  major 
directs. 

The  captain  directs  the  fire  and  advance  of 
his  company  under  the  orders  of  the  major.  The 
normal  position  of  the  captain  is  prone,  or  nearly 
so,  in  the  rear  of  his  company.  Any  upright 
position  would  draw  the  fire  of  the  enemy  on 
his  organization  as  well  as  on  himself.  The  cap- 
tain governs  his  four  platoons  by  means  of  arm 
and  hand  signals  made  from  the  prone  position. 
305 


National  Service  Library 

He  is  also  charged  with  observing  the  fire  effect 
of  his  command  advancing  within  his  sector  and 
maintaining  contact  with  the  major.  To  assist 
him  in  keeping  six  different  points  under  obser- 
vation the  company  commander  is  provided  with 
two  assistants,  the  company  buglers,  each  of 
whom  is  equipped  with  field  glasses  and  signal 
kit.  The  captain  and  two  buglers  each  carry  a 
whistle  of  different  note  from  the  major's.  One 
of  the  buglers  is  charged  with  the  duty  of  observ- 
ing the  major  for  signals — turning  instantly  at 
the  note  of  the  battalion  whistle.  As  instructed, 
he  notifies  the  captain  when  the  major  has 
whistled  "Attention,"  or  receives  the  signal, 
repeats  it  back,  and  informs  the  captain  of  the 
message.  The  other  bugler  keeps  the  platoon 
chiefs  under  observation,  listening  for  their 
whistles,  notifying  the  captain  or  transmitting 
the  signal  as  ordered. 

The  platoon  chief  is  charged  with  the  fire  con- 
trol of  his  platoon.  His  position  is  prone  behind 
his  unit,  with  a  platoon  guide  on  his  left;  each 
carries  a  whistle  different  from  that  of  the  cap- 
tain or  major.  The  platoon  chief  controls  the  fire 
of  his  four  squads  through  the  corporals.  Neither 
the  platoon  chief  nor  guide  pay  any  attention 
to  the  major's  whistle,  knowing  that  its  note 
is  a  signal  for  the  captain  only.  When  the  cap- 
tain's whistle  blows,  however,  the  guide — unless 
otherwise  instructed — turns  at  once,  receives  the 
306 


Appendix 

captain's  signal,  repeats  it  back  and  transmits  the 
information  to  his  platoon  chief,  who  has  not 
withdrawn  his  attention  from  the  fire  effect  of 
his  squads.  The  platoon  chief  blows  a  short 
note  on  his  whistle,  thus  securing  the  attention 
of  his  four  corporals  without  affecting  the  fire 
of  the  men.  He  transmits  the  captain's  will  to 
the  corporal  or  corporals  concerned  by  arm  and 
hand  signal. 

The  corporal  is  in  immediate  contact  with  and 
control  over  his  squad.  From  his  position  just 
behind  his  seven  men,  he  can  speak  to  one  or 
all  of  them,  roll  over  and  touch  a  man  requiring 
special  attention  without  rising  or  otherwise 
drawing  hostile  fire.  The  corporal  pays  no  atten- 
tion to  the  whistle  of  the  major  or  captain.  He 
turns  at  once  at  a  note  from  the  distinctive  pla- 
toon whistle.  If  the  signal  is  for  him,  he  receives 
and  repeats  back  the  message,  and  turning  to  his 
squad,  transmits  the  order  by  voice  and  touch 
if  necessary. 

The  entire  attention  of  the  private  belongs 
toward  the  enemy.  Once  the  fire  fight  is  opened, 
all  of  his  orders  come  from  his  squad  leader. 
His  duty  lies  to  the  front,  continuing  to  fire  at 
the  target  with  the  sight  setting  and  at  the  rate 
ordered.  The  private  turns  at  no  whistle  what- 
ever. None  are  blown  for  him.  The  last  man 
to  look  to  the  rear  at  a  whistle  signal  is  the 
corporal.  For  the  private  to  heed  any  whistle 
307 


National  Service  Library 

signal  "Attention"  is  a  military  offense,  as  he 
is  diverting  his  attention  from  the  enemy.  The 
squad  organization  and  office  of  the  corporal 
relieves  the  private  of  all  such  distractions 
and  allows  the  private  to  devote  his  entire 
attention  to  doing  his  part  to  secure  and 
maintain  fire  superiority,  and  close  with  the 
enemy. 

Such  are  the  channels  of  military  communi- 
cation. It  will  be  observed  that  perfection  in 
the  means  possible  in  the  third,  fourth  and  fifth 
zones — the  zones  of  hostile  fire — will  permit  the 
will  of  the  supreme  commander  to  be  carried 
out  as  he  planned — failure  in  these  simple  lines 
of  communication,  the  messenger,  flag,  whistle, 
arm  and  hand,  and  last  but  not  least,  the  voice 
and  personal  touch  of  the  corporal,  marks  an 
untrained  command,  lack  of  teamwork,  and  pos- 
sible defeat. 

Range  Finding 

Six  trials  with  self-contained  base  range  finder 
at  ranges  from  1,500  to  4.500  yards,  using  well- 
defined  objects  as  targets,  aiming  points,  or  reg- 
istration marks. 

The  range  finder  will  be  set  up,  put  in  gear 
and  focused,  but  will  be  out  of  direction  at  the 
beginning  of  each  trial. 

The  object  to  which  the  range  is  to  be  found 
having  been  identified  by  the  candidate,  the 
308 


Appendix 

examiner  commands,  for  example:  I.  Registra- 
tion mark,  that  tree ;  2.  Measure  the  range. 

At  the  last  word  of  the  last  command  the  can- 
didate measures  the  range  and  announces,  for 
example,  3300.  He  then  steps  clear  of  the  instru- 
ment. 

No  credits  are  given  if  the  range  announced 
is  not  within  5  per  cent  of  the  correct  range,  as 
determined  by  the  board  with  the  instrument 
used. 

If  the  range  has  been  correctly  measured  and 
announced  within  the  limits  prescribed,  credits 
are  given  as  follows : 


Within  3  per 
cent  of  range 

Within  5  per 
cent  of  range 

Time  in  seconds,  exactly  or  less  than  

IS 

2.O 

25 

1.8 

30 

IS 

25 

30 

Credits  

1.6 

i-S 

1.4 

1-3 

The  ability  to  determine  distances  and  ranges 
correctly  is  of  preeminent  importance  to  the 
officer. 

When  in  action  this  accomplishment  enables 
him  to  make  effective  the  fire  of  the  troops  which 
he  commands.  Its  absence  often  causes  him  to 
dissipate  and  make  worthless  their  fire. 

In  an  estimating  distance  test  made  at  Leon 
Springs,  Texas,  July  12,  1913,  the  distance  being 
309 


National  Service  Library 

750  yards,  twelve  officers  out  of  ten  made  an 
error  of  100  yards  or  over,  and  four  officers 
made  an  error  of  200  yards  or  over.  The  latter 
error,  at  this  range,  would  throw  the  center  of 
a  shot  group  6  feet  above  or  below  the  point 
aimed  at. 

It  is  evident  that,  for  officers,  instruction  in 
estimating  distance,  in  addition  to  that  given  in 
the  regular  course  of  firing,  is  necessary. 

To  accomplish  this,  the  regimental  and  all 
smaller  separate  organization  commanders  will 
from  time  to  time  assemble  all  officers  for  a 
competitive  test  of  estimating  distances.  The 
results  of  these  tests  will  be  published. 

To  prepare  for  this  test,  officers  should  take 
advantage  of  all  favorable  opportunities,  in  order 
that  by  constant  practice  expertness  may  be 
obtained. 

Such  opportunities,  it  is  suggested,  may  be 
had  when  troops  are  proceeding  to,  or  return- 
ing from,  drill ;  during  rests  at  drill ;  during  prac- 
tice marches ;  and  at  other  times. 

It  would  be  well  if  occasionally  noncommis- 
sioned officers  shared  in  this  instruction. 

Regimental  and  all  smaller  organization  com- 
manders are  charged  with  the  details  necessary 
to  facilitate  this  training. 

In  this  connection  it  is  suggested  that  officers 
will  add  to  their  value  for  active  service  by  the 
habit,  when  traveling  through  the  country,  of 
310 


Appendix 

picking  out  positions  which  seem  suitable  for 
defense,  analyzing  their  advantages  or  disadvan- 
tages, in  the  way  of  lines  of  approach,  etc.,  and 
estimating  the  ranges  to  the  probable  positions 
of  an  attacking  force. 


Appendix  XI 

PRACTICAL  AND  THEORETICAL  INSTRUCTION  IN 
MACHINE-GUN  COMPANIES  AND  TROOPS  AND 
TESTS  FOR  THE  EFFICIENCY  OF  THE  ORGANI- 
ZATION 

i.  The  following  outline  of  practical  and  theo- 
retical instruction  for  machine-gun  companies 
was  adopted  for  the  machine-gun  companies  in 
the  El  Paso  and  Brownsville  districts : 

(A)  Machine  Gun:     Nomenclature,   function 
of  parts,  care,  preservation  and  repair  of  machine 
guns. 

(B)  Enlisted  Men:    Duties  of  the  individual 
soldier  in  the  service  of  (a)  the  piece;  (b)  the 
gun  squad;  (c)  the  ammunition  squad;  (d)  the 
pack  squad. 

(C)  Packing:    To  include  packing  and  carry- 
ing of  various  kinds  of  loads  and  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  machine-gun  equipment. 

(D)  Animals:    The  care  of  animals  and  in- 
struction in  equitation  for  mounted  men  of  the 
company. 

312 


Appendix 

(E)  Pistol:     Nomenclature,  care  and  use  of 
pistol. 

(F)  Drill:      To    include    instruction    in    the 
mechanism   and   celerity    of    movement   of   the 
nature  and  with  the  same  object  as  close  and 
extended  order  for  infantry  companies ;  applica- 
tion of  signals  to  drill;  movements;  estimating 
distances ;  selection  of  firing  positions ;  ammuni- 
tion supply;  use  of  sight;  instruction  in  loading 
and  the  use  of  various  kinds  of  fire ;  athletics  and 
gymnastic  exercises. 

(G)  Mechanism    of    Gun:    (l)     Disassemble 
and  reassemble;  naming  parts  and  functions.  (2) 
Take  apart  and  reassemble  blindfold;  take  time 
of  these  operations  (one  minute  twenty-five  sec- 
onds is  good  time). 

(H)  Jams:  Illustration  and  practical  demon- 
stration of  jams  and  instruction  in  the  reduction 
of  same. 

(I)  Signaling:    Flag  and  semaphore. 

(J)  First  Aid:  Instruction  in  first  aid,  the 
hygienic  care  of  the  person  and  the  care  of  the 
feet  on  the  march. 

(K)  Rations:  Individual  cooking  and  use  of 
the  reserve  rations. 

(L)  Messages:  Receiving  and  delivering  ver- 
bal messages. 

3*3 


National  Service  Library 

(M)  Marching:  Instruction  in  marching  and 
camping ;  pitching  shelter  tent  camps ;  inspections. 

(N)  Field  Fortifications:  To  include  con- 
struction of  hasty  cover  for  guns;  gun  pits 
with  overhead  shelter,  also  adaptation  of  the 
various  types  of  infantry  trenches  for  machine- 
gun  use. 

(O)  Firing:  Actual  firing  to  instruct  in  the 
use  of  the  various  kinds  of  fire,  viz :  searching, 
distributed,  fixed,  intermittent,  continuous,  and 
the  use  of  combined  sights  exercises  in  reload- 
ing; description,  marking  and  manipulation  of 
targets. 

(P)  Combat:  Training  to  consist  of  simple 
problems  involving  the  following:  Selection  and 
occupation  of  positions;  use  of  various  kinds  of 
fire;  use  of  ranging  fire;  advancing  to  position; 
ammunition  supply;  use  of  cover;  and  operation 
of  the  company  as  a  whole ;  tactical  walks. 

(Q)  Combat  Practice:  With  service  ammu- 
nition (to  include  at  least  two  exercises  in  night 
firing). 

(R)  N.  C.  O.  School:  Subjects:  (a)  Drill 
regulations  for  M.  G.  Co.  (b)  Machine-gun 
Firing  Manual,  (c)  Theory  and  practice  in  use 
of  range  finders,  (d)  Map  making  and  map 
reading,  (e)  Preparation  and  transmission  of 
orders  and  messages,  (f)  Field  engineering, 
314 


Appendix 

including  construction  of  simple  bridges,  repair 
of  roads ;  cordage. 

(S)  Conferences:  Subjects:  (a)  History  of 
machine-guns  in  war.  (b)  Tactical  use  of 
machine  guns.  (c)  Selection  and  occupation 
of  positions  for  machine  guns,  (d)  Types  of 
machine  guns,  (e)  Types  of  packs. 

2.  In  addition  to  the  foregoing,  the  following 
is  prescribed:  (a)  Manipulation  of  the  gun  in 
daylight,  gun  crew  to  be  blindfolded,  and  manip- 
ulation by  night,  (b)  In  addition  to  the  fore- 
going, companies  equipped  with  the  Lewis  guns 
will  practice  packing  and  hauling  in  Ford  or 
other  automobiles  and  trucks,  (c)  Under  sub- 
paragraph  "O,"  paragraph  I,  companies  equipped 
with  the  Benet  Mercier  guns  will  keep  record  of 
gas  pressure  under  varying  conditions,  familiar- 
izing themselves  with  the  peculiarities  of  each 
gun  and  keeping  record  of  them  for  future 
reference. 

The  following  machine-gun  tests  for  infantry 
and  cavalry  were  made  from  time  to  time  to 
foster  competition  among  the  several  regiments : 

Preparation  for  a  March: 

Full  equipment  "A"  to  be  laid  out,  but  not 

packed.  VALUE 

Pack  for  the  march  and  march  one    (i) 
mile   5 

315 


National  Service  Library 

Inspection  of  arms  and  equipment  to  be 
as  follows: 

Security  and  arrangement  of  personal 
equipment  2 

Cleanliness  and  serviceability  of  personal 
equipment  2 

Completeness  of  personal  equipment  and 
neatness  of  clothing 2 

Packing  of  mules  or  automobiles 2 

Completeness  of  equipment  other  than  per- 
sonal    2 

Grooming  and  shoeing  of  animals,  or 
cleanliness  and  serviceability  of  auto- 
mobiles    3 

Drill  of  company  or  troop 2 

Training  and  handling  of  animals,  or 
handling  of  automobiles 3 

Selection  of  position  for  guns  by  captain  as- 
sisted by  platoon  chiefs  to  be  marked  as 
follows: 

For  defensive  operation 5 

To  assist  an  attack 5 

To  assist  a  withdrawal 5 

Manner  of  occupation  of  selected  position 

(use  of  cover,  concealment) 3 

Quickness  in  getting  into  position 3 

316 


Appendix 

VALUE 

Arrangement  for  supply  of  ammunition 
(position  to  support  attack  to  be  used)  . .  3 

Construction  of  hasty  cover  on  site  selected 
for  defensive  position  to  be  marked  as 
follows: 

Shortest  time 5 

Longest  time o 

Intermediate  in  proportion: 

Protection  from  rifle  fire 5 

Protection  from  shrapnel  fire  (overhead 
cover)  5 

Concealment 3 

Individual  tests  to  be  marked  as  follows: 
Officers : 

Estimating  distances 4 

Writing  report  of  position  selected  for 
defensive 4 

Noncommissioned  Officers : 

Map  reading  (all  N.C.O.) 4 

Position  sketch  I -square  mile  showing 
position  of  guns  in  defensive  position 
(2  N.C.O.)  4 

Range  finding  with  range  finder  (N.C.O.)  ..     4 

Privates : 

Estimating  distances  (4  privates) 2 

317 


National  Service  Library 

Privates :  VALUE 

Signaling,  flag  (2  privates) 2 

Signaling,  semaphore  (2  privates) 2 

Receiving  and  delivering  verbal  messages 

( i  private  each  gun) 2 

First  aid  (4  privates) 2 

Taking  apart  and  assembling  gun,  blind- 
fold ( i  private  each  gun) 3 

Reducing  jams  (i  private  each  gun)...  2 


Appendix  XII 

INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  USE  OF  DUMMY  HAND 
GRENADES 

1.  The  weight  of  one  hand  grenade  complete 
is  one  pound. 

2.  Having  taken  the  grenade  from  the  bando- 
lier in  which  it  is  issued,  the  tin  box  is  opened 
by  tearing  off  the  soldering  strip  which  releases 
the  cover  of  the  can.     The  hand  grenade  hav- 
ing been  removed  from  the  container,  the  gre- 
nade must  be  armed  before  it  is  thrown,  and  this 
is  done  by  removing  the  safety  disk.     Having 
armed  the  fuse  of  the  grenade  and  replaced  the 
hood  in  the  proper  armed  position,  the  grenade 
is  ready  to  be  thrown.     In  this  condition  the 
grenade  should  be  carefully  handled  and  not  per- 
mitted to  strike  either  on  the  ground  adjacent  to 
the  thrower  or  in  the  vicinity  of  friendly  troops. 
The  thrower  and  all  friendly  troops  should  have 
cover  before  the  grenades  strike,  as  the   frag- 
ments  resulting   from   their  detonation  have   a 
longer   range   than   the    distance   to   which   the 
grenade  as  a  whole  may  be  thrown.     The  cord 
of  the  grenade  is  made  in  a  convenient  length  for 
the  soldier  of  average  stature,  but  this  length 

319 


National  Service  Library 

may  be  decreased  by  pulling  the  cord  through 
the  knob  and  tying  in  a  new  knot.  The  manner 
of  throwing  the  grenade  is  dependent  upon  the 
free  space  available  for  swinging  it.  When  the 
thrower  has  ample  space  behind  a  parapet,  it  is 
best  to  swing  it  around  the  head  as  with  a  sling, 
both  for  accuracy  and  safety.  Untrained  men 
will  naturally  swing  the  grenade  in  a  vertical 
plane.  The  tests  at  Sandy  Hook  Proving 
Ground  indicate  that  this  method  is  accompanied 
by  considerable  danger,  as  the  thrower  may  strike 
the  ground  with  the  grenade  in  the  act  of  whirl- 
ing it  or  may  release  it  so  that  its  flight  will  be 
nearly  vertical,  causing  the  grenade  to  fall  back 
near  the  thrower.  The  ranges  that  can  be 
attained  with  this  form  of  grenade  are  not  great 
and  vary  with  the  strength  and  skill  of  the 
thrower.  The  cord  of  the  grenade  should  also 
be  examined  to  make  sure  it  is  in  good  condition 
and  not  liable  to  break  while  the  grenade  is  being 
whirled. 

To  obtain  accuracy  and  range  in  throwing  the 
hand  grenade  requires  preliminary  drill  and 
practice  with  the  dummy  grenade.  For  maxi- 
mum effect  the  grenade  should  be  detonated 
within  a  few  feet  of  the  object  at  which  it  is 
thrown.  This  requires  accuracy  usually  acquired 
only  by  a  considerable  amount  of  practice. 


320 


Appendix  XIII 
TRENCH  DIGGING 

The  best  results  in  trench  digging,  whether 
for  purposes  of  drainage  or  defense,  will  always 
be  obtained  by  carrying  out  the  principle  laid 
down  in  the  engineer  manuals  of  having  shifts 
of  men. 

With  uninstructed  troops  it  is  best  to  have 
three  shifts,  each  shift  working  for  ten  minutes 
at  high  pressure,  resting  for  twenty  minutes. 
Further,  when  several  companies,  platoons  or 
squads  are  employed,  a  task  should  be  given 
to  each,  a  section  of  the  ditch  being  marked  off 
for  the  purpose ;  they  should  be  informed  that 
their  work  ceases  as  soon  as  the  task  is  com- 
pleted. 

By  this  method  remarkable  results  can  be 
obtained  and  the  work  can  be  finished  in  much 
less  time  than  in  the  usual  manner  of  fatigue 
detail.  The  men  also  work  more  uniformly. 

It  is  desired  in  digging  ditches  that  when  pos- 
sible they  be  laid  out  as,  and  have  the  form  of, 
defensive  trenches,  with  the  necessary  traverses, 
etc.  In  this  way  the  men  will  obtain  very  neces- 
sary instruction  in  a  very  important  art. 
321 

Vol.  3— N.S.L.  ii 


National  Service  Library 

ENGINEER  INSTRUCTION 

1.  Reconnaissance:     Selected  men  from  each 
company,  troop  or  battery  will  be  given  instruc- 
tion in  the  use  of  the  reconnaissance  equipment 
covering  the  work  of  road  and  position  sketching. 
This  work  will  be  undertaken  as  soon  as  troops 
are  sufficiently  well  supplied  with  their  engineer- 
unit  accountability. 

Similarly,  cavalry  will  be  given  instruction  in 
the  use  of  the  demolition  equipment. 

2.  Field  Fortifications:     Each   infantry   regi- 
ment will  be  given  instruction  in  the  construc- 
tion and  use  of  trenches.    This  will  be  progres- 
sive.    The  men  will  be  taught  the  use  of  their 
intrenching  tools  to  gain  hasty  cover,  and  later 
the  construction  of  firing,  communicating,  and 
support  trenches. 

For  each  battalion  there  will  be  laid  out  on 
the  ground  the  trace  of  a  firing  trench  sufficient 
to  be  occupied  by  it,  communicating  trenches 
leading  therefrom  to  the  support  trenches,  with 
the  locations  of  the  support  trenches  themselves, 
of  the  kitchens,  latrines  and  dressing  stations 
marked  and  the  trenches  which  would  lead  from 
the  support  trenches  to  the  reserves.  All  of  these 
trenches  will  be  marked  out  on  the  ground,  using 
white  tracing  tape.  Each  company  of  each  bat- 
talion will  construct,  working  in  reliefs,  a  suffi- 
cient length  of  full-size  firing  trench  to  accommo- 
322 


Appendix 

date  two  (2)  squads.  Subsequently,  the  portion 
of  this  trench  sufficient  to  accommodate  one 
(i)  squad  will  be  improved. 

3.  Each  machine-gun  company  of  infantry  and 
troop  of  cavalry  will  construct  an  emplacement 
for  a  machine  gun. 

4.  Each  battery  of  artillery  will  construct  an 
emplacement  for  one  gun. 

5.  Revetments:    The  construction  of  hurdles, 
gabions  and   fascines  will  be  taught,  and  each 
company  and  troop  will  be  required  to  make  one 
of   each   of   these,   and  their   use   as    revetting 
material  will  be  illustrated  by  actually  placing 
them   in   the   trenches    which   the   company   or 
troop  has  constructed. 


323 


Appendix  XIV 
MARCH  OF  INFANTRY 

"Distances,  intact  ranks,  and  alignment  and 
covering  of  squads  will,  as  far  as  practicable,  be 
preserved,  and  the  left  half  of  the  road  kept  free, 
both  at  a  halt  and  on  the  march,  for  the  use 
of  messengers  and  higher  commanders.  The 
piece  will  be  carried  with  the  muzzle  so  elevated 
that  the  man  following  need  not  lose  distance  to 
protect  his  face. 

"The  preservation  of  march  discipline  is  pri- 
marily the  duty  of  file  closers  and  company 
commanders,  who  should  be  constantly  on  the 
alert  to  check  the  first  tendency  toward  elonga- 
tion ;  but  all  commanders  from  the  company  up 
should,  from  time  to  time,  permit  their  units 
to  pass  by  for  the  observation  and  correction 
of  defects.  If,  notwithstanding  due  care  of  all 
concerned,  elongation  of  the  column  takes  place 
(and  with  the  best  trained  troops  and  excellent 
march  discipline  such  cannot  altogether  be  pre- 
vented), no  effort  should  be 'made  by  increasing 
the  gait,  or  continuing  to  march  after  the  head 
of  the  column  has  halted,  to  close  gaps.  Dis- 
324 


Appendix 

tance  once  lost  must  remain  lost  until  a  long 
halt  (of  an  hour  for  example)  or  until  the  end 
of  the  day's  march.  Nothing  takes  so  much, 
and  so  quickly,  from  the  stamina  of  the  heav- 
ily loaded  infantryman  as  hurrying  his  steps 
or  double  timing  to  regain  any  considerable 
distance. 

"Proper  pace  setting,  which  includes  the  great- 
est regularity  and  a  correct  rate,  is  of  the  utmost 
importance.  All  company  officers  should  be  care- 
fully trained  therefore.  Each  should  determine 
the  exact  number  of  his  paces  per  minute  for 
the  standard — i  mile  in  20  minutes — by  actual 
pacing  of  measured  miles,  and  when  the  duty 
of  pace  setting  devolves  upon  him,  he  should  con- 
stantly count  his  steps  and  check  his  rate  with 
the  watch. 

"The  pace  of  marching  troops  must  not  be 
regulated  by  that  of  some  mounted  officers' 
horse. 

"It  is  noted  that  troops  are  sometimes  assem- 
bled either  to  begin  a  march  or  after  a  halt,  much 
sooner  than  is  necessary.  A  command  should 
never  be  late;  but  on  the  other  hand,  it  should 
never  cut  short  the  men's  rest  by  being  much 
ahead  of  time.  Care  in  the  calculation  of  dis- 
tances and  in  the  estimate  of  time  required  for 
getting  into  motion,  will  enable  much  of  the  irri- 
325 


National  Service  Library 

tating  and  wearisome  waiting  in  ranks,  to  be 
avoided." 

Although  it  is  appreciated  that  the  infantry 
troops  of  each  command  have  achieved  a  first- 
rate  marching  ability,  the  foregoing  extracts  are 
published  to  give  to  all  an  appreciation  of  the 
requirements  for  successful  marching  of  large 
bodies  of  troops.  Distances  are,  as  stated  above, 
sometimes  unavoidably  lost — as  in  passing  defiles 
or  crossing  streams  and  other  obstacles.  If  these 
distances  must  be  made  up,  the  head  of  the  col- 
umn should  halt  until  the  lost  distances  are 
closed. 

It  is  true  that  small  detachments  (even  as 
large  as  a  regiment)  of  well-seasoned  troops  can 
march  at  a  rate  of  more  than  a  mile  in  twenty 
minutes,  but  years  of  experience  have  taught 
that  for  bodies  of  any  size  the  rate  of  one  (i) 
mile  in  20  minutes  is  the  only  proper  one. 

A  French  report,  at  the  beginning  of  the  pres- 
ent war,  recounts  the  march  of  a  division  for 
twelve  (12)  miles  in  three  and  three-fourths 
(3M)  hours  as  a  remarkable  achievement. 

It  is  suggested  that  at  ceremonies  and  on  other 
occasions  where  music  is  used  the  bands  be 
required  to  play  only  selections  where  the  drum 
beats  are  clear  and  regular  and  used  to  mark 
the  time  throughout. 


326 


Appendix  XV 

RULES  FOR  CONDUCT  OF  TROOPS  TRAVELING  BY 
RAILWAY 

1.  Traveling  by  rail,  each  officer  is  entitled  to 
a  double  lower  berth,  standard  sleeper,  but  may 
be   required  to  occupy  an  upper  berth.     Each 
enlisted  man  is  entitled  to  one  half,  double  lower 
berth  or  one  upper  berth,  tourist  sleeper. 

If  day  coaches  are  provided,  men  are  assigned 
at  the  rate  of  three  (3)  men  to  each  two  (2) 
seats.  If  trip  is  over  twenty- four  hours,  one 
(i)  seat  per  man  should  be  furnished,  if  possible. 

2.  Commanding  officers  of  each  train  and  of 
each  section,   before  entraining,   should  inspect 
the  passenger  cars  to  see  that  they  are  clean, 
supplied  with  water  and  ice,  and  that  coolers, 
urinals  and  toilet  seats  are  in  good  order;  the 
stock  cars — to  see  that  they  are  clean,  that  there 
are  no  projecting  nails,   bolts   or  splinters,   no 
loose  or  rotten  boards  in  the  floors,  no  broken 
fixtures  on  hay  racks,  floors,  doors  or  troughs, 
and  that  suitable  noninflammable  footing  (sand  or 
loose  earth)  has  been  provided. 

The  cars  having  been  accepted,  an  officer  will 
be   detailed   to   mark  with   chalk  on   each   car, 
327 


National  Service  Library 

the  number  of  men  or  animals  to  travel  in  it, 
with  the  letter  or  other  designation  of  organ- 
izations. 

3.  Trains  divided  into  sections  should  be  so 
arranged  that  the  baggage,  and  if  possible  the 
animal  box  and  gondola  cars  carrying  the  mate- 
rial pertaining  to  any  of  the  troops,  be  attached 
to  the  same  section  as  are  the  troops.     In  case 
it  is  necessary  to  divide  the  trains  otherwise,  the 
sections   carrying   animals    should   precede    the 
others  and  an  officer  with  a  sufficient  detail  to 
take  care  of  any  emergency  should  travel  on  each 
section  carrying  animals  and  baggage. 

4.  Heavy  baggage,  and  baggage  not  likely  to 
be  required  immediately  on  arrival  at  destination, 
will  be  loaded  as  soon  as  box  cars  are  available. 
Cars  will  be  assigned  to  organizations,  so  many 
to  each  battalion  or  squadron,  etc.     Where  (as 
will  usually  be  the  case)  one  car  is  assigned  to 
two  or  more  companies,  troops  or  batteries,  pro- 
portional space  will  be  allotted  each  organization 
by  the  commanding  officer  or  officer  delegated 
by  him.     Artillery   guns   and   carriages,   escort 
wagons  and  other  classes  of  wheeled  transpor- 
tation are  generally  loaded  on  gondola  or  flat 
cars.     They   must  be   made   secure   by   nailing 
blocks  of  wood,  under  and  on  each  side  of  each 
wheel  and  by  means  of  lashings.     Commanding 
officers  or  officers  detailed  by  them  are  charged 
with  seeing  that  this  is  attended  to  properly. 

328 


Appendix 

5.  Transportation  is  loaded  after  it  has  hauled 
all  property  to  be  taken  to  the  cars.  Animals  are 
loaded  after  wagons  have  been  loaded,  unless 
they  can  be  loaded  simultaneously  with  the 
wagons.  Harness  is  loaded  with  the  wagons. 
Horses  and  mules,  with  halters  only,  are  loaded 
in  the  stock  cars  provided — through  chutes,  or 
from  platforms,  if  any  are  available,  or  for  lack 
of  either,  by  means  of  ramps.  For  each  section 
carrying  animals,  there  will  be  constructed  a 
portable  ramp,  to  be  carried  on  a  flat  car,  or 
lashed  to  the  roof  of  a  stock  car.  Such  a  ramp 
may  be  constructed  as  follows:  Lay  three  (3) 
pieces,  4"x4"  lumber,  18  feet  long,  on  the  ground 
so  as  to  be  parallel  and  2  feet  between  centers 
(if  no  4"x4"  is  at  hand — two  2"x4"  pieces  securely 
nailed  together  will  answer).  To  these  pieces 
(sleepers)  nail  securely  a  floor  of  2"xi2"  lumber 
6  feet  long  (a  double  floor  of  i"xi2"  will 
answer).  To  the  outer  edges  nail  side  rails  of 
2"x4"  lumber,  cleat  the  floor  by  nailing  i"x4" 
boards  over  each  crack.  This  ramp  may  prove 
very  useful  in  case  of  an  accident  where  unload- 
ing becomes  necessary  and  the  usual  facilities 
are  lacking.  Ramps  must  not  be  placed  inside  of 
a  stock  car. 

Loading  Animals:  In  loading  animals,  the 
number  of  animals  for  each  car  will  be  told  off, 
and  each  animal  will  be  held  by  the  halter  by  a 
soldier. 

329 


National  Service  Library 

Two  men  will  be  placed  inside  the  car,  who  will 
take  the  animals,  lead  them  to  the  end  of  the  car 
and  tie  them  facing  alternately  to  opposite  sides 
of  the  car. 

One  man  will  stand  by  the  loading  ramp  or 
chute,  or  by  the  door,  if  animals  are  loaded  from 
platforms,  and  will  call  off  in  a  loud  tone  of 
voice  the  number  of  the  animals  as  "one,  two, 
three,  etc.,"  as  each  animal  enters  the  car.  There 
will  also  be  posted  near  the  door  two  men  hav- 
ing a  piece  of  rope  or  a  strap  to  use  as  breeching, 
ready  to  pass  around  the  rear  of  a  balky  animal 
and  force  him  into  the  car. 

When  all  is  ready,  the  gate  of  the  car  will  be 
thrown  open  and  the  file  of  animals  moved  into 
the  car  without  halting.  When  the  last  animal 
has  entered,  as  shown  by  the  number  called  off, 
the  gate  will  be  shut.  In  order  that  there  will 
be  no  delay  in  loading  cars,  the  second  detach- 
ment will  be  kept  ready  to  load  the  next  car. 
When  platforms  are  convenient,  several  cars 
can  be  loaded  at  once.  Animals  should  be  so 
packed  that  they  sustain  each  other  when  stand- 
ing against  bumps  and  sudden  stops.  In  enter- 
ing a  car,  an  animal  must  be  entirely  inside 
before  he  is  turned.  On  leaving,  he  must  be 
athwart  the  car  before  he  is  led  out.  A  quiet  ani- 
mal should  lead  in  loading  and  a  quiet  animal 
be  the  last  loaded  as  he  will  be  the  first  to  be 
unloaded.  Loading  and  unloading  must  be  done 
330 


Appendix 

quietly,  so  as  not  to  excite  the  animals.  Swear- 
ing or  yelling  at  animals  or  jerking  halters  is 
strictly  prohibited. 

6.  Light  baggage  (such  articles  as  field  desks, 
field  ranges,  etc.)  immediately  necessary  on  ar- 
rival at  destination  and  such  articles  or  personal 
and  horse  equipment  as  may  be  prescribed  by 
each  commanding  officer  is  loaded  in  the  bag- 
gage cars  of  each  section.     These  cars  should 
be  placed  so  as  to  be  readily  accessible  while 
train  is  in  motion. 

7.  Mounted  troops,  before  loading  the  horses, 
unsaddle  and  place  saddles,  blankets  and  bridles 
in  gunny  sacks,  each  tagged  with  the  man's  name 
and  troop  number,  and  load  them  in  the  baggage 
cars.     The  saddle  bags  are  taken  into  the  cars 
with   the   men.      Horses   are   then    loaded   and 
details,  if  any,  for  their  care  sent  to  the  animal 
section. 

8.  All   baggage,    freight   and  animals   having 
been  loaded,  the  command  is  formed,  each  organi- 
zation opposite  the  cars  it  is  to  occupy.     Com- 
panies,  troops  and  batteries   are   marched  into 
their  cars  and  seats  assigned  by  the  captains; 
seats  near  the  doors  are  assigned  to  sergeants. 

Before  leaving  camp,  the  commanding  officer 
of  the  troops  to  occupy  each  section  makes  the 
following  details : 

An  Officer  of  the  Day.  A  guard  sufficient 
lo  furnish  a  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge, 


National  Service  Library 

and  a  relief,  of  one  sentinel  to  each  door,  in 
each  car. 

9.  Immediately   upon   receipt  of   notice  of   a 
movement  by  rail,  the  supply  officer,  or  an  offi- 
cer detailed  by  the  commanding  officer,  of  each 
command  will  ascertain  whether  kitchen  cars  are 
to  be  furnished  for  the  trip,  whether  cooking  is 
to  be  done  in  baggage  cars  or  whether  travel 
rations  and  coffee  money  are  to  be   furnished. 
He  will  make  all  arrangements  for  the  opera- 
tion of  messes  and  for  procuring  the  necessary 
supplies;  as  much  beef    (fresh)    and  bread  as 
possible  should  be  secured  en  route. 

A  mess  officer  will  be  detailed  for  each  section 
and  will  report  to  the  supply  officer  or  other  offi- 
cer detailed  by  the  commanding  officer  for 
instructions. 

10.  The  following  are  the  duties  of  different 
officers  and  guards,  on  receipt  of  orders  for  a 
movement  by  rail  and  while  en  route: 

Commanding  Officer:  (a)  Notify  all  officers 
of  the  movement,  giving  time  of  departure,  (b) 
Assign  to  each  staff  officer  such  duties  as  pertain 
to  his  office,  giving  him  all  information  at  hand. 

(c)  Notify  all  officers  as  to  what  baggage  is  to 
be  loaded  in  box  cars,  in  baggage  cars  or  carried 
with  the  men  in  passenger  cars,  and  what  is  to 
be  turned  in,  and  to  whom  it  is  to  be  turned  in. 

(d)  Detail   the   necessary   officers   and   enlisted 
men  to  load  headquarters  property  and  the  prop- 

332 


Appendix 

erty  of  the  staff  departments,  (e)  Assign  or- 
ganizations to  sections  of  the  train,  if  necessary, 
(f)  His  duty  with  reference  to  inspecting  rail- 
road equipment  is  defined  in  paragraph  2. 

The  Commander  of  each  Section:  (a)  Assign 
a  mess  officer,  if  one  not  already  assigned,  and 
make  necessary  details  and  arrangements  for 
the  messing  of  the  command,  (b)  Ascertain 
what  guards  are  necessary  and  arrange  for  their 
detail,  (c)  Superintend  the  packing  and  load- 
ing of  the  property  and  animals  pertaining  to 
the  troops  in  his  section,  assigning  space  in  each 
car  to  each  organization,  (d)  Duties  with  regard 
to  inspection  of  the  railroad  equipment,  prescribed 
in  paragraph  2.  (e)  Issue  orders  for  the  con- 
duct of  the  troops,  while  en  route,  (f)  Make 
two  (2)  inspections  each  day  to  assure  that  his 
orders  are  .being  carried  out. 

The  Officer  of  the  Day:  (a)  Inspect  each  relief 
at  least  once  each  day  and  once  each  night  to 
assure  that  sentinels  know  their  orders  and  are 
enforcing  them,  (b)  Report  any  breaches  of 
orders  that  come  to  his  notice  to  the  command- 
ing officer. 

The  Guard:  (a)  One  noncommissioned  officer 
and  six  privates  for  each  car  will  be  detailed 
each  day  for  guard,  (b)  At  every  stop  one 
sentinel  will  be  posted  at  each  door.  His  orders 
are :  To  allow  no  soldier  to  leave  the  car  unless 
333 


National  Service  Library 

orders  have  been  issued  permitting  it.  To  allow 
no  soldier  to  enter  the  car  except  those  who  have 
left  it  by  proper  authority.  To  allow  no  civilians 
to  enter  the  car,  except  railroad  employees  on 
duty,  or  by  authority  of  the  commanding  officer, 
(c)  The  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge  and 
the  privates  of  the  guard  will  enforce  all  orders 
and  regulations  prescribed. 

The  Company  Commander:  (a)  As  soon  as 
orders  for  a  move  by  rail  are  received,  he  will 
separate  his  property  according  to  whether  it  is 
to  be  transported  in  box  cars,  baggage  cars  with 
the  men,  or  turned  in.  (b)  He  will  make  details 
for  packing  the  property  for  shipment,  arrang- 
ing for  the  packing  of  articles  not  in  general  use 
first,  (c)  He  will  make  lists  of  all  his  property, 
giving  weights  of  packages  and  such  other  data 
as  the  supply  officer  may  require,  (d)  He  will 
make  arrangements  for  the  messing  and  comfort 
of  the  men,  unless  these  matters  are  arranged  by 
higher  authorty.  (e)  He  will  see  that  two  (2) 
brooms  are  provided  for  each  car  to  be  occupied 
by  his  company,  and  that  one  whisk  broom  and 
one  shoe  cleaning  outfit  is  in  each  squad  before 
entering  the  cars,  (f)  He  will  superintend  the 
loading  of  all  his  property  and  turn  in  such  part 
of  it  as  is  ordered,  (g)  He  will  personally,  with 
the  assistance  of  his  lieutenants,  assign  seats  to 
the  men  as  the  company  enters  the  cars  and 
see  that  the  entraining  is  carried  on  in  an  orderly 
334 


Appendix 

and  expeditious  manner,  (h)  En  route,  he  will 
have  the  cars  occupied  by  his  company  thor- 
oughly policed  after  breakfast,  dinner  and  sup- 
per, and  as  many  other  times  a  day  as  may  be 
necessary,  (i)  He  will  inspect  his  company  at 
least  twice  a  day  and  assure  himself  that  the 
cars  are  well  policed,  the  men  properly  dressed, 
clothing  brushed,  shoes  cleaned,  and  faces  and 
hands  washed,  and  that  all  regulations  contained 
in  paragraph  n  are  strictly  adhered  to. 

Lieutenants  and  Noncommissioned  Officers: 
Assistants  to  the  company,  troop  or  battery  com- 
manders will  carry  out  his  orders  and  see  that 
they  are  obeyed. 

ii.  The  following  rules  will  govern  the  con- 
duct of  all  troops  moving  on  trains;  all  officers, 
noncommissioned  officers  and  sentinels  are 
charged  with  their  enforcement: 

(a)  Except  by  authority  of  the  commanding 
officer,  no  officer  or  enlisted  man  will  leave  the 
train  at  any  stop  for  any  purpose,  (b)  Where 
the  length  of  a  stop  will  permit,  the  men  will 
be  taken  from  the  cars  for  exercise.  In  such 
cases,  they  will  be  marched  by  battalion  or  com- 
pany for  as  much  time  as  the  circumstances  jus- 
tify. Assembly  will  be  sounded  five  (5)  minutes 
before  the  train  is  to  start,  and  all  detachments 
will  at  once  board  the  train.  Care  will  be  exer- 
cised not  to  take  commands  too  far  from  the 
train,  (c)  Special  details  to  obtain  provisions 
335 


National  Service  Library 

or  other  necessities  will  be  made  by  authority 
of  the  commanding  officer  only,  (d)  No  officer 
or  enlisted  man  will  interfere  with  or  engage  in 
any  altercation  with  any  employee  of  the  rail- 
road. In  case  employees  are  neglectful  of  their 
duties,  the  fact  will  be  reported  to  the  company 
commander  or  other  proper  officer  who  will 
report  to  the  commanding  officer,  (e)  No  unau- 
thorized persons  will  be  permitted  to  enter  any 
cars.  If  such  persons  attempt  to  enter,  they  will 
be  halted  by  sentinels  and  the  noncommissioned 
officer  on  duty  will  at  once  report  the  matter  to 
the  officer  of  the  day,  who  will  investigate  the 
case  and  take  necessary  action,  (f)  No  one  will 
be  permitted  to  ride  on  platforms,  roofs  of  cars 
or  on  engines.  (g)  No  scuffling  or  rough  play 
will  be  permitted,  (h)  No  change  of  assign- 
ment of  seats  will  be  made  except  by  company 
commanders,  (i)  The  putting  of  heads,  feet  or 
arms  out  of  the  windows  while  trains  are  in 
motion  is  prohibited,  (j)  Throwing  of  food  or 
spitting  on  floors  and  throwing  of  missiles  in 
cars  is  prohibited,  (k)  Greatest  care  is  enjoined 
to  prevent  damage  to  water  coolers,  wash  basins, 
toilets  or  urinals.  (1)  No  alcoholic  liquors  or 
other  intoxicants  will  be  allowed  on  troop  trains, 
(m)  Officers  and  men  will  at  all  times  be  prop- 
erly uniformed.  Sitting  in  undershirts  with 
sleeves  rolled  up  or  without  leggins  is  strictly 
prohibited.  Clothing  and  hats  will  be  brushed 
336 


Appendix 

and  shoes  and  leggins  cleaned  as  often  as  is  nec- 
essary to  maintain  a  cleanly,  soldierly  appear- 
ance at  all  times. 

12.  Upon  arrival  at  destination,  men  will  dis- 
embark with  their  arms  and  equipment  and  be 
formed  in  the  vicinity  of  the  cars. 

The  commanding  officer  or  officer  detailed  by 
him  will  inspect  all  passenger  coaches  and  stock 
cars,  accompanied  by  a  representative  of  the 
railroad,  and  list  all  damage  caused  by  troops 
or  animals  while  en  route.  A  report  of  such 
damages  will  be  made  to  the  department  com- 
mander of  the  department  in  which  the  command 
detrains. 

Necessary  details  for  unloading  will  be  made, 
officers  being  placed  in  charge  of  all  details. 
Unless  cars  can  be  unloaded  simultaneously,  the 
following  order  will  govern:  (a)  Animals,  (b) 
Wagons,  trucks  or  other  means  of  transportation, 
and  artillery  guns  and  carriages,  (c)  Light  bag- 
gage, (d)  Heavy  baggage. 

In  case  the  camp  to  be  occupied  is  near  the 
point  of  detraining,  troops  may  be  marched  to 
camp  before  unloading,  a  guard  being  left  over 
the  arms  and  equipment.  Ordinarily,  arms  will 
be  stacked  and  a  guard  placed  over  the  stacks 
until  the  unloading  is  completed. 


337 


Appendix  XVI 
SUGGESTIONS  FOR  TRAINING  IN  EQUITATION 

The  security  of  the  rider's  seat  and  the  pos- 
sibility that  he  may  easily  use  his  aids  require 
imperiously  that  his  position  on  horseback  pos- 
sess certain  qualities;  and  his  appearance  de- 
mands that  his  position  be  neither  ridiculous  nor 
constrained,  but  seem,  on  the  contrary,  elegant 
and  easy.  The  rider  should  seek  to  give  to  his 
position,  by  hard  work  and  long  sustained  atten- 
tion, the  qualities  necessary. 

The  upper  part  of  the  body. — The  head  ought 
to  be  high  and  straight  on  shoulders  falling  nat- 
urally. The  arms  hang  naturally  near  the  body. 
The  forearms  have  a  direction  such  that  the 
elbows  are  a  little  higher  than  the  wrists.  The 
latter  ought  to  be  held  in  their  natural  position, 
without  being  twisted  around,  in  such  manner 
that  the  back  of  the  hand  be  turned  outward, 
the  line  of  the  knuckles  being  vertical. 

The  small  of  the  back  should  be  convex  and 
without  stiffness  in  order  to  permit  the  supple- 
ness indispensable  to  the  weakening  of  the  reac- 
tion of  the  gaits  and  of  violent  movements. 
This  suppleness  is  in  fact  impossible  if  the  small 
338 


Appendix 

of  the  back  is  hollowed;  besides,  if  it  is  convex, 
the  buttocks  are  of  themselves  pushed  under  the 
rider,  which  to  him  are  indispensable  in  order 
to  find  the  middle  of  his  saddle  and  to  have 
flexibility  and  cohesion  with  his  horse;  if  he 
is  placed  otherwise,  one  says  that  he  does  not 
"sit  down." 

All  the  upper  part  of  the  body  ought  to  be 
quite  vertical  at  the  walk  and  at  the  gallop;  it 
may  be  inclined  slightly  forward  when  riding  at 
the  trot. 

These  qualities  which  have  been  enumerated 
pertain  naturally,  without  any  preparation,  to 
all  riders,  without  having  to  acquire  them,  and 
the  position  which  results  is  taken  by  them  them- 
selves if  it  is  not  deranged  by  momentary  con- 
tractions. 

Now,  these  contractions  are  due  to  apprehen- 
sion ;  if  he  does  not  fear  to  fall,  the  rider  will 
maintain  the  position  already  indicated:  it  is  no 
other  in  fact  than  that  he  himself  takes  when  he 
is  seated  on  a  table  or  chair.  Since  now  that 
position  is  natural,  it  is  not  necessary  to  supple 
the  rider  in  order  that  he  may  take  it ;  it  suffices 
to  cause  the  apprehension  to  disappear  that  he 
may  keep  it. 

The   effects   of   apprehension   are   not   things 

that  should  astonish  us:  do  we  not  find  them 

always  when  we  commence  to  devote  ourselves 

to  a  physical  exercise  in  which  the  equilibrium 

339 


National  Service  Library 

is  unstable — skating,  bicycling,  etc.?  At  first, 
one  contracts  and  one  falls ;  then,  experience  aid- 
ing, contractions  disappear  and  the  position 
becomes  easy.  One  has  not  had  for  this  to  resort 
to  special  suppling  exercises;  it  has  sufficed  that 
practice  removes  the  apprehension. 

It  is  the  same  in  equitation ;  nothing  is  needed 
to  supple  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  and  only 
that  part  is  discussed  at  this  moment,  so  that  it 
may  take  a  better  position ;  it  itself  takes  it  if  the 
fear  of  falling  does  not  interfere.  It  is  not  then 
so  necessary  to  supple  these  parts  as  it  is  to 
reassure  the  rider.  The  latter  requires  less  time 
and  is  much  more  efficacious.  One  of  the  first 
concerns  of  the  instructor  ought  to  be  then  to 
remove  all  fear  from  the  minds  of  the  riders. 
This  may  be  obtained  by  having  them  mount  at 
the  beginning  only  the  horses  not  difficult  to  man- 
age and  having  easy  gaits.  One  may  thus  pre- 
vent the  rider  from  becoming  too  occupied 
about  the  security  of  his  seat  by  causing  him 
to  converse  and  to  occupy  his  mind  with  other 
things,  etc. 

The  thighs. — What  has  been  said  about  the 
upper  part  of  the  body,  that  it  places  itself  nat- 
urally in  a  good  position  if  the  rider  does  not 
contract,  is  no  longer  true  with  reference  to  the 
thighs,  for  their  conformation  does  not  permit 
them  to  take,  once  spread  apart  by  the  horse, 
the  position  they  ought  to  have.  Their  fixity, 
340 


Appendix 

in  fact,  is  not  possible  except  as  their  bony  parts 
are  brought  close  to  the  saddle,  without  which 
the  femur  rolls  on  the  muscular  mass  that  is 
found  between  it  and  the  saddle  and  which,  more- 
over, raises  the  knee:  one  says  then  that  the 
rider  is  "hooked  up."  In  this  position  the  thigh 
and  the  leg  cannot  take  hold,  cannot,  one  might 
say,  girth  the  horse,  that  which  is  necessary,  how- 
ever, in  resisting  violent  reactions. 

In  short,  the  articulation  of  the  hip  is  such 
that  if  the  rider  leaves  the  thighs  to  place  them- 
selves naturally,  the  knee  will  not  touch  the 
saddle  and  the  leg  will  not  adhere  to  the  horse 
more  than  at  the  upper  part  of  the  thigh  and 
at  the  lower  extremity  of  the  calf.  From  that 
two  inconveniences  arise :  first,  the  mobility  of 
the  surface  adherent  prevents  all  solidity;  sec- 
ondly, the  calf  being  in  contact  with  the  horse 
at  its  lower  extremity  the  spur  will  be  used 
forcibly,  the  more  so  during  somewhat  violent 
reactions. 

All  these  faults  have  their  remedy  in  a  sup- 
pling exercise  called  "rotation  of  the  thighs," 
which  at  the  same  time  brings  the  femur  close 
to  the  saddle,  permits  the  pressure  of  the  knee, 
and  causes  it  to  descend  and  finally  to  turn 
inward.  From  that,  fixity  of  the  femur  and  of 
the  knee,  lowering  of  the  heel,  and  carrying  the 
spur  at  its  normal  distance  from  the  side  of 
the  horse. 

341 


National  Service  Library 

To  execute  the  "rotation  of  the  thigh,"  remove 
the  thigh  from  contact  with  the  saddle,  carry 
back  the  knee  and  turn  it,  as  well  as  the  toe  of 
the  foot,  inward,  extend  the  leg  and  lastly  draw 
the  knee  a  little  forward,  pressing  the  thigh  hard 
against  the  saddle  in  such  manner  as  to  press  to 
the  rear  the  muscles  found  on  the  interior.  The 
knee  being  now  in  place,  let  the  lower  leg  fall 
naturally,  also  the  feet,  and  relax  the  small  of 
the  back  if  it  has  been  hollowed,  while  carrying 
back  the  knee.  The  rotation  of  the  thigh  having 
been  thus  executed,  the  rider  should  force  him- 
self to  maintain  the  thigh  as  long  as  possible  in 
the  position  given  it  and  preserve  the  small  of 
the  back  relaxed.  The  movement  is  executed  at 
the  halt,  then  at  the  walk,  the  two  legs  alter- 
nately, and  without  stirrups. 

This  suppling  exercise  is  excellent ;  but  its  role 
being  to  change  a  little  the  conformation  of  the 
rider,  it  must  be  repeated  often  and  during  a 
long  time.  It  will  not  cease  to  be  useful  until, 
the  articulation  of  the  hip  having  been  suffi- 
ciently accustomed  and  the  interior  muscles  hav- 
ing been  sufficiently  pushed  back,  the  thigh  takes 
of  itself  a  good  position. 

The  legs. — It  can  be  repeated  for  the  legs  and 
the  feet  what  has  been  said  of  the  upper  part 
of  the  body :  when  the  thigh  is  in  a  good  position, 
there  is  nothing  to  do  to  assure  that  of  one  of 
the  legs:  one  only  has  to  let  them  fall  naturally 
342 


Appendix 

by  their  proper  weight,  as  well  as  the  feet,  by 
relaxing  completely  the  knee  and  the  ankle. 

The  position  of  the  thighs  and  the  legs  is 
notably  and  rapidly  improved  if,  together  with 
frequent  rotation  of  the  thighs,  the  rider  be 
induced  to  ride  without  stirrups  at  the  slow  trot 
and  canter.  The  weight  tends  to  cause  the  knees 
to  descend  naturally.  This  exercise  is  so  excel- 
lent that  it  may  be  practiced  advantageously  even 
by  riders  already  formed,  to  preserve  the  good 
position  of  their  legs  and  to  sit  deep  down  in 
their  saddles. 

Schedule  for  instruction  in  equitation  followed 
in  the  Brownsville  district: 

First  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.)  In- 
troductory remarks,  (b.)  Suppling  exercises 
dismounted,  (c.)  Bridling,  all  students  required 
to  do  same,  (d.)  Saddling,  all  students  required 
to  do  same,  (e.)  Stand  to  horse,  (f.)  To  lead 
out.  (g.)  To  mount,  (h.)  To  dismount,  (i.) 
To  take  the  reins  in  one  hand  and  to  separate 
them,  (k.)  Position  of  the  trooper  mounted. 
(I.)  Elementary  commands  and  their  execution 
(on  the  circle  or  the  rectangle),  (m.)  The  aids 
(elementary),  (n.)  Criticisms  of  positions  (at 
walk  or  trot),  (o.)  Walk  back  to  rendezvous 
point,  (p.)  Short  talk  upon  what  care  the  horses 
should  receive  upon  their  return  to  camp. 

Second  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.) 
Suppling  exercises,  dismounted,  (b.)  All  stu- 
343 


National  Service  Library 

dents  required  to  bridle  and  saddle,  (c.)  Hasty 
review  of  "e"  to  "m,"  first  day.  (d.)  To  move 
forward,  (e.)  To  halt,  (f.)  To  turn  to  right 
or  left,  (g.)  Walk,  slow  trot,  trot  (criticisms 
of  positions),  (h.)  Posting. 

Third  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.)  All 
students  required  to  bridle  and  cinch.  (b.) 
Suppling  exercises  mounted,  (c)  Review  of 
position  of  soldier ;  contact  with  horse's  mouth ; 
forward;  halt;  the  forward  movement,  (d.) 
How  to  make  horse  leave  ranks,  (e.)  Posting. 
(f.)  Aids:  Opening  reins;  bearing  reins;  direct 
rein;  legs.  How  to  regulate  on  the  instructor 
when  riding  in  a  flock  "cross-country."  (g.) 
Cross-country  exercise  on  varied  ground. 

Fourth  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.)  The 
seat,  (b.)  The  hands,  (c.)  The  halt,  (d.)  The 
half  halt,  (e.)  Then  how  to  regulate  on  the 
instructor  when  riding  in  a  flock  "cross-country." 
(f.)  A  little  cross-country  work;  through  water; 
up  and  down  fairly  steep  slopes,  (g.)  Explana- 
tion of  benefit  derived. 

Fifth  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.)  Work 
at  will  first  ten  minutes,  (b.)  Review  that  which 
seems  not  to  be  clear,  (c.)  To  take  the  reins  in 
either  hand  and  in  both  hands,  (d.)  The  "open- 
ing" or  "leading"  rein,  (e.)  The  "bearing"  rein, 
(f.)  The  direct  rein,  (g.)  The  legs,  (h.)  Work 
on  the  rectangle:  (i)  circles.  (2)  abouts,  (3) 
344 


Appendix 

broken   lines,    (4)    serpentines,      (i.)    Work   at 
the  gallop. 

Sixth  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.)  Sup- 
pling exercises  mounted.  (b.)  Cross-country 
work  (with  short  talk  before  and  after  upon 
how  to  control  the  horse  in  this  work). 

Seventh  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.) 
Suppling  exercises  mounted,  (b.)  The  indirect 
rein  of  opposition  in  rear  of  the  withers,  (c.) 
The  indirect  rein  of  opposition  in  front  of  the 
withers,  (d.)  Passing  corners,  (e.)  Changes 
of  gait,  (f.)  Increasing  and  decreasing  the  gait, 
(g.)  Work  at  the  gallop,  (h.)  The  walk,  trot,  and 
gallop  and  the  extended  walk,  trot,  and  gallop. 

Eighth  day,  dismounted,  one  and  one-half 
hours,  (a.)  Lecture  and  conference,  (b.)  Suit- 
able clothing,  (c.)  Care  of  leather  and  other 
equipment,  (d.)  Stable  management,  (e.)  Con- 
ditioning, (f.)  List  of  reference  books. 

Ninth  day,  one  and  one-half  hours.  Instruc- 
tion ride  to  4th  Inf.  corral  for  observation  and 
conference  upon  stable  management. 

Tenth  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.) 
Hasty  review  of  important  points,  (b.)  Exer- 
cise on  varied  ground,  (c.)  Remarks  upon  com- 
pleted work  and  work  to  follow. 

Eleventh  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,     (a.) 
Increasing  and   decreasing  the  gait,      (b.)   The 
345 


National  Service  Library 

extended  walk,  (c.)  Work  on  the  rectangle. 
(d.)  The  turn  on  the  forehand,  (e.)  The  about 
on  the  forehand,  (f.)  Posting  (changing  from 
one  pair  to  diagonals  to  the  other),  (g.)  Gal- 
lop cross-country.  (h.)  Up  and  down  steep 
slopes. 

Twelfth  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.)  The 
gallop  (false,  true),  (b.)  To  take  the  desired 
lead  at  the  gallop  (on  the  circle),  (c.)  Pre- 
liminary jumping  (from  small  log  on  the  ground 
to  2- foot  brush  jump). 

Thirteenth  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.) 
Increasing  and  decreasing  the  gait,  (b.)  Har- 
mony in  use  of  aids,  (c.)  Passing  corners,  (d.) 
The  turn  (on  the  forehand  and  on  the  haunches), 
(e.)  Shoulder  in.  (f.)  Gallop  on  varied  ground. 

Fourteenth  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.) 
Increasing  and  decreasing  gait,  (b.)  On  two 
large  circles :  ( i )  Taking  proper  lead  at  the  gal- 
lop. (2)  Changing  the  lead  by  coming  down  to 
the  trot  and  taking  the  2d  circle  on  the  opposite 
hand  at  the  gallop,  (c.)  Cross-country  gallop 
(including  jumps). 

Fifteenth  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.) 
Increasing  and  decreasing  the  gait  (up  and  down 
the  scale  from  walk  to  gallop),  (b.)  Work  on 
the  rectangle;  circle;  abouts ;  half-turns;  half- 
turns  in  reverse,  (c.)  Cross-country  gallop,  (d.) 
Slides. 

346 


Appendix 

Sixteenth  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.) 
One-half  hour  without  stirrups:  (i)  Walk,  trot, 
gallop.  (2)  Low  jumps,  (b.)  Work  on  the 
rectangle  (same  as  "B"  i5th  day),  (c.)  Exer- 
cise on  varied  ground. 

Seventeenth  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.) 
Three-fourths  hour  without  stirrups :  ( I )  Exer- 
cise on  varied  ground.  (2)  Low  jumps,  (b.) 
Increasing  and  decreasing  the  gait,  (c.)  The 
extended  walk  and  trot. 

Eighteenth  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.) 
Three-fourths  hour  without  stirrups:  (i)  On 
the  large  circle  (suppling  exercises).  (2)  Jump- 
ing, (b.)  Exercise  on  varied  ground,  (c.) 
Slides. 

Nineteenth  day,  one  and  one-half  hours. 
Lecture  and  conference:  (i)  School  of  the 
Remount.  (2)  Shoeing. 

Twentieth  day,  one  and  one-half  hours,  (a.) 
Exercise  on  varied  ground  (jumps,  slides,  water 
hazards),  (b.)  Remarks  upon  completed  work 
and  work  to  follow. 

The  above  outline  of  training  may  be 
slightly  varied  according  to  progress  from  day 
to  day. 

Though  not  mentioned  above,  each  day's 
work  ended  with  at  least  two  minutes  at  the 
walk. 

347 


National  Service  Library 

NOTES  ON  GROOMING 

The  physical  condition  of  horses  and  mules 
depends  first :  on  their  feeding ;  second,  on  their 
grooming;  third,  on  their  general  care. 

Ordinarily,  the  grooming  counts  20  per  cent 
in  the  condition  of  a  horse  or  mule. 

As  a  rule  each  animal  should  be  groomed  for 
a  few  minutes  before  exercise,  and  for  a  half 
hour  after  exercise. 

The  active  grooming  should  be  strenuous,  not 
carelessly  done.  In  each  infantry  regiment 
there  should  be  a  fixed  time  for  stables,  and  it 
should  be  attended  by  an  officer  detailed  for  the 
purpose. 

The  following  method  of  grooming,  as  advo- 
cated and  published  by  the  Mounted  Service 
School,  will  be  used  during  the  first  two  (2) 
weeks  after  the  publication  of  this  bulletin,  in 
order  to  teach  the  details  of  grooming  to  enlisted 
men: 

At  the  command  "Commence  grooming"  each 
man  brushes,  and  wipes  off  the  legs  of  his  horse 
from  the  knees  down  (2  minutes). 

"Currycomb,  left  side."  Take  the  currycomb 
and  gently  loosen  dried  mud  or  matted  hair  on 
fleshy  parts  of  left  side  (2l/2  minutes). 

"Brush  head  and  neck."  Start  with  the  head 
and  work  back  to  include  the  shoulders  and 
elbow  joints.  The  weight  of  the  man,  stiff  armed 
348 


Appendix 

and  standing  well  away  from  the  horse,  should 
be  put  on  the  brush  (2  minutes). 

"Brush  belly  and  back"  (2  minutes). 

"Brush  croup  and  between  the  hind  legs"  (i]/2 
minutes). 

"Brush  hind  leg"   (#  minute). 

"Brush  fore  leg"  (ft  minute). 

Total  time  for  left  side,  about  nJ/2  minutes. 

"Wipe  out  eyes,  nostrils  and  dock,  and  brush 
mane  and  tail"  (3^  minutes). 

"Clean  feet"   (i   minute). 

Total  time,  30  minutes. 

NOTES  ON   INSPECTION   OF   HORSE   AND   MULE 
TRANSPORTATION 

Numbers  and  General  Information.  The 
inspector  will  keep  a  table  showing  the  number 
of  animals  on  hand  in  the  units  whose  mount 
or  transportation  he  is  charged  with  inspecting. 
He  will  also  record  all  important  data  in  connec- 
tion with  the  effectiveness  of  these  animals  which 
can  be  obtained  from  their  descriptive  cards,  such 
as  age,  weight,  etc. 

Shoeing.  The  inspector  will  be  charged  with 
the  general  inspection  of  the  shoeing  of  these 
animals.  He  will  keep  informed  as  to  the  sup- 
plies on  hand  of  horseshoeing  material — shoes, 
nails,  tools,  etc.,  and  the  degree  of  training  of 
the  horseshoers. 

349 


National  Service  Library 

Veterinary  Care.  The  inspector  will  be  charged 
with  the  inspection  of  the  veterinary  care  given 
to  these  animals — whether  the  number  of  veter- 
inaries  is  sufficient,  what  the  proportion  of  ani- 
mals on  sick  report  is,  etc.,  whether  the  medicine 
is  sufficient  in  quantity. 

Forage.  Acting  in  connection  with  the  officer 
of  the  Quartermaster  Corps  he  will  keep  himself 
informed  of  the  quality  and  quantity  of  forage 
issued. 

Grooming.  The  inspector  will  keep  himself 
informed  of  the  appearance  of  animals.  Oppor- 
tunity will  later  present  itself,  especially  during 
reviews  of  transportation.  He  will  keep  in- 
formed regarding  the  amount  of  grooming  given 
animals. 

Condition.  The  inspector  will  inform  himself 
by  observation  of  the  hours  per  week  of  actual 
work  requiring  physical  effort  by  the  animals. 
This  with  a  view  to  keeping  all  animals  in 
hard  condition  for  campaign.  He  will  re- 
quire that  four  animals  per  team  are  worked, 
not  two. 

Quantity,  Material.  The  inspector  will  keep 
informed  on  the  amount  of  material  in  the  trains 
of  his  command,  including  wagons,  harness,  ac- 
cessories, spare  parts,  etc.  He  will  note  all  de- 
ficiencies under  G.  O.  39  W.  D.,  1916,  and  report 
them  to  these  headquarters. 
350 


Appendix 

Upkeep  and  Cleaning  of  Material.  The  inspec- 
tor will  note  the  markings  on  wagons,  will  keep 
informed  of  the  frequency  with  which  harness 
and  packs  are  cleaned,  and  will  report  on  the 
general  upkeep  of  all  material  in  the  trains  in- 
spected by  him. 


351 


Appendix    XVII 

NOTES  ON  THE  TRAINING  OF  TROOPS  IN  THE 
GREAT  EUROPEAN  WAR  WITH  DEDUCTIONS 
DRAWN  THEREFROM 

Additional  Training  During  the  War.  Due 
to  lack  of  authority  for  representatives  of  the 
United  States  army  to  remain  at  the  front  with 
armies  of  belligerent  nations,  reports  of  steps 
taken  to  provide  additional  training  during  the 
war  are  few  and  incomplete. 

Additional  Training,  German  Troops.  A 
camp  for  recruit  training  was  established  at 
Beverloo,  Belgium,  for  a  course  of  eight  weeks' 
training,  especially  in  firing  and  combat  exer- 
cises, following  preliminary  training  at  home  sta- 
tions. Capacity  of  camp,  2,500  animals,  25,000 
men.  Similar  depots  for  increased  training  in 
essentials  of  the  character  of  warfare  experienced 
were  established  throughout  Germany,  the  course 
at  each  being  eight  weeks.  Men  were  trained  to 
fire  from  trenches  and  trees,  practicing  conceal- 
ment. They  were  trained  in  construction  of 
types  of  trenches. 

Cavalry  of  the  German  army  was  trained  to 
endure  long  marches  rather  than  to  charge,  and 
352 


Appendix 

to  accustom  horses  to  bivouac  in  the  open  rather 
than  rely  upon  stabling. 

Field  artillery  were  trained  in  construction 
of  trenches  and  concealment  from  aerial  ob- 
servation. 

Aviators  were  taught  better  cooperation  with 
field  artillery. 

Candidates  for  appointment  as  second  lieu- 
tenant are  given  practical  training  at  the  recruit 
depots  above  referred  to. 

Additional  Training,  French  Troops.  In- 
dependently of  the  student  reserve  officers,  200 
noncommissioned  officers  of  the  active  army  were 
given  special  courses  of  training,  April  6  to  May 
31,  1915,  at  St.  Cyr,  Maixent,  Joinville,  and  Fon- 
tainebleau,  to  qualify  for  appointment  as  second 
lieutenants. 

It  is  impracticable  to  ascertain  how  much  train- 
ing during  the  war  is  given  men  forwarded  from 
regimental  depots  to  replace  casualties,  but  most 
if  not  all  such  received  training  in  former  years. 
This  number  is  very  large.  The  Seventy-ninth 
and  One  Hundred  and  Thirty-first  Infantry  to 
June,  1915  (10  months  of  war)  each  received 
13,000  men  in  all  to  maintain  its  effective 
strength  of  3,000. 

Imagine  the  result  if  such  proportion  of  un- 
trained volunteers  join  an  American  regiment 
in  war! 

It  was  soon  developed  that  the  reconnaissance 

353 

Vol.  3— N.S.L.  12 


National  Service  Library 

service  of  cavalry  was  badly  performed,  infantry 
being  surprised,  as  no  warning  was  received 
from  cavalry  screen. 

The  marksmanship  of  infantry  was  poor,  too 
little  ammunition  being  allowed  for  instruction 
of  recruits  (120  rounds  instead  of  200  allowed 
in  peace). 

In  September,  1915,  the  class,  due  in  October, 
1916,  for  compulsory  service;  assembled  at 
depots  for  training. 

During  service  at  the  front  a  French  regiment 
of  infantry  or  cavalry  in  the  first  line  spends  3 
days  in  trenches,  3  days  in  cantonment  exposed 
to  bombardment,  and  6  days  in  quiet  cantonment ; 
then  12  days  in  the  second  line  (reserve).  Thus 
it  has  3  days  on  the  alert,  3  days  in  danger,  and 
1 8  days  in  security.  Artillery,  less  tried  by  fire, 
are  continually  in  action  and  not  withdrawn  to 
the  rear  for  rest.  Rest  given  infantry  and 
cavalry  is  moral  rather  than  physical.  While  in 
second  line,  12  days  at  1 5-kilometer  march  is 
had  each  day,  and  company  battalion,  or  regi- 
mental maneuvers.  Bayonet  fencing,  throwing 
petards,  reversing  parapets  of  trenches,  crawling, 
running,  target  practice,  machine-gun  practice, 
etc.,  utilize  entire  period  in  second  line.  One- 
half  the  French  army  drills  while  the  other  half 
guards  the  trenches. 

French  infantry  is  trained  to  organize  and 
carry  out  the  assault  of  three  lines  of  trenches 
354 


Appendix 

constructed  in  rear  of  their  positions  to  resemble 
the  German  trenches  in  their  front  and  on  ter- 
rain similar  to  that  in  their  front.  Men  are 
trained  to  rush  100  kilometers  and  lunge  at 
figures  dressed  as  German  soldiers  in  the  trenches 
used  for  assault  training. 

Additional  Training,  Canadian  Troops.  Al- 
though the  Canadian  contingent  had  had  some 
training  before  sailing,  the  first  expedition  (31,- 
250  men)  was  sent  to  camp  at  Salisbury  Plain 
for  six  months'  additional  training.  One  regi- 
ment (Princess  Patricia's)  was  given  only  two 
months  in  England  and  two  months  in  France 
before  being  placed  in  the  trenches  in  February, 
1915.  It  was  composed  largely  of  men  with 
previous  service  in  the  regular  army  or  South 
Africa. 

Other  than  this  regiment  the  personnel  and 
training  of  the  Canadians  is  said  to  have  been 
inferior  to  the  territorial  force. 

The  first  Canadian  division  was  sent  to  France 
after  four  and  one-half  months'  training  at  Salis- 
bury Plain.  The  second  division  was  not  sent 
to  France  until  September,  1915.  These  two 
divisions,  with  authorized  strength  of  40,000 
men,  have  met  heavy  casualties,  and  as  selected 
men  are  transferred  to  them  to  replace  losses, 
it  represents  the  strength  which  Canada  can 
maintain  in  the  field  in  view  of  preliminary  train- 
ing given  in  Canada  and  supplementary  training 
355 


National  Service  Library 

in  England  and  France  before  troops  with  no 
previous  training  can  be  safely  employed  at  the 
front.  Such  strength'  was  not  reached  at  the 
front  until  after  14  months  of  war. 

British  Cadet  School  in  the  Field.  In  Jan- 
uary,^! 5,  to  replenish  the  corps  of  officers,  sadly 
depleted  since  August,  1914,  Field  Marshal  Sir 
John  French,  commander  in  chief  of  the  British 
forces  in  the  field,  established  a  school  for  train- 
ing officers  at  Blendecques  near  St.  Omer,  France. 
Cadets  are  selected  from  enlisted  men  of  educa- 
tional, physical,  and  moral  qualities,  who  have 
been  tested  as  good  field  soldiers  in  actual  cam- 
paign. The  course,  which  lasts  one  month,  is 
one  of  demonstration  and  practice  coupled  with 
a  minimum  of  theory.  Each  cadet  passes  48 
hours  in  the  trenches  and  visits  observation  posts 
of  a  battery  or  group  of  batteries,  submitting  re- 
port of  his  tour.  Machine-gun  tactics  is  an  im- 
portant subject  of  instruction.  Among  others 
are  range  finding,  siting  and  construction  of 
trenches,  sapping,  sketching,  night  operations, 
use  of  rifle  and  hand  grenades,  cooperation  of 
infantry,  artillery,  engineers,  etc.  The  capacity 
is  105  cadets,  that  number  being  graduated 
each  month.  Graduates  have  been  favorably 
reported  by  divisional  and  corps  commanders. 
The  Artists'  Rifles  (Twenty-eighth  Battalion, 
London  regiment)  was  utilized  as  the  basis  for 
this  training  corps  for  officers  in  the  field. 
356 


Appendix 

British  Machine-gun  School  in  the  Field.  A 
school  for  training  the  increased  personnel  em- 
ployed with  machine  guns,  the  number  of  which 
guns  with  field  units  was  doubled,  was  estab- 
lished at  Wisques,  near  St.  Omer,  France,  under 
an  enthusiastic  musketry  officer.  The  course, 
which  lasts  two  weeks,  consists  of  improvising 
positions  and  gun  shelter,  oblique  or  enfilade  fire, 
firing  from  behind  houses  through  openings  in 
walls,  or  from  within  houses  and  cellars  through 
openings  in  the  roofs,  firing  from  armored  motor 
cars  and  aeroplanes,  etc. 

Practical  Experience  for  Higher  Unit  Com- 
manders. It  is  reported  that  regimental  and 
battalion  commanders  of  the  expeditionary  forces 
still  training  in  Great  Britain  were  sent  to 
France  in  relays  for  a  week's  experience  and 
training  at  the  front,  that  on  returning  they  might 
make  the  training  of  their  proper  commands 
more  practical  and  appropriate  to  the  service 
anticipated  when  such  commands  reach  the  front. 

British  Central  Training  Camp  at  Havre. 
In  the  summer  of  1915  a  camp  was  established 
near  the  base  at  Havre  for  the  supplementary 
training  of  men  arriving  from  England  and  con- 
sidered deficient  in  the  essentials  of  infantry 
training.  All  men  passing  the  camp  were  sub- 
jected to  "tests,"  and  not  permitted  to  go  to  the 
front  until  found  proficient  by  the  commandant, 
357 


National  Service  Library 

Major  H.  F.  Whinney,  Royal  Fusiliers.  In- 
structors are  experienced  officers  and  noncom- 
missioned officers  recently  returned  from  active 
service  in  the  trenches,  some  of  them  recuper- 
ating from  wounds  or  sickness.  In  addition  a 
very  good  officer  is  selected  from  each  division 
at  the  front  and  detailed  for  a  tour  of  two 
months  as  instructor.  This  maintains  instruction 
in  pace  with  the  evolution  of  the  peculiar  condi- 
tions of  warfare  which  characterize  the  struggle 
in  France.  The  course  includes  musketry,  in- 
trenching, first  aid,  pack-saddlery,  bayonet  fenc- 
ing, bombing,  revetting,  construction  of  obstacles, 
particularly  barbed-wire  entanglements,  machine- 
gun  practice,  the  disabling  of  guns,  and  conduct 
of  artillery  fire.  Lectures  and  practical  instruc- 
tion are  given  groups  of  officers  and  men,  at 
times  to  as  many  as  300  in  a  group  or  class.  All 
are  impressed  with  the  idea  that  their  lives  may 
depend  upon  following  the  advice  given.  Sub- 
jects are  so  practical,  and  the  necessity  for  knowl- 
edge is  so  vital,  the  hour  so  solemn,  and  lecturers 
men  who  have  learned  by  wounds  and  bitter  ex- 
perience in  action  what  to  avoid,  that  there  is  no 
lack  of  interest  or  attention.  In  musketry  targets 
represent  German  helmets  barely  visible  over  a 
parapet,  bobbing  up  over  a  front  of  several  hun- 
dred yards.  Men  are  taught  the  character  of 
trees  and  houses  in  the  landscape,  so  as  readily 
to  recognize  aiming  points  and  division  lines 
358 


Appendix 

between  sectors.  They  are  taught  the  distinction 
between  cover  from  view  and  cover  from  fire. 
Trenches  of  patterns  found  best  at  the  front  are 
built,  faced  by  trenches  similar  to  those  used  by 
the  Germans.  Men  under  instruction  occupy 
these  trenches  24  hours  to  test  their  knowledge 
of  what  they  have  been  taught  in  lectures.  Men 
are  taught  to  throw  dummy  bombs  from  a  nar- 
row fire  trench  into  trenches  in  front  and  to  ad- 
vance in  specified  formations  of  small  groups 
or  squads,  clearing  "pockets"  between  traverses 
of  any  hostile  occupants  by  "lobbing"  bombs  into 
such  pockets.  They  are  taught  to  hurl  live  bombs 
and  shown  how  to  avoid  accidents,  relieving  men 
in  fire  trenches,  formations  for  assault,  bring- 
ing up  supports,  attacking  "hostile"  trenches 
occupied  by  dummy  "Germans"  which  must  be 
bayoneted  or  bombed,  use  of  respirators  to  avoid 
effects  of  gas,  positions  taken  in  trenches  when 
aeroplanes  are  sighted,  use  of  trench  sprayers 
to  negative  effects  of  gas  that  has  been  thrown 
by  "Germans,"  are  interesting  and  practical  ex- 
ercises undertaken.  They  represent  the  last  word 
in  practical  infantry  training  for  the  character 
of  warfare  peculiar  to  the  situation  in  north- 
eastern France. 

Deductions,     (a)   The  time  devoted  in  peace 

to    training    in    all     other    countries     exceeds 

that  given  all  British  forces,  excepting  possibly 

the  British  regular  army,  which  constituted  at 

359 


National  Service  Library 

the  outbreak  of  the  war  the  only  British  force 
fit  for  service  on  the  Continent,  and  compared 
with  strength  of  the  new  army  was  very  small. 
It  included  many  men  of  several  years'  training, 
reenlisted  and  professional  soldiers,  and  its  serv- 
ice in  August  and  September,  1914,  demonstrated 
the  value  of  troops  thoroughly  trained  and  habit- 
uated to  discipline.  But  its  casualties,  fighting 
against  odds,  were  very  heavy. 

(6)  All  other  British  troops,  excepting  possi- 
bly those  from  Australia,  required  from  six  to 
nine  months'  training,  after  organization,  regard- 
less of  previous  training,  before  they  were  con- 
sidered fit  for  service  at  the  front.  No  reports 
have  been  received  to  indicate  whether  Aus- 
tralian troops  required  more  training  than  had 
been  received  under  the  compulsory  training  re- 
quired by  the  defense  act.  It  is  probable  that 
such  additional  training  was  necessary  and  was 
given  in  camps  in  Egypt  before  such  troops  were 
sent  to  the  Dardanelles  in  the  spring  of  1915. 

(c)  Casualties  in  the  ranks  of  units  from 
countries  having  compulsory  training  were  re- 
placed by  men  of  reserve  forces,  variously  desig- 
nated, who  had  training  in  peace.  Casualties  in 
British  and  Canadian  units  had  to  be  replaced  by 
men  with  no  training  in  peace,  and  the  prepara- 
tion of  such  men  required  at  least  six  months' 
intensive  training  in  Great  Britain,  after  which 
many  were  found  unfit  and  were  given  supple- 
360 


Appendix 

mentary  training  in  France  before  joining  units 
at  the  front. 

(d)  The  proportion  of  the  British  regular  and 
territorial  forces  to  the  population  of  Great 
Britain  and  Canada  being  greater  than  that  of 
the  regular  army  and  organized  militia  of  the 
United  States,  to  the  population  of  the  United 
States,  a  greater  percentage  of  British  citizens 
than  of  United  States  citizens  had  received  some 
military  training  before  the  war  commenced,  and 
the  amount  of  such  training  in  the  territorial 
forces  was  greater  than  in  the  organized  militia 
of  the  United  States. 

Application  to  Situation  in  the  United 
States,  (a)  If  imminence  of  war  should  war- 
rant mobilization  of  the  United  States  land 
forces,  it  is  obvious  that  only  the  regular  army 
and  such  of  the  army  reserve  as  have  very  re- 
cently served  in  the  regular  army  can  be  con- 
sidered ready  at  once  for  active  field  service 
against  a  force  from  any  country  now  at  war, 
including  the  British  new  army  thus  far  sent 
to  the  Continent. 

(&)  The  United  States  has  now  no  adequate 
method  of  supplying  properly  trained  men  to 
replace  casualties  in  the  ranks  of  the  regular 
army  or  to  compose  the  ranks  of  the  large  num- 
ber of  combatant  units  required  in  addition  to 
the  existing  mobile  regular  troops  to  resist 
invasion. 


National  Service  Library 

(c)  The  experience  of  the  British  with  the 
new  army  confirms  the  estimate  in  paragraph  42 
of  "A  Statement  of  a  Proper  Military  Policy" 
(W  C  D  9053-90)  that— 

"Twelve  months'  intensive  training  is  the  mini- 
mum that  will  prepare  troops  for  war  service. 
Therefore  the  500,000  partly  trained  troops  above 
referred  to  require  nine  months'  military  train- 
ing before  war  begins." 

(d}  Conditions  of  modern  war  do  not  afford 
time  to  train  an  army  after  war  becomes  immi- 
nent. Not  only  must  material  be  secured,  but 
personnel  must  be  trained  before  military  opera- 
tions can  be  undertaken  with  any  hope  of  success. 


362 


Appendix  XVIII 
TRAINING  FOR  TRENCH  WARFARE 

There  is  sometimes  a  tendency  to  reach  the 
hasty  conclusion  that  the  training  of  the  soldier 
for  trench  warfare  means  chiefly  or  solely  the 
digging  of  ditches  and  the  construction  of  an 
aggregation  of  defensive  works  of  various  types 
and  patterns,  and  to  look  upon  such  work  as  a 
wearisome,  monotonous  and  uninteresting  task, 
drudgery  that  the  man  wielding  the  pick  and 
shovel  can  hardly  see  the  reason  for. 

It  is  true  that  in  actual  war  the  trench  is  the 
basic  element  of  defensive  works  in  the  field, 
miles  and  miles  must  be  dug,  immense  labor  is 
required  and  thousands  of  men  will  work  un- 
tiringly but  under  the  spur  of  necessity  and 
knowledge  that  what  they  are  doing  is  a  meas- 
ure of  self-preservation. 

The  soldier's  duty  in  time  of  peace  is  not  so 
much  to  toil  and  dig  as  to  learn  how  to  do  the 
work  and  to  use  his  labor  effectively,  to  obtain 
results  commensurate  with  the  energy  expended. 
It  is  not  intended  to  argue  that  the  construction 
of  trenches  and  intrenched  positions  in  the  field 
should  not  be  included  as  part  of  the  peace 
363 


National  Service  Library 

training  of  a  soldier,  but  only  to  emphasize  the 
fact  that  the  profile  and  construction  of  field 
works  are  simple  matters  compared  with  their 
correct  location  and  proper  tactical  use  and  to 
suggest  that  the  time  devoted  to  the  actual  con- 
struction of  field  works  be  proportioned  intel- 
ligently to  that  devoted  to  elementary  instruction 
in  the  general  principles  of  the  subject  and  to 
subsequent  utilization  of  the  constructed  works, 
including  attack  and  defense,  maneuvers,  occu- 
pancy of  the  trenches  in  all  sorts  of  weather, 
nightwork,  etc. 

A  man  is  quick  to  improve  his  condition  in 
regard  to  protection  and  comfort  when  he  learns 
what  is  needed.  His  mind  is  at  least  as  useful 
as  his  body  and  its  training  must  not  be  for- 
gotten. Therefore  teach  the  soldier  what  all 
these  devices  described  in  the  manuals  and 
pocket  books  are  for ;  let  him  build  and  try  out 
the  most  approved  types ;  he  will  then  learn  to 
adapt  himself  to  the  effective  use  of  the  devices, 
to  grasp  the  essential  features,  to  eliminate 
the  nonessential,  to  make  improvements,  to 
absorb  the  idea,  and  to  impart  his  knowledge 
to  others. 

Another  point  to  be  well  considered  by  those 
charged  with  the  soldier's  training  is  that  a  man 
does  not  learn  anything  unless  he  is  first  in- 
terested, and  the  progress  of  the  instruction  given 
must  keep  this  constantly  in  view. 
364 


Appendix 

Military  training  in  time  of  peace  is  handi- 
capped by  the  fact  that  much  of  it  must  be  car- 
ried on  in  the  light  of  theory  alone  without  daily 
practice  to  test  out  the  theories  under  service 
conditions.  The  practical  lessons  of  a  war  soon 
become  out  of  date  due  to  improvements  in 
weapons  and  other  material  of  war  and  the 
resultant  changes  in  tactical  ideas.  It  is  difficult 
to  predict  the  precise  effect  of  improved  weap- 
ons and  the  improved  training  of  other  nations 
who  may  possibly  become  our  opponents  in 
armed  conflict.  Theoretical  views  may  be 
wrong.  The  best  we  can  do  is  to  keep  clearly 
in  mind  the  fundamental  object  to  be  attained, 
to  note  from  each  great  war  how  this  object  was 
achieved  under  varying  conditions  and  to  try  to 
apply  and  adapt  the  principles  to  the  present 
need. 

The  above  remarks  apply  in  large  measure  to 
all  kinds  of  military  training. 

For  trench  warfare  it  is  believed  that  the 
training  may  well  begin  with  the  use  of  topo- 
graphical maps  and  models  of  field  works  and 
intrenched  positions  and  with  the  construction 
of  relief  maps  in  a  simple  fashion  to  teach  the 
significance  of  the  shape  of  the  ground  and  the 
method  of  utilizing  natural  features,  hills,  val- 
leys, ridges,  woods,  etc.,  to  secure  cover  and 
concealment.  The  meaning  of  the  common 
terms,  sky  line,  military  crest,  reverse  slope,  etc., 
365 


National  Service  Library 

should  be  understood  by  all  in  some  degree,  and 
very  thoroughly  by  those  who  may  have  the 
duty  of  selecting  or  laying  out  the  lines  to  be 
occupied  by  trenches  or  other  field  works. 

The  construction,  then,  of  miniature  trenches 
and  parapets  in  sand  built  quite  accurately  to 
scale,  with  all  the  accessories  such  as  revetments, 
overhead  cover,  obstacles,  etc.,  seems  to  be  a 
very  good  way  to  arouse  the  interest  of  the  sol- 
dier and  to  give  him  the  elementary  instruction 
as  to  dimensions,  slopes,  directions,  and  relative 
position  of  the  component  parts  of  an  intrenched 
position.  The  sand  table  can  also  carry  the  in- 
struction in  topography  one  step  further  by  al- 
lowing the  building  to  scale  of  the  hills,  stream 
beds,  roads,  and  railroads,  and  the  representation 
of  wooded,  cleared  and  cultivated  areas.  In  the 
employment  of  artificial  features  in  the  miniature 
landscape  it  is  believed  to  be  highly  desirable  to 
construct  them  all  to  the  same  horizontal  scale 
as  that  of  the  trenches  and  topography  in  order 
that  the  idea  of  correct  proportion  may  be  ac- 
quired. 

A  proper  sense  of  proportion  is  impor- 
tant in  all  occupations  and  is  one  of  the  most 
valuable  things  that  a  soldier  or  an  officer  can 
carry  around  in  his  head  ready  to  apply  it  in- 
stantly to  the  case  at  hand.  It  is  realized  that  it 
is  nearly  always  necessary  to  exaggerate  the 
vertical  scale  of  relief  models  showing  extensive 
366 


Appendix 

tracts,  but  the  horizontal  scale  may  usually  be 
adhered  to  for  all  features. 

Extensive  positions  can  be  laid  out  on  the 
sand  table  and  profitable  instruction  given  to 
officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  as  well  as 
to  the  private  soldier. 

This  training  by  maps  and  models  must  not 
be  carried  too  far ;  it  is  only  a  means  to  an  end, 
and  the  details  must  not  be  allowed  to  obscure 
the  main  object  in  view,  namely,  to  apply  these 
principles  to  the  actual  ground. 

The  next  step  should  be  the  construction  of 
full-sized  trenches  and  all  accessories.  If  this 
has  to  be  done  by  troops  in  small  isolated  bodies 
the  work  may  have  to  be  limited  to  practice  in 
the  mere  mechanical  handling  of  the  full-sized 
elements,  the  tools,  the  obstacles,  different  kinds 
of  revetment,  and  the  like.  In  view  of  the  pro- 
posed subsequent  use  of  the  intrenchments,  it 
would  be  better  to  have  the  work  done  by  troops 
assembled  in  large  bodies  that  could  then  be  used 
in  maneuvers  and  in  the  occupancy  of  the 
trenches,  including  further  training  in  all  the 
active  duties  of  the  attack  and  defense  of  field 
works. 

The  last  idea  involves,  perhaps,  the  construc- 
tion of  an  intrenched  camp,  in  which  all  the 
operations  and  details  of  life  in  the  trenches 
could  be  simulated.  Field  fortifications  are  con- 
structed with  a  view  to  giving  a  cover  that  will 
367 


National  Service  Library 

diminish  losses,  but  they  must  be  so  built  and 
placed  that  they  will  not  interfere  with  the  free 
use  of  the  rifle.  Fire  effect  is  the  first  con- 
sideration. 

Major  Sydenham  Clark,  R.  E.   (1890)   says: 

"Organization,  capable  commanders,  efficient 
armament,  adequate  supplies,  matured  prepara- 
tions, well-arranged  communications  —  these 
things  constitute  the  essence  of  defense ;  these 
determine  the  resisting  power  of  land  fortifica- 
tions. Within  broad  limits  the  details  of  de- 
sign are  of  relatively  small  account." 

Fire  effect  and  organization  may  be  said  to 
include  in  a  broad  sense  all  that  is  to  be  secured 
by  training. 

To  quote  from  a  French  source : 

"Warfare  of  the  kind  the  enemy  forces  us  to 
wage  includes  at  present  as  its  chief  occupation 
the  construction  and  defense  of  an  uninterrupted 
line  of  intrenchments  from  the  North  Sea  to 
Alsace.  The  present  form  of  warfare  appears 
not  to  have  been  foreseen  by  those  who  for 
forty- four  years  have  commanded  our  army, 
and  that  element  officially  known  in  the  infantry 
maneuver  book  as  field  fortifications  has,  with 
rare  exceptions,  received  but  scant  attention 
from  our  corps  and  detachment  chiefs.  On  the 
contrary,  in  many  garrisons,  gymnastics  and 
open-air  games  have  been  in  great  favor,  and 
certain  unkind  persons  have  sometimes  asked 
368 


Appendix 

themselves  if  our  military  chiefs  have  not  lost 
sight  of  the  great  principle  that  in  time  of  peace 
the  soldiers  are  taken  away  from  their  civil 
occupations  to  learn  to  fight  rather  than  to  learn 
to  play  at  leapfrog. 

"All  of  us  know  the  terrible  consequences  of 
these  mistakes  which  plain  common  sense  should 
have  condemned.  When  in  the  early  days  of 
the  war  we  found  ourselves  in  the  presence  of 
an  army  which  had  not  devoted  several  after- 
noons a  week  to  hurdle  games,  but  which  knew 
marvelously  well  how  to  shelter  itself  behind 
the  least  fold  of  the  ground  and  to  hide  itself  in 
holes  rapidly  dug,  we  suffered  enormous  losses." 

The  tendency  in  the  European  war  zones 
where  the  new  trench  warfare  has  reached  its 
greatest  development  is  shown  by  the  character 
of  training  that  is  being  given  or  is  recommended 
for  the  new  armies  that  are  being  steadily  pre- 
pared for  duty  at  the  front.  The  ideas  acquired 
are  briefly  outlined  as  follows : 

1.  The   range  and  accuracy  of  modern  field 
artillery  is  so  great  that  the  fundamental  prin- 
ciple of  selecting  infantry  positions  has  changed 
since  the  outbreak  of  the  present  war. 

2.  The    modern    infantry    should    be    trained 
first  to  be  dead  shots  at  200  or  300  yards,  and 
should  be  able  to  fire  as  rapidly  at  these  ranges 
as  the  conditions  of  accurate  and  individual  aim 
permit. 

369 


National  Service  Library 

3.  Concealment  is  now  the  fundamental  con- 
sideration  in   posting   infantry,   simply   because 
the  moment  a  line  of  hasty  trenches  is  seen  it 
can  be  made  untenable  by  high-explosive  shell. 

4.  In  selecting  a  line   for  intrenchments  the 
infantry  commander  now  places  this  line  from 
100  to  200  yards  behind  the  crest,  thus  sacrific- 
ing long-range  field  of  fire,  instead  of  just  be- 
yond the  crest  as  heretofore  taught  in  the  drill 
book. 

Armies  now  in  training  in  the  British  camps 
are  being  instructed  in  trench  digging  and  in 
small-arms  practice  in  accordance  with  the 
principles  noted  above  by  selected  officers  re- 
turned from  the  front.  The  new  conditions 
point  to  the  adoption  of  some  form  of  automatic 
or  semiautomatic  rifle  in  order  to  increase  the 
density  of  fire  over  the  relatively  narrow  field  of 
fire.  The  use  of  machine  guns  has  already  been 
greatly  increased  with  the  same  object  in  view. 

An  enumeration  of  the  duties  in  which  troops 
must  be  trained  will  include  the  following: 

1.  Musketry;   bayonet    fencing;   manufacture 
and  throwing  of  bombs ;  machine-gun  practice. 

2.  Hasty    and    deliberate    intrenchment    in- 
cluding : 

Firing    trenches;    traverses    and    parados; 
head  cover;  overhead  cover;  machine-gun  em- 
placements; loopholes. 
370 


Appendix 

Shelter  and  cover  trenches ;  cover  at  firing 
point  for  personnel,  for  ammunition,  sup- 
plies, stores,  etc. ;  cover  behind  firing  point ; 
shelters  for  supports  and  reserves;  dressing 
stations;  splinter  proofs  and  bombproof s. 

Concealment;  use  of  natural  cover;  use  of 
dummy  field  works;  dissimulation,  screening 
and  masking  of  earthworks. 

Communications ;  constructing  forward 
communications;  advance  by  covered  ap- 
proaches ;  sapping ;  parallels ;  passage  trenches 
from  the  rear  or  along  the  rear;  trenches  to 
lookout  men  and  listening  posts. 

Mining  and  countermining;  occupation  and 
organization  of  a  crater  for  defense  and 
further  advance. 

Signboards;  systematic  numbering  and 
naming  of  all  avenues,  shelters  and  under- 
ground stations;  guideposts  to  reserve  am- 
munition and  all  important  stations;  arrange- 
ments to  illuminate  signboards  and  to  provide 
warning  and  directing  lights. 

Revetment  of  all  kinds. 

Preparation  and  improvement  of  the  fore- 
ground; clearing;  range  marks;  obstacles; 
inundations;  wire  nets;  alarm  signals;  barri- 
cades. 

3.  Residence  in  the  trenches.     First  aid  and 
sanitation ;  drainage ;  latrines ;  heating  of  trenches ; 
371 


National  Service  Library 

sleeping  accommodations;  care  of  arms  and  am- 
munition ;  care  of  shoes,  clothing,  and  bedding ; 
personal  cleanliness  and  care  of  the  feet;  prep- 
aration and  supply  of  food  ;  methods  for  elimina- 
tion of  pests. 

4.  Attack  and  defense  of  works.     Marching 
through  approach  and  communicating  trenches ; 
troop  leading  in  trenches;  reenforcement  of  fir- 
ing trench;  movements  by  night  in  attack  and 
defense;   advance   to   the   assault;    reversal   of 
parapets    of    enemy    trenches    and    organizing 
them  for  defense;  illumination  of  field  of  fire. 

5.  Defense  against  gas,  liquid  fire,  inflammable 
liquids,  etc. 

6.  Observation.     Accurate   and    rapid    recon- 
naissance  from   front-line  trenches;  instruction 
as    to    the    importance    of    every    topographical 
feature  and  to  the  use  that  may  be  made  of  same 
by    friend    or   enemy;    practice    in    interpreting 
features   of   the   enemy's  position,  as   machine- 
gun    emplacements,    loopholes,    dummy    works ; 
sharp  lookout  by  day  and  night;  special  precau- 
tions  against   night   attacks;    use   of   telephone 
throughout  intrenched  position. 

7.  Use  of  trench  mortars. 

8.  Practice    with    hand    grenades    and    rifle 
grenades  in  the  assault  and  the  defense. 

9.  Care  and  use  of  high  explosives. 

10.  Airplane  control  of  artillery  fire;  this  may 
be  done  by  exploding  ground  mines  beyond  and 

372 


Appendix 

short  of  the  intrenched  positions  the  airplane 
signaling  the  position  of  the  assumed  bursting 
shell. 

ii.  Practice  with  antiaircraft  guns  against 
free  balloons. 

Concealment  is  of  prime  importance  for  bat- 
teries and  for  infantry  trenches.  Advances  in 
the  open  are  impossible  and  advances  even 
where  there  is  some  cover  are  so  difficult  in  the 
day  light  that  the  cover  of  darkness  or  of  smoke 
must  be  used  more  and  more.  Ground  gained 
by  short  advances  must  be  rapidly  intrenched 
and  connected  up  with  the  trenches  in  rear  by 
winding  approaches.  In  the  close  stages  of  an 
advance  the  only  possible  methods  seem  to  be  by 
blinded  sap  or  mine  galleries  driven  just  below 
the  surface  of  the  ground.  Mines  are  used  also 
extensively  to  form  craters,  destroying  the  de- 
fender's trenches  and  offering  a  temporary  cover 
for  the  attacker  if  he  rushes  forward  immedi- 
ately after  the  explosion  of  the  mine,  taking 
advantage  of  the  confusion,  destruction  and  of 
the  cover  to  be  found  in  the  crater.  The 
accurate  and  overwhelming  artillery  preparation 
with  high-angle  fire  and  high-explosive  shell  is 
still  an  indispensable  preliminary  to  an  infantry 
advance  on  hostile  trenches  with  the  object  of 
destroying  the  obstacles,  washing  away  the  earth- 
works, and  shaking  the  morale  of  the  defending 
troops. 

373 


National  Service  Library 

It  is  commonly  related  that  the  war  in  the  west 
has  become  a  stupendous  siege,  and  that  the 
operations  of  formal  sieges  are  being  reproduced 
to  a  certain  extent;  we  hear  of  local  combats 
by  trench,  sap,  mine,  and  assault  for  ridges  and 
hilltops  important  for  observation ;  of  tactical 
wedges  driven  by  one  side  or  the  other  into  a 
weak  section  of  the  enemy's  line,  and  frequently 
of  the  rebound  of  the  wedge  when  the  enemy's 
lines  on  either  side  of  the  pierced  section  squeeze 
in  and  press  back  the  isolated  attack.  But  how 
do  they  go  about  a  great  attack  intended  to  gain 
a  strategical  success  and  to  drive  back  the  enemy 
into  his  territory?  An  outline  of  the  French 
offensive  in  Champagne  in  August  and  Sep- 
tember, 1915,  may  give  us  some  ideas  on  this 
subject. 

An  assault  to  be  successful  under  the  condi- 
tions existing  on  the  western  front  must  be  made 
along  a  wide  front  of  20  or  30  or  40  miles ; 
otherwise  a  local  break  only  will  be  made  and 
the  flanks  of  the  attacking  force  will  soon  be 
exposed  and  rolled  up  by  the  converging  masses 
of  the  enemy  who  can  afford  to  shift  his  troops 
to  meet  a  local  effort. 

In  the  first  place  the  conditions  are  such  that 
the  trenches  have  been  pushed  forward  so  as  to 
get  as  close  to  the  enemy  as  possible,  so  that  in 
some  places  the  front-line  firing  trenches  are 
less  than  250  yards  from  the  enemy's  front  line. 
374 


Appendix 

In  certain  special  cases  these  lines  have  ap- 
proached as  close  as  10  yards. 

It  is  considered  important  to  instruct  all  arms 
for  infantry  work  under  emergencies,  where  in 
hand-to-hand  combats  of  a  nature  not  previously 
anticipated  for  their  arms  their  lives  may  de- 
pend on  a  knowledge  of  at  least  elementary  in- 
struction in  the  duties  of  the  infantry  soldier. 

To  illustrate  the  details  of  the  instruction  re- 
quired the  following  description  has  been  com- 
piled from  notes  on  a  training  camp  conducted 
by  one  of  the  European  belligerents  for  new 
levies  destined  to  duty  in  the  trenches  of  the 
western  front. 

METHOD  OF  ATTACKING  TRENCHES 

The  defense  has  steadily  increased  in  power 
due  to  its  small-arms  fire,  its  obstacles,  and  its 
artillery.  This  is  the  first  great  war  fought  on 
European  soil  with  the  magazine  rifle  and 
smokeless  powder  and  with  powerful  modern 
artillery.  A  frontal  attack  on  trenches  held  by 
well-trained  unshaken  infantry  seems  more  im- 
possible than  ever  before.  Heretofore  when 
such  a  condition  existed  the  alternative  for  the 
attacking  force  was  to  maneuver  around  the 
flank  of  the  defending  force,  but  where  there 
are  no  flanks  to  turn,  as  in  an  all-round  position 
like  a  fortified  town  or  fortress,  or  in  a  position 
like  that  on  the  western  European  war  front 
375 


National  Service  Library 

where  the  entire  frontier  from  the  sea  to  the 
mountain  ranges  of  a  neutral  state  is  heavily 
intrenched,  we  naturally  ask  ourselves  what  is 
the  best  and  most  scientific  method  of  making 
the  attack?  Captain  Thuillier,  R.  E.,  writing  in 
1902  after  the  Boer  War  and  assuming  condi- 
tions like  those  just  described,  remarks : 

"At  all  events,  though  it  is  impossible  to  fore- 
cast in  detail  the  form  of  attack  we  may  at 
least  assume  that  as  a  rule  the  combat  on 
both  sides  would  be  largely  one  of  pick  and 
shovel,  trenches  and  countertrenches,  mines  and 
countermines." 

The  artillery  bombardment  which  may  be 
taken  up  for  weeks  before  the  day  of  assault 
consists  of  a  deluge  of  high-explosive  shells  and 
shrapnel  delivered  day  after  day  and  sometimes 
continuously  night  and  day. 

The  section  of  the  line  attacked  consists  of  two 
main  positions,  roughly  parallel,  and  from  2  to 
2.Y-2.  miles  apart.  The  first  line  is  extremely 
dense  and  consists  of  from  three  to  five  parallel 
trenches,  and  for  lateral  deefnse  a  network  of 
defense  and  communication  trenches.  The  first 
line  is  about  400  yards  deep,  and  between  the 
several  trenches  are  broad  areas  of  barbed-wire 
net  some  60  to  70  yards  deep. 

The  second  defensive  line  consists  mainly  of  a 
single  trench  with  a  few  support  trenches.  It  is 
located  on  the  reverse  side  of  a  hill  crest,  the 


Appendix 

upper  front  slopes  of  which  are  under  observa- 
tion and  are  held  only  by  machine  guns,  out- 
posts, and  artillery  observers  who  communicate 
with  the  trench  in  rear  by  tunnels  through  the 
crest  of  the  ridge. 

The  entire  two  miles  behind  the  front  position 
is  fortified  into  a  net  work  of  trenches  in  all 
directions,  studded  with  machine  guns  in  con- 
cealed emplacements,  and  obstructed  by  barbed- 
wire  entanglements,  some  of  it  in  deep  pits  70 
yards  square  and  6  or  7  feet  deep.  These  are 
almost  invisible  to  airplanes,  and  the  formidable 
nature  of  the  position  in  rear  of  the  front  trench 
is  not  known  to  the  attackers  until  they  have 
swept  beyond  the  first  line. 

The  object  of  the  artillery  bombardment  of 
the  front  line  is  to  destroy  the  barbed-wire  net, 
to  level  down  the  trenches  and  concealed  em- 
placements, to  cave  in  the  shelters  and  dugouts 
over  their  occupants,  to  block  up  communica- 
tion trenches,  and  to  demoralize  the  enemy. 
Long  -  range  artillery  meanwhile  bombarded 
depots,  communications,  camps,  and  transport 
columns  in  rear  of  the  lines  in  order  to  impede 
and  interrupt  the  supply  of  food  and  ammuni- 
tion to  the  enemy's  fighting  units. 

The  duty  expected  of  the  artillery  is  to  flatten 
the  trenches  and  parapets,  to  plow  up  the  dug- 
outs and  subterranean  defenses  so  completely 
that  it  will  be  almost  possible  for  the  attacking 
377 


National  Service  Library 

infantry  to  march  to  the  assault  with  their  rifles 
at  the  shoulder. 

To  quote  from  the  London  "Times's"  "History 
and  Encyclopaedia  of  the  War" : 

"When  reveille  sounded  at  5.30  on  the  morn- 
ing of  the  great  day,  September  25,  those  who 
had  slept  through  the  din  of  gunfire  awoke  to  a 
world  of  gloom.  Clouds  heavy  with  rain  swept 
low  across  the  gray  chalky  landscape. 

"Between  6  and  6.30  the  morning  coffee  was 
drunk  .  .  .  and  then,  conversation  being  impos- 
sible, the  men  squatted  down  by  the  trench  wall 
and  smoked  and  thought  of  what  the  day  might 
bring  forth. 

"Under  a  pouring  rainstorm  which  broke  at 
nine  o'clock,  in  a  few  brief  phrases  the  general 
situation  and  the  general  scheme  of  operations 
of  the  day  were  set  before  the  men.  Then  by  the 
time  given  by  wireless  to  the  army  from  the 
Eiffel  Tower  the  fuses  of  the  artillery  from  be- 
hind were  lengthened  and  the  officers  scrambled 
out  of  the  advanced  parallels  with  a  last  shout  of 
"En  avant,  mes  enfants"  to  the  men.  .  .  .  The 
great  offensive  of  1915  had  begun,  and  all  those 
who  took  part  in  it  are  agreed  that  no  moment 
of  the  battle  was  so  thrilling,  so  soul-stirring 
and  impressive  as  that  which  saw  the  first  wave 
of  Frenchmen  in  blue  uniforms,  blue  Adrian 
steel  helmets,  with  drums  of  grenades  hanging 
at  their  waists,  burst  from  the  trenches  in  which 
378 


Appendix 

they  had  remained  hidden  for  so  many  months 
and  strike  across  the  intervening  No-Man's- 
Land  for  the  enemy's  lines. 

"The  first  waves  of  the  assault  had  about  250 
yards  to  cross  to  reach  the  enemy's  trenches, 
and  such  was  the  impetuosity  and  dash  of  the 
men,  and  so  complete  had  been  the  work  of  the 
artillery  that  by  noon  the  first  line  along  the 
entire  front  had  been  taken.  At  some  points  the 
assaulting  waves  passed  over  the  first  line  and 
into  the  enemy's  position,  but  sooner  or  later 
they  came  to  a  halt  as  resistance  was  developed, 
machine  guns  were  unmasked  by  the  enemy,  and 
their  artillery  again  put  to  work.  At  one  place 
the  center  was  held  up  by  four  machine  guns 
which  had  escaped  destruction  by  the  artillery." 

The  official  communique  of  September  26 
thus  sums  up  the  day's  operations: 

"In  Champagne  obstinate  engagements  have 
occurred  along  the  whole  front.  Our  troops 
have  penetrated  the  German  lines  on  a  front  of 
25  kilometers  to  a  depth  varying  between  I  and 
4  kilometers  and  they  have  maintained  during 
the  night  all  the  positions  gained." 

Many  prisoners  were  taken.  The  first  day's 
work  was  considered  successful.  The  two  ends 
of  the  line  had  resisted  the  assaults  upon  them, 
but  the  attacking  troops  had  held  on  with  ten- 
acity and  kept  a  large  force  of  the  enemy  oc- 
cupied, thus  relieving  pressure  at  the  center. 
379 


National  Service  Library 

But  here  the  resistance  and  obstacles  that  finally 
brought  the  entire  movement  to  a  standstill  were 
causing  delay  at  certain  points. 

The  second  line  of  works  behind  the  hill  crest 
was  practically  intact,  having  suffered  very  little 
from  the  artillery  bombardment. 

Details  of  further  operations  here  are  not  now 
available,  but  the  great  offensive  had  come  to  halt 
and  had  failed  to  make  an  effectual  break 
through  the  opposing  front.  The  period  of  pre- 
paration, the  mapping,  the  airplane  combats,  the 
artillery  duel,  and  the  assault  had  taken  the  at- 
tackers just  so  far,  where,  encountering  ever- 
increasing  resistance,  they  had  come  to  a  halt, 
and  again  were  compelled  to  resume  the  de- 
fensive until  driven  back  or  until  more  elaborate 
preparations  over  a  wider  front  or  under  more 
favorable  circumstances  would  permit  another 
rush  into  the  enemy's  lines  with  momentum  that 
would  finally  carry  the  day  and  achieve  a 
strategic  success  by  making  the  enemy  withdraw 
along  his  whole  front. 

In  theory  high-explosive  shell  poured  in  suf- 
ficient quantities  upon  the  enemy's  positions  de- 
stroys all  semblance  of  trenches  and  levels  the 
deep-dug  line  with  the  rest  of  the  country.  It 
is  stated  that  in  the  five  weeks  which  preceded 
the  assault  described  above  on  no  fewer  than 
twenty-five  days  the  hostile  front  was  violently 
bombarded  and  on  the  last  three  days  the  artillery 
380 


Appendix 

worked  without  ceasing  day  and  night.  The  re- 
sults we  have  seen*  The  first  line  was  taken, 
but  the  second  line  held ;  perhaps  if  the  second 
line  had  fallen  a  third  would  have  checked  the 
attack.  Perhaps  if  the  artillery  had  worked  fifty 
days  they  might  have  destroyed  the  rear  lines, 
but  always  until  utter  demoralization  or  exhaus- 
tion of  supplies  or  ammunition  had  overtaken 
the  defending  troops  would  the  attackers  have 
found  trenches,  obstacles,  machine  guns,  artil- 
lery, and  men  in  successive  lines  ready  to  repel 
them. 

Operations  like  those  described  bring  a  tre- 
mendous strain  on  the  defenders  and  demoraliza- 
tion may  often  be  not  far  away.  It  may  be  that 
if  the  trenches  are  sufficiently  "washed  away" 
over  a  wide  enough  front  and  in  depth  over  first, 
second  and  third  lines,  not  omitting  the  ground 
in  rear,  and  the  deluge  of  steel  and  chemicals 
kept  up  until  the  strain  on  the  men  becomes  un- 
bearable, one  line  or  the  other  will  break  and  a 
victory  be  achieved.  The  magnitude  of  the 
preparations  to  accomplish  this  end  cannot  be 
estimated. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  AT  LOS  ANGELES 

THE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below 


FormL-9 
20m-12,'39(S386) 


inio 

M15p  McCoy  • 


Principles  of 
military  training > 


U110 
M13p 


GEORGE 

WASHINGTON 

YOKKTOWN 


ISRAEL 

PUTNAM 

BUNKER    HILL 


ANDREW 

JACKSON 

NEW    ORLEANS 


JOHN    E. 

WOOL 
BUEN  A     VI! 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

405  Hilgard  Avenue,  Los  Angeles,  CA  90024-1388 

Return  this  material  to  the  library 

from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


OCT  051992 

REC'D  LD-URL 
OCT  0  8199Z 


IEI-D  W1LLIAMT.  UL 


' 

,  £**£,        il**-'     ' 


ROBERT  E.  NELSON  A. 

LEE  MILES 

CBANCELLORSVILLE   KREDE  RICK8BU  RG         PORTO    RICO 


JOSEPH 
WHEELER 
EL    CANEY 


